Polynesian Songs and Chants

Society Islands

Teuira Henry. Tahiti aux temps anciens, 78 // Cadousteau Vaihere. Le 'Orero : le renouveau d'un antique art oratoire, http://www.lehman.cuny.edu/ile.en.ile/pacifique/orero.html
E moti Ea'ea e haere roa i Ana-pū, o Maha'ena ia fenua 28
Te mou'a i ni'a, o Taia-mano; tei reira te pere ra, o Taia-vete 28
Te tahua i raro, o Poro'ura 12
Te 'outu, i tai, o Fare-tai 12
Te vai, o Faarahi e o Faa-iti 14
Te marae, o Ra'i-ipu ma Raauta-tai...
De Ea'ea à Ana-pū, s'étend le territoire de Maha'ena 21
Les collines qui dominent sont Taia-mano, il y a la fortification Taia-vete 29
Le terrain de réunion est Poro'ura 13
La pointe extérieure est Fare-tai 14
Les rivières sont Faarahi et Faa-iti 14
Les marae sont Ra'i-ipu et Raauta-tai...

Teuira Henry. Tahiti aux temps anciens, 88 // Cadousteau Vaihere. Le 'Orero : le renouveau d'un antique art oratoire, http://www.lehman.cuny.edu/ile.en.ile/pacifique/orero.html
O Papara e moe ra i te ahinavai! 15
O Papara nui ia 'Oro hua re'a 14
... 0
E manu vau nei, e Teva 10
E Teva i te ua, e Teva i te mamari 15
Mamari iti no 'Oro hua re'a 12
A tuu i te vanaa e pehe ai 13
... 0
O Rua_roa, o Papara 9
O te Mava'e tua ana 9
O Papara ho'i te tauira i te potii 16
O Papara e moe ra i te ahinavai
C'est Papara voilé d'une brume blanche! 12
C'est le grand Papara de 'Oro au corps jaune 15
... 0
Je suis un oiseau, un Teva 12
Un Teva dans la pluie, un Teva dans l'ombre 14
La petite ombre de 'Oro au corps jaune 15
Que les hérault chantent 7
... 0
Du solstice d'été, c'est Papara 8
Aux alizés avec mer à clapotis 10
C'est Papara qui abrite les filles 12
Papara voilé d'une brume blanche.

M. Raphaël Teihotua Tehiva // // Cadousteau Vaihere. Le 'Orero : le renouveau d'un antique art oratoire, http://www.lehman.cuny.edu/ile.en.ile/pacifique/orero.html
Hura tini nā 'Urataetae 12
"I roto i te hanahana o te ra'i tuatini 17
Ta'u i haro'a. 6
Faatoro a'e ra to'u hiro'a, 12
Neva a'e ra to'u manava, 10
Topa turi a'e ra o ia 10
I mua i te faahiahia e te 'aravihi 17
No te hura tini 6
Hura tini 'arere 7
Hura tini paheehee 9
Hura tini vairipo 8
Hura tini matameha'i 9
Hura tini nā 'ai'ai 10
Hura tini nā faatura 10
Hura tini nā 'Urataetae 12
Hura tini atua"
Dans la splendeur du ciel infini, 11
J'entendis 3
le son mélodieux du tambour divin. 12
Mes sens filèrent le son, 6
Mes émotions cherchèrent, 6
et se relāchèrent sur mes genoux 11
devant tant de beauté et de maîtrise 12
de la danse 4
Danse aérienne 6
Danse filante 5
Danse tourbillonnante 8
Danse originelle 7
Danse de l'esthétisme 6
Danse de l'hommage 6
Danse de 'Urataetae 9
Danse divine.

Teuira Henry. Tahiti aux temps anciens, 311 // // Cadousteau Vaihere. Le 'Orero : le renouveau d'un antique art oratoire, http://www.lehman.cuny.edu/ile.en.ile/pacifique/orero.html
E vanaa tama'i teie i ma'a 13
Na taua i te riri e Huri aau 14
Na taua i te onoono 10
I te iha, i te tote ! 8
... 0
A ta'i i te a'e ! 7
O vau teie, o Te-aho-roa 12
No te hui toa tui roo vau nei ... 14
... 0
Pa'ipa'i i te rima ia huha 12
A fava ei puaa tote ! 10
Auaa i ape au nei i te ra'o 15
E puahiohio te riri, e Te-aho-roa 16
... 0
O vau teie, o Huri aau toa hau 16
A'e to'u metua i to'oe. 11
E 'ore ta'u 'omore e mae a'e ia 'oe.
Un défi de guerre obtenu en ceci 12
Pour nous deux en colère ö Huri aau 14
Pour nous deux en persistance 11
En vexation, en fureur! 9
... 0
Pleure pour les morts! 7
C'est moi Te-aho-roa 8
Je viens d'une race de guerrier fameux... 15
... 0
Frappe les mains sur les hanches 9
Fonce, la tēte en avant comme un cochon enragé 16
Une mouche ne me fait pas hésiter 12
La colère est une tornade, ö Te-aho-roa 14
... 0
C'est moi, Huri aau, mon père était 12
Un plus grand guerrier que le tien. 12
Tu ne peux soulever ma lance.

Turo a Raapoto, Te pina'ina'i o te 'aau, Pehepehe, Papeete: Tupuna Productions, 1990 // Jean-Marc Tera'ituatini Pambrun. Paroles tragiques de l'écrivain ma'ohi, http://www.lehman.cuny.edu/ile.en.ile/paroles/pambrun_paroles-tragiques.html
Te maere nei au. Te poiri nei au. 16
E aha ta'u nunaa i parau ai i to te tahi Hau 21
E Hau no na. 5
E aha i parau ai i to te tahi metua 17
E metua no na. 6
Ua 'otare anei ta'u nunaa i na reira ai. 20
E taata metua 'ore anei 'oe e te Ma'ohi 19
E taata fenua 'ore anei 12
E taata Hau 'ore anei 11
Ua faatere na ho'i 'oe ia 'oe. E aha teie.
Je m'étonne. Je ne comprends pas. 8
Pourquoi est-ce que mon peuple dit d'un autre gouvernement 23
Que c'est son gouvernement. 9
Pourquoi est-ce qu'il dit d'autres parents 15
Que ce sont ses parents. 7
Mon peuple est-il orphelin pour qu'il en arrive là. 17
Ma'ohi ! es-tu un homme sans parents 11
Es-tu un homme sans terre 8
Es-tu un homme sans gouvernement 11
Tu t'es déjà gouverné toi-mēme. Qu'est-ce que ça veut dire.

Rui a Mapuhi, Pehepehe, Tutava, Papeete: édité par l'auteur, 1993 // Jean-Marc Tera'ituatini Pambrun. Paroles tragiques de l'écrivain ma'ohi, http://www.lehman.cuny.edu/ile.en.ile/paroles/pambrun_paroles-tragiques.html
Inaha, teie mau ta'ata i ha'a iho nei no te ha'amou ia tatou 29
Eie e ho'i pahutini mai nei no te ha'api'i ia tatou. 25
E aha atu ra ia te ha'a a te nuna'a i teie mau peu? 24
O te mu noa teie o ta'u e fa'aro'o' nei, ua i roa paha to na vaha? 29
I ora maoro mai ai au ra, no te hi'o i teie ha'ama? 24
No te mata'ita'i ia i te pohe o teie iho i ho mai no'u i te ora?
En effet, ces gens qui ont travaillé pour nous détruire 18
Les voilà qui reviennent en force pour nous éduquer 19
Qu'est-ce que le peuple va faire de ces usages? 18
Je n'entends que des bruits confus, sa bouche est sans doute bien pleine? 24
Ai-je vécu aussi longtemps pour voir cette honte? 17
Pour regarder mourir l'essence qui m'a donné la vie?

http://www.farevanaa.pf/forum/viewtopic.php?t=631&sid=90e2b93fd9707cd5c553a040befa829b
mohimohi te mori tutu'i. 10
tapiri mai ia 'u i teie po. 13
ua 'ite mau atu ra vau i teie nei, 17
ua here au ia 'oe. aita e rave'a. 17
ua hiti te mahana i teie nei. 14
tupohe tena mori, ta 'u i here.
La lampe à pétrole éclaire faiblement. 12
Serre-toi contre moi ce soir. 11
Je le sais bien désormais, 9
je suis tombé amoureux de toi. Il n'y a rien à faire. 19
Le soleil s'est levé à présent. 7
Eteins cette lampe, mon amour.

The Tahitian hymn of creation, by S. Percy Smith // JSP. Volume 1, No. 1, 1892. P. 31-32
Taoto a'e ra Taaroa i te vahine, 15
O hina tua tai te ioa, fanau a'e ra ana 19
Eoa uri, eoa tea, 10
Ua taoto a'e ra Taaroa te vahine, 16
5 Tua uta te ioa, fanau a'ere ana 16
O te a'a toro i uta, 9
Heemai ra muri, te tupu tupu ura te fanua; 18
Heemai ra muri, te ohu tia mama tei oa (? te ioa); 22
Heemai ra muri, o aito te buai tei oa (? te ioa); 23
10 Heemai ra muri, e vahine, o vaha has mea, tei oa (? te ioa). 25
Taoto Taaroa te vahine, o hina tua nia tei oa; 22
Fanau a'e ra enua enua tei oa; 16
Heemai ra muri, tu oro marama tei oa; 17
Heemai ra muri, o urau ra ua toto. 16
15 Taoto a'e ra Taaroa te vahine, o hina tua raro tei oa; 25
Fanau a'e ra, o te Fatu moe nuru tei oa; 18
Taoto a'e ra Taaroa te vahine o vaa utu, 19
Tono tono raa i te nu'u atua 13
E tono Te iri, e moa ia, e tono Te Fatu, e moa ia, 22
20 E tono rua nua, e moa ia, 12
Tei mua iri te atua Ro'o a rave na e roto 19
E pu fanau uporu. 8
Moerenhout here interpolates—“The legend speaks here of the birth of Ro'o, and of his condition at that time, but in terms which cannot be translated. It enters into long details about his infancy, and up to the time that he could walk and run,” and then continues the account of the birth of other gods:— “Vevetia te vahine a ti faofao, 105
Haerea mai ai i rapae i ropu e nuae, 19
25 Tua tua, matui, 7
Tua roa, roa vau, 8
Ava te tua arii o roo na vea.

Te Umu-Ti, a Raiatean ceremony, by Miss Teuira Henry // JSP. Volume 1, No. 1, 1892. P. 105-108
Te hii tapua'e tahi! 9
Te hii tapua'e rua! 9
Te hii tapua'e toru 9
Te hii tapua'e ha! 8
Te hii tapua'e rima! 9
Te hii tapua'e ono! 9
Te hii tapua'e hitu! 9
Te hii tapua'e varu! 9
Te hii tapua'e iva! 9
Te hii tapua'e tini! 9
Te Vahine-nui-tahu-rai e! poia!
Holder of the first footstep! 8
Holder of the second footstep! 9
Holder of the third footstep! 8
Holder of the fourth footstep! 9
Holder of the fifth footstep! 8
Holder of the sixth footstep! 8
Holder of the seventh footstep! 9
Holder of the eighth footstep! 9
Holder of the ninth footstep! 8
Holder of the tenth footstep! 8
Oh Great-woman-who-set-fire-to-the-skies! all is covered!

Specimens of ancient Tahitian poetry, by W.D. Alexander // JSP.Volume 2, No.1, March 1893. P. 105-108
E pehe tai vahine 8
Moanarai te tane, Aitofa te vahine 16
E haere mai, mai Toa e, Aitofa e, 16
E ta'u vahine purotu hara e! 12
Mai te horo raa o te au i Onoiau ra, 18
E mai te tahe raa o vaipue nei, 15
Te uutaina raa o to'u nei 'a'au mateono i te pee raa ia oe. 30
E Aitofa. e aroha mai to tane a mate. 17
Ua tapairu te outu o Tainuu. 15
E mata'u, e riaria, e hauaituhia te tane i te fa raa, 25
E i te hiti mai o te aroha o te vahine herehia, 21
O te mata nei a te vahi ioio mataitai. 19
Nana noa iho te tane, te vai ra mararo. 16
E marama taupe i tooa te huru o te tane, 18
Te huru o Moanarai i teie nei e. 16
E ata nui haa-maru-rai tona inoino, 17
To te tane i tai i tana vahine i nonoa ra, 18
E mai rai rumaruma i te au raa ae o to'u tai i teie nei. 28
Aue hoi an nei e, aue hoi au nei ta'u vahine iti, 25
Ta'u hanihani i haere e nei! 13
Ta'u vahine iti purotu hara, ta'u hoa here faatoa manava, 25
Ta'u hoa ia vero, ua eiahia ae nei! 19
E hei fara, e hei hinano ta'u i porofaina na oe, 22
E Aitofa e, inaha ua reva oe! 15
Aue hoi au nei e! Te ravea te rave ia'u nei e! 23
Te manu atu na oe i te areare i te Aoa tu na. 21
Te vaihohia nei o Vavaara, 13
E o Rotui, te taa nia o te Mehani, i muri ia oe. 22
Ua faarue oe tooe hopu raa i te vai ateate, 23
Taoe nei tiare hotu raa tuutuu ore. 18
Aue oe e Aitofa e! E titihoria oe. 19
Aue to'u mamae e, e te pioi o to'u nei 'a'au! 22
Aue te faanoi e, e te mana'o faaonohi! 19
Te uruhia au i te topatie. Aue taua e! 20
Te noinoi mai tenei te mana'o o to tane nei i te faaroha. 26
Aue ta'u mahanai e! To mata aiai i 'aro e 'tu e! 23
Aita 'tu ra faufaa utuafare e. 15
E tara tui ia'u nei, e tara maitai ia'u nei. 22
E aha taoe hara i inoinoa 'i, e ta'u vahine e, 22
I hipa e atu ai oe. 10
E aha oe i ooti-pito ai i au nei, i taiva hoi, 24
E vahine hamani ino. 9
E vero tatautoru riri, 10
I te otuitui raa i roto i roto ia'u nei. 20
Te manava taahihia vau nei, 13
Te aataina nei to'u manava ia oe. 17
Te toetoe nei au i te muri aroha noa raa. 20
E Aitofa e, e hoi mai! 11
Teie te pupa ura na oe, 11
Teie te hei ura na oe, 11
Teie te hei poe mata uiui na oe, 17
Teie tou utuafare, 10
O vau ia o Moanarai tane.
  0
  0
Come back from Toa, O Aitofa, 11
O my beautiful erring spouse! 11
As the rapid flow of the current at Onoiau, 15
And as the swollen torrent from the valley, 11
So flows my yearning heart after thee. 11
O Aitofa, have compassion on thy lover lest he die! 18
The promontory of Tainuu has become beautified (by thee). 21
The husband will fear, will shrink, will faint at the re-appearance, 19
At the return of the love of the cherished wife, 15
Of that face so bright and beautiful. 12
Look whichever way he will, she seems to be still down there. 17
The moon sinking into the western shades is the image of the husband, 21
The image of Moanarai at this moment. 14
As a great cloud obscuring the sky is his grief, 14
The grief of the husband mourning for his estranged wife, 17
And like the sky darkened by its rising is my distress for her. 15
Alas for me! Alas for me! my little wife, 12
My darling has gone astray! 7
My little beautiful wayward spouse, 12
My friend who made my heart brave, 9
My friend in the storm has been stolen away. 12
A wreath of the fara tree, a garland of Pandanus blossoms I have gathered for thee, 27
O Aitofa, and lo! thou art flown. 11
Ah, woe is me! Is it thus that thou shouldst treat me? 16
Lo, thou art drifting away over the ripples in the Aoa shallows, 20
Thou art passing the fragrant vale of Vavaara, 15
And leaving Mt. Rotui, the upper jaw of Hades, behind thee. 18
Thou hast forsaken thy favourite bathing place with its clear water, 21
And thy Tiare (Gardenia) bush that blossoms without ceasing. 18
Alas for thee, Aitofa! Thou art a little toy canoe that the wind carries away. 27
Alas for my anguish and the rage of my heart! 13
Ah me! I despair and think of suicide. 13
I am possessed with frenzy. Alas for us both! 12
The mind of the husband gives up the effort to win back thy love. 17
Alas for my darling! Thy fair face is lost from sight. 13
There is no benefit from the home. 11
A piercing thorn to me, a pretty thorn to me (art thou). 15
What is my fault for which thou art vexed, 11
For which thou hast disdained me? 10
Why hast thou cut the cord of love, and deserted me? 14
An evil-working woman. 7
As a long continued storm is my anger, 11
At the throbbing within, within me, 9
My bowels yearn, my heart flows out after thee. 13
I am chilled with lingering affection for thee, O Aitofa, return! 22
Here is a bunch of red feathers for thee, 13
Here is a wreath of scarlet feathers for thee, 15
Here is a necklace of beautiful pearls for thee, 18
Here is thy home. 5
I am Moanarai, thy husband.
Ta'u vaa faatere i te pae o te ra'i, 16
I te ruuruu raa aha o Tane-marua-nuu e! 19
E maoa'e rii tuvaruvaru 12
Tei te vaa i Taunoa, 10
5 E aroro aera i te vaa taihaa i Ruahine e! 21
Ua tiatia i te pure, 10
Ua harahara i te vana'a rii e! 14
Marotea te mau toa. 9
No vai te vaa i tau mai? 11
10 E ui atu ai au nei e! 12
Tanetua ua mate, oi ore a vau oi ite. 19
12 Faataoto, haamoe atu e!
Sail O my canoe to the rim of the sky, 11
To the binding of sinnet on Tane-marua-nuu! 15
A north-east breeze gently blowing 10
On the canoe at Taunoa, 10
5 Sends ripples away to the mourning group (lit. canoe) at Ruahine! 21
They are standing for the prayer, 9
Broken is the voice of the dear orator! 14
Girdled in yellow are the warriors. 11
For whom is the canoe that has landed here? 13
10 Ah, why should I ask! 5
Tanetua is dead, and I might have missed seeing him. 18
Let him sleep, let him be lost from view!
Nanai fetia, moua i taaroa tei uta, 18
Haere i Aihi. Te arii no te hitirea mai o te ra, 22
Te toa iti mate-ioio, ua ta tahi huru o manu! 21
Tino arii no Ahuroa, ua huria oe, 17
5 E rai to'u e faaruia noa nei e! 16
Tupuna mau no Tapoa, 9
Te aito ia i faanui i Porapora. 16
A hee a tena mate, ta'u arii e, 14
Tai moua ia paia! 10
10 A pu aera i te Mehani! 10
E umere te Atua i te Po, 11
O Huria ua mate! 8
I na tia i te aha, mate iti pure'a mai ra? 18
I te papa ua mea! 8
15 Mata'i huru e teie, e vahine hau e, 16
O Moehonu ua taa i te roi toetoe e! 18
Ua moe te to'i i Porapora, 12
Te vai na i Vaiotaha. 10
Eaha tau e mehi na, e Tefaaroa? 15
20 Mate aenei Tepeete! 10
Te taata ia i mau ai te papa upea, 17
E ora ai Faanui e! 10
Mea hoa hia i te Pa-tahi. 11
Tera roa o Moehonu e, 10
25 Tei roto ia tei Tioi! 11
Te opapa hia nei e te ivi e!
A row of stars, a mountain that stands apart inland, leading to Aihi. 22
The chief from the rising of the sun, 10
The dear warrior, handsome in death, has become like a bird! 20
Kingly body of Ahuroa, thou art over-thrown! 13
5 My sky is darkened to me now! 7
True ancestor of Tapoa, 9
The warrior who made Borabora great, 13
Glide down thither dead, O my chief, 10
By the slippery mountain. 7
10 Blow (wind) around the Mehani. 9
The god of the darkness (Hades) will praise (him), 13
The overthown one who is dead. 10
What can quiet (grief for the) dear face so pallid! 16
At the altar stone 'tis done! 9
15 A strange kind of wind is this, O woman of peace, 15
Moehonu is separated to the cold bed (of death), alas! 18
His axe sleeps at Borabora, 10
It lies at Vaiotaha. 9
What art thou lamenting, O Tefaaroa? 13
20 Dead is Tepeete. 7
He was the man who held the helm of state (lit. weights of the fish-net), 18
So that Faanui is saved. 9
A person beloved at the fort Patahi. 12
Yonder is Moehonu, far away, 10
25 Inside of the turning place (Tioi), 12
(While) Remembered by the widowed one!
Condolence from Raiatea 10
Tena te vaa tei te tai, 10
Utuhi te vai noa 8
Mai te ave tere a Hiro ma. 11
Tona o te mata'i e pupu i te ie, 14
5 Horahora te tua o te are, 11
Te ie o te timaa-piti o te aoa e! 16
Poroi mai te arii e, 10
8 A tahi aroha tei tupu hu'i e!
  0
There is the canoe in the sea. 11
Its wake is lying 5
Like the train that followed Hiro's band 12
His is the wind that swells the sail, 9
5 Spreading out the expanse of the waves, 13
The sail of the double canoe from the royal residence. 19
Bear the message from the chief, 10
8 Of affection that grows throbbing! i.e. out of throbbing sorrow).
Condolence from the queen, Tamatoa's widow 15
Ahomanu, vahine a Tamatoa, 12
Tei pupu hirohiro i Anaa. 12
Taniu roa tei aratai ia 13
Te farirei raa rii e! 10
Te ura te manu ta'u porofaina, 13
Ta'u ana te pua rata. 9
Haapiti te matai tuaheahe noa, 15
Te reo o te vahine e! 9
Na ta'u mats noa iho nei 10
Te farara o ta'u vahi e! 10
E aroha tei to tua e te ivi e!
  0
Ahomanu, wife of Tamatoa, 11
Of the highest lineage of Anaa, 12
A distant channel has led us to meet 11
So frequently together! 7
The red bird is my herald, 6
My love token the rata flower, 9
As the baffling wind from two quarters, 10
So is the woman's sorrowing voice! 11
And 'tis only by my eyes 5
That my message is interpreted. 9
Love's greeting follows thee, O widowed one!

The period of Rata (No. 2.) // JSP. Volume 20, No.3. P. 155-158
Aroha ore ō mau a! 10
Nu'unu'u mai, ne'ene'e mai au, 14
Ia piri a tátá, 5
E Tahiti-Toerau e! 9
E tināia to'u aroha, 11
E aroha ra vau 7
I to'u metua vahine, 9
Ia Tahiti-Toerau. 9
I te puau, 5
Araurau o te miti, 9
I'au hia e au, 8
E'oto ia 'oe, 7
E Tahiti-Toerau e, 9
I tināia e, 7
Tei te manava faariroriro, 12
Tei te manava faaroturotu, 12
To'u aroha ia oe, 9
E Tahiti-Toerau e!
There was no pity shown, indeed! 9
Moving, moving hither, creeping, creeping hither, I, 15
As I met obstruction struck, 8
O North Tahiti! 5
My love is overflowing, 7
And now I am greeting 7
My mother, 2
North Tahiti. 4
Through the baffling wind, 6
The long wave of the sea, 8
Have I swum 4
To weep over thee, 7
O North Tahiti, 5
With overflowing 5
Of mingled feelings, 6
Of deep anxiety, 6
In my love for thee, 6
O North Tahiti!

Research in Polynesian mythology, by Katharine Luomala // JSP. Volume 49, No. 194. P. 175-196
E tu'u atu ra i raro i Havai'i, 14
'Ia 'ai te nei i'a o te reva. 13
Mara'a Te Tumu, mara'a Te Fatu; 12
E mana (a) te atua Ta'aroa-tumu, 14
Mara'a ti'a e! 6
Toiaha, toiahaaha ai te tumu te fenua. 19
E'ave mua o Tutu, 8
E tu'u i muri o Havai'i. 11
Tahi fai te tau, 7
Te mahiti te muri a fenua. 11
Mana hua e Te Fatu,- 8
E fati to rima! 6
E mau fenua no te reva, 10
'Ua puta oopita(?) te hua. 11
Tu matau Maui. 7
Te haru ra tana i'a ra,- 9
I te fai ra i, 6
I'a te reva! 5
'A huti!
Let it down to Havai'i. 8
That the wandering fish take it. 9
Te Tumu (The Foundation) rises, Te Fatu (The Lord) appears. 19
Creations of the god Ta'aroa-the-creator, 15
Appear! 3
Heavy, very, very heavy is the foundation of the land. 16
The forward line of (the canoe) Tutu, 12
Is let down to the rear of Havai'i. 12
A giant manta fish is suspended, 10
The rear of the land comes free. 10
Te Fatu is very powerful,- 8
Your arm will break! 6
Lands dangling, 3
Pierced… 3
Maui holds steadily his hook. 10
His fish there seizes (it),- 8
(His fish) the giant-manta there. 9
A fish dangles! 4
Haul it up!

The Tahitian account of creation by Mare, by Kenneth P. Emory // JSP. Volume 47, No. 186. P. 45-63
Ka tupu te uho ki te henua, 11
Ka tupu te uho ki Havaiki. 11
E moe ana Te Tumu-po ki raro 0
i te kore o te henua:  0
te hoe o te henua, 8
te tupu o te henua, 8
te uho o te henua, 8
te rau o te henua, 8
te mahora o te henua, 9
te heipo o te henua, 9
te rara o te henua, 8
te taupe o te henua. 9
Ko peka ngaru,  0
Ma te ranu uta, 6
Ma te ranu tai. 6
Hakapiri te ranu kia Atea, 12
E moana i raro 0
ki te faiti, ki te apiapi; 11
i te noti, i te nota. 8
Kia putaranga o vaitu, 10
Kia putaranga o tangata,— 10
Ka pu runga o Atea, 8
Ka pu raro o Fakahotu, 9
I fanau ai te uho ki te henua.
Life appears in the world, 0
Life springs up in Havaiki. 0
The Source-of-night sleeps below 0
in the void of the world: 0
in the taking-form of the world, 0
in the growth of the world, 0
the life of the world, 0
the leafing of the world, 0
the unfolding of the world, 0
the darkening of the world, 0
the branching of the world, 0
the bending-down of the world. 0
Waves swerve aside, 0
With the tide rising inland, 0
With the tide rising seaward. 0
The tide rises till it touches Atea, 0
A sea below 0
in the narrowness, in the confinement;  0
in this, in that. 0
That gods may appear, 0
That people may issue forth,— 0
Atea produces above, 0
Fakahotu produces below, 0
Through whom life  (uho)  was born into the world.
E ui i te tumu, e ui i te tumu! 14
Ui atu vau ki raro ia Te Tumu e. 15
E ui i te tumu, e ui i te tumu! 14
Ko Tumu-nui, ko te i runga 0
Ko Tumu-iti, ko te i raro 0
Ko te tupu ranga ia o vaitu ma tangata. 16
E ui i te tumu! 7
Ui atu vau. 6
Ko Tumu-kia, ko te i runga, 10
Ko Tumu-nana, ko te i raro. 10
Ko te tupu ranga ia o vaitu ma tangata.
A questioning as to origins, an inquiry into the source! 0
I inquire as far back as The Source. 0
It is a questioning into the past, an inquiry as to the source! 0
Tumu-nui (Great foundation) is above, 0
Tumu-iti (Little foundation) is below, 0
It is the beginning of gods and men. 0
A question as to the source! 0
I inquire. 0
Tumu-kia is above, 0
Tumu-nana is below. 0
It is the springing up of gods and men.
Turuturu and Hirinaki 0
Mahiri and Manatu 0
Fakapuku and Fakaheo 0
Fakahihi and Fakapeka 0
Fakahunga and Fakaveu 0
Ihoiho and Ngakongako 0
Tuturi and Pepeke 0
Te Hau and Putake 0
Papa-kia and Tumu-moe-hania
(Causing-hills and Causing-pinnacles) 0
(Entangling and Troubling) 0
(Dividing and Shredding) 0
(Descending and Vortexing) 0
(Kneeling and Crouching) 0
(The Order and Root-source) 0
'Ua parau iho ra Ta'aroa, 12
"E aere nu'u e, e aere ra'i e, 14
Aere ra te fenua 'ino i raro ra, 4
I toro ra i toro e, a'iu'iu anaunau,  0
Te fenua 'ino 'i raro ra, e toro e!" 14
... 0
'Ua parau iho ra Ta'aroa: 12
"E Te Tumu e, 'a ne'e mai." 10
'Ua parau mai ra Te Tumu: 11
"E 'ore au e ne'e atu, e tumu vau no te fenua." 20
"E Te Papa e, 'a ne'e mai." 10
"E 'ore au e ne'e atu, e papa vau no te fenua." 20
"E Te Tireo e, 'a ne'e mai." 11
"E 'ore au e ne'e atu, e tireo vau no te fenua."
Ta'aroa then said, 0
"O space for land, o space for sky. 0
Useless world below existing in nebulous state, 0
Continuing and continuing from time immemorial, 0
Useless world below, extend! 0
... 0
Then Ta'aroa commanded: 0
"O Foundation creep hither." 0
The Foundation answered: 0
"I will not creep forth, I am the foundation of the land." 0
"O Rock-stratum, creep hither." 0
"I will not creep forth, I am the rock-stratum of the earth." 0
"O Young-root-suckers, move hither." 0
"I will not budge, I am the young root-suckers of the earth."
Tuvau, tuvau. 6
One 'ura, one mea. 8
Huniu ha'a ma. 6
.... 0
E ru, e ru ana e. 7
Hi'i te i tai e,
Spread out, lie out. 0
The crimson sands, the red sands. 0
...... 0
Shake, shake gently. 0
There is cradling by the sea side,
Tai o Tane nui mana 'ore i te horahora nei e. 20
Tuvau te one i ta'u va'a iti; 13
'A horahora te one i ta'u va'a nui. 15
'A tu va'a nui. 6
'A horahora te one i ta'u (va'a) iti. 15
'A tuvau, 'a tuvau e a oti. 12
'A horo e ha'a, a horo ha'a, 11
'A horo ha'a e a oti. 9
'O Te Tumu te tuvauvau ra ia Havai ('i). 17
'A tuvau. 4
'Ua fa'aueue iho ra Ta'aroa i te fenua. 'Aore atu ra i 'aueue. 'Ua pi'i iho ra Ta'aroa: 11
"'Ovai te i uta e?" 8
Pina'i atu ra te reo o Ta'aroa i roto i te fa'a. 'Ua parau mai ra: 3
"'Ovau o Tu-fenua, o Tu-mou'a, o Tu-parara, o Te One-a-Tu. 4
Tu tu mai vaho Ta'aroa iho. 12
'O Ta-maomao vi, Ta-maomao va, 13
Puna-heuheu. 6
'Oe i rei ai te 'ohu.   0
Pepe-tu, e Pepe-hau, 8
Pepe te toro na, 6
Ei te 'uri faro Maitu-ra'i, 0
E toa, e tupua, e to'a-hiti." 12
"'Ovai te i tai e?" 8
"'Ovau, 'o Te Fatu-moana, 10
Te fatu tahu tahuri mai to'a. 12
Tupu i te moana, to'a i te moana;  0
Feo i te moana, tuturi i te moana.
(By the) sea of great Tane, powerless in the spreading out here (of the sands). 0
Spread out the sands from my little canoe; 0
Lay out the sands from my great canoe. 0
Let the great canoe stand forth. 0
Spread out the sands from my little canoe. 0
Lay out, put in place until finished. 0
Run and work, hurry the work, 0
Hurry the work until finished. 0
It is The Founder who lays out Havai'i. 0
Lay it out. 0
Ta'aroa now shook the land. It would not move. Ta'aroa then called out: 0
"Who is there inland?" 0
The voice of Ta'aroa echoed in the valley. There came the answer: 0
"It is I, Stability-of-the-land, Stability-of-the-mountains, Stability-of-the-plains, The-sands-of-Stability. 0
Set up without by Ta'aroa himself. 0
Ta-maomao-vi, Ta-maomao-va, 12
Puna-heuheu. 6
You who encircle the clouds, 0
Pepe-tu, Pepe-hau, 7
Pepe extending there, 0
Like the ... dog of Maitu-ra'i, 0
A warrior, a god, a nobleman." 0
"Who is seaward there?" 0
"It is I, The Lord-of-the-ocean, 0
The lord who by sorcery overturned rocks. 0
Grew up in the ocean, became rock in the ocean. 0
Sharp pinnacles of coral in the ocean, upright stones in the ocean.
'Oe i fa'atupu hia (a) i te iho i tai na, 18
E Ro'o ma Ruahatu. 8
"'Ovai te i ni'a e?" 8
"'Ovau, 'o Vatea. 7
Te tea nu'u, te tea ra'i, 10
Te pori a nu'u, te pori a ra'i, 12
Huri hia fenua tupai o Ro'o a(?), 14
Ei te au mata tahu e Ro'o." 12
"'Ovai te i raro e?" 8
"'Ovau, 'o Rua, 6
'O Rua-i-te-tumu, 7
'O Rua-i-te-papa, 7
('O Rua-to'a-nu'u, 'O Rua-to'a-ra'i), 14
'O Rua-i-te-muhumuhu, 9
'O Rua-i-te-rearea o rua. 12
E fai na mai ra te ara i raro na." 14
Parahi atua atu ra te varua o Ta'aroa. Tera te i'oa taua varua, 'o Te Haruru-papa.
You who brought about life in the sea there, 16
O Ro'o and Ruahatu. 8
"Who is above there?" 7
"It is I, Vatea. 6
The land space, the sky space, 7
The productiveness of the land, the productiveness of the sky. 17
The earth is overturned. ... 8
Like the bewitching eyes of Ro'o." 11
"Who is below there?" 6
"It is I, Rua (Source, Abyss), 9
Rua-in-the-foundation, 9
Rua-in-the-rock-strata; 7
(Rua-coral-rock-of-land, Rua-coral-rock-of-sky), 13
Rua-in-the-murmuring (of the abyss), 10
Rua-in-the-whispering of the abyss. 10
The way below becomes plainly visible." 12
The spirit of Ta'aroa dwelt as a god. The name of that spirit was, The-foundations-rumbling.
"'A nana Te Tumu e, 7
'A nana, 'a tiei Te Tumu. 10
'A tiei, 'a fa'a-o Te Tumu e. 12
'A fa'a-o, 'a faro te ure ra o Ta'aroa, 'o Te Apoi-ra'i. 5
Toro na raro ia Te Papa-raharaha, 14
E ivi papa no Ta'aroa."
"O Foundation, look, 0
Look, turn your head and look, o Foundation. 0
Lean over and insert, o Foundation. 0
Insert and let the penis of Ta'aroa thrust (the penis named) The-curved-heavens. 0
Reach down to The-rock-strata-spread-out, 0
A shoulder bone (mistress) of Ta'aroa.
0
0
  "E te tupuaitu e, 8
Eaha ra te ahi i mau ra'i,  0
Tinai hia tu ra ia. 9
Te moa i Raro-ata, 8
I te 'uri i Arava, te pua'a Fetuna, 15
Ua 'opani hia to ratou vaha. 13
Te i tai i Avahoa. 9
'Ua tapo'i hia e Pani. 10
Toe atu ra te tutu i Mari-oro. Te tutu ra Hina-tutu-po i te apa'a no te atua, no Ta'aroa. Ua 'u'uru a'e ra Ta'aroa. 25
"U e Pani, e tutu a te varovaro nei?" 15
Ua parau atu ra Pani, 10
"'O Hina te tutu mai ra i te apa'a." 14
..... 0
 "E ti'i 'oe, e parau atu e, 'e fa'aoti a'e, a maniania te ava o te tupuaitu." 15
Ti'i atu ra Pani, e parau ia Hina, 15
"E fa'aoti, a maniania te ava o te tupuaitu."
  "O wonder-working spirit, 7
What is this fire taking hold of the sky, 0
Extinguish it. 0
The fowls at Raro-ata, 0
The dogs at Arava, the pigs at Fetuna, 0
Their mouths have been closed. 0
They are seaward of Avahoa, 0
They have been covered-over by Pani. 0
There remains (the story of) the beating of tapa at Mari-oro. Hina-beating-in-the-dark was beating tapa for the god Ta'aroa. Ta'aroa grumbled: 0
"O Pani, is that noise the beating of tapa?" 0
Pani answered: 0
"It is Hina beating fine tapa." 0
..... 0
"You go to her and tell her to stop, the harbour of the god is too noisy." 0
Pani fetched Hina and said to her, 0
"Stop it, or the harbour of the god will be noisy."
O Te Hotu-o-te-ra'i, ei pou mua. 14
O 'Anaia-i-te-ra'i, ei pou muri. 15
Pou a te pou tu, i te pou noho, 13
i te pou 'orerorero, i te pou vana'ana'a. 18
E fa'a te tumu, e fa'a te papa, 12
e fa'a 'opi a ra'i. 8
Te ra'i nui 'ia ha'ono. 10
E toto'o 0
tahuhu o te ra'i, pou roto o te ra'i; 15
e apai o te ra'i, turuturu o te ra'i; 16
'aho tua o te ra'i, 'aho tara o te ra'i; 16
tunau o te ra'i, totoro-iore o te ra'i; 17
e ahua o te ra'i, rau-oro o te ra'i; 16
e aeho o te ra'i; hauato o te ra'i; 16
uviau o te ra'i; tapo'i o te ra'i. 15
Oti roa a'e ra te ra'i. 10
Te vai ha'ono noa ra te ra'i i muta'a iho ra.
Hotu-o-te-ra'i was the fore post. 0
'Anaia-i-te-ra'i was the rear post. 0
Set up the pillar to stand by, the pillar to sit by, 0
the pillar to speak by, the pillar to recite by. 0
Build the foundation, build the rock-strata, 0
set out the horizon. 0
Let the great heavens extend. 0
Prop 0
the ridge-pole of the sky, the inner post of the sky; 0
the wall-plate of the sky, the side post of the sky; 0
the rear purlin of the sky, the end purlin of the sky; 0
the ... of the sky, the supplementary ridge-pole of the sky; 0
the sill of the sky, the thatching sheets of the sky; 0
the wall-reeds of the sky, the thatching-needle of the sky; 0
the ridge thatching of the sky, the roof of the sky. 0
The sky is entirely finished. 0
The sky remained expanded in ancient times.

Polynesian mythology by Katharine Luomala // JSP. Volume 49, No. 194. P. 175-196
E tu'u atu ra i raro i Havai'I, 0
'Ia 'ai te nei i'a o te reva. 0
Mara'a Te Tumu, mara'a Te Fatu; 0
E mana (a) te atua Ta'aroa-tumu, 0
Mara'a ti'a e! 0
Toiaha, toiahaaha ai te tumu te fenua. 0
E'ave mua o Tutu, 0
E tu'u i muri o Havai'i. 0
Tahi fai te tau, 0
Te mahiti te muri a fenua. 0
Mana hua e Te Fatu,- 0
E fati to rima! 0
E mau fenua no te reva, 0
'Ua puta oopita(?) te hua. 0
Tu matau Maui. 0
Te haru ra tana i'a ra,- 0
I te fai ra i, 0
I'a te reva! 0
'A huti!
Let it down to Havai'i. 0
That the wandering fish take it. 0
Te Tumu (The Foundation) rises, Te Fatu (The Lord) appears. 0
Creations of the god Ta'aroa-the-creator, 0
Appear! 0
Heavy, very, very heavy is the foundation of the land. 0
The forward line of (the canoe) Tutu, 0
Is let down to the rear of Havai'i. 0
A giant manta fish is suspended, 0
The rear of the land comes free. 0
Te Fatu is very powerful,- 0
Your arm will break! 0
Lands dangling, 0
Pierced... 0
Maui holds steadily his hook. 7
His fish there seizes (it),- 0
(His fish) the giant-manta there. 0
A fish dangles! 0
Haul it up!

Texts below were kindly provided by Dr. David Meyer, David Meyer, University of Edinburgh

References for transcribed Tahitian oral tradition 18
File name abbreviation: 10
Reference 4
adams: 2
Adams, Henry. 1968. Memoirs of Arii Taimai. Ridgewood, NJ: Gregg Press. 20
ahnne_bseo9: 4
Ahnne, E. 1924. Le lyrisme des Tahitiens. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Océaniennes 9:20-23. 27
alexander: 4
Alexander, W.D. 1893. Specimens of ancient Tahitian poetry. Journal of the Polynesian Society 2:55-59. 29
cadousteau: 6
Cadousteau, Mai Arii. 1987. Généalogies commentées des arii des Iles de la Société. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Océaniennes 239/240:1-131. 45
caillot: 3
Caillot, Auguste-Charles Eugène. 1914. Mythes, légendes et traditions des Polynésiens. Paris:Ernest Leroux. 31
chadourne_bseo6: 6
Chadourne, M. 1922. Le lyrisme des Tahitiens. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Océaniennes 6:64-76. 28
emory_bseo28: 4
Emory, Kenneth P. 1928. Chant de Pai pour sa lance Rufautumu qui perça Moorea. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Océaniennes 28:170-171. 42
emory_bseo150: 4
Emory, Kenneth P. 1965. Une prière de marae tahitienne de la famille royale Pomare. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Océaniennes 150:457-465. 44
emory_jps47: 2
Emory, Kenneth P. 1938. The Tahitian account of creation by Mare. Journal of the Polynesian Society 47:45-63. 31
henry: 1
Henry, Teuira. 1928. Ancient Tahiti. Honolulu: Bernice P. Bishop Museum Press. 24
henry_jps2: 1
Henry, Teuira. 1893. Te umu-ti, a Raiatean ceremony. Journal of the Polynesian Society 2:105-108. 30
henry_jps3: 1
Henry, Teuira. 1894. The birth of new lands, after the creation of Havaiʻi (Raiatea). Journal of the Polynesian Society 3:136-139. 39
henry_jps4: 1
Henry, Teuira. 1895. Te parau a Honoura. Journal of the Polynesian Society 4:256-294. 26
henry_jps6: 1
Henry, Teuira. 1897. A war song of the Oropaa clan of Tahiti. Journal of the Polynesian Society 6:211-212. 31
henry_jps20: 1
Henry, Teuira. 1911. More on the ariʻis of Tahiti. Journal of the Polynesian Society 20:4-9. 28
henry_jps21: 1
Henry, Teuira. 1912. The Tahitian version of the names Raʻiatea and Taputapu-atea. Journal of the Polynesian Society 21:77-78. 42
lagarde_bseo59: 5
Lagarde, G. 1937. Légende dictée par un veillard de Tiarei à Marautaaroa i Tahiti. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Océaniennes 59:694-699. 44
leverd_jps21: 2
Leverd, A. 1912. The Tahitian version of Tafaʻi (or Tawhaki). Journal of the Polynesian Society 21:1-25. 31
salmon_jps19: 2
Salmon, Tati. 1910. On Ariʻis in Tahiti. Journal of the Polynesian Society 19:39-46. 24
smith: 1
Smith, S. Percy. 1892. The Tahitian "hymn of creation". Journal of the Polynesian Society 1:31-32. 24
0
Adams: 009 2
Common cry or signal call of the Tevas
Teva te ua, Teva te matai, 11
Teva te mamari, e mamari iti au na Ahurei.
Common cry or signal call of the Tevas 10
Teva the rain, Teva the wind, 9
Teva the roe, the roe dear to Ahurei.
Adams: 025 2
TEURAITERAI AND TAURUA
E ore e pa iau. no fea e pa iau. 16
Teuraiterai ono rai ono. e ura piria mai tau orio. 26
E ura ahuahu mai Raratoa mai e te ipo iti e. 22
E tahi arii haamoe ite ura here. 16
Mai piti e mai faau. tau mate ono i aia. 20
Ruruu te rai ma fau hia 11
Fau hia te rai mai ata. e ata pua e ata rai. 21
Mahiti te pea ma te paora 11
Paora te pa ma tuatini tuatini te pito i haafifi 22
Anapea anapea ia mau maitai.
I will not give her up! Why should I give her up! 14
I, Teuraiterai of the six skies! the Ura that clings to my eyes! 21
The Ura, sunshine from Raratoa, my dear treasure. 17
One king lulled to sleep his dear Ura. 13
Like two united. I should die without her. 15
Tie up the heavens like a net. 11
Tangle the clouds of the sky, the clouds of Pua. 13
Open the net, make me dry. 7
Dry the thousand thousand bonds that unite us. 13
The net, the net holds well.
Adams: 027 2
TAVI AND TEURAITERAI
0
A mau ra i te vahine ia Taurua. 15
Tou hoa ite ee. e matatarai maua e. 18
Taurua horo poipoi oe iau nei. 17
To aiai na pohe mai nei au ite ono. 18
Nau hoi oe i teie nei ra. 13
A mau ra ia Taurua tou hoa ite ee. 18
Matatarai mauai maua e.
Take, then, your wife! Taurua! 11
my friend! we are separated, she and I! 12
Taurua, the morning star to me. 10
For her beauty I would die. 10
You were mine, 6
but now -- take, then, Taurua! my friend! 11
we are separated, she and I!
Adams: 035 2
AROMAITERAI’S LAMENT
Ei Mataoae au hio atu ai i tau fenua ite Tianina. 27
Ite moua ra o Tearatapu te peho i Temaite 20
Tiaa puaa ite moua rahi 13
Ua tahe te hupe ite moua 12
Ua ho ra hia tau ahu. 10
Terara ua e. e ore oe e iriti ae 17
Ia hio atu au ite moua rahi ra 16
Aue le pare i mapuhi e tau fenua iti e 19
Te pahu taimai o nia o Fareura 15
E iriti hia mai te matai o te toa 16
Ei tahirihiri no te arii no Aromaiterai. 20
Ite huru o tou aia.
From Mataoae I look toward my land Tetianina, 17
the mount Tearatapu, the valley Temaite, 15
my drove of pigs on Mouarahi, the great mountain. 17
Mist hides the mountain. 8
My cloak is spread. 5
Oh that the rain clear away, 9
that I may see the great mountain! 12
Aue! alas! the wall of Mapuhi, dear land of mine! 17
"The drums that sound above Fareura 12
draw to me the winds of the south 9
for a fan to fan the chief Aromaiterai. 15
[I long for] the sight of my home."
Adams: 037 2
LAMENT OF TAURAATUA
Taura atua te noho maira i tona ra paepae i te pacpaeroa 27
E uriri iti au e rere i te Ruaroa 17
E fenua Papara ite rai rumaruma 15
E haere a i Teva tena teaia tei Papara to fenua ura e 26
Moua tei nia Moua Tamaiti 14
E Outu tei tai Outu manomano te faarii raa ia Teriirere i outu rau ma Tooarai 41
E tii na vau e turai e atu i teniau para o te Ruaroa e 27
Ia vai noa mai nau i puu rii o Maraeura tei tai e
Taura atua lives at the paepae of the paepaeroa 22
The little Uriri flies to the Ruaroa, for him the loved< 19
’Come back to Papara, the heavy-leaved; 13
Come back to Teva, your home, your Papara, the golden land; 19
Your Moua, the Moua Tamaiti above; 16
Your Outu, the Outu Manomano on the shore, The throne of Teriirere of Tooarai.’ 32
Then let me go and bend aside the golden leaves of the Ruaroa 21
That I may see those two buds of Marae-ura on the shore.
Adams: 057-059 2
Ahu Raa Reva 16
Source: The Teva's of Papara
[1] 0
Ahu raa reva i Tooarai 12
Patiri ite pae ote rai 11
Tu'ua tetapii ite avatea 13
Haati ite reva ate arii 12
Te arii ite rai tauatini 13
Hapuni ite reva ate arii 12
Te arii ite rai tauamano 13
E faatia raa reva tei Matahihae 16
Ite aro o Vehiatua 10
Na taata i ofati ite reva ate arii 17
O Teieie raua o Tetumanua 15
Ahiri toe hara i hope i reira 14
I ati te Oropaa 8
Na hia faifai roa te pohe ote fenua 17
Na hara ,oe ete Purahi 10
Ite reva ura ate arii 11
Tei fati hia e Taiarapu 12
A pohe ai tatou e 9
[2] 0
E tatari oe ite nuu nui ite patu ofai 19
Ite marae i Mahaiatea 12
Pohuatea tei Punaauia 13
Tepauarii tei Ahurai 12
Teriimaroura tei Tarahoi 13
Te fenua i hara atu ai te maau e 16
Eimeo ite raravaru 10
Te fenua i tai hia e Mahine 13
Na oti ite pure, tootoo ia ite iho na 18
O Puni i Farerua, o Raa i Tupai 15
E tahua o Teae afano i Tahiti 15
E oroa tei Tahiti 9
Ahu raa reva na Teriirere i Tooarai 18
Tatou e no ho ai e 9
Na hara oe ete Purahi 10
Ite reva ura ate arii 11
Tei fati hia e Taiarapu 12
A pohe ai tatou e 9
[3] 0
Faaara viriaro tei Pafaarava 15
E rima tahivai e rima tahivai 14
Eha ei roto e ha ei rapae 13
Ahiri ite tao a Amo e 11
E te Oropaa e 7
E hopoipoi tia tatou 11
Ite aro na tai ote vaa 11
Nauta tatou hoe ona a ino 13
Tei mua ite Malataupe 11
E aau paapaa tei Vaitoata 15
E pau tatou ite pau o Pairituaipo 18
Ite rahi tauraa Temahuru nia nei 16
Pahupua ma nei 7
Hia orero tina Papara 10
Na hia te moua 7
Ite vaa nui o Hui ma Taiarapu 15
Hoe noa tia ei te pae tahatai 15
Tau mate o no iaia e 11
Na hara oe ete Purahi 10
Ite reva ura ate arii 11
Tei fati hia e Taiarapu 12
A pohe ai tatou e
[1] 0
The feast of flags was held at Tooarai 13
(The drums) like crash of thunder along the sky 11
(The splendor) like the rays of noonday sun 12
Surrounded the standard of the arii 12
The arii of countless skies 10
Enveloped the standard of the arii 12
The arii of a thousand skies. 11
A feast was also held at Matahihae 13
In the presence of Vehiatua 11
The two men who broke up the feast of the arii 15
Were Teieie and Tetumanua 13
Had the sin ceased there 8
It brought misery to the Oropaa 11
And the whole land was laid prostrate 11
Oh, thou hast sinned, Purahi, 9
Against the reva ura of thine Arii 14
That was broken up by Taiarapu 10
Which brought on our ruin. 8
[2] 0
Assembles the great host at the cairn 11
At the marae of Mahaietea. 12
Pohuatea at Punaauia. 12
Tepauarii at Ahurai. 11
Terii maro ura at Tarahoi 12
The land where the idiot was punished. 12
Eimeo, the eight branched, 9
The land dear to Mahine. 8
The prayers were said, the call was given 12
To Puni of Farerua, to Raa of Tupai 15
The high priest Teae is gone to Tahiti 14
There is a feast at Tahiti 10
The Ahuraareva for Teriirere of Tooarai 19
To whom we all bow down. 6
Oh, thou hast sinned, Purahi, 9
Against the reva ura of thine Arii 14
That was broken up by Taiarapu 10
Which brought on our ruin. 8
[3] 0
The scouts at Pafaarava are wakened 14
One hand is stretched out, and then another. 13
The four (districts) within, and the four without 14
Ah, had the advice of Amo been followed 14
By you of the Oropaa 8
To lead us all 5
The van of the army by canoes on the sea 12
By the mountain-road we had one evil 13
Ahead of us at the Matataupe 12
The dry reef of Vaitoata 9
There we might have died the death of Pairituaipo 19
At the meeting-ground of Temahuru 12
And of Pahupua. 6
Papara is laid prostrate 9
The Mount (the Arii) is laid low 11
By the great army of Hui and Taiarapu 13
Only one now stands on the shore, the Marae, 13
Thou the cause of our downfall. 11
Oh, thou hast sinned,Purahi, 9
Against the reva ura of thine Arii 14
That was broken up by Taiarapu 10
Which brought on our ruin.
Adams: 060 2
Source: :The people of Tautira 12
How Vehiatua remonstrated with Teieie for troubling his authority
[VEHIATUA TO TEIEIE] 11
Teieie, e eiaha ei faainoino ite hau 22
Tena ta oe ite ra e hiti 11
I Tirimiro i Manuataha. 11
[TEIEIE TO VEHIATUA] 11
Te mata toana te mata toanei 13
Te huru toa nei te huru toa nei 14
Haapiti te matai e nauta mai i Tahuarera 20
Ite rua o matai taua Fatutira ite tai paaina 23
O Murihau a nae ra o tau e tai.
Teieie, why, oh! why will you make trouble with the government! 19
You have the sun-rise (the Pari) 11
The Tirimiro and Manuataha (sub-districts). 14
[TEIEIE TO VEHIATUA] 11
You have eyes, eyes have I! 11
You are a warrior, warrior am I! 13
Haapite the wind that blows over Tahuarera 15
Brings me the sound of the surf of Fatutira. 13
Murihau is all I ask and cry for.
Adams: 084 2
Note: Adams writes: "Among the fragments of history that survive in the island is a song called the “Boast of Niufi,” or Niuhi, which is, as usual, so crowded with local allusions as to be unintelligible ..." 63
[A few lines from] THE BOAST OF NIUFI
E fatu rau i tau hau o Taveroiterai 18
I te talua o Manavataia. te tootoo o Ninihotetoa. 24
Te taamu o Tiaperetii. te tahiri o Nunaaehau. 22
E too rau i tau nuu Pare Arue Mahine 18
Teharuru Eue Temehiti Ahuare Tetaero. 19
To ina te horo i paepae iriiri e maau rau nei na Teva.
I am lord of my chiefdom of Taveroiterai 15
Of the girdle of Manavataia, the staff of Niniho-te-toa, 20
The union of Tiaperetii, the fan of Nunaaehau. 20
I am leader of my armies: Pare, Arue, Mahine, 17
Te Haururu, Eue, Temehiti, Ahuare, Tetaero. 20
Ask the fall of Paepae-iriiri if I am the idiot of Teva!
Adams: 122 2
Source: People of Papara 10
Note: Adams writes: "To translate the song literally would be a hopeless task. Its interest is in its local allusions rather than in its poetry." 43
ARIIFAATAIA AND MAHEANUU
Orie e pati i te pae tahatai 14
E mahuta mai te aaura i Taravao. 16
Ei tapihoo itei Terehemanu 14
Ia vai noa mai te moua iti ra Tearatauru 21
E Temarii e e oto oe i te moua ra moua Tamaiti.
Orie is a fish, or bait, 9
which attracts the bird Aa-ur-a, the parrot with red feathers, of Taravao, meaning of course the Maheanuu, 35
to change place with the bird Terehe, meaning of course Temarii, 22
and share his mounts of Tearatauru 13
and Tamaiti, his most precious possessions.
0
Ahnne bseo9: 020-023 4
Source: Collected by J.M. Orsmond in Raiatea
Date of recitation: 1824
Lament about a woman. 30
E Pehe tai vahine. 8
[Moanarai te tane. Aitoofa te vahine. She left her husband at Tainuu and set off to Borabora; he stood by the shore and said:]
E haere mai, mai Toa e Aitoofa e, 17
e tau vahine purotu hara e. 12
Mai te hororaa o te au i Onoiau ra, 18
e mai te tahe raa o vaipue nei, 15
te uataina raa o to'u nei aau 16
mateono i te pee raa ia oe. 14
E Aitoofa, e aroha mai to tane a mate. 18
Ua tapairu te outu o Tainuu. 15
E matau, e riaria, e hauaitu hia te tane i te fa raa, 25
e, i te hiti mai o te aroha o te vahine here hia. 21
O te mata nei a te vahi ioio maitatai. 19
Nаnа noa iho te tane, te vaira mararo. 14
E marama taupe i to'a te huru o te tane, 17
te huru o Moanarai i teienei 15
tona inoino, e e ata nui haamarurai 18
to te tane i tae i tana vahine i nonoa ra, 18
e mai rai rumaruma ite au raa ae o to'u tai i teienei. 28
Aue hoi au nei e, aue hoi au nei, 19
Tau vahine iti purotu hara, 12
tau hoa here fatoa manava, 12
tau hoa ia vero, ua eia hia aenei. 19
E hei fara, e hei hinano 11
tau i poro faina na oe e Aitoofa e, 18
e noha ua reva oe. Aue hoi au nei e. 19
Te ravea te rave iau nei e. 13
Te manu atu na oe i te areare i te aoa'tu na. 21
Te vaiho hia nei o Vavaara, e o Rotui 18
te taa nia o Temehani i muri ia oe. 17
Ua faarue oe to oe hopu raa iti vai ateatea, 24
ta oe nei tiare hotu raa tuutuuore. 18
Aue oe e Aitoofa e, e titi horoa oe. 20
Aue tou mamae e, e te pioi o to'u nei aau. 22
Aue te faanoi e, e te manao faoonohi. 19
Te uruhia nei au i te topatie. Aue taua e. 22
Te noinoi maite nei te manao o to tane nei i te faaaroha, 27
Aue tau mahanai e. 10
To mata aiai i aro ē tu e. 14
Aita tura faufaa utuafare e. 15
E tara tui au nei, e tara maitai au nei. 20
Eaha ta oe hara i ino noa'i e tau vahine e, 21
i hipа ē atu nei oe. 10
Eaha oe i ooti pitoai ia'u nei, i taiva hoi. 24
E vahine hamani ino. 9
E vero tatautoru tou riri i te otuitui raa i roto iau nei. 29
Te manava taahihia vau nei. 13
Te aataina nei to'u manava ia oe. 17
Te toetoe nei au i te muri aroha noa raa. 20
E Aitoofa e, a hoi mai. 12
Teie te pupaura na oe, 11
Teie te hei ura na oe, 11
Teie te hei poe mata uiui na oe, 17
Teie toa utuafare, o vau ia o Manarai tane.
Reviens, oh! reviens de Toa, chиre Aitoofa, 16
O mon йpouse d'une beautй sans йgale! 13
Comme le courant qui sort de la passe d'Onoiau, 18
comme le torrent furieux qui dйborde de la vallйe, 17
ainsi le dйsir incessant de mon amour 13
s'йlance et te poursuit. 8
O Aitoofa, prends pitiй de ton йpoux qui va mourir. 19
La pointe de Tainuu deviendra comme une jolie femme, 22
l'йpoux tremblera, il frйmira, il s'йvanouira, 14
quand il verra reparaоtre et se lever la face de l'aimйe. 20
C'est encore l'oeil qui est le plus admirable. 16
De quelque cōtй que regarde l'йpoux, tout lui dйplait. 20
La lune qui se couche а l'ouest 12
est l'image de l'йpoux, de Moanarai en ce moment. 17
La tristesse du mari pour l'йpouse qui le dйlaisse 18
est comme un grand nuage noir 10
et ma douleur en ce moment est comme le ciel qui s'assombrit. 21
Ah! pauvre moi! Ah! pauvre moi! 12
Ma petite femme caressante est partie, 14
ma belle petite femme, mon amie, ma consolation, 18
mon amie dans la tempēte m'a йtй dйrobйe. 13
J'ai cueilli pour toi une couronne de pandanus, 20
une couronne de fleurs de pandanus, ō Aitoofa. 20
Et voici: tu es partie! Pauvre moi! 14
Est-ce ainsi que tu me traites? 12
Tu t'envoles sur le clapotis du chenal. 12
Tu laisses derriиre toi Vavaara, la vallйe aux buissons embaumйs 24
et Rotui, la māchoire supйrieure du Temehani. 20
Tu as abandonnй la source claire oщ tu te baignais, 19
ton buisson de tiare, toujours couvert de fleurs. 18
Hйlas! Aitoofa, tu es un jouet d'enfant emportй par le vent. 19
Oh! la souffrance et la rage de mon coeur! 15
Hйlas! je suis abattu! la pensйe du suicide me hante. 18
Un vent de folie souffle en moi. Malheur а nous deux! 19
La pensйe du pardon s'affaiblit chez ton mari. 14
Hйlas! ma petite femme chйrie, 9
ton visage charmant s'est йloignй de moi, 12
mon foyer est dйtruit. 6
je suis un bon mari, le meilleur des йpoux. 15
Quel crime ai-je commis envers toi mon йpouse 17
pour que tu m'aies abandonnй? 11
Pourquoi as-tu coupй le cordon ombilical qui nous unissait, pour me fuir? 29
Tu es une femme cruelle. 9
Ma colиre est une tempēte incessante qui frappe а coups redoublйs au-dedans de moi. 30
Je n'ai plus de force dans les entrailles, 13
le dйsir de mon coeur te poursuit. 12
Je suis glacй а force de te regretter. 11
Chиre Aitoofa, oh! reviens; 10
Pour toi, voici un bouquet de plumes rouges! 18
Pour toi, une couronne de plumes йcarlates! 16
Pour toi, un collier de perles йtincelantes! 15
Et voici aussi ton foyer, c'est moi, Moanarai ton йpoux.
Alexander: 055-057 (Journal of the Polynesian Society, v. 2) 16
Source: possibly Moanarai of Ra'iatea
Date of recitation: 1824
Lament about a woman 32
E pehe tai vahine
E haere mai, mai Toa e, Aitofá e, 15
E ta'u vahine purotu hara e! 12
Mai te horo raa o te au i Onoiau ra, 18
E mai te tahe raa o vaipue nei, 15
Te uutaina raa o to'u nei 'a'au mateono i te pee raa ia oe. 30
E Aitofá, e aroha mai to tane a mate. 16
[stanza break] 4
Ua tapairu te outu o Tainuu. 15
E mata'u, e riaria, e hauaituhia te tane i te fa raa, 25
E i te hiti mai o te aroha o te vahine herehia, 21
O te mata nei a te vahi ioio mataitai. 19
Naná noa iho te tane, te vai ra mararo. 15
[stanza break] 4
E maráma taūpe i tooa te huru o te tane, 18
Te huru o Moanarai i teie nei e. 16
E ata nui haa-maru-rai tona inoino, 17
To te tane i tai i tana vahine i nonoa ra, 18
E mai rai rumaruma i te au raa ae o to'u tai i teie nei. 28
[stanza break] 4
Aue hoi au nei e, aue hoi au nei ta'u vahine iti, 26
Ta'u hanihani i haere e nei! 13
Ta'u vahine iti purotu hara, ta'u hoa here faatoa manava, 25
Ta'u hoa ia vero, ua eiahia ae nei! 19
E hei fara, e hei hinano ta'u i porofaina na oe, 22
E Aitofá e, inaha ua reva oe! 14
[stanza break] 4
Aue hoi au nei e! Te ravea te rave ia'u nei e! 23
Te manu atu na oe i te areare i te Aoa tu na. 21
Te vaihohia nei o Vavaara, 13
E o Rotui, te taa nia o te Mehani, i muri ia oe. 22
Ua faarue oe tooe hopu raa i te vai ateate, 23
Taoe nei tiare hotu raa tuutuu orй. 17
Aue oe e Aitofá e! E titihoria oe. 18
[stanza break] 4
Aue to'u mamae e, e te pioi o to'u nei 'a'au! 22
Aue te faanoi e, e te mana'o faaonohi! 19
Te uruhia au i te topatie. Aue taua e! 20
Te noinoi mai tenei te mana'o o te tane nei i te faaroha. 26
[stanza break] 4
Aue ta'u mahanai e! To mata aiai i 'aro e 'tu e! 23
Aita 'tu ra faufaa utuafare e. 15
E tara tui ia'u nei, e tara maitai ia'u nei. 22
E aha taoe hara i inoinoa 'i, e ta'u vahine e, 22
I hipa e atu ai oe. 10
E aha oe i ooti-pito ai i au nei, i taiva hoi, 24
E vahine hamani ino. 9
[stanza break] 4
E vero tatautoru riri, 10
I te otuitui raa i roto i roto ia'u nei. 20
Te manava taahihia vau nei, 13
Te aataina nei to'u manava ia oe. 17
Te toetoe nei au i te muri aroha noa raa. 20
E Aitofá e, e hoi mai! 10
[stanza break] 4
Teie te pupá ura na oe, 10
Teie te hei ura na oe, 11
Teie te hei poe mata uiui na oe, 17
Teie tou utuafare, 10
O vau ia o Moanarai tane.
Come back from Toa, O Aitofa, 11
O my beautiful erring spouse! 11
As the rapid flow of the current at Onoiau, 15
And as the swollen torrent from the valley, 11
So flows my yearning heart after thee. 11
O Aitofa, have compassion on thy lover lest he die! 18
[stanza break] 4
The promontory of Tainuu has become beautified (by thee). 21
The husband will fear, will shrink, will faint at the re-appearance, 19
At the return of the love of the cherished wife, 15
Of that face so bright and beautiful. 12
Look whichever way he will, she seems to be still down there. 17
[stanza break] 4
The moon sinking into the western shades is the image of the husband, 21
The image of Moanarai at this moment. 14
As a great cloud obscuring the sky is his grief. 14
The grief of the husband mourning for his estranged wife, 17
And like the sky darkened by its rising is my distress for her. 15
[stanza break] 4
Alas for me! Alas for me! my little wife, 12
My darling has gone astray! 7
My little beautiful wayward spouse, My friend who made my heart brave, 21
My friend in the storm has been stolen away. 12
A wreath of the fara tree, a garland of Pandanus blossoms I have gathered for thee. 27
O Aitofa, and lo! thou art flown. 11
[stanza break] 4
Ah, woe is me! Is it thus that thou shouldst treat me? 16
Lo, thou art drifting away over the ripples in the Aoa shallows, 20
Thou art passing the fragrant vale of Vavaara, 15
And leaving Mt. Rotui, the upper jaw of Hades, behind thee. 18
Thou hast forsaken thy favourite bathing place with its clear water, 21
And thy Tiare (Gardenia) bush that blossoms without ceasing. 18
Alas for thee, Aitofa! Thou art a little toy canoe that the wind carries away. 27
[stanza break] 4
Alas for my anguish and the rage of my heart! 13
Ah me! I despair and think of suicide. 13
I am possessed with frenzy. Alas for us both! 12
The mind of the husband gives up the effort to win back my love. 17
[stanza break] 4
Alas for my darling! Thy fair face is lost from sight. 13
There is no benefit from the home. 11
A piercing thorn to me, a pretty thorn to me (art thou). 15
What is my fault for which thou art vexed, 11
For which thou hast disdained me? 10
Why hast thou cut the cord of love, and deserted me? 14
An evil-working woman. 7
[stanza break] 4
As a long continued storm is my anger, 11
At the throbbing within, within me, 9
My bowels yearn, 4
my heart flows out after thee. 9
I am chilled with lingering affection for thee, 15
O Aitofa, return! 7
[stanza break] 4
Here is a bunch of red feathers for thee, 13
Here is a wreath of scarlet feathers for thee, 15
Here is a necklace of beautiful pearls for thee, 18
Here is thy home. 5
I am Moanarai, thy husband.
Alexander: 057 (Journal of the Polynesian Society, v. 2) 16
A Lamentation at the death of the Regent Tanetua, during the reign of King Maevarua, in heathen times. 36
0
Source: Chief Raiti of Huahine 21
Date of recitation: 1881
Ta'u vaa faatere i te pae o te ra'i, 16
I te ruuruu raa aha o Tane-marua-nuu-e! 19
E maoa'e rii tuvaruvaru 12
Tei te vaa i Taunoa, 10
E aroro aera i te vaa taihaa i Ruahine e! 21
Ua tiatia i te pure, 10
Ua harahara i te vana'a rii e! 14
Marotea te mau toa. 9
No vai te vaa i tau mai? 11
E ui atu ai au nei e! 12
Tanetua ua mate, oi ore a vau oi ite. 19
Faataoto, haamoe atu e!
Sail O my canoe to the rim of the sky, 11
To the binding of sinnet on Tane-marua-nuu! 15
A north-east breeze gently blowing 10
On the canoe at Taunoa, 10
Sends ripples away to the mourning group (lit. canoe) at Ruahine! 21
They are standing for the prayer, 9
Broken is the voice of the dear orator! 14
Girdled in yellow are the warriors. 11
For whom is the canoe that has landed here? 13
Ah, why should I ask! 5
Tanetua is dead, and I might have missed seeing him. 18
Let him sleep, let him be lost from view!
Alexander: 058 (Journal of the Polynesian Society, v. 2) 16
Source: Chief Raiti of Huahine
Date of recitation: 1881 52
A dirge for Moehonu of the royal house of Tamatoa, who fell in battle at Raiatea.
Nanai fetia, moua i taaroa tei uta, 18
Haere i Aihi. Te arii no te hitirea mai o te ra, 22
Te toa iti mate-ioio, ua ta tahi huru o manu! 21
Tino arii no Ahuroa, ua huria oe, 17
E rai to'u e faaruia noa nei e! 16
Tupuna mau no Tapoa, 9
Te aito ia i faanui i Porapora. 16
A hee a tena mate, ta'u arii e, 14
Tai moua ia paia! 10
A pu aera i te Mehani! 10
E umere te Atua i te Po, 11
O Huria ua mate! 8
I na tia i te aha, mate iti pure'a mai ra? 18
I te papa ua mea! 8
Mata'i huru ē teie, e vahine hau e, 17
O Moehonu ua taa i te roi toetoe e! 18
Ua moe te to'i i Porapora, 12
Te vai na i Vaiotaha. 10
Eaha tau e mehi na, e Tefaaroa? 15
Mate aenei Tepeete! 10
Te taata ia i mau ai te papa upea, 17
E ora ai Faanui e! 10
Mea hoa hia i te Pa-tahi. 11
Tera roa o Moehonu e, 10
Tei roto ia tei Tioi! 11
Te opapa hia nei e te ivi e!
A row of stars, a mountain that stands apart inland, 15
leading to Aihi. The chief from the rising of the sun, 17
The dear warrior, handsome in death, has become like a bird! 20
Kingly body of Ahuroa, thou art overthrown! 13
My sky is darkened to me now! 7
True ancestor of Tapoa, 9
The warrior who made Borabora great, 13
Glide down thither dead, O my chief, 10
By the slippery mountain. 7
Blow (wind) around the Mehani. 9
The god of the darkness (Hades) will praise (him), 13
The overthrown one who is dead. 10
What can quiet (grief for the) dear face so pallid! 16
At the altar stone 'tis done! 9
A strange kind of wind is this, O woman of peace, 15
Moehonu is separated to the cold bed (of death), alas! 18
His axe sleeps at Borabora, 10
It lies at Vaiotaha. 9
What art thou lamenting, O Tefaaroa? 13
Dead is Tepeete. 7
He was the man who held the helm of state (lit. weights of the fish-net), 18
So that Faanui is saved. 9
A person beloved at the fort Patahi. 12
Yonder is Moehonu, far away, 10
Inside of the turning place (Tioi), 12
(While) Remembered by the widowed one!
Alexander: 058-059 (Journal of the Polynesian Society, v. 2) 16
Source: Chief Raiti of Huahine
Date of recitation: 1881 31
Condolence from Raiatea.
Tena te vaa tei te tai, 10
Utuhi te vai noa 8
Mai te ave tere a Hiro ma. 11
Tona o te mata'i e pupu i te ie, 14
Horahora te tua o te are, 11
Te ie o te timaa-piti o te aoa e! 16
Poroi mai te arii e, 10
A tahi aroha tei tupu hu'i e!
There is the canoe in the sea. 11
Its wake is lying 5
Like the train that followed Hiro's band. 12
His is the wind that swells the sail, 9
Spreading out the expanse of the waves, 13
The sail of the double canoe from the royal residence. 19
Bear the message from the chief, 10
Of affection that grows throbbing! (i.e. out of throbbing sorrow).
Alexander: 059 (Journal of the Polynesian Society, v. 2) 16
Source: Chief Raiti of Huahine
Date of recitation: 1881 36
Condolence from the queen, Tamatoa's widow.
Ahomanu, vahine a Tamatoa, 12
Tei pupu hirohiro i Anaa. 12
Taniu roa tei aratai ia 13
Te farirei raa rii e! 10
Te ura te manu ta'u porofaina, 13
Ta'u ana te pua rata. 9
Haapiti te matai tuaheahe noa, 15
Te reo o te vahine e! 9
Na ta'u mata noa iho nei 11
Te farara o ta'u vahi e! 10
E aroha tei to tua e te ivi e!
Ahomanu, wife of Tamatoa, 11
Of the highest lineage of Anaa, 12
A distant channel has led us to meet 11
So frequently together! 7
The red bird is my herald, 6
My love token the rata flower, 9
As the baffling wind from two quarters, 10
So is the woman's sorrowing voice! 11
And 'tis only by my eyes 5
That my message is interpreted. 9
Love's greeting follows thee, O widowed one!
Cadousteau bseo239-240: 016-017 8
Description of Farepu'a 9
Te Paripari o Farepu'a
Ua pаpа te ra'i, ua tuorooro, 12
Ua amaama te uira veroverohia. 16
Ua amoamo na mata o To'erau 14
Te tianiani ra i te tama o Ahurei. 16
Ua tuo to te ra'i, ua pā te mara'ai 17
Te omua iti o te to'a. 10
Te mata'i e! Te mata'i i terehia mai e te nu'u atua o Vaiari. 28
Tahi rima ua toro, ua tini te rima i toro mai. 20
Tupu aera te āhu o Farepu'a 14
Teitei aera te marae i patuhia i ni'a 19
Raaraahia i te ura, e ura te vauvau, e uramoemoe te unauna 30
E ura te tuturi, e ura te pаpа 11
E ura ana'e te marae o Farepu'a i 16
Ohuhia e te anuanua huru rau.
Les cieux s'entrechoquиrent 9
illuminйs d'йclairs fulgurants. 8
Les yeux clignotants du To'erau attira 14
l'enfant de Ahurei. 7
Le ciel appela, а cet appel le Mara'ai souffla 17
avant coureur du to'a. 9
O vent! Vent servant d'escorte а l'armйe des dieux de Vaiari. 19
Une main fut tendue, des milliers d'autres furent tendues. 20
Le marae de Farepu'a s'йleva 11
grandiose sur ses piliers 9
embellis par les plumes du uramoemoe. 14
Ses pierres d'appui couvertes de ura prйcieux. 17
L'enceinte sacrйe entiиrement ornйe de ura. Farepu'a 19
entourй d'arc-en-ciel aux couleurs variйes.
Cadousteau bseo239-240: 017-019 8
Poem in honnor of Tetuna'e nui King of Hitinui
Te faataratara no Tetuna'e nui Te arii o Hitinui. 23
E maeva e arii pu anuanua matafa i te ra'i. 21
Te arii ti'ati'a roroa i Vaiari, tei ahu i te uramoemoe i te marae Farepu'a. 37
Te arii umerehia e te tini manomano 17
Ua tafaafaa na ni'a ia Hitinui 16
Ua tuo te ra'i i ni'a na, ua hatuatua i na pщ mata'i ia To'a e o To'erau. 33
Tootoo atura i te Hiti'a-o-te-ra ia Faarua 21
Maeva i te arii, maeva e maeva i te arii. 20
Te arii i ohuhia e te anuanua i Farepu'a. 21
A rere mai na te ura rau o Hitinui e o Hiti iti. 22
Ei maeva i te arii ia Tetuna'e nui tei hume i te maro ura e te maro tea i ni'a i te pаpа o Taaroa. 44
Maeva, maeva e Mata'irea i te pahu ta'i roa 20
Maeva i te arii o Hitinui. 13
Ua tuo te ra'i o Vaiari e, maeva te arii ta'o roa i te rito ma te ra'i 32
Te arii feufeu i te ura pitara i mua i te marae Farepu'a. 27
Te arii maeva-rau-hia e na ta'o e rau. 18
Te arii aiai atua oe i Hitinui. 18
Te arii rere anuanua o a hitu tau tua o te ra'i. 23
Ua pii te pii i te ra'i e; ei arii! 17
Ua pii te pii i te fenua e; ei arii! 18
E arii tei noho mai i ni'a i te taputu o te ra'i. 22
Tetuna'e nui te arii o Hitinui i maevahia e te nu'u atua o Taaroa e o Tane i Farepu'a.
Bienvenue au roi du centre de l'arc-en-ciel, face rayonnante du ciel. 26
Le roi au pouvoir йtendu de Vaiari, vētu de l'habit royal du uramoemoe sur le marae Farepu'a. 40
Le roi glorifiй par des milliers et des milliers de voix, 19
retentissant de vallйe en vallйe sur la terre Hitinui. 18
Le ciel cria lа-haut, encercla les vents du To'a et du To'erau, 21
emporta а l'est le vent Faarua. 10
Bienvenue au roi! Bienvenue et bienvenue au roi! 24
Le roi environnй de l'arc-en-ciel а Farepu'a. 15
Venez plumes variйes de la grande terre et de la presqu'оle. 19
Venez souhaiter la bienvenue au grand roi Tetuna'e ceint de la ceinture de plumes rouges et de la ceinture de plumes jaunes claires sur le siиge de pierre de Taaroa. 65
Souhaite, souhaite la bienvenue, Mata'irea au tambour de son prolongй, 30
souhaite la bienvenue au roi de Hitinui. 20
Le ciel de Vaiari appela: bienvenue au roi dont la lance atteint l'extrйmitй du ciel. 32
Le roi qui secoua les plumes sacrйes devant le marae Farepu'a. 24
Le roi qui reзut de nombreuses acclamations de bienvenue, de plusieurs lances (districts) 32
Tu es le roi dont la beautй est celle des dieux de Hitinui. 22
Le roi survolant l'arc-en-ciel au sommet du septiиme ciel. 20
L'appel a retenti au ciel: "qu'il y ait un roi!" 17
L'appel a retenti sur terre "qu'il y ait un roi!" 16
Un roi qui siиge au sommet du ciel, 14
Tetuna'e le grand roi de Hitinui acclamй par l'assemblйe des dieux, de Taaroa et de Tane.
Cadousteau bseo239-240: 087-088 8
Source: Attributed to Tauraatua, King of Papara 19
Tauraatua's lament 8
Complainte de Tauraatua
Tauraatua tei noho i ni'a 13
I tona paepae i te Paepaeroa 15
E uriri iti au e rere i te Ruaroa 17
E fenua Papara i te ra'i rumaruma 15
E haere a i Teva 8
Tena te ai'a tei Papara 11
To fenua 'ura e 7
E mou'a tei ni'a, o Mou'a-Tamaiti 16
E outu tei tai o Outu-Manomano 16
Te faa-ariiraa ia 10
Teriirere-i-outu-rau-ma-Toara'i 16
E tii na vau e tura'i ē atu 14
I te niau para o te Ruaroa e 14
Ia vai noa mai na pu'u rii 13
O Marae'ura i tai e.
Tauraatua qui se tient sur sa 13
sur sa Terrasse de Paepaeroa. 12
Je suis un petit pluvier qui S'envole vers Ruaroa. 19
Papara est une terre au ciel sombre 14
Reviens а Teva 5
lа est ton patrimoine A Papara 11
ta terre rouge 6
Une montagne est lа-haut, c'est Mou'a-Tamaiti 16
Un promontoire est vers la mer C'est la pointe Manomano 19
Le lieu d'investiture de 10
Teriirere de Outurau du marae Tooara'i (titre officiel des arii de Papara) 34
J'irai repousser 7
les feuilles Jaunies des cocotiers de Ruaroa 19
Afin que les deux petits mamelons 12
De Marae'ura sur la plage Soient toujours bien en vue.
Caillot: 111-113 3
Source: Either Tahiti, or another of the Society Islands
Date of recitation: 1912-1913 28
Account of the voyage of Hono and Tu from Tahiti to Niau 21
Tuatapaparaa i te tere o Hono e Tu ia raua i tere mai na Tahiti i Niau
0
Ua pohe na metua o Hono e Tu. 13
Ua pehe raua i te pehe inia ia raua haamatai raua i te reva. 31
Ua haamata raua itetere nania i to raua tau pahi. 25
To Tu pahi Tohoranui, to Hono pahi o Mani. 17
Ua tere raua e ua fatata temoua o Tahiti i te moe ua pehe iho ra Hono i tona fenua. 40
Ua fatata Niau i te puta, ua huri hia Hono i raro. 23
Aita tura na pahi etere, tuu atura Tu ite hoe hue tomo atura Hono i roto i teie hue. 39
Takamaira iuia i ta raua nau pahi. 18
Ua tae teinei tau pahi iuta i Faau. 19
Faaroo ihora tevahine Tekurataukia i roto i te fare ua pehe ihora Hono. 34
Taparu atura Hono iana, aita roatu Teura i piri iana. 26
E no te ore roa teura e piri iana, taparu faahou Hono iana. 28
Ireira aita roatu ta Hono e ravea, i reira ua vaiho Hono i tana tuana ia Tu i Faau. 41
Ua reva oia i te mau fenua inia, ua vaiho oia e piti tapao i Niau, e piti tapu ae avae, hoe puta omore. 52
Ua tere oia enote ahoaho no te ore ote maitai, ua ani oia ia Tu i te hoe matai Toerau. 45
Paaina mai te matai inia i tona pahi ia Mani, tere atura te pahi. 30
Ua tere Hono mai Faau atu e tere i Napuka tae oia i reira vaiho i tana tapao i reira oia hoi e omore, tona ioa Ruapago, revatu oia i Takume vaiho e piti tapao hoe hupe moua e tona piritome raahia e te taata e Taururagi, te fenua i piritome hiai oia o Tekotiga, i Takume iho. 134
Mai Takume, haere oia i Marokau vaiho tana tapao i reira e maka. 31
Ei muri aera, hoi atura oia i Tahiti.
Les parents de Hono et ceux de Tu йtaient dйcйdйs. 14
Au moment de leur dйpart, Hono et Tu entonnиrent un chant d'encouragement. 23
Ils partirent chacun sur un bateau. 12
Le bateau de Tu s'appelait Tohoranui, et celui de Hono, Mani. 25
Ils filиrent, et les montagnes de Tahiti allaient disparaоtre, lorsque Hono entonna un hymne de son pays. 33
Niau allait poindre а l'horizon, quand Hono fut jetй а la mer. 20
A partir de ce moment, les bateaux ne marchиrent plus; Tu lui jeta une calebasse dans laquelle il se rйfugia. 37
Cette calebasse se rapprocha d'elle-mēme des navires. 19
Ceux-ci atterrirent enfin а Faau. 12
La femme Tekurataukia fut surprise d'entendre Hono qui chantait. 24
Hono supplia Teura de lui accorder ses faveurs, mais celle-ci demeura sourde а ses priиres. 33
Et comme elle ne se dйcidait pas, il la supplia encore. 19
Aprиs avoir vainement employй tous les moyens pour possйder cette femme, il quitta Niau en y laissant son frиre Tu. 37
Il se dirigea vers les оles de l'Est, aprиs avoir cependant laissй а Niau les traces de son passage, lesquelles sont deux empreintes de ses pieds et un trou fait avec sa lance. 57
Il partit, fut pris par les calmes, et а bout de patience, il demanda а son frиre Tu de lui envoyer le vent du Nord. 34
Le vent se fit sentir, e enleva son bateau appelй Mani. 19
Hono alla de Faau а Napuka, oщ il laissa une de ses lances appelйe Ruapago. De lа, il se rendit а Takume, oщ il йtabli la brise de terre, et oщ il se fit circoncire par Taururagi, au lieu appelй Tekotiga, а Takume mēme. 79
De Takume, il alla а Marokau, oщ il laissa une fronde. 20
Ensuite, il retourna а Tahiti.
Caillot: 114-116 3
0
Source: Lйgende des indigиnes de l'оle Huahine
Date of recitation: 1912-1913 23
The legend of Pipiri ma 8
Te parau no Pipiri ma
0
0
E parau teie note hoe tau na taata ravai ite ia. 24
Itaua na taata ra pai ito raua haere raa etae atura raua itaua vahira to raua ua ia ha mani raa i te rama niau na raua eoti atura, etiae atura raua ite poraa eireira raua e haamataai ite rama itaua rama naraua ara, e tai aere ite po raa haa mata atura raua ite rama itarau rama eoti aere hoi atura raua ite fare itauapora to raua ia manao raa etunu raua itaua ia naraua ra e aura atura hoi taua ia naraua ara. 216
Ireira ua parau atura tana vahine ia na faaara mai ia aiu ma etama na o atura taua taata toraua iho metua eiaha e faaara mai vaiho noatu ia taoto noana taua na tamarii nei aita raua itaoto te ara noa ara taua na te marii tama atura hoi raua te vahine ete tane atoa hoi inomo atura taua na te marii nei ito raua metua no te mea ua faatii ia raua ite maa manao iho ra taua na te marii ra ehaere raua eita raua e faaea faa hou mai ipi hai iho. Iraua no te mea ua faatii hia raua ite maa. 249
Ireirato raua ia faahee raatu manao noa ra hoi na metua e te taoto noa ara taua na te marii nei iniito raua roi no fea hoi ua reve eana taua na te marii nei ite horo, tamaa raaia raua e paia atura raua haere mai nei raua hoi atura raua aita taua na te marii nei ua reva ite horo tapopa atura raua ina te marii eaita roatu iroo hiatu ia raua tei mua noatu rahoi taua na te marii nei ia raua toraua ia tuoraa tu e Pipiri e, hoi mai na maira hoi taua na te marii nei eita maua ehoi atu tau tai ino hoiote rama tau tai faatii otare nariro ae nei na pupaura ite rai o tipi tipi o tapatapa orei te hue iti Matarii maere nia ae Pipira ma era raro iho ua tuu tavaha ta teriu ua tuu tavaha ta te uri no te inoino itaua na temarii nei ito raua tau na metua noreira raua i horo ai aita raua i hinaaro faa hou ite parahi mai ipihai iho ua raua tau metua iino ite maa.
Ceci est l'histoire de pēcheurs. 12
Ces deux pēcheurs, qui n'йtaient autre qu'un homme et sa femme, projetиrent une pēche aux flambeaux. Ils ramassиrent donc des feuilles sиches de cocotiers et confectionnиrent des flambeaux. Ils attendirent ensuite la nuit, puis ils commencиrent la pēche. Aprиs avoir ramassй suffisamment de poissons, ils rentrиrent chez eux. Ils firent cuire le produit de leur pēche et au moment oщ ils s'apprētaient а manger, 137
la femme dit а son mari: « Va rйveiller les enfants pour qu'ils viennent manger. » Le pиre rйpondit: « Ce n'est pas la peine, laisse-les dormir et mangeons. » Les enfants, qui ne dormaient pas, avaient entendu la conversation de leurs parents. Ils furent peinйs de la conduite qu'avait leur pиre а leur йgard, et aussi dйcidиrent-ils de quitter immйdiatement le toit paternel et de fuir des parents йgoпstes comme les leurs. 132
Les parents continuaient а manger tranquillement, croyant que leurs deux enfants dormaient, alors qu'ils avaient fui. Aprиs avoir pris leur repas, les parents rentrиrent dans leur case et constatиrent l'absence de leurs deux enfants. Les parents, les ayant aperзus s'enfuyant vers les cieux, essayиrent de les poursuivre et de les atteindre, mais en vain. Les enfants йtaient toujours devant, tandis que les parents les suivaient а quelque distance. Ceux-ci leur criaient: « Pipiri, revenez а nous », et les enfants de rйpondre: « Nous ne retournerons point а vous, la pēche aux flambeaux est ingrate, elle laisse les enfants souffrir la faim, aussi ils vont demander asile dans les cieux et l'on y verra dйsormais Matarii au-dessus et Pipiri ma au-dessous. » C'est de dйsespoir que ces deux enfants ont pris la dйtermination de quitter leurs parents.
Caillot: 117-124 3
Source: Raiatea
Date of recitation: 1912-1913 16
The legend of Tiaitau from the island of Raiatea 19
Te parau no Tiaitau no te fenua ra o Raiatea
0
E parau teie note hoe tau no Tiaitau note fenua ara no Raiatea e parau tahito. 39
Taua potii ra pai o Tiaitau itona ra anotau tahito e potii tuiroo oia itona ra mataeinaa i Tevaitoa i Ereeo. 58
Eimuri mai ia faroo tauata maiti ia o Paea no Tahiti e epotii tuiroo o Tiaitau e vahine hau roa hoi oia ite nehenehe. 62
Aita taua potii nei iroaa ite tane no reira ua manao taua te maiti nei e haere oia ehio itaua potii ra ia Tiaitau i Raiatea. 68
I reira ua opua oia itona ra tere e haere oia e hio itaua potii ra ia Tiaitau eitona tae raa i Raiatea ua ui haere oia ite mau taata no Raiatea e tei hea taua potii nei o Tiaitau. 99
I reira ua faaite mai taua mau taata i taua te maiti nei ia Paea e haere oe i Tevaitoa ite vahi ra i Ereeo tei reira tona faaea raa e vahaine hau roa taua potii ra ite nehenehe. 92
I reira taua te maiti ra tona haere raa etae roa tura oia itaua vahi i parau hia mai ia na ra. 47
Ireira hoi ua ui hoi oia ite mau taata no reira e faite mai outou e tei hea taua potii ra o Tiaitau te faa ea raa. 61
I reira ua faa ite mai taua mau taata e e teie na ma tou oe e faa aratai ite vahi teireira tona faaea raa. 55
I reira toratou faa aratai raa itaua te maiti nei e ite atura taua te maiti ra itaua potii ra i Tiaitau. 54
Ite mai ra hoi taua potii nei o Tiaitau i taua te maiti nei ia Paea no Tahiti aroha atura taua te maiti nei i taua potii ra ia Tiaitau oaoa atura taua te maiti nei no te mea ua ite one i taua potii nei ia Tiaitau. 112
I reira taua te maiti nei tona ai raa te i itaua potii nei ia Tiaitau e faaipoipo taua na o maira taua potii ua mauruuru roa vau ia oe e faaipoipo ihoa taua no te mea ua ani mai oe iau i e faaipoipo taua e faatia vau itooe hinaaro. 127
I reira ua faaipoipo hia raua eite oti raa raua ite faaipoipo parahi noa atura raua maite maitai aita roa epeapea no te mea oti raua ite faipoipo. 79
Te hoe ra potii te faaea ra oia inia ite hoe motu e vahine nehenehe atoa taua potii nei aita atoa taua etane note ite raa hoi taua te maiti nei e te faaera taua potii nei inia itaua motu ra manao ihora ona e haere one e haavare itaua potii ra ia. 126
Tiaitau e haere ona e taia ite ia na raua inia itaua motu ra faatia maira hoi taua potii nei o Tiaitau itona hinaaro. 63
I reira ua haere taua te maiti nei inia itaua motu ra e taia e ere hoi tona te tere taia e tere me hoi tona i taua potii inia i te motu ra eitona tae raa tu te parahi ra taua potii nei inia itaua motu ra, ite maira taua potii nei itaua te maiti nei faahama atura hoi taua potii nei itaua te maiti ra ia Paea aita taua te maiti nei itaa hama ia na haere roa atura taua te maiti nei e aroha i taua potii nei aroha atoa maira hoi taua potii nei ia na. 226
I reira ua ui mai taua potii nei itona tere faaite atura hoi ona itona tere itaua potii ra tere tou tere i tae mai ai ia oe hinaaro vau ia oe ei vahine oe nau faatia mai ra hoi taua potii nei otona hinaaro. 107
I reira to raua taoto raa eia ahiahi eireira ona ehoi atuai itaua vahine faaipoipo aita roa atu hoi tana ia iroaa note mea aita ona itaia ite ia etere hoi tana i haere eireira hoi eui mai ai tana vahine faaipoipo ia na ua roaa taoe tautai nao atu ona e aita roatu taua eia iroaa einaa uapo manao ihora taua vahine faaipoipo nanarae eparau mau tataua tane nana ra eere hoi e haavare tana ia ohipa e haere noa inia itaua motu ra e mea noa itana potii ra ei vahine nana. 251
Etae aera ite hoe mahana tupu aera tona manao e ohipa e tataua tane nana ra. 37
Inoino atura te manao o taua potii ra o Tiaitau tupu atura tona manao e haere ona e haapohi iana. 49
Note mea aita atura taua tane nana ra e manao faahou mai ia ana. 32
I reira haere atura taua potii ra o Tiaitai iroto ite pu ote hoe papa pihaa oua atura taua potii iraro itaua pape ra pohe roa atura hoi taua potii nei o Tiaitau. 83
I reira ua manao hoi tana tane ehoi ona i te fare eitona taeraa atu ite fare aita aera taua vahine nana ia ua moe manoa ihora ona e haere eimi itona imi raa eite atura iana, teiroto ite pu otaua pape ra, ua pohe roa, hoi taua potii nei Tiaitau. 124
Faatupu mama hia atura taua te maiti nei o Pae no Tahiti itana vahine e pohe ia Tiaitau. 43
Aita ona imanao faahou atu itana vahine faaturi inia i taua motura. 35
Opua ihora taua ta maiti nei e hoi mai onai Tahiti. 26
Tona ia haere raatu inia itona vaa tona ia hoe raa mai e mea huru atea mai ua faaroo ona ite tai ate hoe manu iti nao tana tai iti euriri iti te tai maira tai rii tane mau tapiti fahou te tai ataua manu iti tona ia faaroo raa e manu iti etai mai nei na o faahoa te tai ataua manu iti nei euriri iti te tai maira itahatai e to mea e manaoaiau. 173
Hoe naa hoi taua te maiti nei itona vaa aita ona i ite e taua potii nei o Tiaitau teie manu iti etai mai nei o taua potii maura hoi o Tiaitau o taua manu iti e tai mai ra. 89
Aita taua te maiti ra i hoi faahou imuri tona ia hoe raa maie Tahiti roa ae ra ta pae atura tau te maiti ra iuta. 56
Otaua potii nei o Tiaitau aita tona tino iriro roa ei taata pohe note mea te vai mana noa ara te taata ite reira anotau. 60
Aita hoi taua potii nei o Tiaitau i faarue iana e Tahiti roa aere atoa ona ite tae raa mai taua te maiti no i tupu ihora tona manao e eimi ona ite vahine nana e hau tona tai itana vahine tahito ia Tiaitau. 104
Eimuri mai momoa hia ihora ona ite vahine api etae aera ite maha i faaipoipo ai taua te maiti nei o Pae ite tana vahine riro roa maira taua potii ra o Tiaitau ei vahine ora tupu ataa ihora tona. 98
E haere atoa ona i taua faaipoipo raa ara e tae aera ite tau i faaipoipo ai taua te maiti ra itane vahine api faanehenehe atoa atura taua potii ra o Tiaitau iana e haere atoa atura ona i taua faaipoipo raa ra ireira ua ite mai taua te maiti ra o Paea itaua potii ra ia Tiaitau hio noa atura taua te maiti nia itaua potii aita ona i amu faahou itana maa nao aera tona manao otaua mau tera vahine tahito o Tiaitau tona ia parau raa ite taata e haru itaua potii ia Tiaitau. 249
I reira to te taata vauvau raa itaua potii ra ia Tiaitau aita taua potii ira iroaa ia ratou. 50
I reira taua potii ira te faariro roa raa ei taata pohe tona hoi raa mai i Raiatea haere roa atura ona tae roa atura ona itona vahi ipohe ai ona aheri taua te maiti e aita ona i faaipoipo ite vahine e ora faahou mai a ona ei taata ora mau mai tona huru tahito mau tataua te maiti iite ra ite mata mua ra. 152
I te tae raa taua nei o Tiaitau otona vahi tumu mau oia hoi o Raiatea. 37
I reira tona manao raa e haere oia inia itaua moua i Vaoaara. 34
I reira tona haere raa etae atura ona itua fariu, fariu maira ona imuri, haere faahou ona etae atura ona, i Tuturi, Tuturi atura iraro, haere faahou atura e tae atura ona i Tiaraafare, faatia atura ite fare, haere faahou atura taua potii nei, e tae atura ona i Fahiarii, faaarii atura ona iana, haere faahou atura ona, etae atura ona, i Vaitoto, e Vaitota, miri atura ona i te pua o Temehani e vahine paroo o Tiaitau vahi aihora eana te pa i Rauhotu. 222
E ite parariraa taua pa ra ireira tona hio raa itaua ua apoo ra epiti ireira tona oua raa iroto itaua apoora. 58
Ia opua te taata e ehaere inia itaua moua ra eia tae inia iho itaua ra e tapu ratou ite hoe tumu fara e taue hia iroto itaua apoo ra eiropu roa ite ava tiano pipi ha atuai.
Voice l'histoire d'une jeune fille de l'оle Raiatea, nommйe Tiaitau, 28
qui vivait а une йpoque dйjа reculйe. Cette jeune fille habitait le quartier d'Ereeo, dans le district de Tevaitoa. Elle йtait renommйe pour sa beautй. 56
A cette йpoque, la rйputation de cette jeune fille parvint aux oreilles d'un jeune homme de Tahiti appelй Paea. 42
Cette jeune fille йtait vierge et avait repoussй maintes propositions de jeunes gens du pays. Paea conзut le projet de se rendre а Raiatea pour voir cette beautй et cette chaste personne. 68
Il s'y rendit, et lа, il prit des renseignements sur la demeure de Tiaitau. 24
Il lui fut rйpondu qu'elle habitait le district de Tevaitoa, au lieu dit Ereeo, et qu'elle йtait d'une beautй sans pareille. 48
Il se rendit au lieu qui lui йtait indiquй 18
et questionna les premiиres personnes qu'il rencontra, pour savoir oщ demeurait la jeune Tiaitau. 38
Celles-ci lui dirent qu'elles allaient l'y conduire. 18
Elles l'y menиrent effectivement, et lorsque Paea la vit, il resta en extase devant elle. 29
La jeunne fille, d'autre part, contempla le jeune Tahitien qui la saluait. Paea eut le coeur plein de joie d'avoir vu la jeune Tiaitau. 56
Puis, prenant courage, Paea demanda la main de Tiaitau. Celle-ci lui rйpondit: « Je suis heureuse et t'admire d'ētre venu de si loin pour me demander en mariage; je t'accepte donc pour йpoux ». 72
Le mariage fut aussitōt cйlйbrй et ils vйcurent lа trиs heureux. 19
Quelque temps plus tard, Paea entendit dire que sur un оlot voisin vivait une jeune fille йgalement belle et d'une conduite irrйprochable. Paea mourut d'envie d'aller la visiter, mais, pour se rendre dans cet оlot sans йveiller l'attention de Tiaitau, il lui fallait un motif plausible. 101
Il rйflйchit, et un soir, il dit а Tiaitau: « Il y a assez longtemps que nous n'avons pas mangй de poisson, je vais pēcher cette nuit. » Sa femme l'ayant approuvй, il se rendit directement dans l'оlot en question. 65
Il n'avait pas du tout l'intention de faire la pēche, il recherchait la jeune fille dont il avait entendu parler. A son arrivйe, la jene fille, qui йtait assise а ce moment, en le voyant parut gēnйe. Paea, au contraire, marcha vers elle d'un pas assurй et la salua. Elle lui rйpondit par un salut, 103
puis lui demanda ce qu'il йtait venu faire dans son оlot. Il lui dit: « Je suis venu te voir et te demander d'ētre ma femme. » Elle ne fit aucune difficultй pour se rendre au dйsir du jeune homme. 69
Ils passиrent la nuit ensemble, et, а l'aube, il retourna а terre vers sa femme lйgitime. Inutile de dire qu'il n'avait pas de poisson, puisqu'il n'avait jamais eu l'intention d'en prendre. Sa femme lui ayant demandй s'il avait fait bonne pēche, il lui rйpondit: « Non, je n'ai pas eu de chance, j'ai essayй toute la nuit de prendre des poissons, mais en vain. » Tiaitau accepta cette dйclaration comme vraie. Paea continuait а aller visiter la jeune fille de l'оlot et chaque fois il rentrait chez lui sans poisson, faisant croire а sa femme, qui l'admettait, qu'il йtait poursuivi par la malchance. 207
Cependant un jour que Paea s'йtait encore absentй sous prйtexte d'aller а la pēche, sa femme eut le pressentiment qu'il la trompait. 44
Elle se fit beaucoup de mauvais sang et pensa au suicide, 24
puisque son mari ne l'aimait plus. 13
Elle se dirigea vers une source, se prйcipita au coeur mēme du trou bйant d'oщ jaillissaient des tourbillons d'eau, et disparut. Elle s'йtait tuйe. 54
Paea, aprиs avoir passй un doux moment dans l'оlot en compagnie de la jeune fille dйjа connue, se rendit chez lui, oщ il pensait faire croire encore une fois а sa femme qu'il revenait de la pēche. En arrivant, il vit la case vide, sa femme avait disparu. Il fit des recherches et parvint а la source dont il a йtй parlй plus haut. Lа il reconnut dans un cadavre sa belle Tiaitau. 125
Il devint fou, 5
ne pensa plus а sa maоtresse de l'оlot, 10
et n'eut qu'une idйe, retourner а Tahiti. 15
Il monta dans sa pirogue et pagaya vers son pays. Il йtait dйjа йloignй de Raiatea, lorsqu'un oiseau se fit entendre, et sa chanson disait: « C'est un uriri qui pleure, ... qui pleure son mari. » L'oiseau chanta encore: « L'uriri pleure sur la plage et pense sans cesse а toi. » 95
Le jeune homme continua а pagayer sans se douter que cet oiseau qui chantait, n'йtait autre que l'āme de Tiaitau, sa femme. 50
Il arriva а Tahiti, 7
mais Tiaitau ne l'avait pas abandonnй (а cette йpoque, on avait le pouvoir de revivre et de se transformer comme on voulait). 46
Elle avait donc, invisible, suivi Paea а Tahiti. Quelque temps aprиs, Paea projeta un nouveau mariage, bien que l'image de son ancienne femme Tiaitau ne fūt pas encore effacйe en lui. 74
Il trouva donc une femme et fut fiancй. Le jour du mariage ne se fit pas attendre, et, ce mēme jour, Tiaitau reprit son corps. 44
Elle assista а la cйlйbration du mariage et fit toilette pour se montrer а la noce. Pendant le repas, Paea remarqua cette jeune femme, et, aprиs l'avoir dйvisagйe, il reconnut la belle Tiaitau. Il ne pensa plus au repas, il se leva et invita la foule а arrēter cette femme. 96
On essaya de faire ce que Paea avait demandй, mais en vain. 24
Tiaitau s'йtait enfuie et avait disparu. Elle йtait retournй а Raiatea et avait repris sa place, prиs de la source, dans le corps inerte qui s'y trouvait. Si ce jeune homme ne s'йtait pas remariй, Tiaitau aurait revйcu et il aurait pu la revoir dans la beautй qu'il lui avait connue auparavant. 112
Tiaitau, de retour dans son pays natal а Raiatea, 19
pensa а aller vivre sur la montagne Vaoaara. 16
Elle s'y dirigea donc, et arrivйe а un certain point, elle se retourna et vit la haute mer; elle continua et atteignit Tuturi; elle s'agenouilla; elle marcha encore et, arrivant а Tiaraafare, elle se construisit une case. Elle continua sa course et atteignit Fahiarii, oщ elle se fit reine. Elle arriva ensuite а Vaitoto-Vaitota et vit la fleur de Temehani. Tiaitau йtait renommйe pour sa beautй. Elle anйantit le fort de Rauhotu, 164
а la place duquel s'ouvrit deux йnormes trous, se jeta dans l'un d'eux, et disparut. 26
Quand aujourd'hui quelqu'un va faire une ascension vers cette montagne et fait l'expйrience de prendre un morceau d'un tronc de pandanus et de le jeter au milieu de l'orifice, il peut constater que le mēme pandanus est sorti par la passe qui se trouve en face, un moment aprиs.
Caillot: 131-141 3
Source: Mythe des indigиnes de l'оle Pora-Pora
Date of recitation: 1912-1913 22
The shark ghosts 3
Te mau mao-tupapau
0
Tehoe teie mau parau faahia hia note hoe mau tupapau mao no raro ite moana. 37
Teie tei oa o taua mau tupapau mao nei o Teaumoana, o Teauta, o Tehiuta, ete hoe mao aita tona eioa i faa ite hia mai. 62
Opua ihora te hoe mau taata ito ratou tere. 21
Tetere o taua mau taata note hoe ia potii. 21
Otaua potii nei e tuahine ia no taua mao aita tona iaa i faaitea hia mai. 40
Otau mao nei hoi e tuaane ia no taua potii nei. 25
Te haere raa taua mau taata mei etae atura ratou ite hoe vahi e ooa taua vahi ra e emoana hoi taua vahinei aita ratou hinaaro e e haere ratou na roto itaua ooa ara nete mea e vahi roa roa taua vahi ra. 102
No reira ua manao ratou e eau noa ratou na roto itaua ooa miti moana ra. 37
Te manao ra otaua potii nei e manao ino hoi tona hinaaro oua e ia amu taua mao nei o Teuta itaua mau taata ra eiaha e amu rana ei toratou au raa na roto itaua ooa moana ra. 90
Parau atura taua potii itaua mao ra ia Teauta e e amu i taua mau taata ra aita hoi taua mao nei ihinaaro ite amu i taua mau taata ra no te riri hoi otaua ra itaua ra amu aihora taua potii nei na taua mao nei. 108
Eite ite raa taua mau taata ra e eua amu hia taua potii nei na taua mao ra oto atura ratou itau potii nei ne te mea ua pohe ona. 65
Aita atura ratou ihaere fahou ito ratou tere note mea notaua potii nei hoi taua tere nei. 45
Manao ihora ratou e e hoi ratou ito ratou mataeinaa emaite oto hoi ratou itaua potii nei. 47
Tupu atura hoi tora tou matau ite metua otaua potii nei. 28
Ei to ratou tae raa tu ite fare otaua potii nei ite mai hoi te metua ete tuane otaua potii nei aroha maira ia ratou na o maira e maitai to outou tere pahono atura ratou aita note mea upohe to tamahine ua amu hia ete mao iroto ite ooa moana ito ratou au raa naroto. 133
I reira ua inoino te tuane ne te mea ua pohe toua tuhine. 28
Tupu atura tona mai iroto ua inoino itona tuahine uapohe. 29
E aita imaoro pohe atura taua tamaiti nei. 22
Eimua atu ua parau ona e ia pohe ona ra eiaha e afai iana etanu iraro ite repo. 42
E afai ra iana iroto ite pu otaua pape ra ei reira vaiho ai iaua. 35
E mea maoro imuri iho ua riro taua tamaiti nei ei mao eitona riro raraa ei mao opua ihora taua tamaiti iriro ei tupapau mao nei e haere oia eimi ite mau tupapau mao atoa ia haere ratou e taparahi itaua tupapau mao i amu itona tuahine ra ia pohe atoa ona. 133
E itona imi roa itaua mau tupapau mao ra eitea hia atura iana opua atura ratou e haere eta parahi i taua tupapau mao ra. 62
Eimuri mai to ratou ia haere raa eimi itaua tupapau mao re eite hia atura ia ratou. 44
Otaua tamaiti ifaariro ei tupapau mao nei aita ona ihaere na mua mai na muri noatu ona te haere i taua mau mao nei. 59
E ite ite raa mai taua mao ra iteie nei mau mau mao ite ihora tau maorae etere ia to teie mau mao note mea aita tei mau iitea hia iona atahi ra ona aite ai. 82
No reira ua horo roa taua mao nei eiroto roa itoua apoo taponi atura ia ratou, aita teie mau mao iite fahou e tei hea atura taua mao nei ia Teauta note mea ra hoi etia ai totaua mao ra to Teauta epiti tau ia roroa tona ia tiaai hoe ite pae atau hoe hoi ite pae aui taraua ohipa ehionoa raua e ia haere te eneii naro pu eireira raua patia ai ia patia raua epohe roa ia. 197
I reira taua mau mao nei haere eimi itaua mao ra ia Teauta e na ropu atura ratou itaua naia roroa ra patia hia ihora ratou hia taua na ia roroa ra pau roa atura ratou ite pohe. 90
Taua te maiti nei ra o tei faa riro ei tupapau imao ra aita one ipohe ne te mea tei muri roa ona aita ona i haere naropu ua namuri noa oia te haere. 73
I reira ma nao iho ra taua ta maiti i faariro ei. 24
E hoi ona apohe atoa ona eitona hoi raa farerei atura ite hoe mao faa hou a, taua mao i farerei ia na nei e mea ora mai hoi taua mao atoa nei. 73
Tei oa hoi o taua mao iti i farerei ia nei o Tehiuta hoi tona ioa. 35
Otaua mao iti o Tehiuta e mea hihia ona na taata e afai hia atura toua nei tino inia ito fenua ta nina hia iho ra ite au ahi na taua mau taata ra. 73
Ua ama tona tino atoe ra te hiu otona itere ua hae mai te hoe uri uaamu itona hiu e faahoro atura iraro ite miti faarue atura etaua uri ra te maua ra otaua mao nei ua tae roa ia iroto itona ra hiuiti no reira ua ora faahou taua maora. 120
Faahoa atura raua i otaua te maiti i faariro ia na ei tupapau mao nei ei hoa here ia raua. 48
Noreira taua mao iti nei i parau hia ai e o Tehiuta note mea ua ora oua itona ra hiu eia hoi otana itere. 55
I reira taua te maiti i faariro ei mao neitona parau raa tu ia Tehiuta e e haere taua etaparahi ia Teauta ia pohe atoa. 62
I reira naoatura naoatura o Tehiuta iana ite aha hoi nao maira taua te maiti ifaariro ei mao nei note ua amu ona itou mei tuahine naoatura o Tehiuta e haere taua eimi ia Teaumoana note mea taua mao nei o Teaumoana aita tu emao maiana te huru terahi. 131
I reira toraua haere eimi ia Teaumoana eite hia tura ia raua itoraua ite raatu aita iho a emao maiana te rahi. 60
Ite ite raa mai o Teaumoana ia raua hanioma atura te vaha otaua maora o Teaumoana. 44
Aita raua iite faahoue tei hea atura te tahi hiti vaha ete tahi hiti vaha toraua ia faariro atura raua ei hua miti painu atura raua ima mau ae ite hiti vaha otaua mao ra o Teaumoana na maira taua maora o Teaumoana ovai teie paraurau mai nei itou nei upoo nao atura taua mao iti ra ovau teie o Tehiuta na oatu ara. 163
A teaumoana etere iti paha toorua naoatura raua e e etere iti ia i tae mai ai ia oe nei na atura o Teaumoana eaha toorua tere nao atura raua ihaere mainei maua eimi ia oe, e haere tatou e taparahiia Teauta note mea ua amu ana ito maua tuahine iti eua pohe hoi ona na maira o Teaumoana e aita epeapea ehaere ia tatou. 171
Ua ui atura o Teaumoana iaraua tei hea tona faaea raa na oatura haere mai oe ua mau e faaite atu ia oe te vahi e faaeai ona ua ite maua itona faaea raa. 85
I reira toratou hareraa e tae atura ratou itaua vahi ra tei roto tona faaea raa ite fenua to ratou haere etaua fenua ra eita taua nei o Teaumoana eo iroto ite ava otaua fenua ra erahi ona eiti te ava. 103
I reira to Teaumoana nao raatu ia raua e eiroto vau ite ava itiai atu ai ia horo mai irapae au onau ia eamu atu naoatura o Tehiuta na maua ia ehaere maroto te tiahi mai irapae au to raua ia haere raa eite atura raua itaua ma ia roroa ra faaite atura o Tehiuta iana uaiteoe ite hipa ate ra tau naia roroa na o atura taua te maiti i faariro ei mao nei aita ona iite itarau ahipa ua parau atura o Tehiuta iana na oatu ia haere au na mua e muri mai oe iau te haere note mea to hio raua ite emi ia haere naropu ei reira raua patia ai ia ite ravau ita raua ohipa eravera. 300
Toraua ia haere raa ua ropu itaua vahira ite maira taua nai epiti ra teie iho te enemi epatia taua ito raua tae raa iropu patia ihora taua na ia e piti ra riro atura raua ei hua miti no reira aita raua iputa. 107
Eu atura taua na ia ra raua raua iho putura rauaiha pohe atura raua iho: eite aturaua ia Teauta ite maira hoi o Teauta iaraua tapani atura o Teauta. 80
Toraua ia imi raa e ite atura tona apoo faariro atura taua mao nei o Tehiuta iana eihonu opani atura ona ite apoo o Teauta riro atura hoi o Teauta iana ei he nee maira ona nania ite paraha otaua honu ra tae atura ona irapaeu mai ite ihora o Tehiuta e ua ora o Teauta irapae au mai tona ia tapopa raa riro atura o Teauta eitehu riro atura hoi o Tehiuta ei huamiti manao atura o Teauta ua moe. 203
Rave oioi atura oia i tona huru mao e no tona poia hoi atura oia i tua mai te ma nao oia e haere taia i te ia na na ei maa na na. 65
I tona iho a moe raa e aore rea i maoro rave atoa tura o Tehiuta i tona ra huru ia. 40
Tona ia ite raa e aita nei tona hoa, tona ia imi raa na reira iho. 32
E no te itea ore hia e ana opua tura oia e hoi i muri e e haere i te pae ava e imi iana. 44
E mea puai roa oia i te au raa no te mea ua peapea roa oia i tona hoa. 37
Aita hoi teienei hoa nona i na reira ia inaha faarue atura oia iana i te taime i peapea oia e horo atura oia. 59
E ua huru maoro te vahi i au hia e Tehiuta me te haamarirau ore ite atu ai oia i te atea roa te hoe tau mea huru ereere i mua iana. 66
Teienei tau mea huru ereere tana i ite ra, o teienei tamaiti i riro ei mao te tahi e o Teauta te tahi te tapapa ra i te ra i mua ra. 62
Manao atura o Tehiutai e e peapea tona hoa e no reira aita tura oia i haapao faahou, iana i manao noa oia i te imi i te ora o teienei tamaiti i riro ei mao. 81
Itaapuai atura oia i te au e mairi mai o Teauta i muri tei ropu atura ia oia ia raua. 47
I te reira taime te tae atura ia teienei tamaiti i roto i te ava haere atu ai oia i tua mai. 47
Te tiai noa ra hoi o Teaumoana i te ava. 20
No te ite raa teie mao rahi riaria rahi roa i te hoe mao i te faao raa mai i roto i te ava e te auau hia mai ra oia e te tahi atu too mao e piti, manao iho ra oia e o te ia amu taata ia ta tona tau hoa i parau atu iana ra; aita roa oia i ite noa e e e mao e ia te reira, no reira aita oia i hio tutonu atu iana: i tona o raa mai i roto i te ava, apu noa hia mai ra e ana, mai te manao ore oia e o te tamaiti i riro ei mao tana i taparahi iho nei. 217
E no te aue raa o Tehiuta i papu ai iana e ua hape oia. 29
I reira toa ra te hoe reo amuamu i te nao raa mai: « Ua reva te tuane i te tuahine ra, mauruuru! » O te reo te reira o Teauta tei tae atoa mai i roto i te ava, e haere atura oia e tautai i te ia ma te peapea ore atu ra.
Ceci est une histoire extraordinaire qui a trait а des requins-revenants habitant la mer. 33
Ces revenants se nommaient Teaumoana, Teauta, Tehiuta, et le quatriиme n'avait pas de nom. 35
Un jour, plusieurs personnes projetиrent un voyage, 17
dont une jeune fille avait йtй l'instigatrice. 16
5, 6: Cette jeune fille йtait la soeur du requin-revenant qui n'avait pas de nom. 28
Aprиs avoir marchй assez longtemps, ces personnes se trouvиrent en prйsence d'une baie а eau profonde et s'avanзant trиs loin dans les terres. Pour la contourner, il fallait marcher longtemps; 56
elles dйcidиrent donc de couper en ligne droite en la traversant а la nage. 23
La jeune fille eut cependant un instant d'hйsitation, puis elle pensa que, si le revenant Teauta intervenait, il mangerait les hommes et lui laisserait la vie sauve. Il partirent donc tous, hommes et jeune fille, а la nage, pour traverser la baie dont il s'agit. 93
Soudain Teauta fit son apparition et la jeune fille en le voyant lui dit: « Teauta, mange les hommes et laisse-moi la vie sauve. » Teauta, qui n'avait nullement l'intention de manger l'un deux, devint furieux de cette observation, fit un bond vers la jeune fille et la fit disparaоtre dans son corps. 107
Les hommes, qui avaient йtй prйsents а cette attaque, se mirent а pleurer la jeune fille 28
et revinrent sur leurs pas, n'ayant plus а continuer leur course, celle-ci ayant йtй le fait seul de la disparue. 36
Ils rentrиrent dans leur village, pleurant toujours leur jeune compagne, 24
et craignant, d'autre part, la colиre de son pиre. 14
En arrivant prиs de la case de la jeune fille, le pиre et le frиre de cette derniиre s'y tenaient et leur dit: « Vous avez fait bon voyage? » Ils durent rйpondre nйgativement et expliquиrent que l'enfant avait йtй dйvorйe pendant qu'ils traversaient la baie а la nage. 84
Le frиre se mit а pleurer sa soeur, qu'il chйrissait; il йtait inconsolable; 24
il en fit une grave maladie, 11
qui le fit mourir, en peu de temps. 12
19, 20: Avant de mourir, il recommanda aux siens de le placer dans un bassin naturel de la riviиre qui se jette dans la baie dont il vient d'ētre parlй, au lieu de l'enterrer. 58
Quelque temps plus tard, l'āme de ce jeune homme s'enferma dans le corps d'un requin, qui devint lui aussi un revenant. Cette transformation opйrйe, il se mit а la recherche des autres requins-revenants, afin de s'entendre avec eux pour tuer celui qui avait dйvorй sa soeur, et la venger. 97
Ceux-ci acceptиrent et ils se mirent tous а la recherche du requin assassin. 24
Aprиs avoir longuement cherchй, ils le trouvиrent enfin. 16
Le jeune homme devenu requin-revenant se tenait derriиre les autres requins-revenants dans ces parages, 37
devina aussitōt qu'il s'agissait de quelque chose d'extraordinare, car jamais ils n'avaient encore paru dans cet endroit. 46
Il rentra donc dans son trou et disparut. Les autres requins-revenants le cherchиrent, mais en vain. Ce requin avait deux gardiens qui se trouvaient l'un а droite, l'autre а gauche de lui, et йtaient chargйs d'exterminer des ennemis: c'йtaient deux poissons trиs longs et trиs dangereux. 90
Ainsi pendant que les requins-revenants recherchaient leur adversaire qui avait disparu, les deux gardiens de celui-ci йtaient lа qui attendaient le moment propice pour attaquer. Ce moment ne se fit pas attendre: ils passиrent effectivement entre les deux poissons dont il vient d'ētre parlй: au moment oщ ils йtaient а leur portйe, ceux-ci foncиrent sur eux et les traversиrent de part en part. 131
Cependant le jeune homme devenu requin-revenant, йtant restй en arriиre, comme il avait toujours fait depuis le dйbut de l'expйdition, ne fut point atteint, 53
et pensa qu'il йtait plus prudent pour lui de se retirer. 19
En s'йloignant rapidement, il fit la rencontre d'un autre requin, qui lui aussi йtait encore en vie par miracle, et dont l'histoire est la suivante Il s'appelait Tehiuta. 9
Un jour, il fut pris а la ligne, traоnй а terre et brūlй par les hommes. 19
Tout son corps avait йtй carbonisй, sauf sa queue. Un chien, venant а passer, saisit cette queue entre des dents, et en cōtoyant la rive, la laissa tomber а l'eau. Et comme, au fur et а mesure de la cuisson, la vie du requin se retirait dans la partie non atteinte par le feu, toute sa force vitale s'йtait donc concentrйe dans sa queue que les flammes avaient йpargnйe, et il revint а la vie sous sa forme primitive. 144
34, 35: Aprиs la rencontre dont il a йtй parlй, ces deux requins-revenants devinrent amis insйparables. 27
Le jeune homme devenu requin proposa а Tehiuta d'aller tuer le requin Teauta. 31
Tehiuta lui demanda pourquoi il voulait tuer Teauta. Il lui rйpondit: « C'est parce qu'il a tuй ma soeur. » Tehiuta lui dit alors: « Pour cela, il faut que nous retrouvions Teaumoana, car c'est le plus gros et le plus fort de tous les requins, et que nous le dйcidions а venir nous aider. » 106
Ils se mirent en effet а sa recherche et le trouvиrent: le jeune homme devenu requin constata que rйellement nul requin n'йtait aussi fort et aussi gros que lui. 55
Teaumoana, les voyant, ouvrit sa gueule 17
si grande qu'il leur йtait impossible de voir les māchoires de ce monstre, tellement elles йtaient йloignйes l'une de l'autre. Pour arriver а lui sans йveiller son attention, ils se transformиrent en йcume de mer, se laissиrent emporter par les courants et se posиrent sur la māchoire supйrieure du requin Teaumoana. Celui-ci dit: « Qui est ce qui me gratte la tēte? » L'un deux rйpondit « C'est moi, Tehiuta. » 139
Teaumoana ajouta: « Tu dois me vouloir quelque chose? » Il rйpliqua: « Oui, mon ami et moi avons besoin de toi. » « Que dйsirez-vous de moi? » ajouta-t-il? « Nous venons te prier de nous aider а tuer Teauta, qui a mangй notre soeur. » Teaumoana acquiesзa en disant: « Cela ne me gēne pas, nous allons partir, 120
mais dites-moi oщ il habite. » Ils rйpondirent: « Viens, suis nous, nous allons t'indiquer sa cachette. » 34
Ils partirent. Teauta demeurait dans un trou sous une оle et, pour arriver а cette оle, il fallait franchir une passe qui йtait tros petite pour livrer passage а Teaumoana. 62
Aprиs rйflexion, Teaumoana dit а ses deux compagnons qu'il allait rester а l'extйrieur de l'embouchure de la passe et que, lorsque Teauta sortirait, il l'avalerait. Tehiuta reprit: « C'est cela, nous allons entrer et tācherons de le faire sortir. » Ils entrиrent et se dirigиrent vers la cachette de Teauta. De loin ils virent les deux poissons longs dont il a йtй parlй plus haut. Tehiuta demanda а son compagnon s'il savait ce que faisaient lа ces deux poissons: ce dernier rйpondit nйgativement. Tehiuta lui dit alors: « Je marcherai devant, tandis que tu me suivras de prиs, car ces poissons sont des ennemis et sūrement ils nous attaqueront, lorsque nous passerons au milieu d'eux. » 229
Effectivement, au moment oщ ils passaient а leur hauteur, les poissons les fixиrent et Tehiuta prйvint son compagnon en disant: « Voilа les ennemis qui nous regardent; attention, ils vont s'йlancer sur nous. » Ils foncиrent sur eux, mais а l'instant mēme ils furent changйs en йcume de mer et ils furent sauvйs. 94
Les deux poissons, n'ayant pu s'arrēter, se perforиrent mutuellement et moururent. Teauta, les apercevant, se cacha. 39
Tehiuta et le jeune homme devenu requin le cherchиrent et finirent par trouver sa cachette. Tehiuta se changea en tortue et plaзa le dos de sa carapace contre l'orifice du trou а l'intйrieur duquel se tenait Teauta. Celui-ci se changea en йcrevisse et parvint ainsi а sortir en rampant contre le dos de Tehiuta. Ce dernier, le reconnaissant, le poursuivit et, lorsqu'il fut prиs de le saisir, Teauta devint « mulet ». Tehiuta se changea en йcume de mer et Teauta crut qu'il avait disparu. 173
Alors il se hāta de reprendre sa forme premiиre de squale, et, comme il йtait tourmentй par la faim, il se dirigea vers la haute mer, oщ il espйrait prendre quelques poissons, pour sa nourriture. 68
Mais il avait а peine quittй la place que Tehiuta, lui aussi, redevenait un requin; 34
il remarquait l'absence de son compagnon, et se mettait а sa recherche aux alentours. 29
Ne l'y trouvant pas, il se dйcidait а revenir en arriиre, et partait dans la direction de la passe. 31
Il allait trиs vite, parce qu'il йtait inquiet du sort de son ami. 22
Celui-ci n'avait pourtant pas eu pour lui la mēme sollicitude: il l'avait abandonnй au plus fort du danger pour aller chercher son salut dans la fuite. 54
Aprиs un assez long trajet, Tehiuta aperзut peu а peu deux formes noirātres: 27
c'йtaient, la premiиre, le jeune homme devenu requin, la seconde, Teauta, qui luttait de vitesse avec lui, et s'en rapprochait de plus en plus. 50
Tehiuta comprit le danger que courait son compagnon, et, n'йcoutant que son courage, 30
il alla encore plus vite, rйussit а dйpasser Teauta, et а se placer entre lui et le jeune homme devenu requin. 38
A ce moment, celui-ci sortait de la passe et pйnйtrait dans la mer extйrieure. 26
Teaumoana, le gros requin, s'y trouvait aux aguets. 20
Ce redoutable squale, voyant sortir de la passe un requin serrй de prиs par deux autres, crut que c'йtait le requin assassin dont ses alliйs lui avaient parlй: il ne se douta pas un instant que cela fut un autre, et, par consйquent, ne se donna mēme pas la peine de l'examiner: au passage, il le happa d'un seul coup, sans s'apercevoir qu'il tuait ainsi le jeune homme devenu requin. 133
Ce ne fut que par un cri d'йpouvante que poussa Tehiuta qu'il comprit enfin sa mйprise. 30
En mēme temps une voix railleuse lanзait ces paroles: « Le frиre a rejoint la soeur. Merci! » C'йtait celle de Teauta, qui rentrait dans la passe pour continuer sa pēche, cette fois, en toute sйcuritй.
Chadourne bseo6: 068-071 6
[An example of] Rauti Tamai
E vanaa aitu e Tumataaroa 14
te vanaa o te Atua uru mate ahu 15
te vanaa o te Arii 9
te vanaa a Teahio 9
te vanaa a te tuturi ma te paepae 15
te vanaa a te fatu moana 11
te vanaa a te upea matatini 13
i huria i te ahoahuri fenua 14
i tafifia i te tu moana 11
te vanaa a Ruaroroirai 12
te vanaa i nia i te rai tahua 14
e pono te pono 6
e pono i te fare ai taimai ia Ihi te ae 20
ia Ihi te toa 7
te vanaa a Fanaura toa i te Pū maruia 19
te vanaa i te tootoo ia Ruaiaipao 19
faarava i te piripiri mai te aere i tai e 20
i te aro o Aua 8
i tai i te avaava 9
tutia ae i te pahu e au teina rii e 18
ei fau tei te upoo ei ruuruu tei te tua 21
ei taumi tei te aro 10
ei tatua i te manava taia 13
ua taia Petea, taia Huaroro ia To Porahu ta'u Omore e 27
e ofai o Tu o te amiomio 13
e oti i te fara aoaoa, tapu i te niurohiti 21
e vaa raau e tia nei 11
O Atea o te pō te vahine, o te ao te tane 19
te tia nei Honoura i te pū Maruia 17
te apoapo nei te manava oa taurearea 19
te ori nei te heiva o te tamai 14
te piripiri ma te aere i ta e 13
ma Tainanu tumataata maitai i te aro o Aua 22
iritia i te pahu e au teina rii e 17
e arii hoi i te pua ia uta e au teina rii e
Une invocation vers toi grand Taaroa 15
l'invocation du Dieu qui provoque la mort ardente 20
l'invocation du Roi 8
l'invocation de Teahio (un prētre) 14
l'invocation du tuturi et du paepae 15
l'invocation du Maоtre de l'Ocйan 11
l'invocation du filet aux yeux mille 14
qui a йtй jetй sur l'ouragan 9
pour encercler le grand Ocйan 9
l'invocation de Ruaroroirai 13
l'invocation en haut au tahua du ciel 16
conduis le convoi 7
et conduis а la maison mange guerre Ihi le destructeur 20
Ihi le geurrier 7
l'invocation de Fanaura guerrier du Pū Maruia 21
l'appel au bāton de commandement: Ruaiaipao 19
assemble pour rapprocher ici la troupe qui est а la mer 19
en face d'Aua 6
vers la mer, dans la petite passe 10
redressez le pahu mes cadets chйris 10
que le fau soit sur la tēte, que corde soit sur le dos 21
que plastron soit sur la poitrine 12
la ceinture pour le ventre craintif 13
a craint Petea, craint Huaroro To Pooahu ma Lance 20
une pierre Tu aux reflets changeants 13
pour couper le pandanus йlancй pour couper le cocotier 20
une pirogue bois qui est debout ici 16
c'est Atea la nuit la femme, le jour le mari 16
se tient debout Honoura sur le Pū Maruia 18
il attrape au vol le salut des jeunes gens 15
se danse la danse de la guerre 11
se rapproche la troupe qui est а la mer 13
de Tainanu le hйros valeureux en face de Aua 19
faites retentir le pahu mes cadets chйris 13
un Roi vraiment du corail intйrieur mes cadets chйris.
Chadourne bseo6: 072-073 6
Parapore: Teura i te Onohi.
Faa rarahi te ura i te rai e 13
e aha te matai e Teura i maru iho 16
i marumaru iho i nia ia'u nei e Teura e 20
e ru ai to aau e Teura e 13
e pau ai tau aho ura iaia 15
o te fa mai ra e toa i tai e Teura e 17
o Tau Arii oe Punuateraitua 16
e ru au e hauriria 10
e hau taua mai nei i to'na aroha 16
a tahi tiaraa to puru aiai no Mara ua haapae ia 25
o ana tiare, o ana hei anoa 14
eaha ra e noaa'i tena mea 13
te mateono ei pono ite rau o te ura 17
tuia i te onini ura o te rai 14
ia piri mai to'na aroha ia'u nei e Teura e 21
e hitu tau o te hinaaro 11
e varu tau o te poheono 11
pohe na pohepohe noa na hoi Teura i te Onohi 20
i te tai raa i to aroha na oti e 15
faa rarahi te ura o te rai e
Agrandissez la pourpre du ciel 11
quel est le vent Teura qui a ombragй ici 15
qui a ombragй ici sur moi-mēme o Teura 17
qui fait tressaillir tes entrailles o Teura 17
qui йpuise mon souffle embrasй pour toi 15
il surgit lа-bas un roc au large o Teura 14
c'est le mien arii toi Punuateraitua 17
oppressйe je suis et frissonne 10
l'йpouvante vient de son amour 11
une fois apparu ton visage beau de Mara m'йloigna 20
tu es grotte fleur, tu es couronne toujours 16
comment possйder cette chose 8
la passion qui dirige l'йlan multiple des flammes 16
allume le sommet pourprй du ciel 11
que s'unisse ici son amour а moi ō Teura 18
sept pйriodes celles du dйsir 8
huit de la passion 7
a йtй accablйe, a йtй accablйe vraiment Teura i te Onohi 19
d'avoir pleurй sur ton amour lа accompli 13
Agrandissez la pourpre du ciel.
Chadourne bseo6: 074-075 6
[An example of] Anau (Complainte).
Farara ra e e matai iria te matai Tumatuma tei tairi iho nei 29
i nia iau e Teihoa e 12
te matai taua ore ote mate i pau ai tau aho i te 24
parau ino no oe i tae mai e 14
e tia vau e haere tapea hia vau e te oto, ua 22
hautaua, ua hauriaria tau tino e 18
Au ae Matarii ma i nia e, aue hoi te aroha o te 24
taa e raa taua e hoa e 12
e au ae o Faahu e au ae o Muriaha o Neehu i nia 26
e ore anei tau aroha e piri atu ia oe 20
A poto ra te anave i mahiti ai te pea i mau, i mau mau 25
ai hoi taua nei e hoa e 13
Hiti ae te mahana i nia e, reva atu hoi oe i una e 24
e noho hoi oe i una, e, moe atu hoi oe i una e 23
eihea ra vau imi ai ia oe? ei raro anei i te papa rii rii e 31
ei roto anei i te tau vana? 13
Ua tia mai te matai o te muri aroha ia oe, i matatara iho ai taua 33
nei e tau ipo e
Abattu un vent irritй le vent Tumatuma qui a frappй ici 19
maintenant sur moi ō mon ami 12
le vent pas ami, de la mort, qui a йpuisй mon souffle а la 18
nouvelle mauvaise de toi qui est arrivйe 18
me lиve moi pour marcher, retenue moi par le chagrin, est 19
йpouvantй, est frissonnant mon corps. 9
Nagent les Plйiades en haut, Oh! vraiment la peine de la 19
sйparation nous deux ō mon ami, 13
nagera Faahu, nagera Muriaha, Neehu en haut, 19
ma pensйe ne se rapprochera-t-elle de toi? 14
Devenu court le fil a fait s'ouvrir le filet qui tenait, qui tenait 26
vraiment nous deux ō mon ami 12
Se leva le soleil en haut, t'en allas toi lа-bas 16
habitas tio lа-bas, disparus toi lа-bas 12
ou moi chercher toi? en bas est-ce dans les profondeurs de l'Ocйan 21
est-ce dans les caves de la mer? 9
est levй le vent du regret pour toi, qui a dйtachй nous 17
deux, o mon aimй.
Chadourne bseo6: 076 6
[An example of] Ute
Outu Roro Vaihi te fenua 12
O te riorio iti tai aoe 13
O Temuri e, rau e, manaonao e, 14
Afea mai oe tau vini ura e 14
Ua riro paha atu oe e
Pointe roro Vaihi la terre 11
Le riorio petit chante au jour 13
O Temuri, ō inconstante, ō inquiйtante, 17
Quand viendras-tu ō mon vini rouge 14
A йtй prise peut-ētre toi lа-bas........
Emory bseo150: 459-464 4
Source: Extract from the Pomare family manuscript in the Bishop Museum entitled E puta tupuna no te ari'i ra o Tu-nui-e-aa-i-te-atua 49
Prayer for peace recited on the Mata-hihae marae in the district of Te-ahu-upoo
Teie te raine Ino Taputapuatea. 16
Na 'Oro-mata-utua. 8
E raine atua. 7
Teie te raine no Vai-'otaha. 13
Na Te-ri'i-maro-tea. 8
E raine ari'i. 7
Oti atu na, a he! 7
E raine no Mata-hihae. 10
Na Te-ari'i-na-vaho-roa 10
E raine ari'i. 7
Oti atu na, a he! 7
Teie te ra'o pa'o. 8
Toia nu'u, e matie pohe. 11
E ina u to rima e Te-ari'i-na-vaho-roa. 17
Oti atu na, a he! 7
Te 'a'eho a ha'amau ai Tu e Ro'o. 15
O Tahi-mana-ari'i, Rapa-i-to'a, Rapa-i-huira, Matamata-'ura. 25
Te 'ura a Ta'aroa. 8
Fa'ahau Tu, fa'ahau Ro'o, fa'ahau Ta'aroa. 19
Te tupu o te fenua i te ao o te ra'i. 16
Tahu tumu tahu vana'a. 9
Tu'ua i te ra'i ia ha'aha'a. 13
Pa'ea i te ra'i ia Tane-ma-Rua-Maui. 17
'Orero te atua 'o Rua-tupua, 13
'Orero i te hiti'a o te ra, i te to'o'a o te ra; 19
I te muhumuhu, i te ve'ave'a (-re'are'a) 16
'A puehu te atua i Vae'a-ra'i, 14
i te aroaro o Tane-nui, 11
i te mata 'a'a ra'i, 8
i te mata tuiau o Ro'o-aio. 14
E fenua 'o Nu'u-te- 8
E marae 'o Ra'i-tupu. 9
Te fare 'o Ruru-aitu. 9
E paepae 'o Fa'atoa-i-te-hau. 14
Manava i tere i 'o! 8
'A maru Tane i te au 'ura. 11
A tahi tere nui e taea mai ai te ra'i putuputu o Tane nei. 27
E Hiro! 3
I horo mai nei au i te moera'a o te 'ahatea. 21
Te na 'tu raro, 5
Tei te pori ia Taere, 10
Tei te pori ia Muhumuhu. 11
Ua poru i te ihu onoono. 12
E vauvau i te fare 'o Pou-mari'ori'o. 17
Te tihapai i te marae 'o Nu'u-pure. 15
E ro'o a va'a, 6
Tei ia Hotu 6
Tei ia Noa. 6
E fa'ai a ra'atira. 9
Tei Hiti na taua Manahune, 12
Tei Hiti, tei Fenua-'ura. 11
'O te po tena, 5
'O te ao tena, 6
'O Hotu tena, 5
'O Ta'ere tena, 6
Ta tatou 'aha-tea. 8
Titiri noa te na 7
I ni'a ia Hotu, 7
Ei fa'a-ari'i. 7
I oti. 3
E area to 'o a'e, 8
E tama (a) te ari'i Fa'atau-uira. 15
Te Iho-i-te-pa. 6
'Oia 'oe e 'Oro-utua. 11
Te Tino atua, te ari'i. 10
E aau (-au?) i te iho to 'o a'e. 14
E tama te toa. 6
E raine te i tai. 8
E fa'atia te i uta. 9
E toia a nui (-nu'u), matie pohe. 14
E ra'o pa'e. 5
Te ra te toa, e toa a te ari'i, 13
I te hiti ra'a o te ra, 9
E i te to'o'a o te ra; 9
I te apa-to'a, 6
E ite apa-to'erau. 9
E toa a te ari'i, e toa hau, 13
Fano e i nu'u, 6
Fano e i ata, 6
E i te ata e hiti a'e ra i te ra. 14
O Dieux, 4
Ho mai i te hau'ia rahi!
Prayer for peace recited on the Mata-hihae marae in the district of Te-ahu-upoo 30
Voici la fleur de cocotier du marae Taputapuatea. 22
Pour 'Oro-mata-utua (de Raiatea). 15
Une fleur de cocotier divine. 12
Voici la fleur de cocotier du marae Vai-'otaha. 20
Pour Te-ri'i-maro-tea (de Borabora). 14
Une fleur de cocotier royale. 12
Voilа qui est terminй, a he! 9
Une fleur de cocotier pour le Marae de Mata-hihae, 21
Pour Te-ari'i-na-vaho-roa (de Te-ahu-upoo, Tahiti). 21
Une fleur de cocotier royale. 12
Voilа qui est terminй, a he! 9
Voici le rouleau de soutien (sacrifice). 18
Traоnй sur le territoire, c'est un brin d'herbe mort. 14
Etends ton bras, o Te-ari'i-na-vaho-roa. 14
Voici qui est terminй, a he! 10
Les roseaux (qui lient) par lesquels Tu et Ro'o furent installйs. 21
O Tahi-mana-ari'i, Rapa-i-to'a, Rapa-i-huira, Matamata-'ura. 25
Les cordeliиres sacrйes а plumes rouges de Ta'aroa. 17
Fais la paix avec Tu, fais la paix avec Ro'o, fais la paix avec Ta'aroa. 28
Qui provoqua la croissance de la terre dans la lumiиre du ciel. 23
Magie originelle, magie sacrйe. 13
Lāchйe dans le ciel qu'elle abaisse. 14
Laisse la glisser jusqu'au ciel de Tane-ma-Rua-Maui. 21
Le Dieu Rua-tupua parle, 11
Parle а l'Est, а l'Ouest; 6
Dans les murmures, dans les rйjouissances. 12
Les Dieux surgissent sur le marae Vai'a-ra'i (а Raiatea), 22
devant le visage du grand Tane, 10
devant les yeux qui incedient le ciel, 14
devant les yeux de Ro'o-aio. 11
Un territoire est Nu'u-tere, 11
Un marae est Ra'i-tupu. 9
La maison est Ruru-aitu. 10
La plateforme est Fa'a-toa-i-te-hau. 14
Bienvenue а la mission qui va lа! 12
Tane s'abrite dans la brume rougeātre. 15
C'est une noble mission que celle qui conduit aux cieux rassemblйs de Tane. 27
O Hiro! 3
Je cours ici vers le lieu de repos du Dieu а plumes jaunes. 22
Le voici en bas, 6
Avec les favoris de Taere, 10
Avec les favoris de Muhumuhu. 11
Le nez qui presse s'aplatit (en saluant). 13
Etendez l'herbe dans la maison Pou-mari'ori'o 17
L'emplacement special? Au marae Nu'u-pure (а Moorea). 20
Nouvelle de l'arrivйe d'une pirogue, 14
Est lа avec Hotu, 5
Est lа avec Noa. 5
Il est un pourvoyeur de nourriture pour les nobles. 19
Ici, а Hiti sont ces Manahune, 10
Ici а Hiti, а Fenua-'ura. 9
La nuit est lа, 4
Le jour est lа, 4
Hotu est lа, 3
Ta'ere est lа, 4
Nos images jaunes tressйes. 9
Le tonnerre est lа, 5
Au-dessus de Hotu, 7
Proclamant un chef. 5
C'est terminй. 3
Un espace est lа-bas. 6
Un fils de chef est Fa'a-tau-uira. 12
Te Iho-i-te-pa. 6
Vous voilа, 'Oro-mata-utua. 11
Le corps divin, le corps royal. 8
L'essence du commandement est rencontrйe lа. 12
Le guerrier est un fils (de chef). 10
Une fleur de cocotier pour le cйrйmonial se trouve du cōtй de la mer 25
Un assistant se trouve vers l'interieur. 14
Traоnйe sur le territoire, il y a un brin d'herbe mort, (une victime humaine). 25
Un rouleau supportant une pirogue. 15
Voici le guerrier, un guerrier du chef. 15
Dans l'Est, 2
et dans l'Ouest; 5
Dans le Sud, 3
Et dans le Nord. 4
Un guerrier du chef, un guerrier paisible, 16
Qui a naviguй vers les pays, 9
Qui a naviguй dans les nuages, 11
Lа dans le nuage, s'йlevant avec le soleil. 13
O Dieux, 4
Accordez une paix prolongйe!
Emory bseo28: 170-171 4
Source: From Maоtre Thuret
Date of recitation: Not later than 1928
Song of Pai for his spear Rufautumu which pierced Moorea 41
Chant de Pai pour sa lance Rufautumu qui perзa Moorea.
0
Honoura e a rave na oe i te rau ape 17
I nia i to taua ra paepae ia Taraatinirau i te faa ra i Ataaroa. 33
A tahiri na oe i te matai ra e Maoae, ia pee te rupehu i nia i te fenua Eimeo. 38
Potua i te rai vetea e, potua i te rai vetea. 21
Maoae te matai i tau omore ia Rufautumu no Ataaroa. 27
Te Teva i uta, te Teva i tai, te Teva rarirari. 19
Te Porionuu e a hio na ia Rufautumu. 18
Ua fetoitoi te are o te moana, 15
Ua ruperupe te hupe o te moua; 14
Rufautumu e, Rufautumu e afai na oe i tou nei roo i nia i te fenua Eimeo. 37
Te omore teie a Pai Tuarere no te faa ra i Ataaroa. 25
Te tamaiti a te Arii no Ataaroa o Ariitaua. 23
No oe te Roo tau e amo nei, 13
Ei faaite raa ia i te ui amuri atu 19
O Rufaatumu te ioa i te omore 15
I patia hia i Eimeo. 11
E ore roa te reira roo e moe e tae noatu i te hopea. 25
Rufautumu e, Rufautumu e, 12
Peipei na vau ia oe i nia i te otue Tataa; 22
I reira hoi au faaineinei au i te Patia raa i Eimeo. 29
E Pai e a vero, E pai e a vero, 14
Patia na vau ia Rufautumu i nia i te moua tapu hia. 25
Ruru te tai o Rufautumu na nia i te tua aivi. 21
Tuarere i te po, Tuarere i te ao, 15
O marama nui hoi ua hee. 12
Te oto noa ra te vahine heipua, 14
Te ui rairai ua fati. 11
Maraetapu e, ua Tinitaua i te aito no Ataaroa.
Chant de Pai pour sa lance Rufautumu qui perзa Moorea. 22
Honoura! prends une feuille de "ape" 14
Une feuille de notre autel "Taraatinirau" d'"Ataaroa" 24
Souffle le vent du "Moae" pour chasser le brouillard qui couvre "Eimeo" 27
Le chasser et mettre le ciel a dйcouvert, (bis) 14
Le Maoa'e favorise mon "omore" dont le nom est Rufautumu-no-ataaroa 28
Le Teva i uta, le Teva i tai, le Teva mouillй 18
Le Parionuu regardez tous Rufautumu 16
Les vagues de l'ocйan se redressent altiиrement 15
Le vent de la montagne se renforce 11
O Rufautumu! pars et emporte ma gloire sur la terre 19
Je suis la lance de Pai Tuarere de la vallйe d'Ataaroa 22
Le fils d'Ariitaua roi de Ataaroa 16
Je pars emportant ta gloire 9
Afin que les gйnйrations futures sachent 13
par la lance Rufautumu 9
Qu'Eimeo a йtй percйe 8
Cette renommйe est йternelle 9
O Rufautumu! O Rufautumu! 12
De la pointe de Tataa je dois te lancer. 15
Lа je me prйparerai а piquer Eimeo 13
O Pai lance! O Pai lance! 10
Lance Rufautumu sur la montagne sacrйe 14
Rufautumu tremble et chante sur le dos des collines 17
Tuarere de la nuit. Tuarere du jour 15
Le soleil s'est cachй 6
La femme а la couronne de pua pleure 14
La pointe mince est cassйe, 9
O Maraetapu, le hйros de Ataaroa est tinitaua.
Emory jps47: 053-058 2
Date of recitation: 16 July 1849
Source: Mare, Tahitian orator and genealogist 27
The Mare account of creation
0
'O Ta'aroa-nui tuhi maite (= mate), 'oia te tumu o te fenua. E toivi Ta'aroa. 'Aore o na e matua tane, 'aore ho'i metua vahine. Te parahi noa ra Ta'aroa 'i roto i te 'aore. 'Aore e fenua, 'aore e ra'i, 'aore e tai. Te aereere noa ra te fenua: 'aore e tumu. 112
'Ua parau iho ra Ta'aroa, 12
"E aere nu'u e, e aere ra'i e, 14
Aere ra te fenua 'ino i raro ra, 14
I toro ra i toro e, a'iu'iu anaunau, 18
Te fenua 'ino 'i raro ra, e toro e!" 14
Te mata ra o Ta'aroa, tu na i vaho. Mauna atu ra te pa'a o Ta'aroa i riro (a)tu ra ia ei fenua. Hi'o iho ra Ta'aroa: 'ua fenua te fenua, 'ua tai hia te tai, 'ua ra'i hia te ra'i. Parahi atua Ta'aroa mai te hi'o i tana ha'a. 'Ua rahu fenua atu ra. 107
'Ua parau iho ra Ta'aroa 12
"E Te tumu e, 'a ne'e mai." 10
'Ua parau mai ra Te Tumu 11
"E 'ore au e ne'e atu, e tumu vau no te fenua." 20
"E Te Papa e, 'a ne'e mai." 10
"E 'ore au e ne'e atu, e papa vau no te fenua." 20
"E Te Tireo e, 'a ne'e mai." 11
"E 'ore au e ne'e atu, e tireo vau no te fenua." 21
[And so forth, for the a'a (roots), and the pai-a'a (long rootlets), and the roherohe (fine rootlets).] 30
Teie te pehe na Ta'aroa i te tuvauvau ra'a ia Havai'i te fenua 30
Tuvau, tuvau. 6
One 'ura, one mea. 8
Huniu ha'a ma. 6
E ru, e ru ana e. 7
Hi'i te i tai e, 7
Tai o Tane nui mana 'ore i te horahora nei e. 20
Tuvau te one i ta'u va'a iti; 13
'A horahora te one i ta'u va'a nui. 15
'A tu va'a nui. 6
'A horahora te one i ta'u (va'a) iti. 15
'A tuvau, 'a tuvau e a oti. 12
'A horo e ha'a, a horo ha'a, 11
'A horo ha'a e a oti. 9
'O te tumu te tuvauvau ra ia Havai('i). 17
'A tuvau. 4
'Ua fa'aueue iho ra Ta'aroa i te fenua. 'Aore atu ra i 'aueue. 'Ua pi'i iho ra Ta'aroa 43
"'Ovai te i uta e?" 8
Pina'i atu ra te reo o Ta'aroa i roto i te fa'a. 'Ua parau mai ra
"'Ovau o Tu-fenua, o Tu-mou'a, o Tu-parara, o Te One-a-Tu. 24
Tu tu mai vaho Ta'aroa iho. 12
'O Ta-maomao vi, Ta-maomao va, 13
Puna-heuheu. 6
'Oe i rei ai te 'ohu. 10
Pepe-tu, e Pepe-hau, 8
Pepe te toro na, 6
Ei te 'uri faro Maitu-ra'i, 12
E toa, e tupua, e to'a-hiti." 12
"'Ovai te i tai e?" 8
"'Ovau, 'o te Fatu-moana, 10
Te fatu tahu tahuri mai to'a. 12
Tupu i te moana, to'a i te moana; 14
Feo i te moana, tuturi i te moana. 15
'Oe i fa'atupu hia (a)i te iho i tai na, 18
E Ro'o ma Ruahatu. 8
"'Ovai te i ni'a e?" 8
"'Ovau, 'o Vatea. 7
Te tea nu'u, te tea ra'i, 10
Te pori a nu'u, te pori a ra'i, 12
Huri hia fenua tupai o Ro'o a(?), 14
Ei te au mata tahu e Ro'o." 12
"'Ovai te i raro e?" 8
"'Ovau, 'o Rua, 6
'O Rua-i-te-tumu, 7
'O Rua-i-te-papa, 7
('O Rua-to'a-nu'u, 'O Rua-to'a-ra'i), 14
'O Rua-i-te-muhumuhu, 9
'O Rua-i-te-rearea o rua. 12
E fai na mai ra te ara i raro na." 14
Parahi atua atu ra te varua o Ta'aroa. Tera te i'oa taua varua, 'o Te Haruru-papa. 37
Hi'o atu ra Ta'aroa, 'aore roa e ta'ata i te fenua. Hi'o iho ra Ta'aroa i raro, 'ite atu ra ia Te Papa-raharaha. 'Ua nana a'e ra te mata, 'ata a'e ra ia Ta'aroa. 70
Teie te hua no Ta'aroa 11
"'A nana Te Tumu e, 7
'A nana, 'a tiei Te Tumu. 10
'A tiei, 'a fa'a-o Te Tumu e. 12
'A fa'a-o, 'a faro te ure ra o Ta'aroa, 'o Te Apoi-ra'i. 23
Toro na raro ia Te Papa-raharaha, 14
E ivi papa no Ta'aroa." 10
Te vahine o Te Fai-mai-raro, te tahi i'oa no te vahine. No raro a'e 'oia. 'O Te Fai-mai-ni'a, te tahi (io'a) no Ta'aroa, no te mea no ni'a iho te tane. 62
Fanau a'e ra ta raua One-'ura. He'e mai ra i te tua, o One-mea. Ua riro ei one no te fenua. Fanau mai ra o 'Oro, riro atu ra ia ei atua. Parahi atu ra ia ini'a i te tano o te ra'i. 81
A he'e i te tua o Te Iri; a he'e i te tua o Te Fatu. 22
[And so on, for Moe, Rua-nu'u, Tu, To'a-hiti, Te Meharo, Punua-te-fatu-tiri.] 27
E fanau atua ana'e ia. 12
Fanau mai ra e vahine, o Hina-tutu-po te io'a. Tu'u i tona toro'a, e tutu i te apa'a no te nu'u atua. 43
Inu iho ra Ta'aroa i te 'ava, e taero a'e ra, parau atu ra ia Pani, e hoa ia no Ta'aroa. Ua parau mai ra o Pani 51
"E te tupuaitu e, 8
Eaha ra te ahi i mau ra'i, 12
Tinai hia tu ra ia. 9
Te moa i Raro-ata, 8
I te 'uri i Arava, te pua'a Fetuna, 15
Ua 'opani hia to ratou vaha. 13
Te i tai i Avahoa, 9
'Ua tapo'i hia e Pani. 10
Toe atu ra te tutu i Mari-oro. Te tutu ra Hina-tutu-po i te apa'a no te atua, no Ta'aroa. Ua 'u'uru a'e ra Ta'aroa. 49
"U e Pani, e tutu a te varovaro nei?" 15
Ua parau atu ra Pani, 10
"'O Hina te tutu mai ra i te apa'a." 14
"E ti'i 'oe, e parau atu e, 'e fa'aoti a'e, a maniania te ava o te tupuaitu." 35
Ti'i atu ra Pani, e parau ia Hina, 15
"E fa'aoti, a maniania te ava o te tupuaitu." 21
'Ua parau mai ra Hina, "E 'ore au e fa'aea, te tutu nei au i te apa'a ei vehi no te atua, no Ta'aroa, no 'Oro, no Moe, no Ruanu'u, no Tu, no To'a-hiti, no Tau-utu, no Te Meharo, no Punua-te-fatu-tiri." 83
'Ua ho'i mai ra Pani e fa'a'ite ia te tupuaitu, eita Hina e fa'aea. 'Ua fa'aue fa'ahou a, 43
"E ti'i a 'oe e parau atu e ..." 13
E toru ti'i ra'a, riri a'e ra Pani ia Hina, no te mea, 'aore Hina i fa'aro'o atu i tana parau. Rave atu ra Pani i te i'e ta'iri iho ra i te rei o Hina. Pohe roa a'e ra o te varua ra o Hina, rere a'e ra i ni'a i te ra'i. 'A topa i te i'oa o Hina-nui-aiai-i-te-marama. Parahi atu ra Hina i roto i te marama.
Mighty Ta'aroa whose curse was death, he is the creator of the world. He was alone. He had no father nor indeed a mother. Ta'aroa simply lived in the void. There was no land, nor sky, nor sea. Land was nebulous: there was no foundation. 73
Ta'aroa then said, 7
"O space for land, o space for sky. 9
Useless world below existing in nebulous state, 16
Continuing and continuing from time immemorial, 17
Useless world below, extend! 8
The face of Ta'aroa appeared outside. The shell of Ta'aroa fell away and became land. Ta'aroa looked: Land had come into existence, sea had come into existence, sky had come into existence. Ta'aroa lived god-like contemplating his work. More land was conjured forth. 91
Then Ta'aroa commanded 8
"O Foundation creep hither." 10
The Foundation answered 9
"I will not creep forth, I am the foundation of the land." 17
"O Rock-stratum, creep hither." 8
"I will not creep forth, I am the rock-stratum of the earth." 16
"O Young-root-suckers, move hither." 11
"I will not budge, I am the young root-suckers of the earth." 18
[And so forth, for the a'a (roots), and the pai-a'a (long rootlets), and the roherohe (fine rootlets).] 30
This is the chant of Ta'aroa in laying out the land Havai'i 20
Spread out, lie out. 8
The crimson sands, the red sands. 7
. . . . . . 0
Shake, shake gently. 5
There is cradling by the sea side, 10
(By the) sea of great Tane, powerless in the spreading out here (of the sands). 23
Spread out the sands from my little canoe. 12
Let out the sands from my great canoe. 11
Let the great canoe stand forth. 9
Spread out the sands from my little canoe. 12
Lay out, put in place until finished. 12
Run and work, hurry the work, 6
Hurry the work until finished. 8
It is The Founder who lays out Havai'i. 14
Lay it out. 4
Ta'aroa now shook the land. It would not move. Ta'aroa then called out 24
"Who is there inland?" 6
The voice of Ta'aroa echoed in the valley. There came the answer 23
"It is I, Stability-of-the-land, Stability-of-the-mountains, Stability-of-the-plains, The-sands-of-Stability. 31
Set up without by Ta'aroa himself. 11
Ta-maomao-vi, Ta-maomao-va, 12
Puna-heuheu. 6
You who encircle the clouds, 9
Pepe-tu, Pepe-hau, 7
Pepe extending there, 7
Like the ... dog of Maitu-ra'i, 10
A warrior, a god, a nobleman." 10
"Who is seaward there?" 7
"It is I, The Lord-of-the-ocean, 10
The lord who by sorcery overturned rocks. 10
Grew up in the ocean, became rock in the ocean. 16
Sharp pinnacles of coral in the ocean, upright stones in the ocean. 21
You who brought about life in the sea there, 16
O Ro'o and Ruahatu. 8
"Who is above there?" 7
"It is I, Vatea. 6
The land space, the sky space, 7
The productiveness of the land, the productiveness of the sky. 17
The earth is overturned.... 8
Like the bewitching eyes of Ro'o." 11
"Who is below there?" 6
"It is I, Rua (Source, Abyss), 9
Rua-in-the-foundation, 9
Rua-in-the-rock-strata; 7
(Rua-coral-rock-of-land, Rua-coral-rock-of-sky), 13
Rua-in-the-murmuring (of the abyss), 10
Rua-in-the-whispering of the abyss. 10
The way below become plainly visible." 12
The spirit of Ta'aroa dwelt as a god. The name of that spirit was, The-foundations-rumbling. 28
Ta'aroa looked and saw that there were no people on the land. Ta'aroa looked down and saw The-rock-strata-spread-out. Her eyes gazed back and she laughed at Ta'aroa. 55
This is the song of Ta'aroa 9
"O Foundation, look, 8
Look, turn your head and look, o Foundation. 16
Lean over and insert, o Foundation. 13
Insert and let the penis of Ta'aroa thrust (the penis named) The-curved-heavens. 24
Reach down to The-rock-strata-spread-out, 12
A shoulder bone (mistress) of Ta'aroa. 13
One name of the woman was The-appearing-below. She was below. The-appearing-above was another name of Ta'aroa, because, as the husband, he was above. 52
Born of their union was Crimson-sands. There followed Red-sands. They became sands of the earth. 'Oro was born, he bacame a god. He lived at the summit of the sky. 46
Then followed Te Iri; then followed Te Fatu. 14
[And so on, for Moe, Rua-nu'u, Tu, To'a-hiti, Te Meharo, Punua-te-fatu-tiri.] 27
These were all born gods. 7
There was born a woman, Hina-beating-tapa-in-the-period-of-night. Her occupation was to beat tapa for the gods. 36
Ta'aroa drank 'ava, and whn he was under its influence, he spoke to Pani, a friend of Ta'aroa. Pani answered 36
"O wonder-working spirit, 7
What is this fire taking hold of the sky, 10
Extinguish it. 5
The fowls at Raro-ata, 7
The dogs at Arava, the pigs at Fetuna, 12
Their mouths have been closed. 10
They are seaward of Avahoa, 11
They have been covered-over by Pani. 12
There remains (the story of) the beating of tapa at Mari-oro. Hina-beating-in-the-dark was beating tapa for the god Ta'aroa. Ta'aroa grumbled 47
"O Pani, is that noise the beating of tapa?" 15
Pani answered 5
"It is Hina beating fine tapa." 11
"You go to her and tell her to stop, the harbour of the god is too noisy." 22
Pani fetched Hina and said to her, 11
"Stop it, or the harbour of the god will be noisy." 14
Hina replied, "I will not stop, I will beat out the white tapa here as a wrapping for the gods Ta'aroa, 'Oro, Moe, Ruanu'u, Tu, To'a-hiti, Tau-utu, Te Meharo, and Punua-the-thunder-bolt." 62
Pani returned and told the god Hina would not stop. He was commanded again, 23
"You fetch (her) and say ..." 6
After going for her three times, Pani was furious at Hina, because she would not obey his order. Pani took the mallet and beat the brow of Hina. She died, but the spirit of Hina flew up into the sky. Her name then became Hina-nui-aiai-i-te-marama. Hina thereafter lived in the moon.
Emory jps47: 058-059 2
Source: Pomare family manuscript
Date of recitation: Before 1929 34
Chant of the Propping of the Sky of Havai'i
E parau na te mau ta'ata pa'ari no teie nei fenua, mai te matamua mai. 32
O Te Hotu-o-te-ra'i, ei pou mua. 14
O 'Anaia-i-te-ra'i, ei pou muri. 15
Pou a te pou tu, i te pou noho, 13
i te pou 'orerorero, i te pou vana'ana'a. 18
E fa'a te tumu, e fa'a te papa, 12
e fa'a 'opi a ra'i. 8
Te ra'i nui 'ia ha'ono. 10
E toto'o 4
tahuhu o te ra'i, pou roto o te ra'i; 15
e apai o te ra'i, turuturu o te ra'i; 16
'aho tua o te ra'i, 'aho tara o te ra'i; 16
tunau o te ra'i, totoro-iore o te ra'i; 17
e ahua o te ra'i, rau-oro o te ra'i; 16
e aeho o te ra'i; hauato o te ra'i; 16
uviau o te ra'i; tapo'i o te ra'i. 15
Oti roa a'e ra te ra'i. 10
Te vai ha'ono noa ra te ra'i i muta'a iho ra.
An ancient account of the scholars concerning this world in past ages. 20
Hotu-o-te-ra'i was the fore post. 11
'Anaia-i-te-ra'i was the rear post. 13
Set up the pillar to stand by, the pillar to sit by, 12
the pillar to speak by, the pillar to recite by. 13
Build the foundation, build the rock-strata, 14
set out the horizon. 7
Let the great heavens extend. 9
Prop 1
the ridge-pole of the sky, the inner post of the sky; 13
the wall-plate of the sky, the side post of the sky; 12
the rear purlin of the sky, the end purlin of the sky; 13
the ... of the sky, the supplementary ridge-pole of the sky; 14
the sill of the sky, the thatching sheets of the sky; 11
the wall-reeds of the sky, the thatching-needle of the sky; 14
the ridge thatching of the sky, the roof of the sky. 12
The sky is entirely finished. 8
The sky remained expanded in ancient times.
Henry: 037 1
Song in appreciation of the ti
E Ti-'ura te Ti, 6
E faifai noa hia e te hui tapairu; 17
E marere hua e! 7
Na'u tena na Ti, 6
E Ti tanu e! 5
O a Ti, a pare i tai na e; 11
O te tu'e mata o te ahune e. 12
E manino te tai o te ravaai 13
A te vahine e, 6
Te tu'u maira i to'na hoa iti e!
It is the purple-tinged ti, 8
That is plucked by the waiting maids; 10
Oh! they will fly! 3
"That is my ti, 3
Ah, cultivated ti!" 6
Dig the ti, fence it in along the shore; 12
It is the brow of plenty. 6
Oh, it smooths the waters for fishing 10
For the woman; 4
She will give some to her dear friend.
Henry: 070 - 071 1
The Districts of Tahiti Nui [Description of area]
E moti i Vai-o-va'u e horo roa i 'Ea'ea, o Hitia'a te fenua. 28
Te mou'a i ni'a, o Te-vai-tohi, o Mauru, e o Ta-hou-tira. 24
Te Tahua i raro, o Te-'iri'iri. 13
Te 'outu i tai, o Pape-he'i. 12
Te vai, o Manini-haorea e o Maha-te-ao. 18
Te marae, o Hiti'a e o Taputapu-atea. 17
Te ava i tai: o Pu-tai-maru, (i Pape-ivi e Vai-to-are), Te-aau-raa, i Faaone, o Te-matoe-o-Hitiaa, e o Tapo-ra i Tai-pа'i'a. 54
Te motu i tai, o Opu-totara, o Vari-a-rarщ (oia o Ari-o-raro), e o Pū-uru. 32
O Teri'i-tua te ari'i. 10
Te papa i raro, o Fanauē. 12
Te fare-'arioi, o Pereue. 12
Te 'Aito 'Arioi, o Maro-'ura. 13
Te fare-'aira'a-upu, o Maha-te-ao. 15
Na 'orometua, o Te-reva, o Mara, o Mara-uri, o Mara-tea, o Rau-'aha-tea e o 'Opu-a-tipa. 37
E fenua tu'u piri o Hitia'a; teie te vetahi tau piri:- 24
A tahi, a rua te marama i ha'aputuputu; a toru, a maha marama i ha'aputuputu; a pae a ono marama i ha'aputuputu; a hitu, a varu te marama i ha'aputuputu; a iva e ahuru te marama i ha'aputuputu; a tū mai, a fa'ati'ati'a, a vaiiho i vaho! 104
(1) 'O vai ia? 5
E te Tumu-nui e, o te tamari'i o te vahine matamua 'o te Tumu e to'na hua'ai, i fanau mai i te ao nei. 45
19 (2) Eaha te faofao ata? 10
'O te repo fenua ia 'aore i i; e o te moana atea ia. 25
(3) Eaha te ra'au e peha te tumu e peha te 'ama'a, e peha te ohiu, e peha te rau, e peha te 'iri, e peha te maea? 46
O te vahine ia fanautama. 12
(4) 'Eaha te tahu'a 'e tаtа i te riu o Ha'apaiano'o? 20
'O te Maoa'e e o te Papaite ia.
From Vai-o-va'u (Water-in-weeds) to 'Ea'ea (Deliberation), Hitia'a (Rising or East) is the land. 34
The mountains above are Te-vai-tohi (Riven-water 4,532 feet), Mauru (Bareness, 4,503 feet), and Ta-hou-tira (Renewed-mast, 3,981 feet). 41
The assembly ground is Te-'iri'iri (The pebbles). 14
The point seaward is Pape-he'e (Gliding-waters). 15
The rivers are Manini-haorea [Manini (fish) encircled] and Maha-te-ao (World-in-four or quarters). 33
The temples were Hitia'a and Taputapu-atea (Sacrifices-from-abroad). 25
The harbors outside (within the reefs) are: Pu-tai-maru (Easy-ocean-pool) at Pape-ivi (Water-of-ghosts), and Vai-to-are (Water-of-waves), Te-aau-raa (The-sacred-reef), at Faaone (Sand-extension), Te-matoe-o-Hitia'a (The eastern-crack), and Tapo-ra (Now-strike), at Tai-pa'i'a (Ocean-slipping). 99
The islets are Opu-totara (Porcupine-fish-stomach), Vari-a-raru (Mud-of-insects) called also Ari-o-raro (Waves-below) and Pu-uru (Forest-clump). 46
Teri'i-tua (Sovereign-of-the-ocean) was the chief. 18
The under chief was Fanaue (Strange-birth). 13
The comedian house was Pereue (Night-vapor). 16
The arioi warrior was Maro'ura. 13
The school was Maha-te-ao (The world-in-four). 14
The teachers were Te-reva (The-atmosphere), Mara (Nauclea forster), Mara-uri (Dark-Nauclea), Mara-tea (Light-Nauclea), Rau-aha-tea (Light-Nauclea-leaf), and Opu-a-tipa (Stomach-of-flying-fish). 64
Hitia'a was a land of riddles; here are some of the riddles 20
One, two moons have supervened; three, four moons have supervened; five, six moons have supervened; seven, eight moons have supervened; nine and ten moons have supervened; come forth, be propped, remain outside! 71
(1) Who are they? 4
O Tumu-nui, they are the children of Tumu's first woman and her posterity, born into the world. 27
(2) What are the clouds' reservoirs? 10
They are the ground which is never full; and the vast ocean. 17
(3) What tree is it that duplicates its trunk, duplicates its branches, duplicates its shoots, duplicates its leaves, duplicates its outer bark and inner bark? 47
It is a woman bearing children. 10
(4) Who are the workers that bail up the waters of Ha'apaiano'o (Confluent-water)? 26
They are Maoa'e (northeast wind) and Papaite (northwest wind).
Henry: 072 1
Mahaena [Description of area]
E moti 'Ea'ea e haere roa i Ana-pū, o Maha'ena ia fenua. 28
Te mou'a i ni'a, o Taia-mano; tei reira te pare ra, o Taia-vete. 28
Te tahua i raro, o Poro-'ura. 12
Te outu i tai, o Fare-tai. 12
Te vai, o Fa'a-rahi e o Fa'a-iti. 14
Te marae, o Ra'i-ipū ma Ra'autatai. 17
Te ava i tai, o Pū-ta'i-hani. 13
Te motu, o Ta-au-piri. 9
O Ro'ura te ari'i. 8
Na papa i raro, o 'Outu e o Punua-ari'i. 18
Te tu'utu'u-ve'a, o To'o-iva. 12
Na fare-'arioi, o Pou-mariorio, o Mara-ha'ava, e o Ma'a-i-tere. 28
Te aito arioi, o Rau-pa'a. 13
E horuera'a tei tai i Maha'ena. 15
O Pū-ta'i-hani e o Toa-tane na to'a horuera'a. 21
O Hina-rau-re'a te vahine i hau roa i taua horuera'a i tahito ra; ei vahine oia na Turi, atua ta'ata. 47
No'na i mairi ai te i'oa o Tou'ura-oi-'ore, no te horue titi'aifaro.
From 'Ea'ea (Escape) to Ana-pu (Pool-cavern), Maha'ena (Long-appeased) is the land. 28
The hills above are Taia-mano (Dread-of-many); there is the fortification Taia-veta (Dread-of-search). 36
The assembly ground below is Poro-'ura (Red-herald). 15
The point outside is Fare-tai (House-seaward). 18
The rivers are Fa'a-rahi (Great-valley) and Fa'a-iti (Small-valley). 21
The temples are Ra'i-ipu (Sky-with-pools) and Ra'autatai (Disenchantment-want) 24
The harbor outside is Pu-ta'i-hani (Lovers'-trumpet-blast). 18
The islet is Ta-au-piri (Close-swimming). 13
The high chief was Ro'ura (Red-ant). 10
The under chiefs were 'Outu (Cape) and Punua-ari'i (Royal-side-pool). 25
The messenger was To'o-iva (Group-nine). 13
The arioi houses were Pou-mariorio (Receding-pillars), Mara-ha'ava (Matured-Nauclea), and Ma'a-i-tere (Food-that-floated). 46
The chief comedian was Rau-pa'a (Outer-leaf). 17
Out at Maha'ena is the sea for surf-riding. 15
Pu-ta'i-hani (Lovers'-trumpet-blast) and Toa-tane (Man-rock) are the rocks to start from. 24
Hina-rau-re'a (Gray-of-turmeric-leaf) was the most famous surf rider of that place; she was the wife of Turi the demigod. 38
To her was applied the name Tou'ura-oi-'ore (Sun-burned-swerving-not), because she rode straight.
Henry: 073 1
Mehiti [Description of area]
E mou'a iti teitei ra Pū-tara, 15
Pū tara na i te ra'i i Mehiti. 13
E tu'e ma'ava ino i Tūrei, 13
No Mehiti va'a ino 8
Humaha tapa'au; 7
Taparahi ta'ata te toro'a!
A high hill is Pu-tara (Sharp-one), 10
Cone sharp in the sky of Mehiti (Border). 11
'Tis dangerous to beat the Turbo at Turei, 15
Because of Mehiti of bad clan 11
With victims laden; 5
Manslaying is their profession!
Henry: 074
Ha'apai-a-no'o, te piha ia teta, 14
Te fenua o va'a iti ma te toi, 13
Te piha ia teta! 7
E taura'a mata'i o Ha'apai-a-no'o, 16
O Ha'apai-a-no'o te fa'a e nui, 14
E piha tena no Tahiti. 9
E haere Tahiti i reira i te ati, 15
Ia Teta Ari'i, 7
Ora'tura i te imi ro'a, 10
Ora'tura i te tama'i. 9
Tei Ha'apai-a-no'o te 'uru ia ma'a 'iore.
Ha'apai-a-no'o is the room of refuge, 15
The land of the little clan of the strong, 10
The room of refuge! 7
A settling place for winds (strife) is Ha'apai-a-no'o, 17
Ha'apai-a-no'o is the greatest valley, 14
A room it is for Tahiti. 9
Tahiti goes thither in trouble, 11
To King Teta, 4
And escapes the searcher, 8
And escapes from battle. 7
At Ha'apai-a-no'o breadfruit is food for rats (so plentiful).
Henry: 074-075 1
The school at Ha'apape [Description]
Tei Uporu te tiara'a fare 'aira'a upu ana-vaha-rau a te hui ari'i, o Tapu-ata-i-te-ra'i; tera na orometua vahine, o Toa-te-manava no Ra'iatea, e o Mu-reo, firifiri 'aufau no Papeari i Tahiti-nei; tera te 'orometua tamaiti, 'o Hiro, 'o te ite noa i te upu no te fa'aro'oro'o noa ra'a 'tu i rapae'au i te fare, 'aore a 'oia i fa'aōhia i te pupu pipi i roto i taua fare ra, e o te hau roa'tura ia i te 'ite. 181
E ti'a i taua ha'api'iraa ra te tamari'i a te hui ari'i no Tahiti nei e no Ra'iatea e te au mai; e ti'a atoa i te haapi'iraa no Opoa i Ra'iatea te mau pipi no Tahiti te haapi'i ra'a.
At Uporu is the school of savants of royal families, named Tapu-ata-i-te-ra'i (Sacred-cloud-in-the-sky); there are the women teachers, Toa-te-manava (Brave-hearted) of Ra'iatea, and Mu-reo (Murmur-of-voices), reciter of heraldry, of Papeari in Tahiti; there was the boy teacher, Hiro (Jester), who knew the recitations from listening to them from outside of the house before he was admitted into the class of pupils in the school, when he became a scholar of the highest merit. 155
That school is attended by the children of the royal families of Tahiti and Ra'iatea and other kindred people; and to the school of Opoa in Ra'iatea also go forth pupils of Tahiti to learn.
Henry: 075 1
Uporo [Description of area]
Fenua mou'a rua o Uporu; o te one i ahu hia e Hiro i tahatai ra, o tahi ia huru mou'a, e o 'Orohena i uta ra o te rua ia huru. Uporu is a land of two kinds of mountains; the sand heaped up by Hiro along the seashore is one kind, and 'Orohena, inland, is the second kind.
Henry: 076 1
Home of Pomare in Teporionuu [Description]
Tara-ho'i ta'i poto, 8
Tara-ho'i te ta'i onaona, 11
O maro Tara-ho'i, 7
'Eiaha 'oe e hi'o i reira! 13
E nana'ihere Papa'oa, 10
E ui tena e tae mai ai. 12
Ahu-toru te 'ai'a tupuna o te Ari'i o Taraho'i, 21
O Ahu-toru tupatupa. 9
E reve i te ma'a mo'a i reira, 13
E fa'ahoi 'i muri e 'ai. 11
E māro Tara-ho'i, 8
E ore e tu'u, 6
E ore e ho'i i te ua e te mata'i. 15
Taraho'i nui i te vai a tōtō, 15
E vero ia, o marama ia i ni'a, 14
Pa'a'ina o te tai i tahuna ea. 14
O mato rua nui te muhu o Pare, 13
Tōa roa i te huhu ta'oto'oto. 14
O toa haratō i huhа ha'ape'epe'e, 15
O honu iti e na hoa tapairu, 13
O ta'i mai i te po'o i Fara-tea, 14
O to tupuna o Tia-Māūi; 13
O Pū-'o'oro i te vai tai rea. 14
To vai haumaru.
Tara-ho'i of brief cry; 7
Tara-ho'i of obstinate cry, 9
It is persistent Tara-ho'i, 9
Look not thou upon it! 8
Papa'oa is worth its hundreds, 9
Hardy must you be to come hither. 10
Ahu-toru (Three-walls, a marae of three steps) is the ancestral heritage of the king of Tara-ho'i, 32
It is the Ahu-toru of reputable aspect. 14
There they take sacred food, 9
And return behind to eat it. 9
Persistent is Tara-ho'i, 8
It yields not, 4
It recedes not in rain and wind. 10
Great Tara-ho'i, of knocking waters, 11
That is, in storms with the moon above, 11
And the roaring sea that encompasses it. 13
Cliffs with great murmuring caves has Pare, 12
Attained by the napping bumble-bee. 11
Pain-inflicting warriors fleet of limbs, 12
Little turtle and waiting maids, 10
Outside of Fara-tea (Light-fara) cove, 14
Your ancestor is Tia-Maui (Stand-by-prayer); 14
Pu-'o'oro of joyous singing 10
Is your cooling water.
Henry: 079 1
Song of Pa'ea [referring to the district]
E ti'i rа o vai tū nui 10
E pa i te 'ava rau ri'i, 10
Fa'ati'a i te pū ma te pahu, 12
A pa i te ava i ni'a o Mahu-ta'a. 14
Te ua a to'a ri'i e, 9
A puni paha i to i'a 9
E ta'a i te pae tua o te 'atu roa! 15
A haere i te manu 'ura i Ra'iatea, 16
A ta'a 'i te matauiui o toа, 13
E poe i te tiare i Tupai, 12
A mahu i te 'ura i Raroto'a, 12
A manihinihi i te aravao. 12
O 'Utu'ai nui 'o'opu 10
I te patu tai rea, 8
I te fenua i pā'u hia e Hiro. 14
A piri te atua ura i te tapau e, 15
Tia vere! Tia vere!
Let the great standing river 8
Wall in its small-leafed ava, 9
Tell it with the trumpet and drum, 8
Wall in the ava upon Mount Mahuta'a. 13
O rain of the rocks, 6
Conceal perhaps thy fishes 7
That go to the deep of the long bonito! 12
Go for parrakeets to Ra'iatea, 12
To distinguish the handsome warrior, 12
Wearing the gardenia of Tupai, 12
Blended with ura feathers of Rarotonga, 13
Deal kindly with the mountaineers. 11
'Tis great, black 'Utu'ai (Cape-eating) [mist] 14
Of the wall of the yellow sea, 9
Of the land that Hiro splashed. 8
When the parrakeet gods are caught with gum 13
Beware! Beware!
Henry: 080 1
War song (pehe tama'i) from 'A-'Oropa'a in Papara
Te Rua-i-tupua te Rua-i tahito ra! 15
Mai te tai maira vau, 10
Mai te mahu fenua, 8
Te-tou nohora'a aroha e! 11
E hoatu anei ia Rua-i-tupua tahito 18
Ia Vai-toru? 6
E to'u fenua maita'i e, 11
Papara to'u fenua ia mau. 12
Toa ivaiva 6
Ua fatata i tau ma te ono. 12
Ho atu anei ia Rua-i-tupua tahito, 17
Ia Vai-toru? 6
Papara to'u fenua ia mau. 12
Te ruma nei ra Oropa'a e! 11
Mai ta'na mou'a tapu ra'atira 13
Mai tete te ruma. 7
Te ta'i nei te fanau'a 'oura ri'i marae 18
E tere Hiro, e fete e feta, 11
Pati fenua ia oe. 9
Tū rā, e oroi, pūa, 11
Te manu mou'a ri'i. 8
Papa tane te fenua e mau e!
Rua-i-tupua (Source-of-growth), Rua-i-tahito (Source-of-old)! 22
From the sea have I come, 9
From the misty land, 4
The Cordia, O residence beloved! 12
To Rua-i-tupua of old shall 10
Vai-toru (three waters) be given? 11
O my good land, 4
Papara is the land I'll hold. 8
Raging warrior, 5
The time of vengeance approaches. 12
To Rua-i-tupua of old shall 10
Vai-toru be given? 7
Papara is the land I'll hold. 8
O 'tis lowering over Oropa'a! 11
From its mountain sacred to gentlemen 12
Clamor is brooding. 6
The little shrimps of the marae are crying, 12
As the sweep of Hiro comes the outbreak. 14
Thou wilt make them leap upon the land, 12
Stand, turn, blown away, 5
Shall the mountain birds be. 8
Rock the man shall be in possession!
Henry: 081 1
A song of Papara, referring also to 'Oropa'a
O Papara e moe ra i te ahinavai! 15
O Papara nui ia 'Oro hua re'a 14
O te vai ia Tai-au; 10
Taai na i te horo i paepae iriiri. 17
E manu vau nei, e Teva, 10
E Teva i te ua, e Teva i te mamari 15
Mamari iti no Oro hua rea. 12
A tuu i te vanaa e pehe ai 13
Tei Papara te tupura'a o toa, 13
No te toa manahune 8
O 'Oropa'a, toa i Fenua-ura, 13
O mere o te u a i Anā, 11
O Rua-roa, o Papara 9
O te Maoa'e tua nane; 10
O Papara hoi te tauira i te poti'i 16
O Papara e moe ra i te ahinavai!
'Tis Papara veiled in white mist! 11
'Tis great Papara of 'Oro of yellow body 13
Who is with Tai-au (Agreeable-sea, Oro's adoptive father); 22
Travel, running to the pebble paving of the marae. 15
I am a bird, a Teva, 7
A Tevan in the rain, a Teva in the shade, 14
The little shade of 'Oro of the yellow body. 13
Let the heralds sing 5
'Tis Papara that produces warriors, 11
The plebeian warriors 8
For Oropa'a, warriors for Red-land 11
Of Orion's belt close by Betelgeuse, 12
Of the summer solstice; 'tis Papara 11
Of the trade wind with rippling sea; 10
'Tis Papara fostering the girls, 9
Papara veiled in white mist!
Henry: 082 1
Song of Mataiea district
O Vaiuriri nui a tere i maoha, 15
Maoha to ma'a. 6
O Mataiea riri vave, 10
Mo'opuna o te ahu parepare, 12
Tatai a nui o manu, 9
O Vai'uriri i te nia noa i te 'ai'a.
'Tis great Vaiuriri that moved resplendently, 14
Splendid is thy food. 5
'Tis Mataiea the hasty tempered, 11
Offspring of the fortified 8
Of the shore of the host of birds, 9
'Tis Vaiuriri in which is the heritage.
Henry: 083 1
Song of Papeari district
O Vaiari iti a muna e! 11
E muna ia te ma'a, 8
Vaiari iti a muna e! 10
Ua rau te ara i te fenua e, 13
E fenua poto i te 'Aua'a. 12
E a'a vau i te 'Aua'a, 11
Ta'i tahi rea ia a'a a'e; 12
E ha'a faura'o a ta'a e atu ai 15
O Vaiari iti i te 'e'a rau!
O dear Vaiari of enchantment! 11
Thy food then was enchantment, 7
Dear Vaiari of enchantment! 10
Many are the paths in thy land. 7
Near are the lands at the 'Aua'a (But-for-that [straight]). 17
I shall fathom the 'Aua'a; 9
It measures a few fathoms across; 11
By a conveyance is left behind 9
Dear Vaiari of many paths!
Henry: 084 1
The evil record of To'ahotu
O To'ahotu ti'ira'a tapu! 11
E fenua 'ino, 6
Fenua fao, e fenua tapu, 11
'E'ita e fa'aherehere i te ari'i, 15
Ua rave, ua rave roa, 10
Opapa, opapa Vairaō!
'Tis Toahotu, recoursed to for sacrifices! 15
A bad land, 3
Land of black art, land of sacrifices. 10
It spares not princes, 6
When it takes, it takes to keep, 10
Triumphant over Vairaō!
Henry: 084-085 1
Song of Vairao
Fa'a rua rahi ta'iripū te mata'i e! 16
Na-ni'a iho na Ma'atea, 10
I pa'ipa'i e Hamuri, 9
Totoro a'era i poutini, 11
I te 'utufare o te toa! 10
I hitimahuta to'u ara, 10
I te rau tou i te tamaru o Tane ra, 15
A pe'e mai e! 6
E faa'i rа e ta'ai; 8
Te ta'i mai ra te mata'i i Toa-roa 15
I Tapu'ae raha,te ava nei e! 13
A fa'ati'a i te tira, e tira, 12
O Tapu'ae-raha i te haere; 12
Ei tutua tira ei tetere a va'a. 15
Ei tau fenua a tere, 10
A tere i mata'i 'oe, e fa'ai i te'ie 17
I te hi'u o te tira. 8
Te fenua i mua i umea mai, 13
O Vaiari iti a muna e, 11
O Vaiuriri nui a tere i mahoa, 15
O Papara nui ia Oro hua re'a. 14
Ua matata ia noa, rohirohi vave, 15
Fa'aea noa ihora te pu'e tahu'a 15
I ti'atere to'na aroha. 10
E 'Oputu te manu na'na i hipa, 12
I hipa ti'a a tai, 8
Ua ao mai nei i te aroha, 13
O ta'u fenua ra, o Vai-uru. 12
O Ma'atea te mou'a, 9
Tahua o Poti'i, te aha ri'i 12
I Nu'utere o Moe-te-rа-uri Ari'i. 14
Ua hopu i te tai au i Vai-uru e, 16
O vehia tua i te mata'i a 12
Te to'ofа i taha roa. 8
Tatou e noho а 6
I te hutu manu noa, 8
Ta heē mai i te are.
O great double valley of concentrated breezes! 16
Over (mount) Ma'atea (White-sling). 11
Come gusts and Hamuri (Trade-wind). 10
Creeping round many pillars, 8
Of the home of the warrior! 9
Oh, I was startled in awakening, 10
With leaves of the Cordia in Tane's shade. 14
As they fell! 3
Now fill up (the sails) and travel; 9
The wind is whistling at Toa-roa (Long-rock), 12
At the harbor of Tapu'ae-raha (Extended-footstep)! 17
Erect the masts, masts 5
To pass through Tapu'ae-raha; 10
Let there be many masts to sail the canoe. 13
Along my shores you must sail, 9
Sail in the wind that fills the sails 10
In the trail of the masts. 7
The lands before [us] that were drawn apart, 12
Are, Vaiari of enchantment, 10
Great Papeuriri that moved off resplendently, 14
[And] Great Papara of 'Oro of yellow body. 13
Exhausted quite, soon fatigued, 13
Then rested the artisans 7
Whose emotions overcame them. 11
The albatross was the bird that proudly turned, 12
That proudly turned out to sea, 10
And returned in love, 7
For my land, Vai-uru (Enchanted-water). 11
Ma'atea is the hill, 7
The assembly ground is Poti'i, the little prayers 14
Are at Nu'utere (marae) of King Moe-te-ra-uri (Sleep-of-darkened-sun). 25
Oh, I have bathed in the sea of Vai-uru, 15
When the sea was rolled by the wind of 10
Chieftains of long coast. 8
Let us dwell on 4
In the spray of the birds, 6
And ride upon the waves.
Henry: 086 1
Sign of Mataoae
Tuti'i fa'efa'ea o Mata'oae, 14
Mata'oae nui ia aifenua! 14
O Mata'oae te atua hiva e riri noa, 17
Te ai o Mata'oae te mea ro'o rahi; 16
E au'ati te ma'a roa, 10
E aurima o ma'a poto, 10
E noha ta'i vinivini 9
O Pouou-ma-fenua, 9
I Mata'oae nui aifenua!
Fickle ancestor is Mata'oae. 11
Great land-grasping Mata'oae! 10
'Tis Mata'oae of hasty gods of clans. 11
The eating at Mata'oae is proverbial; 15
The under attrition is the long vegetable, 14
The upper attrition is the short vegetable. 14
A sage who wept bitterly was 8
Pouou-ma-fenua (Post-barked-to-the-ground), 15
Of great-land-grasping Mata'oae.
Henry: 088-089 1
Song of Afa'ahiti
E fenua tera, e fenua terera'a no'u e! 17
O Taravao nui ia nu'u'tu na raro e, 16
To farapai e te ara, 9
Te patia ri'i mata'oi'oi. 12
Te huira'a mapua i te vai maru, 14
Tara'a i te tuna tapahi noa. 12
O matai tupuna te taro 10
Pota ao nunui i te aia. 12
Toia va'a tei vaiova'u 12
O aru hotu 5
I te amara e rurura'a tini, 12
I te tupe iti i te ara o te ava, 14
I te ohiti mata-roroa i tahatai e, 16
Pahua i te one tea o te a'au, 14
E honu, e fai i te aero haavinivini 17
I To'a-pū i te parau ri'i here. 14
Pō na Afa'ahiti, 8
Tai haruru i te ava fa'ahaha, 13
E 'a'orara'a-moa ri'i 10
Te fa'aro'ohia mai i uta. 12
Tei Afa'ahiti te i'a ma'a 12
I tū ti'a i te anuanua. 12
Opu pa'ia i te tai e pō, 12
I Motu-nono i te fe'e onohi noa; 14
'Ai urа i te fe'i fa'ari'ari, 12
I te tō farara, i te poti, i te 'ai'a 16
Puna tea e na hui tapairu.
O, that is land, my land that moved! 8
There is great Taravao that moved below, 14
By emulation and adoration, 11
In piercing with sharpened (tools). 10
The water weed lies thick in the shady river, 13
Where the eel is cleaved asunder. 12
An heirloom is the taro 9
With broad leaf, of the heritage. 11
Launch the canoe Vaiova'u 11
Of the breaking waves 7
Over the numerous tiger shells, 10
Over the numerous little cockles of the passage, 16
Over the long-eyed little crabs of the shore, 13
The Tridacna in the white sand of the reef, 13
The turtle and rayfish with stinging tail, 11
At Toa-pu (Mid-ocean-rock) with the dear little pearls. 17
When night falls on Afa'ahiti, 9
While the sea rolls in its shifting course, 13
The little cockcrowings 6
Are heard from inland. 7
At Afa'ahiti are fishes spreading [fins] 14
That resemble the rainbow. 8
Satisfied is the appetite at night, 12
At Motu-nono of the crouching octopus; 13
Then there eat the tapering plantain, 12
The leaning sugar-cane, and purple taro of the heritage 19
With clear spring and the waiting maids.
Henry: 094-095 1
Source: Mr. Phillip Henry, son of the Rev. William Henry, who lived many years at Papeto’ai 32
Chant of Mo'orea
'O 'Aimeo i te rara varu 11
Te fenua i pa'i hia 9
E te Ari'ii Ra'a-poto. 10
'O Fa'ato'ai te fenua e, 11
Opo'o-tū tauа e! 8
'O Matiti te marae, 8
'O Vai-'ai'a te pape, 9
'O Mave iti, O Mave rahi, 10
Mave i te 'uru tuouo e! 11
Tau fe'e ro'oa 7
'I paepae-ara, 7
'I te fare muhu area, 9
Te fare orerorero-ra'a o te hui toа 15
'E ru'uru'u opu 7
'E mа'a na te toа. 5
To'erau i te aria roa 11
Na ni'a mai i te uri a Ra'a.
'Tis 'Aimeo of eight radiations (mountain ranges), 19
The land where dwelt 5
King Raa-poto (Sacredness-of-short-duration). 14
Fa'ato'ai is the land, O, 9
Of the warrior chiefs! 7
Matiti (Growth-of-verdure) is the marae, 13
Vai-'ai'a (Water-of-the-heritage) is the river, 17
Flowing gently, flowing swiftly, 6
Flowing in the woods amid shouting, O! 12
Thy octopus [comes], 5
To the black stone pavement, 8
To the house of occasional murmurings, 14
The house of warriors' parliament 12
Where the abdomen is girded, 9
Where the food is for the warriors. 11
North wind from distant regions 8
Comes upon the shades of Sacredness (the god).
Henry: 102 1
Source: the scholar Raiti 9
Huahine war song
0
E tapiria i te pua hau-ou 13
E ta'aia i te aha o Vai-tarae, 15
Ia mau te 'iato o to va'a, 12
A ro'ohia 'oe e te mata'i, 12
Te Fa'a-rua roa ia Mere. 11
No te outu i To'erau-roa, 12
Tahirihiria na i te tahua 12
O Tama-pua, 5
Tahiripaoa te mata'i 10
No te tara i pi'iura. 9
E fatifati na te nuanua iti 13
O Mou'a-tapu, 6
Ia ta'aia e te more o Ti-rave, 14
Ia tu'ia e te ava-roa o Tū-'opa 16
E riro atu ai te mou'a 11
I te tahi ari'i ē atu.
Hold close to the flower of the pledge of peace, 15
Tie with the sennit of Vai-tarae (Water-of-weeds, land), 18
Make fast the outrigger props of your canoe, 15
Lest you be overtaken by the wind, 10
The North-wind from distant [Orion's Belt]. 10
From Cape of To'erau-roa, 10
Fanning the assembly ground 7
Of Tama-pua (Limestone-child; at Maeva), 14
Tempestuous is the wind 8
From the raging corner. 6
When the strength is broken 6
From Mou'a-tapu (Sacred-mountain), 12
When it is traversed by warriors unprepared of Ti-rave 17
When it is struck with the long stone of Tu-opa, 13
Then will the mountain belong 9
To some other king.
Henry: 114 1
Address to Pomare by typical vassel state
E Pomare Ari'i i Taraho'i, Tū nui-e-a'a-i te atua i te ra'i ma te ata, Teri'i e tui i te ra'i. Teri'i Hinoi-atua, i te tautua i te ra'i, i ra'i a naunau, Te-niu-roa e ti'a i hiti, te vi e tupu i te moana, Te-Ari'i-nui i Tahiti! 100
Teie mai nei to pu'e ta'ata o Te'aharoa, e ono, tei Taraho'i nei, tei mua i to aro.
O King Pomare of Tarahoi, Tū (Stability-who-settles-the-gods-of-the-cloudy-skies) the king who pierces the sky, King Hinoi-atua (Silent-with-the-gods), of the numerous skies, of the beloved skies; Te-niu-roa (The-tall-coconut-tree) that stands on the border, Te-vi (The-vо-tree) that grows in mid-ocean, the great-king of Tahiti! 98
Here are thy people of the six districts in Te'aharoa, here at Taraho'i, in thy presence.
Henry: 122 1
Ancient historic record of the Leeward Islands
A noho Te-fatu ia Te-ura i Porapora, fanau ta raua tamari'i, o Maro-te-tini e o Te-vae-a-ra'i. A haere o Te-fatu e te tamaiti, o Maro-te-tini, i Taha'a ('Uporu), a tu'u ta Taha'a vahi, e uira, e auri, e ato'a, e a-tau-rearea. A haere i Ra'iatea (Havai'i) a tu'u i ta Ra'iatea, e tore, e havae-mata-pe, e urua-puru; e moe te heiva. A haere i Huahine, a tu'u i ta Huahine, e fau-tu, e fau-aha, e uri, hotu, a nui; e maro te heiva. Ho'i atura i Porapora, a tu'u i ta Porapora, e au, e rori, e u'u e 'oti'oti i te tara fare o Havai'i; e hoe te heiva. Te-fatu took to wife Te-'ura at Porapora, and the children they begat were Maro-te-tini (Persistent-myriads) and Te-vae-a-ra'i (Divider-of-the-sky). Te-fatu and his son, Maro-te-tini, went to Taha'a ('Uporu) and gave to Taha'a lightning, saplings, athletes, and everlasting-luxuriance. They went to Ra'iatea (Havai'i) and gave to Ra'iatea the oval sea-urchin and the globular sea-urchin with small spines, the sodden cavalli fish; and sleep was their diversion. They went to Huahine and gave to Huahine straight hibiscus and hibiscus with fissures, to shade, blossom and become great; and argument was their diversion. Then they returned to Porapora and gave to Porapora the sea snail, the sea cucumber, and the mussel to cut off the end of the house of Havai'i; and paddling was their diversion.
Henry: 123 1
Commemoration of alliance with the Maori
Na ni'a Te-ao-uri, 8
Na raro Te-ao-tea, 8
E tō roa te manu e 9
E hi'o i te hiti o te rā! 11
E mo'otua no Piho i te maro taino'a, 16
E hume i to maro taino'a. 11
Porapora i te hoe mamu, 10
E hoe te heiva.
Above is Te-ao-uri, 9
Below is Te-ao-tea, 8
All encompassed by the birds 7
As they look towards the east! 9
Grandson of Piho (Splash-and-shout) of the seaweed girdle, 17
Gird on the girdle of seaweed. 10
Porapora of the silent paddle, 10
Paddling is thy diversion.
Henry: 124-125 1
Chant of the priests of 'Oro
A 'ai ra i te ia vavae roroa na 'oe, e ta'u ari'i, e 'Oro-mata-'oa! A 'ai i te i'a o te tai na 'oe, e ta'u ari'i, e 'Oro-tauа! Manava 'outou e te nu'u atua, i te tairurura'a mai ia 'Oronei i to'na 'utufare, ei 'utuafare no te mau atua ato'a. Maeva te atua! Now eat of the long-legged fish, 'Oro-mata-'oa! O my king. Eat of thy fish of the sea, my king, 'Oro-tauа (Fighting-warrior); Welcome to you, O host of gods, in coming here to 'Oro in his home; the home of all the gods. Hail to the gods!
Henry: 131 1
Lamentation of Tahitians because of burden of marae restrictions
Toti, Tota! E papahia Tahiti i mua i te marae! Bowed down, forsooth! Crushed will be Tahiti before the marae!
Henry: 132 1
Marae dedication prayer
Tahi ti'a mai e te atua e, i ta matou nei pure! 21
Inaha, te pūpū hia'tu nei e matou, na va'a mataeina'a o teie nei hau, i teie fenua, ei vahi mo'a na 'oe, ei ti'ara'a marae e ei ti'ara'a fare no 'oe. 71
Teie te 'ta'ata ei tapu ha'amo'a na matou i mua i to'oe ei aro, e te Atua e, teie te 'Ofa'i-faoa mo'a no te 'utufare ta matou e ha'a no 'oe e no te nu'u atua e haere mai ia 'oe nei ei manihini na 'oe, e te atua e! 'O ta matou teie pure, a tahiti'a mai e te Atua e!
Hearken unto us O god, in this our prayer! 14
Behold, we the clans of this kingdom present to thee this land, to become sacred to thee, upon which to build a temple and houses for thee. 41
Here is a man as a pledge of consecration from us in thy presence, O god, here is the sacred 'Ofa'i-faoa (chief-corner-stone) of the home we shall make for thee and the host of gods who will come to visit thee as thy guests, O god! This is our prayer, hearken unto us, O god!
Henry: 140-141 1
Song about Maha'i-atea marae
Inaha Maha'i-atea! 9
Ua mou'a rua Papara, 10
E mou'a e o Mou'a Tamaiti, 13
E mou'a e o Maha'i-atea. 12
Eaha'tu e au ai 9
I tereira ha'apaoraa? 11
E marae ahu iti Maha'i-atea, 14
Mai te tarava ra'a mato ra 11
Ia paiuma.
Behold Maha'i-atea! 8
Two [kinds of] mountains has Papara, 11
One kind is Mount Tamaiti, 10
Another kind is Maha'i-atea. 11
To what else may be compared 9
such a construction? 6
A temple encompassed with steps is Maha'i-atea, 16
Like extended rocks 6
To mount upon.
Henry: 143 1
Priestly injunction on a family marae
Eiaha te rouru paoti hia e tahu hia i te auahi, a pahure te upo'o o te ta'ata no'na te rouru. Eiaha te mai-u'u ta'ata i 'o'oti hia ra, eiaha te a'ahu ri'i piro, te fenu ri'i peue e te ma'a tapa no te ro'i ia tahu hia i te auahi; e iho ia no te tino ta'ata, e humehume hia te iri e e po te mata o te ta'ata no'na tana mau mea ra ia tutui hia i te auahi; e tanu ra i taua mau mea ra i roto i te apo'o, i te tiria-pera, e 'aore ia e ha'amo'e roa i te tai hohonu. Let not the cuttings of the human hair be burned with fire, lest the owner of the hair become bald. Let not the nail prunings of a person, or the worn out clothes, or shredded mats or tapa from the bedding be burned with fire; these are the essence of the person, and there would follow moles upon the skin and blindness to the owner if they burned them; but bury those things in the hole, tiri-a-pera, or drop them into the deep sea.
Henry: 146-147 1
Canoe builder's "putting hatchet to sleep" song
A ti'i a naonao i te to'i, 12
I te rua to'i i Havai'i; 11
E naoa, e iritia uruuru hia, 15
E pepee hia, ia hoa hia 12
I te ha'a tua mea. 8
I fa'aina hia i te one mata huahua; 17
I tavai hia i te one mata ri'i; 14
I tapiri hia i te miro moa ma fau tu, 16
E faua i te aha mata tini a Tane. 15
E raa te to'i 6
I te aha mata ioio a te tahua, 15
E u e mau 5
Ei maro no te to'i, 8
Ei fafau no te to'i, 9
Te tua no te to'i, 7
Ei 'o'iri no te to'i; 9
Ei mama no te to'i, 8
Ei taputapu no te to'i, 10
Ei tuitui no te to'i, 10
Ei fa'aoti no te to'i, 10
Ei ta mana no te to'i.
Go and take hold of the axe, 9
In the aperture in Havai'i, 11
Hold, that it be taken out enchanted, 11
Made light; that it may produce sparks 10
In doing varied work. 7
It is whetted with fine sand; 8
Made smooth with loose-grained sand; 12
It is set in a firm handle of sacred miro, 13
United with many-stranded sennit of Tane. 12
The axe will become sacred 9
In the brilliant sennit of the artisan, 12
Which touches and holds 6
As a girdle for the axe, 8
For the handle of the axe, 8
The back of the axe, 6
To make one the axe and the handle, 12
To make light the axe, 7
To consecrate the axe, 8
To impel the axe, 6
To complete the axe, 7
To give power to the axe.
Henry: 147 1
Invocation to awaken an axe
E fa'arara'a no te to'i! 10
Ta'ai atu na i te to'i, 10
Pupu, e aro, e ra'ai. 9
Fa'atae atu i te to'i i mua i te 'au, 17
E rahiri i te maro rere, 10
E ara no Tane, 6
Atua tahu'a nui; 8
E ara no Ta'ere ma opoopo, 12
E ara no Te-Fatu nu'u, 9
E ara no Ta'aroa, 8
Metua a te nu'u atua.
The awakening of the axe! 9
Let it travel a little seaward, 10
Present it (there), let it fight and attack. 11
Let the axe go against the spray 10
Inaugurating its flying girdle, 10
Awake for Tane, 6
Great god of artisans; 7
Awake for Ta'ere of all skill, 10
Awake for Te-fatu of hosts, 9
Awake for Ta'aroa, 8
Father of all the gods.
Henry: 150-151 1
Chant on Marae
O te marae nei te mou'a e te hanahana o te fenua; 'o te teoteora'a ia o te ta'ata no teie mau fenua. O' to te fenua ia unauna te marae; a aora'i ia i pupu hia na te atua. 79
'A'ore e ta'ata i ta'ahi noa i to te tahi e ra marae, i ha'apao ra i to ratou iho. No te marae tupuna nei i tao hia ai e e ai'a fenua to te ta'ata. 66
E vahi hahano rahi e te hau rahi te marae; ei tere pure to te ta'ata i tae atu ai i reira 'a'ore atu e tere ē, A'ore te atua i vare. Ia tae te ta'ata i te vahi marae ra, e nao e atu ia te haere, e tu'u i te ahu i raro mai te tapono e tae atu i te papa, e mau raro hia te hopoia i te rima, e ia moe atu taua marae ra. 143
Ei te otue toro i tai ra te marae ari'i; ei te ooa ra ta marae o te ra'atira; 'o uta ra na te mau poti'i ia, oia te manahune. 57
E vahi ra'a te marae, e vahi hahano; e fa'atupura'a manava hirahira, e vahi iriha te marae. 39
E mea ri'ari'a roa te marae o te hui ari'i; te marae tupuna e te marae o te fenua! E vahi turuma ta'a e roa, e vahi amiami e te hauriria; e vahi mamae no te tahu'a e te fatu, e na te mau ta'ata ato'a. E mea mamae te patu marae; ia hape noa te pua'a i te patu marua ra, e 'ore roa te fatu pua'a e 'ite fa'ahou atu, mo'a ihora ia na te atua. Te va'a e hoe na tahatai ra e fa'a'ateatea roa ia tae i te otue marae ari'i ra, e tu'u te ahu o te ta'ata i raro, e hoe maru noa e ia ta'a e atu taua vahi ra. 223
E mana to te tihi marae; te ta'ata e a'ua'u hia e te 'aito ra, te orure hau e te titi, ia a'ua'u hia e tupai ra, e horo i mua i te marae e ora ia. Area ra te ta'ata i ha'apaohia ei tapu ra, 'a'ore a'na e vahi oraora i te fenua nei. Ia horo oia i mua i te marae ra, o te ha'apohe ra'a 'tu ia, o te vaira'a mau ia. 142
I riro te fare o te ta'ata mana ei marae no'na; e ora te ta'ata ia horo i roto i taua fare ra, eiaha te feia i ha'apaohia ei tapu. No reira te parau i nao hia nei e: "E are 'oe i te iriaputa mua o to'u fare; o ta'u marae hoi to'u fare, o te ahu mua tei to'u iriaputa mua. 124
E mea poiri rumaruma i te ra'au nui o taua mau marae ra; e o te hau roa i te ra'a o te miro ia, oia te amara; E ta'ere tera no te 'oro'a; E ta'ere tera no te Ari'i; E fa'a'ara i te atua; E ha'amau i te maro o te Ari'i.
Marae were the sanctity and glory of the land; they were the pride of the people of these islands. The ornaments of the land were the marae, they were the palaces presented to the gods. 55
People did not intrude upon others' marae, but they adhered to their own. It was owing to the ancestral marae that people could say they had an inheritance. 51
A place of dread and of great silence was the marae; a person's errand must be to pray in going there, but for no other purpose. The gods could not be deceived. When persons approached a place where stood a marae, they gave it wide berth, they lowered their clothes from their shoulders down to their waists, and carried low their burdens in their hands, until they got out of sight of it. 118
Upon the prominent points were the royal marae; in the bays were the gentlemen's marae; and behind them were the marae of the girls, that is, the common people. 49
A holy place was the marae, an awe-inspiring place; it was a place that awakened conscience, a dreaded place. 37
Terrible were the marae of the royal line; their ancestral and national marae! They were places of stupendous silence, terrifying and awe-inspiring; places of pain to the priests, to the owners, and to all the people. The walls of these marae were repelling; when a pig chanced to stray upon a wall fallen down, its owners never saw it again, it became sacred to the gods. When a canoe passed along the shore, it withdrew far off as it approached the point where stood the royal marae, the people lowered their clothes, and paddled lightly until they passed the place. 175
Potent were the horns of the marae; fugitives that were chased by warriors, conspirators and captives who were chased to be slain, would run to the front of the marae and were saved. But persons destined to be sacrificed, found no place of refuge in all the land. When they ran before the marae, they were slain there, that was their proper place. 106
The house of a great man became his marae; persons escaped being slain when they ran into his home, except those appointed for sacrifices. From this circumstance arose these words: "Beware of the front door of my house; my house is my marae, the front door has the front step. 85
It was dark and shadowy among the great trees of those marae; and the most sacred of them all was the miro which was the sanctifier. That was the basis of the ordinances; It was the basis of royalty; It awakened the gods; It fixed the 'uru girdle of sovereigns.
Henry: 151 1
Song for 'opu-nui handling 'apa'a
E ruru, e ruru tuatua, 10
I tae mai te varovaro o ta'na i'e e! 16
O hi'i ma epa epa, 8
Homai ei puro'u 8
Ei fa'ano'ano'a a te fenua o 14
Ro'o te roro'o, 6
A nini te aitu. 7
Oi rи, oi rи, 4
Oi roro vau nei e!
O roll [of cloth], O immense roll, 9
That came with sound of its mallet! 10
'Tis to nurse, to give rest, rest, 9
To give as a wrapper 7
For sweet odor in the land of 9
Ro'o, the prayer chanter, 7
To let the gods come to and fro. 9
Almost overcome, overcome, 10
Overpowered am I!
Henry: 155 1
Closing night invocation
E te nu'u atua e! E ma'ma' te upu. Ei poiri i vaho ei maramarama i roto mai te tahe vai u'e. Ei manu'u a horo, ei ueue a vi, ei tau tapa ohie. 66
Homai i te upu, homai i te vana'a, homai i te orero, ei te pō tahi nei e te atua e! Fano i te ra e hiti aera. Tei te ra e hiti a'ere te ora, e te atua e!
O host of the gods! The prayer must close. Send obscurity out, and let light come in as the flow of the freshet. Let it move and run, let it shake out [to fill] tightly; let it be means of accomplishing much. 56
Give [me the gift of] prayer; let me become a herald, and orator, in one night, O gods! Fly to the rising sun, with the sun that is rising is life, O gods!
Henry: 156 1
Newly initiated priest's right to title
'E'ere au it te tipara, 'e'ere au i te aihamu! E upu Ta'ere au. 29
E purau ta'u i hopoi na te 'orometua; e i'a ta'u i tapupu na te 'orometua; e ahu vane ta'u i hopoi na te 'orometua; e pe'ue ta'u i hopoi na te 'orometua; e popoi ta'u i papahia na te 'orometua; e e pua'a feti'i ta'u i hopoi na te 'orometua.
I am no beggar; I am no eater of scraps! An invoker from Ta'ere am I. 23
Purau [bark] have I taken to the teachers; fish I have chopped for the teachers; finely braided clothes have I taken to the teachers; mats have I taken to the teachers; fruit batter have I pounded for the teachers; and family pigs have I taken to the teachers.
Henry: 158-159 1
Warning by messengers of the pa'i-atua service
E fati 'ava, e fati 'ava! 10
Auanei e fati ai! 10
Te ara i te tai e taimara hia, 14
No te va'a hoehoe a te atua, 13
Eiaha te va'a ta'ata ia fa'afarerei. 18
Eara i te 'e'a i uta, na te ari'i, 15
E ara, aua'a e haerea 12
Te ara nui e te ara ri'i! 11
Aua'a ana'e ia! 9
Ei ahi tapo'i; 7
Eiaha ei turama, a mahuta te atua; 17
Te ra'a no te atua e purara. 12
E vaere'a marae apopo; 11
Ei a'ahiata apopo atu, 12
E fa'aarara'a, 7
E fa'aaraara'a i te atua. 13
A ara o taura tahu'a, 10
A ara mai apopo! 8
E hopu i te vai, 7
Mirimiri i te mata, 8
E hume i te maro 'uo, 9
E noho i ni'a i te mahora 11
E noho e upu i te ahoa 11
No te vaere'a marae. 9
O te ara o te ari'i, 9
Te ara o te ta'ata, 8
To ara o na hui tapairu, 11
E e'e i te papa. 7
E ra'a apopo, 6
E vaere'a marae. 8
Ei te a'ahiata nui atu 12
E fa'arara'a atua. 9
O te atua i ni'a, te atua i raro; 15
Te atua i tai, te atua i uta; 14
Te atua i roto, te atua i vaho 14
E tae ana'e mai i teienei oroa. 17
E ra'a, mo'a!
The ava breaking, the ava breaking! 12
It is soon to break! 7
Avoid the sea restricted, 9
For the god's canoe for errands, 9
The people's canoes must not meet it. 12
Avoid the roads on shore, for the king, 12
Take heed and pass not 7
The highway and bypaths! 5
Avoid them all! 5
The fires must be extinguished; 10
Burn no light, lest the gods take flight; 9
Sacredness of the gods will pervade. 10
Weeding of the marae tomorrow; 11
The following morning early, 8
The awakening, 5
The awakening of the gods. 8
Awake, O body of priests, 8
Awake and come tomorrow! 9
Bathe yourselves, 6
Feel your faces, 6
Draw on the white girdle, 7
And sit upon the lawn 6
To recite the ahoa (life giving) 12
For weeding the marae. 8
'Tis the awakening of the king, 9
The awakening of the people, 10
The awakening of the waiting maids (lay worshippers), 16
Who will alight upon the stones (marae). 12
Sacredness tomorrow, 6
Weeding of the marae. 8
And in the early morning following 10
Awakening of the gods. 7
The gods above, the gods below; 9
The gods of the ocean, the gods of the land; 12
The gods within, the gods without; 9
They will all come to the ordinance. 11
'Tis sacredness, holiness!
Henry: 159-160 1
Ahoa chant
E vaere'a marae! 8
Te ra'u a rimu 6
Na Ro'o-te-roro'o, 7
E te nu'u atua. 7
E raua ia rimu. 8
E vaere'a marae! 8
Te huti a mo'u 6
Na Ro'o-te-roro'o, 7
E te nu'u atua, 7
E hutia ia mo'u, 8
E vaere'a marae! 8
O pohue toro i uta, 9
Na te rima e vaere e 9
Na Ro'o-te-roro'o, 7
E na te nu'u atua. 8
Purau nui e toro i uta 11
Na te rima e ha'amarari, 10
E tahiria te repo. 8
Riro ai te marae ei mea 'ai'ai 16
Ia Ro'o-te-roro'o 8
E i te nu'u atua, 8
E vaere ai nu'u. 8
Vaere ai ra'i, 7
Vaere ai fau-upo'o-tū. 12
Ei to'o'a te tua, 8
Ei hiti'a te aro, 8
Vaere atu ai 7
I hiti'a o te rā, 8
Te vaere'a marae 8
Na Ro'o-te-roro'o 7
E te nu'u atua.
It is marae weeding! 8
The scraping of moss 5
For Ro'o-te-roro'o (Fame-the-prayer-chanter), 14
And for the host of gods. 6
The moss will be scraped. 6
It is the marae weeding! 9
The pulling up of grass 6
For Ro'o-te-roro'o, 7
And for the host of gods. 6
The grass will be pulled up, 7
It is the marae weeding! 9
Pohue spreading inland, 8
The hands will weed out 7
For Ro'o-te-roro'o, 7
And for the host of gods. 6
Great purau spreading inland 10
The hands will clear out, 7
And swept will be the ground. 7
To render the marae attractive 11
To Ro'o-te-roro'o 7
And to all the host of gods, 7
Is why the assembly is weeding; 8
Why the king is weeding, 6
Why the chief warriors are weeding. 11
To the west (turn) the back, 6
To the east the face, 7
Then weed on 4
Towards the east, 5
The marae weeding is 8
For Ro'o-te-roro'o 7
And for the host of gods.
Henry: 161-162 1
Priest's song over marae leaf cup
I hara te marumaru, 8
E rau tupu e! 6
A tupu a ao, 6
A rito a mahora. 7
Fa'aipu a rara, 7
Te 'ape i hara i te 8
Marumaru o rau tupu e. 10
A ato i te 'ape 7
I hara i te marumaru 9
Teie rau tupu e. 8
Ua tohe atura i te vai; 11
'Naha te vai 5
I toina mai na. 7
A mа tohe, 3
Mа te vai nu'u, 5
O te vai tapu, 6
Te vai hopu aitu e! 9
Ua ha'apa 'tura! 7
Ua ha'apa o Ro'o-te-roro'o, 12
Ua ha'apa o Mā-u-i a nu'u, 13
O Mā-ū-i a ra'i. 9
Te ha'apa o rima ia pupuru, 12
Te ha'apa o rima ia rarave; 12
Oia i ha'apa hia mai ai 13
I te tino i te aha o te aitu nei. 15
E apa!
Astray in the shade, 6
Did this leaf grow! 5
It grew, it unfolded, 6
Became comely and expanded. 9
Formed a cluster and extended, 9
Did the 'ape that strayed 7
In the shade where this leaf grew. 10
Then plucked from the 'ape 7
Astray in the shade 6
Was this leaf that grew. 6
It forms a basin for the water; 9
Behold the water 5
That has come forth. 5
Clean is the basin, 6
Clean the moving water; 7
'Tis the holy water, 5
The bathing water for the gods! 8
'Tis accepted! 4
Accepted by Ro'o-te-roro'o, 9
Accepted by Mā-ū-i of hosts 10
Mā-ū-i of heaven 9
Accepted from firm hands, 6
Accepted from hands that grasp, 7
Accepted for the use of 8
The bodies in sennit of the gods here (present). 14
It will ward off evil!
Henry: 162-164 1
Tu'utu'ura'a 'arere chant
E Ti'a-o-atea, arere a te atua, a t'ia i ni'a, a mirimiri i to mata, a hopu i te pape, a hume i te maro, a ahu i to puri nui hamatua, e toto'o nui i to rima, a horo i Mou'a'ura i 'Uporu (Taha'a), ia Tane e ta'na nu'u atua, e haere mai i Opoa nei, ei atua i teie nei 'oro'a. 121
E pure to te ao nei, i 'utu'a fare o 'Oro Tauā. 22
E Rei-tū, arere a te atua, a ti'a i ni'a ... e a horo i Tai-nunа, ia Tū ma Te-mehara, e haere mai i Opoa nei, ei atua i teie nei 'oro'a. 62
A horo a, Rei-tu, i hiti'a, ia Ro'o-te-ro'oro'o e i to na hoa, ia Hoani, e haere mai ... 37
E Nevaneva ... a horo i Fare-papa-ha'uriuri i te moana ia Rua-hatu e ia Hau, e haere mai ... A horo atu ai i Papa-uri e i Papa-tea, i te nu'u atua i Hiva, e haere mai ... 74
E Irinau ... a horo i Paparoa, i te atua, ia Ra'a, e haere mai ...; e horo ai 'oe i te papa nui i te vao, ia To'a-hiti, e haere mai ...; e na te pae vai 'oe te ho'i mai, e Irinau, ro'o hia 'tu, o Punua-moe-vai, e haere mai ... 95
E Ti'a-o-uri ... a horo i te Pō, ia Ta'aroa ma Rua-tupua-nui ...; e a horo atu ai i raro i Rua-papa-nui, ia Ta'ere-maopo'opo e tena pu'e tahu'a ... A horo atu ai 'oe, e Ti'a-o-uri, i Rohutu-no'ano'a, ia Roma-tane ...; a horo mai ai na te ahu-ta'a, i te 'oromatua hamani maita'i, e te 'oromatua hamani 'ino, e haere ana'e mai i Opoa nei ... E a horo a'ena, e Ti'a-o-'uri, i na ofa'i turu'i nei, ia Ro'o-te-roro'o, te atua-tahu'a-nui, e fano mai i teie nei oro'a. 200
A ti'a i ni'a, a horo, e na 'arere nei, i tera pu'e atua, e na ratou e ta'o atu i tera tini atua, i tera mano atua, te atua i ni'a, te atua i raro te atua i tai, te atua i uta, te atua i vaho, te atua i roto, te atua o te pō, te atua o te ao, e haere ana'e mai ei atua i teie nei 'oro'a. 131
E pure to te ao nei; tu'utu'ua te arere! 18
Te 'arere ia vai? O Ti'a-o-atea, te 'arere ia Tane. E manava ta Tane, e manava ta te nu'u atua 41
"Mana, e Ti'a-o-atea!" 9
Te ta'o o Tane: "E Ti'a-o-atea, a tahi tere nui?" 20
"E! E tere nui to'u! Horo mai nei au ia 'outou i Mou'a-'ura nei e haere i Opoa; e pure to te ao. E pа, e tu'u roto, e penapena, 'imi aitu, e aitu hia mai, i te 'utu'afare o 'Oro taua." 82
"E Ti'a-o-atea e, ua ti'a to tere e fano matou i tena 'oro'a i te 'utu'afare o 'Oro Taua." 40
Te ho'i mai nei o Ti'a-o-atea, 'e pe'e hia mai e Tane e te nu'u atua. 31
Te 'arere ia vai? O Rei-tū, te 'arere ia Tū ma Temehara i Tai-nuna ...
O Ti'a-o-atea (Approver-of-extension), messenger of the gods, arise and feel thy face, bathe in the water, draw on thy loin-girdle, put on thine official clothing, take a great walking stick, and run to Mou'a-'ura (Red-Mountain) in 'Uporu (Tahaa), for Tane and his host of gods to come to Opoa, as gods for this ordinance. 102
There is prayer in this world, in the home of Warrior 'Oro. 18
O Rei-tu (Straight-neck), messenger of the gods, arise ... and run to Tai-nuna (Mixed-up-shoal, land), for Tū and Te-mehara (Memory), to come to Opoa, as gods for this ordinance. 54
Go also, Rei-tu, to the east for Ro'o-te-ro'oro'o and his friend Hoani (Tempter) to come ... 30
O Nevaneva (Look-around) ... run to Fare-papa-hauriuri (Rock-house-of-rank-odor) in the ocean, for Rua-hatu and Hau to come ... Then run to Papa-uri (Dark-rock) and Papa-tea (Light-rock, Ma'atea) for the host of gods of Hiva, to come ... 76
O Irinau (Healing-skin) ... run to Papa-roa (Long-rock), to the god Ra'a to come ...; then run to the great cliff of the inland recess, for To'a-hiti (Bordering-rock) to come ...; and return hither by way of the river bank, O Irinau, and get Punua-moe-vai (Sleeper-in-side-pool) to come ... 86
O Ti'a-o-uri (Approver-of-darkness) ... run to Pō for Ta'aroa and Rua-tupua-nui ... and run also down to Rua-papa-nui (Great-rock-cavern), for Ta'ere-maopo'opo and his artisans ... Then run, O Ti'a-o-uri, to Rohutu-no'ano'a (Paradise) for Roma-tane (Voluptuous man) ...; and come on by way of the wall-of-skulls, for kind ghosts and the malignant ghosts, all to come hither, to Opoa ... And just come, O Ti'a-o-'uri, to these kneeling stones, for Ro'o-te-roro'o, the high priest god, to come to this ordinance. 159
Arise, and run, O messengers here present, to those gods, and they will bid the numerous gods, the thousands of gods, the gods above, the gods below, the gods of the sea, the gods of the land, the gods without, the gods within, the gods of darkness, the gods of light, to come as gods for this ordinance. 82
There is prayer in this world, the messengers are dispatched! 17
Whose messenger is it? It is Ti'a-o-atea, the messenger for Tane. Tane welcomes him, his host of gods welcome him 36
"Welcome, Ti'a-o-atea!" Tane says: 12
"O Ti'a-o-atea, a great errand?" 12
"I have a great errand," says Ti'a-o-atea. "I have run hither to Mou'a-'ura for you all to go to Opoa; there is prayer in the world. There is exclusion and admittance of an assembly, a seeking of gods, and gods are coming to the home of Warrior 'Oro." 83
"O Ti'a-o-atea, thine errand is agreeable, we shall go to the ordinance in the house of Warrior 'Oro." 37
'Ti'a-o-atea is returning hither to be followed by Tane and his host. 22
Whose messenger is it? It is Rei-tu, the messenger for Tū and Temehara of Tai-nuna (land) ...
Henry: 162a 2
Māui-marae and Māui-fatarau chant
0
Ia ora te fenua! Ua ora te ma'i o te marae, ua vaere hia, ua ioio. Ua ora te ma'i o te unu. 44
Ua ora te ma'i o te fata rau. 13
Ua ora te ma'i o te 'utuafare o te atua. E haere ana'e mai te atua, e ū ma te uri.
May the land live! The marae is restored, it is weeded and become handsome. The carved ornaments are renewed. 36
The alters are renewed. 8
The home of the gods is renewed. The gods will all come, and gather in the darkness.
Henry: 162b 1
Tarotaro preliminary invocation
0
E te atua e! e aroha mai i to taura tahu'a nei. E fare nohora'a to te 'opu-nui, e to te mau uru, e pure 'iri anu ra matou, e 'ore e ta'oto, i teie 'aru'i, e rari i te hau, eiaha rа ia rari i te ua e te atua e!
O gods! Have mercy upon your body of priests here (present). The 'opu-nui and the possessed images have a house, but we shall be praying chilly, without sleep, this night; we shall be wet with dew, but let us not be wet with rain, O gods!
Henry: 164 1
Announcement of coming of the gods
E arere e horo mai! O Ro'o arere. Eaha te tere i te ao nei? Te vana'a mai nei ia Tane e te nu'u atua a Tane, i te ra'i hamama tua tini, o Tane fenua roa, e fano mai nei i teie 'oro'a. 82
E 'arere e horo mai! O Rei-tū. Te vana'a mai nei i Tū-nui-ae-i-te-atua, ia Te-mehara, e ia Ro'o-te-ro'oro'o, e fano mai i teie nei oroa. 64
Ovai teie 'arere e horo mai nei? O Nevaneva. 21
Te vana'a mai nei ia Rua-hatu e ia Hau, o te moana, e i te nu'u atua Hiva e fano mai i teie oroa. 46
Ovai teie 'arere e horo mai nei? o 'Iri-nau. 21
Te vana'a mai nei ia Ra'a, ia Toa-hiti, e ia Punua-moe-vai, e fano mai i teie nei 'oro'a. 42
E arere e horo mai! O Ti'a-o-uri. 15
Te vana'a mai nei ia Ta'aroa ma Rua-tupua-nui, ia Ta'ere ma'opo'opo e ta'na pu'e tahu'a; ia Roma-tane e i te nu'u-'oromatua hamani maita'i, e te 'oromatua hamani 'ino, te fano ana'e mai nei i teie nei 'oro'a. 94
Ovai teie atua e na mua roa mai nei? 19
O Ro'o-te-roro'o, te atua tahu'a nui, i fano mai i teie nei oro'a. 30
Na ho'i te ara o te atua! Ua ara ana'e te atua, te fano mai nei i teie nei 'oro'a!
A messenger is coming! It is Ro'o, the messenger. What is his errand? He is heralding Tane and the host of gods of Tane of the open tenth sky, of Tane of distant lands, who are flying to this ordinance. 57
A messenger is coming! It is Rei-tu. He is heralding Tū-nui-ae-i-te-atua (Stability-greatest-of-the-gods), and Temehara, and Ro'o-te-ro'oro'o, who are flying to this ordinance. 60
Who is the messenger coming hither? It is Nevaneva. 16
He is heralding Rua-hatu and Hau, of the ocean, and also the host of gods of Hiva, who are flying to this ordinance. 37
Who is this messenger running hither? It is 'Iri-nau. 16
He is heralding Ra'a. Toa-hiti, and Punua-moe-vai, who are flying to this ordinance. 29
A messenger is coming. It is Ti'a-o-uri. 14
He is heralding Ta'aroa and Rua-tupua-nui; Ta'ere ma'opo'opo and his artisans; Roma-tane and the host of kind ghosts and malignant ghosts, who are flying hither to this ordinance. 57
Who is this god who comes foremost? 10
It is Ro'o-te-roro'o, the high priest god who has come to this ordinance. 23
Behold the awakening of the gods! The gods are all awake, they are flying hither to this ordinance!
Henry: 165a 2
Marae priests' chant ushering in dawn
0
Ua taha te ata i te ra'i, 11
Ua ara te ata! 7
Enа te ata e hiti 7
E hiti i te po'ipo'i; 9
E ata i puia-- 7
Puia ia ata poiri, 10
I oti matietie, 8
E mara'ara'a mai 'Oro-pa'а, 11
Te fatu moana, mai. 8
O maru i te pō 7
A taha te ata e hiti, 9
O te ata e tautape, 9
E fana 'tu i te rā. 8
I puia ia ata, 8
Aua'a i oti matietie, 12
E mara'ara'a mai 'Oro-pa'а, 11
Te fatu moana mai. 8
O maru i te pō 7
A taha, a ohiti te ata, 10
E tautape, e tatapa 9
E fana 'tu ia ata 'ura'ura, 12
No te rā e hiti mai 9
Mai 'Oro-pa'а o te moana mai.
The clouds are bordering the sky, 9
The clouds are awake! 8
There are the rising clouds 9
That ascend in the morning, 7
Clouds that are wafted-- 7
Wafted are those dark clouds, 9
Made perfect, 4
And lifted from 'Oro-pa'а, 7
Lord of the ocean. 6
In the shades of night 6
The clouds that rise embank, 8
The clouds condense, and 7
Form an archway for the sun. 7
The clouds are wafted, 7
Perfected betimes, 6
And lifted from 'Oro-pa'а, 7
The lord of the ocean. 7
In the shades of night 6
The clouds do rise, and part, 8
Condense, and reunite 8
Into an arch of red clouds, 8
For the sun as it rises 7
From 'Oro-pa'а of the ocean.
Henry: 165b 1
Marae priest's end of night's vigils
0
Ua ao, e ti'i ra tatou i te atua, ia oti te pai atua, o te ro'o noa hia mai ho'i e te ta'ata e pohe atu i tona aro
It is daytime, let us now fetch the gods, that we may get through the assembling of them before people come and die in their presence.
Henry: 166 1
Marae priest's chant when opening ark
Tara e, te matara e! 8
E tai e! Tai-nuná! 7
Tae i Tai-nuná 6
O ti'a. O tara e! 7
O tara tara'tara 7
Aha matara! 5
E metua Ta'aroa. 8
E 'aitū i te ra'i mea 11
E 'aitū i te ao e ati roa a'e 16
E tara e, matara e! 8
E tae i Tai-nunа. 7
E ha'apа, Aitū mo'a, 9
E Aitū hau roa nei! 11
E ha'apа i te rima e pupuru, 11
E ha'apа i te maui a nu'u, 11
E ha'apа i te maui i ra'i, 11
E ha'apа i to rima e pupuru, 11
E ha'apа i to rima ia raverave! 13
Tara e, te matara e! 8
E tai e! Tai-nunа! 7
Tei Tai-nunа ua ti'a, 9
Tei te ao e ati noa a'e. 12
O Tara taratara 7
Aha matara! 5
O tara iriti 6
Aha matara, 5
E aitu hau roa nei!
O enchantment, O undoing! 8
O seas! O Tai-nunа! 7
Extending to Tai-nunа 7
Is righteousness. O enchantment! 10
Enchantment of undoing 7
Sennit yielding! 5
Ta'aroa is the parent. 8
The ruddy sky contains gods. 6
All the world contains gods. 7
O enchantment, O undoing! 8
It will extend to Tai-nunа. 8
Hold back, holy god, 4
O got here supreme! 7
Control thy heavy hand, 5
Control the force of armies, 9
Control the force of the skies, 9
Control thy heavy hand, 5
Control thy hand as I handle (thee)! 9
O enchantment, O undoing! 8
O seas, Tai-nunа! 6
Righteousness extends to Tai-nunа, 11
Extends throughout the earth. 9
O enchantment of undoing 8
Sennit yielding! 5
O enchantment of uncovering 9
Sennit yielding, 5
O god here supreme!
Henry: 167 1
Address of marae worshippers to image of tutelar god
Ia ora na 'oe i te haere raa mai, e Tohoi-maro! Ia ora na 'oe i te haere ra'a mai! Teie e au noa nei teie aau i to taera'a mai. Greetings to thee on thine arrival O Tohoi-maro (Inspirer-of-the-loin-girdle)! Greetings to thee in coming! Joy fills this heart on thine arrival [here].
Henry: 168 1
Marae priests' prayer concerning sacrificial pig
Tahiti'a, mai, te atua e, i ta matou nei fei'ai! Teie te pua'a taraehara na 'oe, e pua'a tapena, e pua'a porao ore. 53
E pua'a ha'ape'e, fa'ati'amа i e ta'ata hara nei. Teie atoa te 'ai'ai hinuhinu, na 'oe, e na te atua nei i mua i to'oe na aro, e te Atua e, ea farii mai! O ta matou teie fei'ai, tahiti'a mai!
Hearken, O god, to our petition with food! Here is the sacrificial pig for thee, a sacred pig, a pig without blemish. 39
It is a pig of atonement, to set free sinful man. Here also is the fat small eating, for thee and the gods here in thy presence, O god, accept it! This is our petition with food, hearken unto us!
Henry: 169 1
Father's permission to sacrifice small son to marae
A rave i teie tamaiti e hopoi e taparahi na te atua! Inaha ua fifi te aha marae ia'na, ua fifi te aha atua. E tamaiti ia na'u, na'u iho i fanau, eiaha ra vau e nounou, oia i hape mai i te pa'iatua nei. Take this child and slay him for the gods! Behold the order of the marae is distrubed by him, the thread of the prayers to the gods is entangled. He is my son, I begat him, but I must not regret [losing him], because he has erred in coming here to the assembly of the gods.
Henry: 170 1
Umere a te ta'ata chant
Tahu'a: "E tau aitu maona!" 12
'Opure: "Maona!" 6
Tahu'a: "Hu'ihu'i!" 7
'Opure: "Hu'ihu'i!" 7
Tahu'a: "Ra'a 'iu!" 7
'Opure: "E tōtō!" 8
Tahu'a: "E tōtō! A pōpō mai a tatou a tau a hiti ma te ra'au." 30
'Opure: "E tōtō! A pōpō mai a tatou a tau a hiti ma te ra'au." 30
[united handclapping] 6
Tahu'a: "To unu," 6
'Opure: "To unu," 6
Tahu'a: "Ei fa'i to unu, ei ite to unu." 17
('Opure e tahu'a pa'ato'a): "E i'oa, e i'oa fa'i nua, ratou te fa'i nua i te rave a te ta'ata nei."
Priests: "We are wrestling in prayer with the gods!" 13
Worshipers: "Wrestling!" 5
Priests: "Throbbing!" 4
Worshipers: "Throbbing!" 5
Priests: "Most ancient sacredness!" 9
Worshipers: "That knocks!" 5
Priests: "That knocks! Let us clap our hands for ever and ever with the trees." 20
Worshipers: "That knocks! Let us clap our hands for ever and ever with the trees." 21
[united handclapping] 6
Priests: "Thy carved ornaments," 7
Worshipers: "Thy carved ornaments," 8
Priests: "Thy carved ornaments are to tell, they are witnesses." 17
Worshipers and priests uniting: "Names, names, will they disclose above, they will disclose the deeds of men."
Henry: 171a 2
Toa'e opening invocation
0
A hura 'orero, a re'a toa'e, e tamа! 14
Te ari'i fa'atauira i te iho o te pа. Tera 'tu te pō, tei te ari'i te ao. Fetu, marama, te rā 'ei avei'a, e apua, e haora'i. 54
Na upu iti, na upu 'oreore, na upu tahu'a, na upu vana'a, teie nei 'orero, tuau i te papa fau rua, i te ra'i mumuhu. Tau'oa nui, a tui ia rohi, tai ai Hiro i te upu, i te 'orero ma te vana'a!
Speak exultingly, enter worship cheerfully, to purify! 15
The king is opening worship in the vital part of the sanctuary. The night is passed, day is for the king. Stars, moon, and sun are guides, garlands encircling the sky. 44
Silent prayers, oral prayers, prayers of the priests, prayers of orators, these will reach to the divided rocks, to the murmuring skies. Great assembly, shout out lustily, to make Hiro shout in prayer, in speeches, and in orations!
Henry: 171b 1
Upu fa'atonu (saving invocation)
0
Tahiti'a mai e te atua e! Tena tini atua, tena mano atua, a fariu mai, a fari'i i ta matou nei upu! I ora te fa'ao ta'ata o teie nei fenua, ia ora te huia, ia ora i te atua. Ia ora te mua fare ta'ata. E ara i te ta'ata papari'a taratara, i te ta'ata papari'a hoai, i te hufapapai, i te maro ta'iri i te hauroa mua. E tu'u ana'e ia na vaho roa. Ia ora matou, te ta'ata nei, e te nu'u atua e!
Hearken unto us, O gods! 8
Those numerous gods, those thousands of gods, turn unto us, accept of our petitions! 27
Preserve the population of this land; preserve the generation; may they live in the gods. Preserve the frontiers of the people's habitations. Watch against the man with rough cheeks, the man with angry looks, against the incendiary, against him who lets fly the ends of his loin girdle. Put all those things entirely away. Preserve us human beings, O host of gods!
Henry: 172-173 1
Parima-nui performance
Parima! Parima-nui fa'anoa noa! 14
Tapu atu na, noa mai nei. 11
E ia 'oe na te ra'a, e te Atua e, ei te huru tahua te mo'a o te ari'i e te opure. 36
E haere matou i muri e rimarima e ha'aha'a: e tauteute, e 'omo'omo i te tiare, e tapara i te mati, e pupuhi i te auahi, e tuhi, e momoto, e tata upo'o, e fai, e hanihani, e tomo i te ahu noa, e amu i te pua'a, i te urua, i te ma'o, i te mai'a; e inu i te 'ava; eiaha ia 'oe e matahihira mai, e te Atua e! 135
Ei onei 'oe, ei te vahi moa nei e fariu ē i to mata i te Pō, eiaha e hi'o mai i te ha'a o te ta'ata nei. 50
[the high priest responded] 7
Ua ora te ma'i o te marae, ua vaere'a ua ahoa hia! Ua ora te mai o te ari'i e o te va'amata-eina'a; ua tui roto hia, ua pe'e te hara; ua pure hopu hia, e ua mā. Teie te 'ura, teie te hauniu, teie to ta'ata o mei'a roa; te omi'i ma te avae, te avae ma te omi'i, ei utu i to riri hotua nui, e te Atua; no te hara nui, no te tu'utu'u no te tae reo, no te atua i ma'au hia, no te rimu o te marae i va'u hia i hara hia, no te mimiro 'oau no te mata mataēa, no te tuhi, no te ahua, no te fa'atomo i te varua ino ia vetahi e. Tei reira te hara e uri mai ai 'oe, e te Atua? 254
E tara mai, e homai ia meia roa nei, e huri i tai nui atea, ia ora to maru. E te Atua e a parima mai i to pu'e 'opure nei, ua mo'a. 61
[after placing garlands on image of Roma-tane] 15
Tera te hei na 'oe, ta tahu'a aitu, e Roma-tane e. E hei parima; tapu atu na. Parima mai, parima mai, ia fa'anoa noa. 50
[ripoa or turue (leave-taking) recital] 15
E Ta'aroa-nui tahi Tumu, e tena ati tama aitu e! Ei onei 'oe ei roto i te reva o teie nei vahi a oa ia te ta'ata nei. Ua api roa ia 'oe. Ei raro matou te ta'ata nei, e taahi noa i i te repo fenue o te ao nei. E te ati matua manua mai te Pō mai, ei ona 'oe i roto i te reva o te vahi moa ia te ta'ata nei; ei raro matou e ta'ahi noa i i te repo fenua o te ao nei. E te matua maitatai o te Pō, ei ona 'oe ei roto i te marama o te ao i teie nei vahi moa ia te ta'ata nei, ei raro matou e ta'ahi noa i i te repo fenua o te ao nei.
Dismissal! Grand dismissal to make ordinary! 13
Let sacredness remain here, that we become ordinary. 17
Let holiness be thine, O god, let the priesthood hold the congregation. 22
We are now retiring to use our hands and become vile: we shall do domestic work, wear flowers, paint ourselves yellow with mati, blow fire, curse, give each other blows, practise black art, caress, put on unconsecrated clothes, eat pork, cavalla fish, shark, bananas; and drink ava; look not upon us in anger for this, O god! 97
Remain thou here, in this holy place, turn thy face to Pō, look not upon the deeds of men. 28
[the high priest responded] 7
The evil of the marae is repaired, it has been weeded, accompanied with the chant! The evil of the sovereign and of the clans is ended; the inner service has wiped out sin, the closing prayer is finished, and all is clean. Here are the 'ura feathers, here is the peace token of coconut flowers, here is thy man, long banana, from his head down to his feet, his feet to his head, to arrest thine anger of great growth, O god; for great crimes, for family discord, for hasty words, for irreverence to the gods, for imperfectly scraping off the moss of the marae, for rankling rage concealed, for mutual estrangement (of friends), for cursing, for annihilating by sorcery, for sending evil spirits into others. They are the sins which displease thee, O god? 224
Undo them, place them upon long banana here present, cast them into the trackless ocean, that thy devotees may be saved. O god, dismiss these thy worshipers for they are holy. 49
[after placing garlands on image of Roma-tane] 15
There are wreaths for thee, O priestly god, O Roma-tane. Wreaths for dismissal; let sacredness remain here. Dismiss us, dismiss us that we may become ordinary. 48
O, great Ta'aroa, the unique Tumu, and thy great family of gods! Remain here, in the air of this place sacred to man. It is filled with your presence. We mortals shall remain below, treading the soil of this earth. O hosts of malignant spirits from Pō, remain there in the air of this place sacred to man; we mortals shall remain below, treading the soil of this earth. 114
O host of good spirits from Pō remain there in the height of the world, in this place sacred to man; we mortals shall remain below treading the soil of this earth.
Henry: 174a 2
High priest addressing tutelar god
0
Tapu atua na, noa mai nei! Tera te aho o te marae, to tapa'au ra'a mata, to pu'e tahu'a, o Anа-ni'a, o Anа-mua, o Anа-roto, o Anа-muri, o Anа-tipu, o Anа-heuheu, o Anа-tahu'a-ta'ata-metua, o Anа-tahu'a-vahine, e o Anа-iva: Te maro tahu'a ia'na, to tuturi ia'na, te pure ia'na, te aro tahua ia'na. Parima mai i to pue tahua nei!
Let sacredness remain here, and let us become ordinary! There is the life of the marae [pointing to the tapa'au upon the slabs], thy sacred tapa'au with masks, the body of priests, Polaris, Antares, Regulus, Zubeneschamali, Dubhe, Alphard, Arcturus, Procyon, and Betelguese. [Then speaking of the tapa'au in the singular number]: Thy sacerdotal loin girdle is with him, thy leaning slab is wtih him, his are the prayers, he has the face of the priest. Dismiss thy priests here present!
Henry: 174b 1
Tiri's chant
0
O hi'i rа ma tau epa, 8
Tau epa e toro e! 8
Tau epa rima, rima, 8
Tau epa rima hi'i! 8
E tū, tū a o tai tua, 11
Tau a 'ie, 5
O tai tovarovaro. 8
Tara papa, 4
Tara tava; 4
O hahu ma te maru, 7
O ha'apa'a tauai a maro 12
Oi re, oi re, oi re 9
I roo e, 4
A taviri ai ai i taha ruru e! 14
Ua hi'i ma epa, epa!
Now, this is nursing thee to rest, 9
Thine outstretched resting place! 10
Thy resting place of arms, arms, 7
Thy resting place of nursing arms! 8
The ocean will ever exist, exist, 11
Sails will ever alight, 7
Upon the vibrating seas. 8
Enchantment on the [cloth] board, 8
Enchantment on the bark [cloth]; 7
Made smooth and soft, 6
The sweet-scented cloth put out to dry. 10
Well nigh defeat, defeat, defeat, 11
Overtook [me], O, 6
As I rolled up the cloth outspread! 11
Nursed and rest, rest [thou]!
Henry: 175 1
Speech by people's orator upon presenting offerings
E utu o ari Po ari ao. Pana hiti pana toa, e na Atua e; afa'i e atu i te 'ino, ia 'ore i te ao nei! 45
[native text missing] 6
A fariu mai i to aro ma te aroha ia matou, te ta'ata hara nei! E tapena pua'a, e tapena 'uri, e tapena moa, e tapena roroi; teie te meia, teie te mau maa ato'a o te fenua, a fari'i mai, e te Atua e. Euru pani hia te uru o te mai; e rau hihi; e rau avari. Fa'aaroha mai to maru, e te Atua, tahiti'a mai. 135
[the high priest concluded:] 7
Na ho'i te ma, e ma no te aia'ai; a ma i uta, a ma i tai, a ma i ni'a a ma i raro: a ma te Pō, a ma te ao, a ma te marae, a ma te opure, a ma te feia noa, a ma te huia ato'a. Homai i te 'ai o te fenua, homai i te 'ai o tai, homai i te hua'ai o te ta'ata ia rahi e te Atua e. Te haere ana'e nei ra te va'a mataeina'a i te 'utuafare, e ai mai te ai haere e ai 'ino, e 'ai i te atea; eiaha e hi'o atu, e te atua e! Area matou, e 'ai'ai mai te horuhoru i mua i to aro. E te atua e, aroha mai ia 'ore ia tupu te 'ino. Tahiti'a mai, e te atua e!
Here are peace offerings to the depth of Hades, to the extremities of the world. Push from the east and from the west, O gods; remove all evil form this world. 46
[Behold these peace offerings to ward off your anger, O gods - native text missing] 25
Turn your faces with favor upon us sinful people. Here are hogs consecrated, dogs consecrated, fowls consecrated, coconuts consecrated; here are bananas, here are all the fruits of the land; turn to us, O gods. Effective prayer will be offered for the sick possesssed; many spirits will flee away; many people will recover. Have pity in mercy on us, O gods, hearken unto us. 113
Behold the cleansing, cleansing from sin; clean inland, clean seaward, clean above, clean below, Po is clean, the world is clean, the marae is clean [and then he enumerated everything upon it as clean]. The worshipers are clean, the people ordinary are clean, the families are clean. Give us food in the land, give us food in the sea, give us numerous offspring, O gods, Now all the clans are going home, to eat moving about, to eat without order, to eat abroad; look not at them, O gods! But as for us, thy body of priests, we shall eat here in awe in your presence. O gods, have pity upon us that no evil befall us. O gods, hearken unto us!
Henry: 176-177 1
Spoken by high priests when leaving sacred precincts
Tapu atu na noa mai nei, e tena nu'u atua tena mano atua te ho'i ne matou i to matou mau 'utu'afare, e tomo i te ahu mo'a, e tauteute, e hanihani, e fa'aapu e fa'anoa noa. Eiaha e mata roa mai, eiaha e taria roa mai ia matou. Fariu i to mata i te po e fariu i to tua i te ao. Te vaiho atu nei matou i te ra'a ei ona te mo'a, e te Atua e! Let sacredness remain here that we may become ordinary, O host of gods, those thousands of gods! We are returning to our homes to put on unconsecrated clothes, to do domestic work, caress, farm and become ordinary. Be not farsighted, be not farhearing to us. Turn your faces to darkness and turn your back to the light. We are leaving sacredness, let holiness be there [with you], O gods!
Henry: 178 1
Head of family casting off god
Tera te po'a, te po'a tu nei au ia 'oe! Eiaha 'oe e uru fa'ahou mai i roto iau nei; eiaha vau ei nohora'a fa'ahou no 'oe; eiaha vau e 'ite fa'ahou ia 'oe; eiaha 'oe e 'ite fa'ahou mai iau. E haere 'oe i 'imi e atu i te tahi taura no 'oe, i te tahi utu'afare e atu. Eiaha vau eiaha roa! Ua poihu vau ia 'oe-- ua ri'ari'a a'era vau ia 'oe! Te va atu nei au ia 'oe. E haere roa 'oe i te Vai-tu-pō, i te aro o Ta'aroa, to'oe na metua, Ta'aroa te metua o te mau atua 'atoa. Eiha 'oe e ho'i fa'ahou mai iau nei. Inaha te huia, te pohepohe nei i te ma'i; te rave hia nei e 'oe, e atua ri'ari'a roa 'oe e te 'ai ta'ata! There is casting off, I am casting thee off! Do not come in to possess me again; let me not be a seat for thee again! let me not know thee again; do thou not know me again. Go and seek some other medium for thyself in another home. Let it not be me, not at all! I am wearied of thee-- I am terrified with thee! I am expelling thee. Go even to the Vai-tu-po (River-in-darkness), into the presence of Ta'aroa, thy father, Ta'aroa, the father of all gods. Return not again to me. Behold the family, they are stricken with sickness; thou art taking them, thou art a terrible man-devouring god!
Henry: 179 1
Traveller's prayer for sea voyage
Tahitia mai i te matou tere, e te atua! E aratai ora 'oe ia matou i ni'a i te fenua. Ei tere tia ei tere ora; eiaha 'oe e fa'arue ia matou i te moana nei. E horoa mai 'oe i te tahi mata'i no matou, ei puhi na muri, ei maoa tia ei ra'i aneane. Tahitia mai ia matou, e te atua! Hearken unto us throughout our voyage. O gods! Lead us safely to land. Let our voyage be propitious, free from evil! leave us not in the ocean. Give us a breeze, let it follow us from behind, let the weather be fine, and the sky clear. Hearken unto us, o gods!
Henry: 180-181 1
Canoe builders' chant when setting rollers
E rao tu'ua 6
E rao mua i Atea 9
Fa'arotu u mata'i. 8
E matafa, manu aitu, 9
A fa'auru ra! 6
E rao tu'ua, 6
E rao i roto Atea, 9
E rao fa'arotu mata'i; 10
E rua tufa a te manu aitu, 12
E rao tu'ua, 6
E rao peho Atea, 8
E rao o te vahine metua. 11
Nau te tu'i, e tu'i no te aha? 12
E tu'i mai mua. 7
Ei mahu no te aha? 8
E uru hia e Tane; 8
E Tane, a fa'auru ra! 9
E rao tu'ua na Ro'o te ro'oro'o. 14
E rao na Ta'aroa-Metua, 11
E rao na Te-Fatu nu'u, 9
E rao na Ta'ere ma opoopo, 12
E rao na Toa-hiti mata nui; 12
E Tane fa'auru ra! 8
Tu'ua te rao muri, 8
Te rao na Tu pa nui 8
I fa'atu i te ra'i; 8
E Tane, fa'auru ra; 8
Toro ra, fa'auru, 7
E Tane aitu! 6
Nau te tu'i, e tu'i no te aha? 12
E tu'i no te taruarua nui, 12
Na Tane te 'opiri napenapea, 12
E tu'i mai roto, 7
E tu'i mai muri, 7
E tu'i tana aha mua. 9
E Tane e, fa'auru ra, 9
Tane turu rao, 6
Fa'auru ra!
A roller is laid 6
A front roller for Atea 8
To cause commotion against the wind. 13
Far-seeing god bird, 6
Now enchant it! 4
A roller is laid, 6
An inner roller for Atea, 9
A roller to contend with the wind; 9
Twice served is the god bird. 8
A roller is laid, 6
A roller for the valley of Atea, 11
A roller for the motherly woman [Hina]. 11
Mine it is to strike, to strike what? 11
To strike before. 6
To make spray for what? 6
For the enchantment of Tane; 8
O Tane, now enchant it! 7
A roller is placed for Ro'o the famous. 13
A roller for Father Ta'aroa, 10
A roller for Te-fatu of hosts, 9
A roller for Ta'ere of all skill, 10
A roller for Toa-hiti (Bordering-rock) of great eyes; 17
O Tane, now enchant them! 7
The hindermost roller is laid, 9
The roller for Tū, the great father 11
Who made stable the sky; 6
O Tane, now enchant it; 7
Now extend enchantment, 6
O god Tane! 4
Mine it is to strike, to strike what? 11
To strike the great rolling waves, 10
Tane will quickly turn them, 7
When they strike the midships, 7
When they strike behind, 6
When they strike his sennit in the bows. 10
O Tane, now enchant, 6
Tane, supporter of the rollers, 9
Now enchant them!
Henry: 181 1
Speech during fa'ainuraa i te va'a
Fano ta'u va'a nei, 8
I te 'are miti fati, 8
Ei na raro mai, 7
Ei na ni'a 'tu ta'u va'a, 10
E Tane aitū e! 8
Fano ta'u va'a nei, 8
Na te tai vave'a, 7
Ei na raro mai, 7
Ei na ni'a 'tu ta'u va'a, 10
E Tane aitu e!
If I sail my canoe, 7
Through the breaking waves, 8
Let them pass under, 5
Let my canoe pass over, 7
O god Tane! 4
If I sail my canoe, 7
Through the towering waves, 8
Let them pass under, 5
Let my canoe pass over, 7
O god Tane!
Henry: 183a 2
Chant by paia when severing umbilical cord
0
E ha'apa i te pito o te tama, 12
Te pito tapu 5
O te aitu o mahuta mai nei. 13
Ia roa, ei pito aho roa; 12
E taaai i te taura ia mau; 14
Tapu ai i te pito o te tama aitu 15
I te tipi moa o te ofe rare, 12
Hui i te pito, te pito rearea, 13
Ia mama te pito atua.
Lay hold of the cord of the child, 8
The sacred cord 4
Of the god that has flown hither. 8
Let it be long a cord of life; 9
Tie it firmly with thread; 7
Then sever the cord of the child god 9
With the sacred knife of the flying bamboo, 12
Perforate the cord, the vigorous cord 12
That the godly cord be light.
Henry: 183b 1
Chant by paea when annointing king's child with sandalwood oil
0
Te tama teu, o te puo mei'a 12
Te mei'a o te aitu. 9
Ei horoi i te 'iri manina 12
Te 'iri paruparu o te tama 11
E tavai i te monoi 9
I te tino o te tama aitu 11
Ia maru, ia hinuhinu 10
I te monoi moa o te aitu 12
E nenei maro, e tamara 10
I te pito, ia marū, ia marō. 14
Ei hai i te 'a'i o te tama aitu; 15
Haati i te 'a'i i te pito 11
Ei hei, ei tapu aho roa, 12
No te tama aitu nei.
This is the purifier, the heart of the banana, 15
Banana [tree] of the gods. 8
To pass over the smooth skin, 8
The tender skin of the child. 7
Anoint with oil of sweet odor 11
The body of this child god 6
That it be soft, that it be glossy 8
With the sacred oil of the gods. 9
Squeeze dry, and saturate with oil 12
The cord that is flexible, be dry, 8
For a garland for the neck of the child 10
Encircle the neck with the cord 8
As a garland a pledge of long life, 11
For the child god here present.
Henry: 184 1
Chant by paia while performing uhi-a-iri
Te uhi-a-'iri o te tama o te aitu, 15
Te uhi-a-'iri i te vai ora o Tane. 15
Fa'aro'oro'o o te mata'i moa o te aitu 18
Te mata'i maru o hiti 9
E ouhia mai nei 9
Ia manihinihi te 'iri o te tama. 14
A ti'a Ta'aroa, a ti'a Atea, a ti'a Tane 18
A ti'a e tena mano atua! 11
E ha'apa te tama nei i te meho tua 15
E ha'apa i te meho aro 10
O pa i ni'a ma te ho-ra'i, 10
E aitu e, e toa riro!
Bathing the skin of the child of the gods, 10
Bathing it in the living water of Tane. 12
Listen to the wind hallowed of the gods, 11
The gentle zephyr from the east 8
Which is blown this way, 5
To render sensitive the skin of the child. 12
Arise Ta'aroa, arise Atea, arise Tane! 18
Arise, O host of gods! 7
This child will lay hold of fugitives behind 12
And lay hold of fugitives before 11
The fort above, mid heavenly shouts, 11
O gods, a warrior accomplished (is this)!
Henry: 191-192 1
Source: Tupaia of Motutapu
Date of recitation: 1887 30
Pure Utuhi invocation
Fa'atea no te ari'i e tae i Motu Tapu; 17
E papa e haruru te ra'i i ni'a e! 14
I te maro 'ura e! 7
Ua 'ura tini 6
I te ahu ta'a 6
I to maro 'ura na e tau ari'i e. 14
Tuia te ra'i i ni'a e, 10
E te ari'i nui ia 'Oro Toa. 13
Te tupuai fa'aari'i o Ra'iatea, 16
Rerea i te 'ura i Hauviri. 12
Horo te arere te haha i ni'a ia 'Oro 16
Ia hio mai ai ia Ra'iatea 15
I mua i to maro 'ura na e! 11
Tau ari'i o te ra'i e te maro 'ura e 16
Ua 'ura tini 6
I te ahu ta'a 6
I to maro 'ura na e ta'u ari'i e 14
Ei hea hume ai 8
To maro 'ura na e ta'u ari'i e? 13
Ei te tai tua mai o Taputapuatea. 17
A tiu ta ria roohia 10
Te pure ari'i i te utuhi 11
Ua puni a'enei te uru o 'Oro 14
I te rau o te 'ura 8
Manu na te ra'i e! 7
Manu tahi atua 7
Te 'ura amo a'e 7
I te pure i te rau roa 10
Ua oti te maro o te ari'i 12
Tatou e noho ai e 9
Tui te noroa o maeva rua 12
Na 'Oro te metua o 'oe. 10
E ti'i i te 'ura tei Tahuea 13
Raverave noa mai i te pua tiri 14
O 'ura i te ara o Tane 10
E noa'a i reira 8
O te 'ura rau nui 8
Ahiri ho'i e ora na o Tumaraa 14
Eo Tevaitoa i te Rapatia 13
Ei ono i to maro 'ura 10
E ta'u ari'i e 7
Te ra'i e te maro 'ura e! 10
Te'ura tini 5
O te ahu taa 6
I to maro 'ura na, e tau ari'i e 14
E ti'i i te 'ura ia tini 11
Ia mano i anapanapa 10
I te ahu taa ha'amana 10
'Ura i tau rere 7
Iriti a te papa ia hute. 11
Te tapa ia i to maro 'ura na 12
E ta'u ari'i e! 7
Te ra'i e te maro 'ura e 10
Ia 'ura tini 6
I te ahu taa 6
I to maro 'ura na, e ta'u ar'i'i e. 14
Ta'u Ari'i 'oe, a ti'a i ni'a 13
I te tua o Marama; 8
E ti'a i ni'a 6
Ia Ra'iatea nui hau Marama 14
E to i te tini e to i te mano, 12
E to i te mata 6
O Ra'iatea nui e vau. 11
Tau Ari'i 'oe i te fa'anehenehe, 15
To roro una, 5
Hei atu a i Taputapuatea, 13
Te 'Oro matau tua, 'oe e ta'u ari'i e.
Make way for the king onwards to the Sacred Isle; 14
Loud peals resound in the sky above, O! 13
For the red girdle, O! 6
Numerous are the 'ura feathers 12
From the wall of jawbones 7
In thy red girdle, O my king. 6
The sky is reached above, 8
By the great Warrior Sovereign 'Oro, 12
The high investor of Ra'iatea's kings, 12
Flying in the feathers of Hauviri. 11
Let the herald run up fearlessly to 'Oro 12
As he looks down to Ra'iatea 11
Upon thy red girdle, O! 6
O my king of the skies and the red girdle, 11
Numerous are the 'ura feathers 12
From the wall of jawbones. 7
In thy red girdle, O my king, 6
Where shall the girding on 7
Of thy red girdle be, O my king? 7
Upon the seaside of Taputapuatea 15
In a vision the king saw in 9
His royal prayer for the immersion 11
Enchantment of 'Oro secreted 9
In the body of the 'ura (feathers) 10
Of the heavenly birds, O! 7
The unique birds of the gods 9
The 'ura (feathers) carried. 9
To the service upon the long sides (of the marae) 16
Finished is the girdle of the king 10
Which is why we are here, O! 8
Strong are the prayers for the double greeting 14
To 'Oro, the father, and to thee. 10
Fetch 'ura (feathers) from Tahuea marae 14
Bring forth flowers in profusion, 9
'Ura (feathers) on the track of Tane 11
Obtained from there, 7
Great 'ura feathers. 7
Behold then, awake are Tumaraa 12
And Tevaitoa (Departments) to brave vicissitudes, 17
To stand by thy red girdle, 5
O my king. 2
The sky and the red girdle, 6
Thousands be the 'ura feathers. 10
From the wall of jawbones 7
In thy red girdle, O my king, 6
Fetch 'ura (feathers) in abundance. 11
Let there be thousands resplendent 10
At the wall of jawbones, which gave power 12
To the 'ura feathers that settled and flew 12
Were the rock taken up, glory would depart. 12
That is the strength of thy red girdle, 8
O my king! 2
The sky and the red girdle, O! 7
Thousands be the 'ura feathers 10
From the wall of jawbones 7
In thy red girdle, O my king. 6
My king, thou arise 6
From the Sea of the Moon; 8
Arise 3
To great Ra'iatea of the peaceful Moon 16
And draw the tens, and draw the thousands, 10
And draw the whole 5
Of Ra'iatea of eight [districts]. 11
My king thou, to be adorned, 8
Thy brain indeed shall be 7
Crowned by the god of Taputapuatea, 12
By 'Oro inured to the sea, O thou, my king.
Henry: 194 1
Priest's pronouncement after pivai-ari'i
A hi'o i to mou'a ia Te-a'e-tapu, 15
A horo i to tahua, O Mata-tu-tahua-roa. 17
A hopu i to vai, ia Via-tiare. 14
A 'au i to vai, ia Ra'i-to-moana. 15
Pau i to vai ia Vai-tara-toa. 14
A hi'o i to 'outu, ia Mata-hira-i-te-ra'i.
Behold the mountain Te-a'e-tapu (Pervading-sacredness). 18
Run upon thine assembly ground, Mata-tu-tahua-roa. 17
Bathe in thy water, Vai-tiare (Gardenia-pool [a small sacred pool]). 22
Swim in thy river, Ra'i-to-moana (Sky-drawing-the-ocean). 16
Splash thy water, Vai-tara-toa (Water-of-sharp-rocks). 14
Behold thy cape, Mata-hiri-i-te-ra'i (Face-flinching-at-the-sky).
Henry: 199 1
Cleansing a priest who had performed domestic work during time of ordinances
[guilty priest] 4
Teie au, teie te pinia moa, teie te rau 'ava, ei taraehara a'e i taua hara na'u ra, i taute ai au. Fa'aora ia'u i taua hapa ra. 62
[all present] 3
A haere mai. Ia ora 'oe! A haere mai i te 'oro'a. A haere na ra e horoi i taua mahuruhuru nau ra. 45
[presiding priest] 5
Tahiti'a mai, e te Atua, tohiu maro e, i tohiu tahu'a nei! Fa'atiama'i i to tahu'a i hara nei, ia ma te taute i tai nui atea ia moe i tai mauriuri; ia ma te mahuru huru, te hara o to tahua nei. Fa'aho'i mai i te moa nona, ia tarai fa'ahou 'oia i te urua ia hi'i fa'ahou, ia rutu fa'ahou i te pahu, e ia naupa fa'ahou tana rau 'ava. Tahiti'a mai e te Atua e!
[guilty priest] 4
Here am I, here is the chicken, here is the ava sprig to atone for my sin, when I did domestic work. Forgive me that transgression. 39
[all present] 3
Come hither! May you live! Come to the ordinance. But go first and be cleansed of your debasement. 32
[presiding priest] 5
Hearken, O god, inspirer through the loin girdle, to thy body of priests! Cleanse thy priest who has offended, that his domestic defilement be cleansed in the trackless ocean, be lost in the murmuring sea; that the debasement, the sin of this thy priest be cleansed. Restore him to holiness, that he may again cut up cavella fish, again nurse the gods, again herald them, shout for them, that he may again beat the drums and again obtain the ava leaf. Hearken to us, O gods!
Henry: 207a 2
Apua form of prayer
0
E ta'u tamari'i e! Na 'oro-matua niho roroa, e te varua 'ino o te po, a ti'i a fa'a'ite mai i te ta'ata i hara, 'oia 'o Mei'a-roa nei.
O my children! Ghosts with long teeth and devils of darkness, go and fetch and reveal to me this offender, Long-banana.
Henry: 207b 1
Supplication of pre-meditating thief to his god
E ta'u atua e, te haere nei au e eia, eiaha 'oe e fa'aro'o mai ia he to'u reo auanei; ia maau vau ia 'oe na, eiaha 'oe e hi'o mai, e te atua. O my god, I am going to steal; do not heed me when my voice goes astray by and by; let me be a fool to thee; do not notice me, O god.
Henry: 207c 1
Confrontation between thief and owner
[thief's denial] 5
'A'ita vau i rave i tena na taoa; e topa noa'tu na vau i ta'u atua, e topa noa'tu ho'i au i ta'u tamaiti matahiapo, ei 'ite e 'a'ita vau i rave i ta'oe tao'a! 72
[owner's reply] 3
Eiaha 'oe e huna mаrō! Tei ia 'oe mau taua tao'a ra; na 'oe mau i rave, ua apua hia 'oe e te orou. 'O 'oe mau a te eiā, na apo hia to'oe varua, ua 'itea hua hia to'oe na huru.
[thief's denial] 5
I have not taken that property; I even call my god [to witness], I assuredly call my first-born to witness that I have not taken your property. 38
[owner's reply] 3
Do not persist in denying it! You have really got that property, you really took it, you have been conjured by the sorcerer. You are really the thief, your spirit has been reflected, you have been clearly identified.
Henry: 210 1
Source: Anani, priest of order of Ro'o-te-roro'o 18
Chant by disenchanting priest of Ro'o-te-roro'o
Pare mai i te tapu o Ro'o te roro'o; 15
i te rito, 4
i te mahora o Ro'o; 8
i te fai pu i te peapea 11
ia Ro'o i ni'a, 7
ia Ro'o i raro, 7
ia Ro'o i uta, 7
ia Ro'o i tai, 7
ia Ro'o i te poiri, 9
ia Ro'o i te maramarama! 11
Tu, Ro'o te roro'o, 7
I mauri i roto i to metua vahine, 15
i fanau matahiapo mai ia Fa'ahotu. 17
Tu i te ufa i te pare, 9
i te mama i te pare; 8
pare o riria na, 7
e moemoea!
Ejection of evil by the adjuration of Ro'o-te-roro'o; 20
of the renovation, 7
of the adjustment of Ro'o; 8
on full confession of troubles 10
to Ro'o above, 6
to Ro'o below, 5
to Ro'o inland, 5
to Ro'o seaward, 6
to Ro'o in darkness, 6
to Ro'o in light! 5
Stand, Ro'o-te-roro'o, 7
who was entranced within thy mother, 9
and wast the firstborn of Fa'ahotu. 10
Stand to eject with vehemence, 9
to eject with mildness; 6
eject the ills of grudges, 7
conveyed through dreams!
Henry: 210-211 1
Source: Anani of the order of Ro'o-te-roro'o 39
Interchange between apa and family of person needing disenchantment
[apa] 2
"Eaha to ma'i i taai na? 11
E tuhi, e 'oe, e mataotao?" 12
[family] 2
"E'ere!" 3
[apa] 2
"Eaha ra? E rorai?" 8
[family] 2
"Eere!" 3
[apa] 2
"E ahua? E ra'a i fatia?" 11
[family] 2
"Eere!" 3
[apa] 2
"E patu mo'a i fa'ahoroa?" 11
[family] 2
"Eere!" 3
[apa] 2
"E 'a'au mimiro, e matamataee, e hahara, to mai i taai na?" 26
[family] 2
"Eere!" 3
[apa] 2
"E fa'atomo to mai i taai na?" 13
[family] 2
"'Oia ia!" 5
[apa] 2
Ei hahau area; ei po otahi nei e te atua e! 22
E mo'a 'oe i roto, e ra'a 'oe i vaho nei; 18
Tu'u mai to fa'a'ai pua'a, to 'imi ura i te motu, tara! 23
Homai i te ta'ata o Mei'a-roa te 'ino. 17
Teie tau ta'ata, 8
Mei'a roa, mai te 'upo'o e te avae, mai te avae e te 'upo'o; 27
A haha tau arihi, e rumirumi, a tau ai i 'oro Po a. 23
Teie te 'ura, teie te 'ava, fa'aoa'oa ia oe, teie te epa, teie te hiuniu, te tapaau ra'a mata, ei utu i to riri, e te atua, tara! 60
Homai i to riri i te Mei'a-roa nei; tahitia mai to maru, to tapu i teie, 32
e te atua i te marae amo'a. 13
Te amo atu nei au i to tapu, o Meia-roa, e te atua e!
[apa] 2
"What complaint is ailing thee? 10
Is it a curse, an error, or pride?" 11
[family] 2
"No!" 1
[apa] 2
"What then is it? A parent's curse?" 9
[family] 2
"No!" 1
[apa] 2
"An imprecation? Sacredness violated?" 13
[family] 2
"No!" 1
[apa] 2
"A sacred wall pushed down?" 7
[family] 2
"No!" 1
[apa] 2
"Is it a burdened soul, estranged, accused, that afflicts thee?" 19
[family] 2
"No!" 1
[apa] 2
"Art thou possessed with witchcraft?" 9
[family] 2
"That is it!" 3
[apa] 2
Let relief come in; let this [ailing] end in this one night, O god! 20
Thou art holy within, thou art sacred without; 14
Spare thy pig feeder, thy 'ura feather seeker of the atolls, restore him! 22
Transfer [the evil] to the man, Long-banana. 12
Here is thy man, 4
Long-banana, from head to foot, from foot to head; 16
let thy priest triumph, and squeeze him, that he descend and be grated in Hades. 22
Here are the 'ura feathers, here is ava to make thee glad, here are choice gifts [pointing to the mat of gifts], here is the scientist, to discover the face [of the evil doer], and to transfer thine anger upon him, o god, forgive! 73
Place thine anger upon Long-banana, here present; hearken unto thy devotee, [grant] thy pledge in this, 30
O god of the temple of deliverance. 12
I am bearing to thee thy sacrifice, Long-banana, O god!
Henry: 211 1
Source: Anani of the order of Ro'o-te-roro'o 17
Command by apa for disenchantment
A haere 'oe i vaho, e te atua! 14
E ho'i atu 'oe i te po ra, i to nohoraa mau, eiaha roa 'oe e ho'i mai i teie nei ta'ata! 41
E te atua e, a fa'atapupu maite 'oe i te metua o teie pue ti'i, ia mou roa 'oia e to'na 'atoa ra hua'ai. 50
Eiaha roa ia toe i te fenua nei.
Come out [of him], O gods! 8
Return to darkness, your proper abode, and return never again into this person! 25
O god, cause to be chopped to atoms the parents of these fetchers, let him be exterminated with all his offspring. 33
Let them not remain upon this earth.
Henry: 215-216 1
Ti leaves plucking ceremony for umu-tо 12
[while approaching ti trees]
Te hi'i tapua'e tahi! 9
Te hi'i tapua'e rua! 9
Te hi'i tapua'e toru! 9
Te hi'i tapua'e ha! 8
Te hi'i tapua'e rima! 9
Te hi'i tapua'e ono! 9
Te hi'i tapua'e hitu 9
Te hi'i tapua'e varu! 9
Te hi'i tapua'e iva! 9
Te hi'i tapua'e tini! 9
"E te Nu'u-atua e! a ara, a ti'a i ni'a! te haere nei taua i te umu-ti ananahi." 35
Mareva na, e atua ia; e mau na te avae i raro, e ta'ata ia. A hi'o ti'a rа i te vaira'a o te umu ra, 'e 'a 'ofati 'i te rau tо, mai te na'o e: 58
"E te Nu'u-atua e! E haere 'oe i teie nei pō, e 'ananahi tatou atoa ia." 35
A ruru rа i te rau ti ei tauto'o tahutahu 'a 'ota'ata'a i roto i te rau fau, e a moemoe i roto i te marae, ia vai i reira ho'e a'e ru'i, a na'o ai te poro'i atu 72
"A'e, a ara! e te Nu'u-atua e! to 'avae e haere i te umu-tо. Te pape e te miti, e haere ato'a. Te to'e uri, ma te to'e tea, e haere i te umu. Te 'ura o te auahi e te ru'iru'i o te auahi, e haere ana'e; na oe e haere, e haere 'oe i teie nei pō, e ananahi 'o 'oe ia e 'ovau, e haere taua i te umu-ti." 133
Ia 'a'ahiata ra, 'a ti'i 'a rave mai i te rau tо, 'a amo e 'i te umu roa, 'a tatara 'i te ineinera'a o te feia e haere i ni'a i taua umu ra; 'a fa'a'ati te tahutahu i te umu, mai te fa'ati'a i te to'oto'o rau ti i mua, a nao ai 99
"E na ta'ata e tahutahu i te umu e, a ta pohe na! E to'e uri! e to'e tea! Te pape, te miti, te 'a'ama o te umu, te ru'iru'i o te umu, a hi'i atu i te tupua'e avae o te feia e haere nei, a tahiri na i te ahu o te ro'i. E te nu'u to'eto'e e, e fa'aea na tatou i roto i te umu. A mau na, e te Vahine-nui-tahu-rai e, i te tahiri, e haere na taua i te ropu o te umu! 153
Te hi'i tapua'e tahi! 9
Atairi rа i te umu i te tootoo, mau te na'ō e 21
"Te Vahine-nui-tahu-ra'i e! po'i'a!" 14
Haere noa'tura ia ta'ata, mai te ino ore na ropu, e na te hiti o taua umu-ti ra, na muri mai i te arata'i, o te tairi i taria to'oto'o rau-ti na te tahi pae e te tahi pae. Eiaha rа te ho'e ta'ata e hi'o i muri, a'ore e mau te tahutahura'a, 'e 'e 'ama te avae.
Holder of the first footstep! 8
Holder of the second footstep! 9
Holder of the third footstep! 8
Holder of the fourth footstep! 9
Holder of the fifth footstep! 8
Holder of the sixth footstep! 8
Holder of the seventh footstep! 9
Holder of the eighth footstep! 9
Holder of the ninth footstep! 8
Holder of the tenth footstep! 8
[while plucking ti leaves] 8
"O hosts of gods, awake, arise! You and I are going to the umu-ti (ti-oven) tomorrow." 29
If they float in the air, they are gods; but if their feet touch the ground, they are human beings. Then break the ti leaves off, looking in the direction of the oven, and say 54
"O hosts of gods! You go tonight, and tomorrow you and I shall go." 19
Then bind up the ti leaves for a wand; wrap them in fau (Hibiscus) leaves, put them to sleep in the marae, where they must remain one night, and say in leaving 48
"Arise, awake! O hosts of gods! 10
Let your feet take you to the umu-ti. Fresh water, and salt water come also. Let the dark earthworm and the light earthworm go to the oven. Let the redness and the shades of the fire all go. You will go, you will go tonight, and tomorrow it will be you and I; we shall go to the umu-ti." [This is for the night.] 90
At daybreak, get the ti leaves, carry them straight [away] to the oven, and open them when all are ready to pass through; then walking round the oven, the magician must hold the wand forward and say 55
"O being (spirits) who enchant the oven, let it die out for a while! O dark earthworms! O light earthworms! Fresh water and salt water, heat of the oven, darkening of the oven, hold up the footsteps of the oven, hold up the footsteps of the walkers and fan the heat of the bed. O cold host, let us linger in the midst of the oven. O Vahine-nui-tahu-rai, hold the fan, and let us go into the oven for a little while! 121
Holder of the first footstep! 8
Then bind up the ti leaves for a saying 12
"O Vahine-nui-tahu-ra'i! All is covered!" 15
And everybody walks through without hurt, into the middle and around the oven, following the leader, waving his wand from side to side. But no one must look back in going through the oven lest the spell be broken and the feet get burned.
Henry: 237-238 1
Invocation of gods by chief arioi
Ei onei 'oe, e te atua, e 'ite mai ia matou. Teie te pua'a na 'oe; teie te 'ahu taviriviri na 'oe, te 'ahu no te oroa no te mareva, no te aha tatai; ta 'oe teie. 72
E aratai 'oe ia matou e i te fenua; homai te tahi mata'i na matou, ei ahi na muri, ia tere i te hinu ma te ro'i. Fano te aha tatai nei, e te atua, e i te ava o te fenua e haere hia nei. Eiaha matou ia pae e atu i te moana e i te fenua; e 'aroha mai i to maru. 118
Eiaha 'oe e fa'arue mai ia matou; eiaha to matou ia pee hia i te ro'o 'ino, e ua pohe ia mareva! E tatai tau aha ei te ava i te ho'i ra'a mai i te fenua nei.
Remain here, O god, who seest us. Here is a pig for thee; here are strips of cloth for thee; cloth for the ordinance of sailing away for prayer to secure safety at sea; these are for thee. 61
Lead thou us on to land; give us a breeze, to encompass us from behind, that we may sail as smoothly as upon a bed. Let this prayer safely take us, O god, even into the harbor of the land to which we are going. Let us not beat up to other seas or lands; have pity upon thy shadows. 84
Forsake us not; let us not be overtaken with evil tidings, that those sailing are lost! Let this prayer to thee secure our safety to the harbor even in returning to land.
Henry: 238 1
Presentation of maro-tai by chief arioi
Tera te maro-tai na 'oe e te atua e! O te vane, te 'ura te fa'aio, te pua'a, te apaapa 'uru, e te rahiri; ta 'oe ia i to matou tae ra'a mai i te fenua nei ma te ora. 71
E 'aroha mai i to maru e te atua e, eiaha te 'ino ia tupu ia matou i te fa'aea ra'a i teie nei fenua, e tae noa tu i to matou mareva ra'a tu. Tahi tia mai i ta matou aha e te atua e!
There is the sea-voyage-offering for thee, O god! A fine mat, 'ura feather arioi cloth, a pig, half a breadfruit, and a bunch of braided coconut leaves; they are for thee on our safe arrival in this land. 69
Have compassion on thy sadows, O god, let no harm befall any of us while we remain in this land, even to when we sail away. Harken to our petition, O god!
Henry: 240a 2
Chief arioi's initial introduction of arioi entertainment
Ha, ha, ho'i! O vau, 'O Tiaau. E mou'a i ni'a 'o 'Orohena i hau roa i ni'a i Tahiti nei! E tahua i raro, 'o Fae-ria; e 'outu i tai, 'o te Fau-roa; e vai, 'o Vai-popoo. 'O vau, 'o Tia-au, 'arioi i te fenua, otuituia i te 'ofai pupuhi. Ha, Ha, indeed! It is I, I stand. My mountain above is 'Orehena, which is above all in this Tahiti. The assembly ground below is Fae-ria; the cape seaward is Fau-roa; the river is the Vai-popoo. It is I, I stand comedian of the land that vibrates with the sound of the gun.
Henry: 240b 1
Statement by Te-roma-tane after casting rahiri at sovereign
Ena hoi te manava e manava o te ari'i! E manava mai ra oe, e te ari'i nui tua tinitini; e manava maira oe' e te ari'i manomano! I fano mai 'oe i te mahora o te ra'i; i fano mai 'oe i na va'a 'ura ma te heihei, ma te tarehu roto; i fano mai 'oe i na va'a muri; i fano mai 'oe i te va'a i te re'a, i te va'a 'ura ma te heihei, ma te tarehu moana. Manava te ari'i nui, tau aea! Here is indeed the welcome, the welcome of the sovereign! Thou art welcoming us, O great sovereign appearing from the sky [royal abode]! Thou hast flown hither to the lawn of the sky; thou hast flown to the foremost canoes; thou hast flown to the after canoes; of gaiety, to the canoes of red garlands from across the hazy deep. Welcome, O great sovereign, this introduction to thee!
Henry: 241 1
Presentation to 'Oro by chief ariori on returning home
Teie matou e te Atua i fa'ahoi fa'ahou hia mai e te fenua, i tana tere ta matou i poroi ia 'oe ra. Teie matou tei te fenua ma te ora. Teie ta 'oe e pua'a e 'ahu e te 'ura. Ta matou teie maro-tai na 'oe, e te Atua e. Here we are, O god, returned from the land whither we were bound when we took leave of thee. Here we are safely landed. These are for thee--a pig, cloth, and 'ura feathers. These are our sea-voyage-offerings to thee, O god.
Henry: 244 1
Source: The High Priest Tamera in Tai'arapu
Date of recitation:: 1843 46
The burning of Te-ra-tore-re'a: Interchange at initial meeting
[Te-fa'ahira's greeting] 8
E te Ari'i o 'Oro-ma-'aito e! Ia ora na, e ta'u ari'i, i te atua, i te haere ra'a mai. Putotoro ho'i, e ta'u ari'i e, i te haere ra'a mai i teie mataeina'a! A tomo i te fare, i Te-ra-tore-re'a; i ha'a hia 'ai tei fare, no 'outou, no te manihini io matou nei. A tomo ra i te fare, e ta'u ari'i e! 128
[Tavi's reply] 3
E Te-vahi-tua ari'i e, e To'ofa, te papa o teie nei hau, o 'Oro i Utu-a'i nei, e poupouiti rahi to matou i te taerea'a mai i teie fenua tuiro'o, io 'outou nei! Inaha, no to 'outou horoa rahi ra'a mai i te ma'a e te taoa no to 'outou fenua, i 'ite ai matou e e parau mau to matou i fa'aro'oro'o na mau e, e fa'aterera'a hau maitai to 'outou no te ruperupe o te fenua. I o mai nei te hina'aro i to matou a'au e haere mai, ia ite mata mai, e ia farerei hua matou ia 'outou. I teienei, ua 'ite mata atua matou, ua farerei e ua 'fa'aro'o i te 'outou parau ha'apoupou. Teie matou, ta 'outou pue manihini nei, te Ari'i e te hui ra'atira o 'Oro-ma-'Aito o Matahihae. E ta'u Ari'i, e Te-vahi-tua o 'Oro i Utu-'ai-nei, te tomo nei matou i teie nei fare nui atea, i teie fare manihini, o Te-ra-tore-re'a.
[Te-fa'ahira's greeting] 8
O Princes of 'Oro-ma-'aito ('Oro-in-ironwood)! May you live in the gods, my Princes, in coming here. Not frequently, O my Princes, do you visit this district! Enter into the house, Te-ra-tore-re'a; this house is prepared for you, for our visitors. Enter now into the house, O my Princes! 90
[Tavi's reply] 3
O King Te-vahi-tua (Divider-of-the-ocean), O Chief, who art supporter of this Government, of 'Oro of Utu-a'i (Cape-eating), we feel great pleasure in coming here to this land of fame, into your midst! Behold, because of your liberal gifts of food and other goods of your land, we knew that what we had already heard was true, that your mode of governing was favorable for the prosperity of the land. So the desire entered our hearts to come, that we might see for ourselves and that we might meet you personally. Now, we have seen with our eyes, we have met you, and have heard your warm greetings. Here we are, your visitors, the princes and gentry of 'Oro-ma-'aito of Matahihae. O my King, Te-vahi-tua of 'Oro of Utu-'ai-nei, we are entering into this great spacious house, this house for guests, Te-ra-tore-re'a.
Henry: 245-246 1
Source: The High Priest Tamera in Tai'arapu
Date of recitation:: 1843 46
The burning of Te-ra-tore-re'a: Interchange in front of assembled guests
[Te-fa'ahira's statement] 8
E te Ari'i, o 'Oro-ma-'aito e, e te hui ra'atira i apee mai ia 'outou! Tera mai te ma'a i ravehia na 'outou; e pua'a, e ia eu e te i'a ota, e moa, e 'oura miti e te 'oura pape, te taioro, te miti-haari, te miti-no'ano'a, te pape haari, te po'e te 'uru, te taro, te mei'a, te 'umara, te uhi, e te pota, e te 'ava ei fa'a'are'are'a i to 'outou a 'a'u. 151
Tera 'tu, i ni'a i te aho fare te peue, te ruru, te tiputa, te maro purau, te vane, te ahu varavara, te fau, te hei 'ura; e tera te moea-tau-mauna e hohora ei tearora'a 'ava na 'outou. Inaha, te pupu anae hia 'tu nei na outou e ta'u Ari'i! 102
[Tavi's reply] 3
E te Ari'i o 'Oro-i-Utu-'ai, e na To'ofa, te papa o teie nei hau, e te hui ra'atira nei, ia ora na 'outou i te atua! E poupou rahi to matou i te fari'ira'a i teie nei fa'a'amua rahi, i teie ma'a e i teie puera'a taoa rahi ta 'outou i pupu mai nei na matou. Teie 'atoa, e ta'u Ari'i, e tahi o iti, ei fa'atauaroha ra'a na matou ia 'outou; e ruru pu'upu'u, e ha'apa'e e peue, e tiputa purepure, e huruhuru manu, e ope otaha, e ope mauroa, e te hei 'ura. 209
No te ro'o ma'a rahi o to 'outou nei fenua i 'ore ai matou i hopoi 'atoa mai ai i te ma'a; e inaha, ua 'ite papu roa 'tura matou e e parau mai ana'e ta matou i fa'aro'o, e e hau atu a te faufa'a o teie nei hau tuiro'o. 102
E 'amu e e inu ana'e tatou 'atoa, e au ai; e moe maunu roa ho'i ia matou i teie nei fare.
[Te-fa'ahira's statement] 8
O Princes of 'Oro-ma-'aito, and the gentlemen who have come with you! There is the food that is prepared for you; there are hogs, fish cooked and raw, fowls, crayfish and shrimps, coconut sauce, coconut water, puddings, breadfruit, taro, bananas, potatoes, yams, and taro spinach; and ava to rejoice your hearts. 97
Upon the rafters of the house are mats, rolls of cloth, capes, loin girdles of hibiscus, mats for the gods, thin scarfs, helmets and parrakeet feather wreaths; and there are sleeping mats on which to go into unconsciousness, given for you to be intoxicated upon. Behold we present them all to you, O our Princes! 94
[Tavi's reply] 3
O King of 'Oro-i-Utu-'ai, Chiefs who art supporters of this Government, and gentlemen, may you live in the gods! We cordially accept this great presentation, of this food, and of this great assortment of goods, which you have given us. Here also, O my King, is a reciprocal present as a token of friendship from us to you all: rolls of bread-fruit-bark cloth, scented sheets, mats, printed capes, birds' feathers, tails of man-of-war birds, tails of tropic birds, and parrakeet feather wreaths. 143
Because of the report that you had much food in your land, we have not brought any, and lo, we know for a certainty that all that we heard was true, and that the wealth of this realm is even greater than its fame. 63
Let us eat and drink together, which will be pleasant; and we shall indeed sleep soundly in this house.
Henry: 272 1
Source: :The people of Mo'orea 12
A Dirge to Queen Pomare IV
Hotana I te Metua nana tatou te tamari'i, 18
Tahu'a ho'i e Ari'i, nona tatou e ora ai! 19
Hanahana to 'oe e te Ari'i Vahine 15
Ia ora ho'i 'oe i te Atua o te Rai, 17
Ia ora ho'i 'oe e Pomare Vahine, 15
Te Ari'i rahi o Tahiti nei. 12
Teie mai nei to Aimeo, 12
Aimeo teie i te raravaru 13
Ua reva ho'i 'oe i te fenua rumaruma 17
Te vahi e 'ore e ho'i fa'ahou mai. 15
Teie mai nei to mau tamari'i, 14
Haere mai nei e heva ia 'oe, 14
Hopu mai nei i te 'are no te moana 15
Aue ra ho'i te 'aroha e! 11
Ia ora ho'i 'oe e Pomare maha, 14
Ua mate a'enei 'oe te Ari'i tuiro'o 18
I te tapeara'a i te evaneria 14
I rotopu i to 'oe nei hau. 12
Te vi ho'i 'oe e tupu i te moana, 14
Onaona fa'afafe i te pu o te matai. 16
Mea 'arofa rahi 'oe Pomare maha 14
I to 'oe na moera'a ia matou.
Hosannah to the Father in whom we live, 12
To the priest and king by whom we're saved. 11
Greatness, is thine, O Queen, 10
May life be thine in God in Heaven, 12
Hail to thee, O Queen Pomare, 12
Great sovereign of Tahiti. 10
Here are we of Aimeo, 10
Aimeo [we] of eight radiations 13
Thou hast gone to the shadowy land, 10
From whence thou wilt not return. 9
Here are [we] thy children, 7
Come hither to mourn for thee, 10
Diving through the waves of the deep; 11
Alas, indeed, how sad! 7
Farewell to thee, O Pomare the Fourth, 13
Deceased art thou, O Queen, so famed 14
For holding fast to the evangel 9
In the midst of thy kingdom. 6
The vi tree thou that grew in the ocean, 13
Gloriously bending the strength of the wind, 11
[Our] great regrets for thee, O Pomare the Fourth, 16
In the removal from us!
Henry: 273 1
Source: :The people of Mo'orea 12
Greetings to King Pomare on his accession to the throne
Ia ora ho'i 'oe e Pomare pae e, 15
Te ari'i rahi o Tahiti nei, 12
'Oe ho'i tei mono ia Pomare maha, 15
Tei mate a'enei. 8
Teie te parau e Pomare pae, 13
Tapea maite i te evaneria 13
Ei fifi auro i ni'a ia 'oe, 14
Ia ra'atutuo 'oe maitai, 13
Taraire ai to 'oe hau. 11
Na fa'atahinu hia 'oe ei Ari'i, 15
I ni'a iho i to 'oe torono, 12
Ia riro ho'i 'oe mai te aeto ra 15
I te ineinera'a i ni'a iho i Tahiti nei. 19
Teie mai nei to Aimeo, 12
Aimeo teie i te raravaru; 13
Hopu mai nei i te 'are no te moana, 15
Faaro'o a'e nei i te poroi na 'oe, 16
Ta'u Ari'i e ia ora na!
Hail to thee, O Pomare the Fifth, 11
Great sovereign of Tahiti. 10
Thou who hast succeeded Queen Pomare the Fourth, 17
Who now is dead. 5
Here is our message [to thee], Pomare the Fifth. 16
Hold fast to the evangel, 7
As a chain of gold about thee, 11
And that thy goodness be glorious, 10
And thy reign be prosperous. 8
Thou art annointed king 8
Upon thy throne. 4
Like the eagle may'st thou be, 10
In thine expansion over Tahiti. 12
Here are [we] of Aimeo, 10
Aimeo [we] of eight radiations. 13
Diving through the waves of the sea 11
We have obeyed thy summons. 8
Hail to thee, O our King!
Henry: 291-292 1
Tui faarairai
Teie ta 'oe metua tane; teie ta 'oe metua vahine; teie ta oe vahine (or te 'oe tane); teie ta 'oe tamaiti; teie ta 'oe tamahine; teie ta 'oe fetii (o mea). A huri i to mata i te po; eiaha e fariu mai i to te ao nei. Ei . . . . Here is thy father; here is thy mother; here is thy wife (or husband); here is thy son; here is thy daughter; here are thy relatives (and so on). Turn thy face to Hades; look not back to this world. Let sickness end with thee.
Henry: 300 1
Drilling 16
[Said by drilling master standing on an open field]
Toto'o i te tahua ia mata tahua roa. 17
Toto'o i te tahua ia mata tahua poto. 17
Tahi pae ia rupe-a-nu'u. 11
Tahi pae i tai ia rupe-i-tai. 14
E 'ori tatavi e ha'a ta te va. 12
E mataitai ta pua i te fau. 13
E 'ori te heiva ia orea. 12
Na atua i uta e, a haere mai! 14
Na atua i tai e, a haere mai! 14
Na atua i ni'a e a haere mai! 14
Na atua i raro e, a haere mai! 14
A haere mai ei atua a'e i ta tatou 18
Ei ha'api'i i teienei mau pipi 16
I te tia raau. 7
E moe i te Fatu, 7
E moe i te Fatu, Ta'aroa, 11
E tata te tapua ra'au, 10
E ta i te vai o Tu'. 8
I noa'a tana i'a, 8
E vaevae roroa. 8
Tana tiea e 'ura! 8
[Drilling first with the club in six movements] 11
(1) E 'ura teo; (2) e 'ura teni; 10
(3) E 'ura teo; (4) e 'ura teni; 10
(5) E 'ura pitara; (6) e 'ura faau. 12
E fa'a'a, e hoa ia Tane 11
Atua o te mau mea purotu, 12
Ia riro te hui ra'atira 11
Ei papa rahi, 6
Ei tahe vai pue i te 'ite; 12
Ei ueue a vi 8
Ei manuu a horo; 8
Ia poiri i vaho, 8
Ia marama i roto.
March out upon the long course. 10
March out upon the short course. 10
One side for mountain-pigeon inland. 14
One side for mountain-pigeon coastwise. 16
Emotion will dance, the waves [people] will work. 15
Fau flower will look on. 8
Drilling will be the lively game. 9
O gods inland, come forth! 7
O gods coastwise, come forth! 9
O gods above, come forth! 8
O gods below, come forth! 7
Come as gods in our amusement, 11
To teach these pupils 7
The use of wood weapons. 9
Rest in the lord, 4
Rest in the lord, Ta'aroa, 8
The user of the wood must strike, 10
Must strike the waters of stability (war). 11
That he may obtain his fish, 8
Long legs (slain men). 5
This club is red! 4
[Drilling first with the club in six movements] 11
(1) Exaltation red; (2) boastful red; 10
(3) Exaltation red; (4) boastful red; 10
(5) Raising red; (6) striking red. 7
Suit it, O friends, to Tane, 9
God of beauty, 5
That the people may 6
Become a great rock, 7
A freshet in dexterity, 7
Become subduers, 6
Become fast runners; 6
That darkness be [thrown] out, 7
That the light be let in.
Henry: 302 1
Matea
Teie te matea no te mata moe, no te pae a mata. E ara mai 'oe, e hi'o mai e te atua e eiaha to mata e fariu e atu. Here is the awakener for sleeping eyes, for awakening the eyes. Awake thou and look this way, O god, turn not thy face elsewhere!
Henry: 305 1
Challenges to battle
[Challenge] 3
E vana'a tama'i teie i ma'a 13
Na taua i te riri e Huri aau 14
Na taua i te onoono 10
I te iha, i te tote! 8
Taua ra e fa'aoti hia i 12
Teie heiva 'ino, e tama'i. 12
A ta'i te toa, 6
A ta'i te nuanua i viro hia, 13
A ta'i i te a'e! 7
A vau teie, o Te-aho-roa, 12
No te hui toa tuiro'o vau nei. 14
[Reply from warrior challenged] 8
Pa'ipa'i i te rima ia huha, 12
A fava ei pua'a tote! 10
Auaa i ape au nei i te rao! 15
E puahiohio te riri, e Te-aho-roa, 16
Ei vavahi papa te riri, 10
Ei oropua puai te riri, 12
E ia pupu nonoha 8
I taai hia te ata. 9
Ho mai i te toa o auta'ata 13
O te riri e te fatiai. 10
Ovai teie, O Huriaau toa hau a'e tau metua i ta 'oe. 27
E 'ore tau 'omore e mae ae ia 'oe.
[Challenge] 3
A war challenge in this attained 11
For us two in anger, O Huriaau (Upset reef). 16
For us (two) in persistence, 8
In vexation, in fury! 7
Now we (two) shall accomplish 7
This bad play war. 4
Let the warrior weep, 7
Let the champion aimed at weep, 11
Weep for the slain 6
This is I, Te-aho-roa (Long-breath), 11
I come from a race of famous warriors. 14
[Reply from warrior challenged] 8
Clap the hands upon the thighs, 7
Rush head first as a hog enraged! 10
I do not flinch at a fly [his antagonist] 11
A whirlwind is anger, O Te-aho-roa, 12
A rock braker is anger, 7
A strong north wind is anger, 7
That blows away nonoha (grass) 8
sheaths are clouds underrating the enemy. 13
Give me the undaunted warrior 11
With rage and endurance. 8
This is I, Huriaau. My father was a greater warrior than yours. 21
You cannot lift my spear.
Henry: 306-307 1
Source: Mahuta
Date of recitation:: 1839 19
Rauti war song
E ari'i tei nia o te ueue a nu'u, 17
O tapotu a ra'i. 7
A fanoi te tere, e te toa, e te auta'ata. 18
A ha'apu i te tere, 8
E te toa, i ni'a ia Mou'a-raha 14
A Ta'aroa, tuhi mate! 9
Auanei e huri ai 10
I te vero moana. 7
Auanei to paepae, e tau ari'i, 16
E hi hee ai i te toto o te a'e. 14
Ei tao mato te nu'u, 9
E mo'o puapua tini tei roto; 13
Ei ava afa te nu'u 9
E mao avai ava tei roto. 12
Horo i mua na te riri. 9
Te fetoitoi maira te au. 12
Taua e oua i roto 10
I te ripo o te au. 8
Auanei e potu mai ai 12
Te mata'i ia Raa-mau-riri, 12
E tiu ma te toa, 7
E parapu huri fenua. 9
E uira tutui ra'i, 9
E uira rapa ni'a, 8
Te tua o te uira 8
E vero tei muri, 7
E vero 'ino, e mata'i ho'i ri'a. 13
A puta na te mata, a iriti; 11
A puta na te 'ouma, a ha'amahu; 13
A pee atu te ofai a ha'amahu; 14
A motu na te 'iri, e tihi tau tana; 14
E 'ava ia na te taure'are'a; 13
E 'ava pua; e 'ava re'a; 10
E 'ava te aninia; 8
E 'ava te tuiaroha; 9
E 'ava matapoiri; 8
A 'ava mau, te riri aitu; 11
E vahi iti e puta a'e ai te ao, 15
E ta maa ai te niu i 10
E hopoi ia taua i te Po, 12
E fa'aea i raro i te tumu o te niu.
There is a king above, who is the speaker of armies, 18
The roller of the skies. 7
Set about your errand, O warriors, O brave men. 16
Accomplish your errand, 7
O warriors, upon the flat mountain battlefield 16
Of Ta'aroa, whose curse is death! 12
From the will send out 6
An ocean storm battle. 7
Soon thy paving, O my king, 6
Will flow with the blood of the slain. 10
Let the army be as a cleft in the rock 10
Issuing out innumerable lizards; 12
Let the army be an open passage 10
Within which is a furious shark. 10
Rush forwards enraged. 6
The current rage begins to swell. 9
Let us leap into 6
The vortex of the current (heat of warfare). 13
Soon will burst forth 5
The wind waging war of Raa-mau-riri (Sacredness-holding-anger), 19
A descriptive south wind, 8
Which ravages and devastates countries. 13
Lightning anger setting fire to the skies, 12
With lightning flashes above, 8
Upon the back of the lightning 8
Will come the storm battle, 7
An evil storm, an angry storm. 7
If the eye get pricked, relieve it; 12
If the breast get wounded, wear it; 11
If a stone strike you, bear it; 11
If the skin get cut; it is a professional ornament; 16
These are opiates for the valiant; 13
Opiates fizzing and gay; 8
Opiates that make dizzy; 8
Opiates that make faint; 9
Opiates that obscure the eyes; 11
Opiates indeed, the anger of the gods; 13
A little more and day (victory) will dawn, 11
When we shall dine on coconuts 9
Take war to Hades, 6
And dwell beneath the coconut trees.
Henry: 307-308 1
Source: Mahuta
Date of recitation:: 1839 22
Rauti war song in battle
E fa'atupura'a fenua te tama'i, 14
E tu tai a papa, 7
E hora'a one. 6
A mau a 'o. 5
E 'o a rua; 5
E one tupu te tama'i; 9
E one ao, 5
E one rito, 5
E one mahora, 6
E one tuturi, 6
E one paepae, 7
E one pepee, 6
E one avari, 6
Avari a'enei te fenua i Havai'i 16
I te aro o te a'ere nu'u, 11
I te a'ere ra'i, i te a'ere fenua, 15
I te a'ere miti, i te a'ere vai, 14
I te a'ere mou'a, 8
I te a'ere ra'au, no te fare toa. 14
A tanu i te ti i te aro o te Tumu; 14
A tupu te ti, a ao te ti; 10
A huaai te ti 7
No te aro o te Tumu; 8
Ei pu'a te noho o te viri nu'u; 13
Ei totara te haere. 9
Ei tui a i'a, 7
Ei reva a manu. 7
Ei 'uri nui fa'atuma e peepee te avae. 19
Tamumu te taera'a ra'au a te 'aito; 16
E rohi te auta'ata. 9
Ei aiata te rave a te rito; 13
Ei mata piri i te rave; 10
Auaa e hi'o i te taua. 12
A rohi, e nati poto roa hia! 12
Hoatu i vai poiri. 9
E mahuta i te ra'i piri, 10
I rau te aro, 6
Ei aro rahi mata tini, 10
Eiaha e tata i te aratipi. 13
A ui a'ena i te toa 10
Peneiae e auahi rau 'uru, 14
E marara tuaehaa, 9
E tipatipa haarotoa. 10
A tu'u ia haere a'ena! 11
E haere noa tu -- 7
E haere ta'ata 'ino ia, 11
Ei uparu roru, 7
E hara te fa'a'ai! 8
E ariri ma fetue ma e, 10
E tau ta'ata rarahi a'e orua i tereira, 19
I to 'orua na vahi!
War is growth (extension) to the land, 10
Establishment of rock strata (great men), 11
Spreading out of land (population). 12
Take the spade (war weapon). 9
Dig the holes (drill the lines); 8
War is fertile soil; 7
Soil that will produce seeds (extension), 13
Soil that will be verdant (produce power), 12
Soil is spread out, 7
Soil for leaning slabs (increase of priests), 14
Soil for pavings (for marae). 9
Soil that shifts (changes rulers), 8
Soil inaugurated, 8
Land was inaugurated in Havai'i (Ra'iatea) 18
In the presence of the space for waves, 12
Space for the skies, space for the land, 11
Space for sea, space for the river, 11
Space for mountains, 7
Space for trees for the house of warriors. 14
Plant the ti (war) in the presence of the foundation; 16
Let the ti grow, let it mature; 9
Let the ti have increase (bring in profit) 13
From the presence of the foundation; 12
Let the line of battle be as lines of coral rock; 15
Advance as the sea hedgehog. 10
Unite as a string of fish, 8
Or as a flock of birds. 6
Be as the great savage dog that is fleet of step. 15
Let the warrior's weapons clash together; 12
Be courageous, brave men. 10
Let the warrior take hold unsparingly; 11
Let him take hold with closed eyes; 10
That he perceive not a friend. 10
Be brave and make short work! 8
Press into the dark waters (active engagement), 14
Fly into the close sky (conflict), 7
Let there be many battles, 7
Let it be a great battle of thousands, 12
Dread not the reserved forces of the enemy. 13
Enquire of the warriors 9
If there be not among them a fire of breadfruit leaves (hearts failing), 24
Flying fish appearing and disappearing, 12
Little frightened fish hiding in the rock. 11
Let them depart! 4
It matters not if they go -- 7
They will leave as mean men, 9
Pale and spiritless, 6
Whom it would be wrong to feed! 9
O whelk and sea victims, 7
You are greater men than they 10
In your own places!
Henry: 308-309 1
Source: Haapu-taata and Maoae
Date of recitation:: 1829 37
Rauti war song from Ra'iatea and Tahaa
Mahuta ia ahura tupu vana'a, 13
Mua vana'a, roto vana'a, 10
Tote vana'a, e heuea 'orere, 13
O tui ma te viea, 8
O pihae ma te vana'a! 9
Area a fa'ai tu au i tau vana'a, 16
Tau mahuta: 'Uprou, 8
O 'Uporu nei utu'afare ia no te atua, 18
O Havai'i nei ra 8
Ei matua papa 7
Ei po fanaura'a no Vavau. 12
Ie ho'a ie! Na tamari'i nei, 13
Na tamari'i nei, Ie! 9
Ie, e pipiri e fenua; 10
Ie, ie, e pipiri 8
E fenua hui a uta, hui a tai. 14
Mahuta i ni'a? A e! 8
Riu? A, e! 4
Na ui tua mea, 7
Na uparuroru, 6
E vauho; ia ei tiao, 11
Ei fa'aora; ei fatia no vero, 14
E a'era'a i tera ra mata'i rahi. 14
Ta morohi atu, 6
Ta tere ma te hinu. 7
E a'ere tu uta io tatou, 12
E vai pue ma te vai tahe, 11
Ua tipu'upu'u te he i te ana. 13
Putuputu mai te rau toa te 'omore. 15
Ora atua te fa'atotoro. 11
E puta i tai i mahoahoa, 12
E taravarava te pea a niu mea. 14
A tahu i te auahi 9
A te vahine metua 8
A tamaumau i te ahi a Mahui'e. 15
Tena te ruahine tie, 9
Tena te ruahine hau. 9
A hura tupu vana'a. 8
Tautini ra tau nei vana'a 12
I roto i te far mahora. 9
E rohi e fa'aitoito, 10
E 'ore e fa'aherehere, ha'apohe, ha'amou 18
E tahe te hou o taua tamaiti ari'i ra, 18
E pu'u te 'upo'o 7
O taua fare 'aito ra. 10
I te 'omore nei 7
E tahe te roi mata o te ra'atira ra. 15
Ei roi mata te haumanava. 12
A tu'u te rouru e te maiu'u 13
Ei fa'atauaroha i te a'e ra. 14
E maue i te ra'i piri e au taeae, 17
Te ra'atira ia roa'e mai. 12
Auaa e horuhoru, 9
E tanu ra i te matau. 9
Te fatia a te toa 8
Ei riri hea ei huru fa'ahee te rave, 17
Ei manava ra'a te rauti. 11
Ia tu'u te arero o tei aro mai, 15
Ai opupu te iri i te tahatai 14
Ei puta tao i te 'uoma, 11
Atira te maro 6
I tena na heiva 'ino ai tama'i, 14
Ia hopu i te hau te taure 'are'a, 15
Ei roi no te 'ope'ope, 10
Ia turerua te tamari'i i tahatai.
Let fly the invocation in the chant, 10
Leading chant, middle chant, 7
Expansive chant, rousing chant, 9
To impel immediately, 8
Tear whilst speaking! 6
But I shall deliver my chant! 7
My invocation: 'Uporu (Taha'a), 11
As for 'Uporu it is the home of the gods. 13
But as for Havai'i (Ra'iatea) 12
It is strong rock 4
Of the night from whence sprang Vavau (Porapora). 14
Rouse up friends! Ye sons here, 10
Ye sons here, rouse up! 8
Rouse up adhering to your land; 11
Rouse up, rouse up, adhering 11
To your land peopled inland and coastward. 13
Fly up? Ah yes! 3
Simultaneously? Ah yes! 8
O generation of red (sunburned) backs, 12
Be ready for action, 7
Be troops to stand against, 8
To save, to break the storm (war), 9
To let the hurricane spend itself. 10
Be calmed down, 4
That we sail as in oil. 8
We have depth inland, 6
Fresher and flowing water (Reinforcements). 12
Caterpillars (warriors) are coiled up in the cave (reserve). 20
As thick as toa leaves are their spears. 14
God 'Ora will direct [us]. 7
We shall break out upon the raging sea [host] 14
And cross spears upon the red coconuts [men's heads]. 14
Kindle the fire [war spirit] 8
Of the mother [land] 5
Keep alive the fire of Mahui'e! 13
There is the old woman that carries off. 12
There is the old woman of peace. 11
Exult [ye] in the war chant. 7
Let my chant produce effect. 7
Within the field house [battle-field]. 12
Be strong, be energetic, 7
Spare not, annihilate. [Of the enemy] 12
Sweat will flow from that prince, 8
Bumped will be the heads 7
Of the warriors of that camp. 8
From these spears 5
Those gentlemen's tears will flow. 9
Tears will be their meat. 8
Let them have hair and fingernails 11
As keepsakes from off their slain. 11
Fly into the close sky [conflict] my brethren, 9
That you capture gentlemen. 9
Be not agitated 6
But bury fear. 4
The warmth of the warrior 7
Is to rush angrily, rush into action, 11
The rauti giving vitality. 9
Let the tongue of the enemy protrude, 12
Let their skin be scorched on the seaside, 13
Let the spear pierce their breast, 11
Let them no longer persist 7
In this bad play, fighting, 6
Let their valiant men sue for peace, 13
For a bed for their carcasses, 9
That their children may live tranquilly upon the seashore.
Henry: 310 1
Aha-tu prayer
E Tū ma Ta'aroa e, e Ta'aroa nui tuhi mate e, teie te ia na oe, o te i'a o te aitea no roto i te Vai-o Tu. 49
Maitai atura, e te atua, oe tu'u mai i taua i'a nei i to matou rima. Na e te atua, a mau, ia na 'oe, ia moopō roa tona ra tu, te hoe e 'ore iti ia toe noa iho.
Tū with Ta'aroa, O great Ta'aroa, your curse is death, here is your fish, the fish caught from the Vai-o-Tu (Water-of-Stability). 43
Well it is, O gods, that you have given this fish into our hands. There, O gods, take it as a fish for yourselves, that all his family be extirpated and not one be spared.
Henry: 311 1
Priests entreaty when laying down the hiamoea
E te atua e eiaha e fa'arue ia matou, eiaha e haere a! Inaha, teie toa matou, a mauei ta'ata na 'oe, e te nu'u atua e! O gods, forsake us not, go not away! Behold, here we are also, take us to be your servants, O host of gods!
Henry: 312 1
Depiction of the atoreraa te moa ufa
E rohi. 3
Ei piri mata te rave 9
I te aro o te taua nei; 11
Tutonu maite, 6
Auaa e nevaneva te mata. 12
Ei fa'arua nui tairi pu te rave. 15
E vaere i te mapua, 9
E 'imi ia poti, 7
Auaa te ho'e o 'ore ia toe, 14
Atore i te moa ufa, 9
Eiaha e a'a 'ura'ura a'e ia toe. 17
E turi tahi maeta, 8
E pito maite; 6
Ei haruru o te tai, 9
E tu'u i te rai i raro i te avae, 15
Homai i te riri 7
O Ta'aroa tuhi mate!
Be strong. 2
Work with closed eyes (ignoring) 9
In the presence of friends; 8
Look steadfast, 5
Let not the eyes wander. 7
Be as the great blasting north wind. 9
Weed out the water mint (refugees), 12
Seek for the red taro (able-bodied men). 13
Let not one be left, 6
Disembowel the hen, 6
Let not a red root be left. 8
Be all deaf (to entreaties), 10
Go hand-in-hand; 4
Be as the roaring seas, 8
And put the sky (chief) beneath your feet. 12
Let us have the anger 7
Of Ta'aroa, whose curse is death!
Henry: 318-319 1
Sovereign's response to manu faite if in favor of peace
Tera te toa a te ari'i, te toa o hau, ei hau mai te 'a'ano e te roa, mai te hitia o te ra e te to'oa o te ra mai te apatoa e te apatoerau: ei hau! 66
Te iriti nei te ari'i i te taupo'o tama'i, ua matara te ha'ana tama'i. ua ha'apae hia te ihe. Ua ha'amana hia te ari'i mai teie pae e tae noatu i tera pae. Te taoa maitai e horoa ia tu nei o te hau; a tonoi te 'orero ia fa'aite i te hau. 111
Iriti i te tira o te va'a tama'i, haapae atu i ni'a i te turu; ha'apae i te ahu tama'i, te ahu motumotu o te toa o te moa i te toto haia, tanu atu i roto i te toto haia, tanu atu i roto i te marae na Tutae-avae-toetoe, na te ahu ari'i e te ta'ata i te ahu api. Ha'apae i te ra'au toa, ei hau, ei hau maoro pu'upu'u'ore, ia e tahatai i te tamari'i, e ia putuputu noa te ta'ata no te ra i te omuhumuhu noa ra'a. Fa'aea ma te hau e te here. 195
Ia atua te atua, ia tahu'a te tahu'a pure i te marae. Ia ari'i te ari'i e ia ra'atira te ra'atira ei hau te nohora'a o te ta'ata i to ratou mau mataeina'a. 73
Ia ho'i ana'e te mau tahu'a i ta ratou mau ha'a; ia taia te tahu'a tautai, e ia ahune te fenua i te ma'a o te feia fa'a'apu. 58
Tuaru ia tutava'e i te Po. Tapoi i te afa tama'i ei tino ari'i te tapoi. Fari'i' i te toa a te Ari'i no te hau.
There is a rock from the sovereign, the rock of peace, let there be peace over length and breadth, from east to west, from south to north; let there be peace! 47
The sovereign is putting off the war cap, the armor is loosened, the spear is put aside. The sovereign is respected from one side to the other. The treasure that is being given you here is peace; send forth the heralds to proclaim peace. 77
Take down the masts of the war canoe, draw them up onto their blocks; put away the war clothes, the tattered clothes of the warrior, rendered sacred with the blood of the slain; bury them in the marae for Tutae-avae-toetoe [for the gods of Hades]. Let the sovereign put on royal clothes and the people new clothes. Put the war weapons away and let there be peace, long unbroken peace, so that the children may fill the shores and that there be a dense mass of people all talking together. Live on peace and love. 155
Let the gods be gods, and the priests be priests in the marae, the chiefs be chiefs, and the gentlemen be gentlemen, that peace be in the dwellings of the people in their districts. 51
Let the artisans return to their various vocations; let the fishermen fish, and let the land be ripe with the food of the farmer. 39
Banish war with all its evils to Hades. Cover over the abyss of war; let the chief be a covering stone. Receive from the soveregin the rock of peace.
Henry: 320 1
Reconsacration of marae after war
[Priest presenting breadfruit branch at marae] 14
Teie te apaapa 'uru na 'oe e te atua e, ia ruperupe ina i te fenua. Te tipapa nei matou i te pu'e utaa; te ruhiruhia, te vahine, e te humaha tamari'i, e fa'aho'i mai i te fenua nei. Eiaha e mau i te riri i to fa'a'ai pua'a, ia ora to maru, e te atua e! 114
[Priest to assemblyof warriors] 9
Teie te 'orero mai te vaha o te ari'i vahine, ua noanoa fa'ahou te fenua, e haere ra tatou e fa'aho'i mai i to tatou pu'e fetii e moe noa nei.
[Priest presenting breadfruit branch at marae] 14
Here is a part of a breadfruit [tree] for thee, O god; make fruitful the land. We are going to recall the dependent ones, the aged, and the women and children, to return home. Hold not anger against thy pig feeders (the people); spare thy shadows (priests), O god! 77
[Priest to assemblyof warriors] 9
Here is word from the mouth of the queen; the sweet odor of the land is restored, and now we must go and bring back our families who are absent.
Henry: 321 1
Raumataohi prayer
E te atua e, teie matou! 12
Teie, te Ari'i, 7
Teie te va'a mataeina'a, 12
I haere mai i te fenua 11
E amu i te ma'a. 7
Eiaha ei mai, 8
Ia ora te hui ari'i, 10
Ia ora te hui toofa, 10
Ia ora te hui ra'atira, 11
Ia ora te va'a mataeina'a. 13
Ua fenua te fenua, 9
Ua marae te marae, 9
Ua atua te atua, 9
Ua ari'i te ari'i, 9
Ua maitai roa. 8
Te mai o te marae, ua ora, 12
Te mai o te fata, ua ora, 11
Te mahuruhuru. 6
Fano ei hau, ei hau rahi, 12
Ei hau hohonu, 7
Ei hau maoro, 7
Ei hau maitai roa!
O gods, here are we! 7
Here is the sovereign, 8
Here are the clans, 6
Come to their land 6
To eat food. 5
Let there be no sickness, 7
Let the royal family live. 8
Let the chieftains live, 8
Let the gentlemen live, 7
Let the clans live. 5
The land is restored as land, 8
The temples are restored as temples, 11
The gods reign as gods, 6
The sovereign is sovereign, 10
All is superlatively well. 8
The sickness of the temples is healed, 11
The sickness of the altars is healed. 11
The sickness of the land is healed. 10
Extend forth peace, great peace, 11
Let it be deep peace, 8
Let it be long peace, 7
Let it be excellent peace!
Henry: 321-322 1
Priest's address at the tu'ura'a va'a uta hara
E hoe i tena va'a e mairi mai Hiti-poto, Hiti-tautau-atu, hiti-tautau-mai, e tae roa i Tai-nui-atea. E ma te hara a te ta'ata i Tai-nui-atea; e ma te mahuru o te fenua i Tai-nui-atea. 84
A ui mai te aitu tu moana e; "Nohea va'a?" e tao e, "No Tahiti." "O hea i Tahiti?" "O Ta-pori-o-nu'u; te mou'a i ni'a, o Mahue; te tahua i rao o Vai-rota; te vai, o Pu-'o'oro; te 'outu i tai, o Ahu-roa; te marae, o Tara-ho'i, fa'a ari'i o Tu-nui-a'e-i-te-atua. E va'a uta hara -- e huri atu i Moana-tai-oo." 129
[as canoe is sailing away] 10
Naha te fa'atae o te aitu! A tae Tane a tae Ta'i-te-araara, a tae Te Fatu a tae Rua-nuu, a tae Ta'aroa-nui-tahi-tumu, te metua o te aitu! A tae o 'Oro ta haia, e te tamahine ra, o To'i-mata, e na hui tapairu. 92
Einaha te fa'ataera'a o te aitu! Tae fa'ati'a, tae fa'amana e tae fa'aora! 35
Ia ora na to pu'e ta'ata io nei, ia ora na to maru.
Paddle this canoe past Hiti-poto (Short-border), Hiti-tautau-atu (Border-receding), Hiti-tautau-mai (Border-advancing), and onwards to Tai-nui-atea (Trackless-ocean). The sins of the people will be cleansed in Tai-nui-atea, the pollution of the land will be cleansed in Tai-nui-atea. 97
When the gods hover over the ocean and enquire, "From whence is the canoe?" say, "It is from Tahiti." From what place in Tahiti?" From Ta-pori-o-nu'u (Fatness of hosts); the mountain above is Mahue (Pushed-up); the assembly ground is Vai-rota (Gathering-water); the river is Pu'o'oro (Gurgling-group); the point outside is Ahu-roa (Long-wall); the marae is Tara-ho'i (Thorn-returning); the king there raised is Tu-nui-a'e-i-te-atua (Stability-greater-than-the-gods). It is a canoe bearing away sins -- cast it into Moana-tai-oo (Vortex-ocean)." 174
[as canoe is sailing away] 10
Behold the arriving of the gods! There comes Tane, there comes Ta'i-te-araara (Low-cry-that-awakens); there comes Te-fatu (The lord); there comes rua-nu'u (Source-of-Armies); there comes Ta'aroa-nui-tahi-tumu (Great-unique-foundation), father of the gods, there comes 'Oro, slayer of men, and his daughter, to'i-mata (Axe-with-eyes), with her waiting maids. 116
And behold the arrival of the gods! Arrived to accept, arrived to give power, arrived to save. 30
May your people here live, may your shadows (priests) live.
Henry: 332-333 1
Source: King Pomare
Date of recitation:: 1818 23
Divisions of the year
Teie te tau ari'i ma te tai'o na to Tahiti nei, 'oia o Matari'i-i-ni'a e o Matari'i-i-raro. O Mata-ri'i e pura na i te ata i te pae ra'i o na Hui-tarava ia Mere ra i te arehurehura'a o te ahiahi, i te Ava'e o Temā ra, 'oia ia Novema 20, o te avei'a ia o te tau 'ahune O Matari'i-i-ni'a ia tau, e topa noa 'tu ia fetu ri'i i raro a'e i te pae ra'i i te arehurehura'a o te ahiahi, i te ava'e o au-unuunu ra, 'oia ia te 20 no Mē. O te upo'o ia o te tau 'ahune. 206
O Matari'i-i-raro te tau i ha'amata i te ava'e o Au-unuunu ra (ia Mē) ia mo'e ae ia fetu ri'i i raro i te pae ra'i i te arehurehura'a o te ahiahi ra, e tae noa 'tu i te pura fa'ahou ra'a mai ini'a i te pae ra'i i te arehurehura'a i te ava'e o Tema ra (ia novema). O te tau ia o te o'e. 130
A tahi matahiti, e rua tau i teie tai'o. 19
Teie te piti o te tai'o i te tau; e na ni'a i te ava'e 24
O Rehu (Varehu, Arehu), te haere mai nei te 'ahune; ia Titema e Tenuare ia tau. I te tua o Rehu, o 43
Fa'ahu-nui, te tamoe no te 'ahune; ia Tenuare e Fepuare. I te tua o Fa'ahu, o 34
Pipiri, te 'ore ra te ma'a; ia Fepuare e Māti. I te tua o Pipiri, o 29
Ta'a-'oa, te 'ore ra te 'uru; ia Māti e Epereera. O te tua o Ta'a-oa, o 32
Au-unuunu, ua unuunu ia te hуe o te rava'ai, e anotau vero; ia Eperera e Mē. I te tua o Au-unuunu, o 50
'Apa'apa, te pou no te tau o'e, te parara'a o te ra'o'ere ra'au e ma'iri atu ai; ia Mē e Tiunu. I te tua o 'Apa'apa, o 53
Paroro-mua, pohera'a o te re'a ia Tiunu e Tiurai. I te tua o Paroro-mua, o 34
Paroro-muri, e tau o'e; ia Tiurai e Atete. I te tua o Paroro-muri, o 31
Muri-'aha; ia Atete e Tetepa. I te tua o Muri-aha, o 23
Hia'ia, te pou ra'a 'tu i raro roa i te o'e; ia Tetepa e Atopa. I te tua o Hia'ia, o 38
Te-mā, o te mā rea 'tu ia o te ma'a tahito, e tupura'a o te ma'a api, o te tau ia e tanu ai i te ma'a; ei Atopa e Novema. I te tua o Te-mā, o 63
Te-'eri, ia Novema. Ei reira e 'oteo mai ai te 'uru apо. I te tua o Te-'eri, o 34
Te-ta'i, Te-ta-ai-nui-ia-tuma, ia Titema. Te tupu ra te uru; te ta ai ra ia i te hui ma'a o te taevao i tai.
These are the kingly periods observed by Tahitians. They are Matari'i-i-ni'a (Pleiades-above) and Matari'i-i-raro (Pleiades-below). When the Pleiades first sparkles in the horizon towards the constellation of Orion's belt in the twilight of the evening, in the month of Temā (The-clearing), on November 20th, they are the forerunners of the season for plenty. Matari'i-i-ni'a is then the season, until these little stars descend below the horizon in the twilight of the evening, in the moth of Au-unuunu (Suspension), on the 20th of May. That is the ending of the season of plenty. 180
Matari'i-i-raro is the season beginning in the month of Au-unuunu (Suspension) in May, when those little stars disappear below the horizon in the twilight of evening, until they sparkle again above the horizon, in the twilight of the month of Temā in November. This is the season of scarcity. 94
One year has two seasons according to this reckoning. 17
Here is the second way of counting the seasons; it is by the moons 20
Rehu (Levelling) is when harvest is coming in; this period arrives between December and January. On the back of Rehu comes 38
Fa'ahu-nui (Great-repose), the sound sleep of plenty; between January and February. On the back of Fa'ahu comes 36
Pipiri (Parsimony), the time when scarcity begins; between February and March. On the back of Pipiri comes 31
Ta'a-'oa (Departing-joy); breadfruit is scarce. On the back of Ta'a-'oa comes 25
Au-unuunu (Suspension); the fisherman's paddles are then put away, it is a stormy period; between April and May. On the back of Au-unuunu comes 48
'Apa'apa (Severed-in-twain), descent into the time of scarcity of food; the leaves of plants then yellow and fall off; between May and June. On the back of 'Apa'apa comes 52
Paroro-mua (First-fall). Turmeric and wild ginger then die out; between June and July. On the back of Paroro-mua comes 37
Paroro-muri (After-fall), the last of the fruit season; between July and August. On the back of Paroro-muri comes 36
Muri-'aha (Prayer-behind); between August and September. On the back of Muri-'aha comes 28
Hia'ia (Cravings), descent into the greatest scarcity of food; between September and October. On the back of Hia'ia comes 39
Te-ma (The-clearing), when the old crops are clean gone and new crops are developing, which is the season for planting food; between October and November. On the back of Te-ma comes 54
Te-'eri (Scarcity), most of November. Then the inflorescence of the breadfruit begins. On the back of Te'eri comes 34
Te-ta'i (The-cry), Te-ta-ai-nui-ia-tuma (The epicure's-great-forage for food), in December. The breadfruit is developing; then wild foods of all kinds are brought out to eat.
Henry: 334 1
Source: :Mrs. Ari'ita'imai Salmon, high chiefess of Papara, and also Umarea, son of a high chief of Mo'orea
Date of recitation:: 1891 53
Year of Twelve Moons
Teie te i'oa o te mau ava'e o te matahiti e ta ratou mau vahine 30
Paroro-mua, ei Eperera; o Mara'amu te vahine. 20
Paroro-muri, o Mē; o To'erau te vahine. 17
Muri-'aha, ia Tiunu; e parara'a no te ra'au, o Te-'ura te vahine. 27
Hia'ia, ia Tiura'i; ua pohe te re'a; o Tura'i-re'a te vahine. 27
Ta'a-'oa, ia Atete, o Te-rere-'oa'oa te vahine. Ofaara'a o te honu e te upoa. 35
Huri-ama, ia Tetepa, o Te-mata-tau-roroa te vahine. Ua vehe te tau, o te roroara'a ia o te mahana. 43
Te'eri, ia Atopa, o Te-ha'amoe-'apa'apa te vahine. Ava'e ua. 27
Te-ta'i, ia Novema, o Te-hei-fa'ataha te vahine. Te uaara'a ia o te pua, o te rave hia ma te ha'apae i te hei 'i'ino. 51
Varehu, ia Titema, o Oteatea te vahine. 18
Faahu, ia Tenuare, o Pahu-nui-atoi-tere-i-te-ta-moe te vahine. E ava'e 'ahune ia. 37
Pipiri, ia Fepuare o Pipiri-ma'a-i-fenua te vahine. "E 'ai atu te hoa i te tara fare, e 'ore e 'ite mai e, o te hoa here 'oe", e parau tahito ia. Utautara'a o hone ri'i e te upoa i tua. 82
A-unuunu, ia Mati, Ua-unuunu-ma-te-tai te vahine. E anotau vero.
These are the names of the months of the year and of their wives
21
Paroro-muri (After-fall), in May; To'erau (North-wind) is the wife. 20
Muri-'aha (Prayer-behind), in June; leaves turn yellow; Te-'ura (Gorgeousness) is the wife. 29
Hia'ia (Longings), in July; wild ginger and Turmeric die out; Tura'i-re'a (Battering-down-of-re'a) is the wife. 35
Ta'a-'oa (Departed-joy), in August; Te-rere-'oa'oa (Flight-of-joy) is the wife. The turtle and the upoa bird then lay their eggs. 40
Huri-ama (Turned-outrigger), in Septermber; Te-mata-tau-roroa (Face-long-standing) is the wife. Time is balancing, the days are lengthening. 44
Te'eri (Development of spring) in October; Te-ha'amoe-'apa'apa (Persistence) is the wife. It is a rainy month. 36
Te-ta'i (The-cry) in November; Te-hei-fa'ataha (Wreaths-worn-jauntily) is the wife. It is the season for the Besleria laurifolia flower, which is preferred to commons wreaths. 55
Varehu (Spring-advanced), in December; Oteatea (Infloresence-of-bananas) is the wife. 29
Faahu (Restfulness), in January; Pahu-nui-atoi-tere-i-te-ta-moe (Great-drum-extending-ripeness-with-sound-sleep) is the wife. 42
Pipiri (Parsimony), in February; Pipiri-ma'a-i-fenua (Stinginess-of-food-in-the-land) is the wife. "The friend will eat then in the house corner, and ignore thee as a dear friend," is an old saying. The turtle and the upoa bird take their young out to sea at that time. 87
A-unuunu (Withdrawal), in March; Ua-unuunu-ma-te-tai (Withdrawal-from-the-sea) is the wife. It is a stormy period.
Henry: 336-338 1
Source: Paora'i, a counselor of Porapora. Afterwards Vai'au, a high priest of Porapora, recited nearly the same chant, also a little later, Pati'i, a noted high priest of Mo'orea
Date of recitation:: 1822 78
Creation of the world
O Ta'aroa te tupuna o te mau atua ato'a; na'na te mau mea ato'a i hamani. Mai tahito a iuiu mai o Ta'aroa nui, Tahi-tumu. 56
Na Ta'aroa iho Ta'aroa i tupua toivi noa; oia iho to'na metua, aore to'na metua tane, aore metua vahine. 49
Ua mano te huru o Ta'aroa; o Ta'aroa i ni'a, Ta'aroa i raro, Ta'aroa ofa'i. E fare atua Ta'aroa, to'na tuamo'o, o te tahuhu ia, na ivi 'ao'ao o te ta'ota'o ia. Teie ta Ta'aroa 80
Ta'aroa-nui, Parau-mau, Hurifenua, Ta'aroa-nui fa'aoti hara e te ino, Ta'aroa-nui Tumu-tahi, Ta'aroa-nui hiuhiu 'ai'ai, Ta'aroa upu tū Ta'aroa ma tū ra'i, Ta'aroa ha'apurara, Ta'aroa tū ava'va, Ta'aroa ta'ahi tumu, Ta'aroa nui tuhi mate. 110
E tuhi i te fenua e mate, e huri i te fenua e pohe i te ma'i, e tuhi e te moana e riorio, e tuhi i te ra'au e oha haere. E mano te huru o Ta'aroa, ho'e roa ra Ta'aroa, i ni'a, i raro, e i te Pō. 84
I parahi Ta'aroa i roto i to'na pa'a mai te pō a 'iu'iu mai. 28
Mai te huoro ra te pa'a i roto i te aere a 'ohu noa ai, 'aore ra'i, 'aore fenua, 'aore tai, aore marama, aore rā, aore fetu. 57
E pō ana'e ia, e po tinitini ia e te ta'ota'o. O rumia te io'a o taua pa'a o Ta'aroa ra. 42
O Ta'aroa ana'e iho i to'na pa'a. Aore metua tane, aore metua vahine, 'aore tua'ana, aore tuahine. Aore ta'ata, aore pua'a, aore 'uri. O Ta'aroa ra, 'oia ana'e iho. 77
E aere rai te aere, a aere fenua te aere, e aere tai te aere, e aere vai te aere. 41
A tae rā i te ho'e tau, ua pate ihora Ta'aroa i to'na pa'a, e amaha huru uputa rōo a'era. Ua unuhi maira Ta'aroa i vaho, ti'a 'tura i ni'a iho i to'na ra pa'a, hi'o ihora e o 'oia ana'e ra. 'Aore e muhumuhuraa, e po ana'e ra to vaho. 105
Ua pi'i ihora, "Ovai tei ni'a na e?" 'Aore reo! "Ovai tei raro na e?" 'Aore reo! "Ovai te tai na e?" 'Aore reo! "Ovai tei uta na e?" 'Aore reo! Te pinainai noa mai ra to'na iho reo, tira 'tu ai. 84
Naō atura Ta'aroa, "Aere ra'i e, aere nu'u e, aere fenua, e toro atu i nia roa e i raro roa na e!" A au noa Ta'aroa i roto i te aere fenua ore. Au atura e ni'a e ni'a roa, e i raro, i raro roa; hoi atura ia Tumu-iti i roto ia Fa'a-iti i to'na ra pa'a, fa'aea 'tura na i roto ia Fa'a-iti ma te apiapi e te poiri ta'ota'o. 147
Rohirohi atura Ta'aroa i roto i taua pa'a ra, e maunu atura oia i te ho'e pa'a hou, e ti'a mai nei i vaho i ni'a iho i te pa'a tahito ra ia Rumia. 67
Ua rave ihora 'oia i taua pa'a hou no'na ra ei tumu nui no te ao nei ei papa fenua e ei repo no te fenua. E o taua pa'a o Rumia ra, i vetevete hia i mutaaiho ra, o to'na ia fare, te apu o te ra'i atua, o te rai piri ia, o te fa'aati i te ao i tupu ra. 115
Fa'aea aera Ta'aroa i te rai piri poiri roa, e 'aore 'oia i ite e e ao to vaho, e ua tamaiti a'era Ta'aroa, Teie rā na ta'ata i roto iana iho, o meharo, o manao, o tutonu, e o hi'ohi'o, o na taata ia i ite i te fenua. Ovai tei topa i te io'a o teie tamaiti, o Ta'aroa? Na'na iho i topa noa i to'na iho io'a, o Ta'aroa. 150
Rahi atura, pa'ari atura; e mana rа to Ta'aroa! E atua ha te mau atua ato'a? E atua ri'i tapiripiri haere noa ia! 51
Tei roto ia Ta'aroa te mau peu atoa. Te vero, te ua, te tai, tei roto ana'e i to'na 'apu rima. 41
Ua hamani ihora Ta'aroa i te tumu nui o te fenua ei tane, e i te papa fenua ei vahine a'e na te Tumu-nui; o Haruru-papa te ioa o taua tumu ra, tu'u atura Ta'aroa i to'na varua i roto, 'oia te meho'i no'na iho, topa 'tura o Ta'aroa-nui-Tumu-tahi. Ua maeva a'era Ta'aroa ia Tumu-nui ei ari'i, maeva rа Tumu-iti ia Tumu-nui fenua 'ore. 150
Ua ta'o atura Ta'aroa: "E Tumu-nui e, a ne'e mai a fa'a tane, ei tane a'e na teie nei vahine na Papa-raharaha." E reo mau to te Tumu-nui i te naō ra'a 'tu e, "E ore au e ne'e atu, e tumu vau no te fenua nei." 91
Ua ta'o atura Ta'aroa: "E te papa raharaha e, a ne'e mai oe ei vahine na teie tane ia Tumu-nui." E reo mau to taua papa ra i te parau ra'a 'tu e, "E ore au e ne'e atu, e papa vau no te fenua nei." 'Aore te ho'e i tae, aore hoi te tahi i tae. 107
A tau ā Ta'aroa i te ra'i piri ia Rumia; rahu atua, i fanau i te po ia Ta'aroa. I ta'o hia 'e taua ra'i ra e e ra'i atua. 57
O Ta'aroa nei tu ra'i, ua fariua ei tatau no te po, ei tupuraa atua. Ria roa nei te taata i hamani hia 'i, o Tū ma Ta'aroa ia i te hamani ra'a hia te ta'ata. 73
A ueue te huruhuru a Ta'aroa, 'oia te tumu ra'au, 'oia te ra'au torotoro, 'oia te fei pū, 'oia te ruperupe i ni'a i te fenua. 59
Ua fenua a'era te fenua, e ua paari, te tapea ra te fee nui, o Tumu-ra'i-fenua; tahi avei, i apato'a ia; tahi avei i apa-toerau; tahi avei i te hiti'a-o-te-rā; e tahi avei i to'oa-o-te-rā; a tape'a i te fenua e te ra'i piri i raro nei. 108
Na Ta'aroa te mau mea 'toa.
Ta'aroa (The-unique-one) was the ancestor of all the gods; he made everything. From time immemorial was the great Ta'aroa, Tahi-tumu (The-origin). 50
Ta'aroa developed himself in solitude; he was his own parent, having no father or mother. 29
Ta'aroa's natures were myriads; he was Ta'aroa above, Ta'aroa below, Ta'arow in stone. Ta'aroa was a god's house; his backbone was the ridgepole, his ribs were the supporters. These were Ta'aroa's [attributes] 72
Great-Ta'aroa, the Truth, Turner-of-the earth, the Great-Ta'aroa who ended sins and evil, the Great-Ta'aroa Foundation, the Great-Ta'aroa of boundless glory, Ta'aroa of sure bidding, Ta'aroa of the clear sky, Ta'aroa who propagated, Ta'aroa who stood over the passage of the reef, Ta'aroa the extirpator, the great Ta'aroa whose curse was death. 118
When he cursed the earth there was death, when he turned the earth there was sickness, when he cursed the sea it became dry, when he cursed the trees they drooped. Myriads were the natures of Ta'aroa, but there was only one Ta'aroa, above, below, and in Hades. 79
Ta'aroa sat in his shell in darkness for millions of ages. 18
The shell was like an egg revolving in endless space, with no sky, no land, no sea, no moon, no sun, no stars. 29
All was darkness, it was continuous, thick darkness. Rumia (Upset) was the name of that shell of Ta'aroa. 31
Ta'aroa was quite alone in his shell. He had no father, no mother, no elder brother, no sister. There were no people, no beasts, no birds, no dogs. But there was Ta'aroa, and he alone. 58
There was sky space, there was land space, there was ocean space, there was fresh-water space. 27
But at last Ta'aroa gave his shell a fillip which caused a crack resembling an opening for ants. Then he slipped out and stood upon his shell, and he looked upon his shell, and he looked and found that he was alone. There was no sound, all was darkness outside. 79
And he shouted, "Who is above there, oh?" No voice [answered]. "Who is below there, oh?" No voice! "Who is in front there, oh?" No voice! "Who is in back there, oh?" No voice! There was the echo of his own voice, and that was all. 69
And Ta'aroa exclaimed, "Oh, space for skies, oh, space for hosts, oh, space for land, extending high above and far below!" Then he swam in the space without land. He swam up, far up, and down, far down; and then he returned to Tumu-iti (Little-foundation) in Fa'a-iti (Little-valley) within his shell, and he dwelt there in close confinement and thick darkness. 103
At length, Ta'aroa got wearied of that shell, and so he slipped out of a new one, and stood outside upon the old shell [which was named] Rumia. 45
And he took his new shell for the great foundation of the world, for stratum rock and for soil for the world. And the shell, Rumia, that he opened first, became his house, the dome of the gods' sky, which was a confined sky, enclosing the world then forming. 69
Then Ta'aroa dwelt in the confined sky in total darkness, and did not know of light outside, and thus he became a lad. But these were the persons within himself, memory, thought, steadfast-gaze, and observation; these persons knew the land. Who gave this boy his name, Ta'aroa? He named himself, Ta'aroa. 89
He grew and became matured; but how great was Ta'aroa! What gods were all the others? They were only minor, dependent gods! 36
By Ta'aroa all things existed. The storm, the rain, the sea, were in the hallow of his hand. 26
Ta'aroa made the great foundation of the earth to be the husband, and the stratum rock to be the wife; Haruru-papa (Rock-resounder) was the name of that foundation, and he put his spirit into it, which was the essence of himself, and named it Ta'aroa-nui-tumu-tahi (Great-unique-foundation). Ta'aroa hailed Tumu-nui (Great-foundation) as king, but Tumu-iti hailed him as king without land. 132
And Ta'aroa said: "Oh, Tumu-nui, crawl hither as a husband, to espouse this wife Papa-raharaha" (Stratum-rock). Tumu-nui had an audible voice as he answered, "I will not crawl thither, I am the foundation for the world." 71
Then Ta'aroa said: "O, Papa-ra-haraha, crawl hither to espouse this husband, Tumu-nui." That rock had a real voice as it answered, "I will not crawl thither. I am the stratum rock for the earth." The one did not go nor did the other go. 71
Ta'aroa dwelt on for ages within the close sky [named] Rumia; he conjured forth gods, and they were born to him in darkness. For this reason the sky was called the sky of gods. 47
When Ta'aroa stood within and turned his face to call to darkness, it was to create gods. It was much later that man was made. Tū was with Ta'aroa when he made man. 50
When Ta'aroa shook off his feathers, they became trees, plantain clusters, and verdure upon the land. 31
When land became land and it was firm, the great octopus, Tumu-ra'i-fenua (Foundation-of-earthly-heaven) held on; one arm was south, one arm was north, one arm was east, and another arm was west; they held the sky down against the earth. 70
Everything belonged to Ta'aroa.
Henry: 339-340 1
Source: Pao-raro and Ra'i-tupu, high priests of Porapora, and Tamera, Tahitian high priest
Date of recitation:: Pao-raro: 1822; Ra'i-tupu: 1824; Tamera: 1833 62
Another version of the creation
I noho maoro na Ta'aroa i roto i to'na ra pa'a. Mai te huoro mau ia te menemene, e te taaminomino ra i roto i te aere mai te pō tinitini maiа. 63
'Aore rā, 'aore marama, 'aore fenua, 'aore mou'a, te vai 'are'are noa ra. 'Aore ta'ata, 'aore pua'a, 'aore moa, 'aore 'uri, aore peu oraora, 'aore tai, 'aore vai. 74
Ia tae ra i te ho'e tau, te patapata ra Ta'aroa i to'na ra pa'a i roto i to'na nohoraa piri, 'afа a'era, parari a'era. Ua unuhi aera Ta'aroa, tū noa 'tura i ni'a iho i te pa'a e ua pi'i atura: "O vai tei ni'a na e? O vai tei raro na e?" Aore reo i te parau ra'a mai! "O vai tei tai na e? O vai tei uta na e?" 'Aore reo i te parau ra'a mai! E vevovevo ana'e no to'na iho reo, e ati noa a'e, aitu 'tu. 174
Ta'o atura Ta'aroa, "E te papa e, a ne'e mai!" 'Aore rа e papa ia ne'e atu. Ua ta'o atura, "E te one e, a nee mai!" Aore rа e one ia ne'e atu. Riri atura i te mea aita 'oia i fa'aro'o hia. 82
Huri ihora i taua pa'a no'na ra, fa'ati'a ihora i ni'a ei 'apu to te ra'i, topa 'tura i te i'oa o Rumia. Rohirohi atura, e ria ri'i ihora, ua unuhi atura i te ho'e pa'a hou o te vehi ia'na iho, rave ihora ei papa e ei one. 'Aore a ra i māha to'na riri, rave atura i to'na tuamo'o ei panai mou'a, to 'na 'ao'ao ei purou mou'a, to'na manava ei pati'i ata marevareva, to'na toahua e to'na 'i'o ei pori fenua, to'na rima e na avae ei faaetaeta no te fenua; to'na ma'iu'u rima e te ma'iu'u avae ei apu e ei poa to te i'a; to'na huruhuru ei raau, ei nanaihere, e ei raau tafifi, ia ruperupe te fenua; e to'na a'au ei 'oura e ei puhi no te vai e te tai; e ahu 'tura te toto o Ta'aroa, mareva tura ei ra'i 'ute'ute e ei anuanua. 328
'Are'a te 'uru o Ta'aroa ra, vai mo'a noa 'tura ia no'na iho, te vai ora noa ra Ta'aroa i te ho'e tino 'ino 'ore. 'Oia te fatu o te mau mea atoa. Ateatea, tupura'a 'tura. 74
A rahu Ta'aroa i te atua, a ria roa na rа te ta'ata i rahua, ia Tū ma Ta'aroa. 35
Mai ta Ta'aroa ra, e pa'a ia, 'oia ho'i te 'apu, e 'apu ho'i to te mau mea ato'a nei. 37
E 'apu te ra'i, 'oia te aeha'i, i fa'anohohia e te atua te rā, te marama, te tua ta'a, e te hui tarava, a te atua. 50
E 'apu te fenua nei no te 'ofa'i, te vai e te ra'au o te tupu mai. 28
To te tane nei 'apu, o te vahine ia, no te mea na rei ra mai 'oia i te ao nei; e to te vahine nei 'apu, o te vahine ia, no te mea na te vahine 'oia i fanau. 67
E ore e hope te tai'o i te 'apu o te mau mea o te ao nei.
For a long period Ta'aroa dwelt in his shell (crust). It was round like an egg, and revolved in space in continuous darkness. 38
There was no sun, no moon, no land, no mountain, all was in a confluent state. There was no man, no beast, no fowl, no dog, no living thing, no sea, and no fresh water. 48
But at last Ta'aroa was filliping his shell, as he sat in close confinement, and it cracked, and broke open. Then he slipped out and stood upon the shell, and he cried out, "Who is above there? Who is below there?" No voice answered! "Who is in front there? Who is in back there?" No voice answered! Only the echo of his own voice resounded and nothing else. 109
Then Ta'aroa said, "O rock, crawl hither!" But there was no rock to crawl to him. And he said, "O sand, crawl hither!" But there was no sand to crawl to him. Then he got vexed because he was not obeyed. 56
So he overturned his shell and raised it up to form a dome for the sky and called it Rumia. And he became wearied and after a short period he slipped out of another shell that covered him, which he took for rock and for sand. But his anger was not yet appeased, so he took his spine for a mountain range, his ribs for mountain slopes, his vitals for broad floating clouds, his flare and his flesh for fatness of the earth, his arms and legs for strength for the earth; his finger nails and toe nails for scales and shells for the fishes; his feathers for trees, shrubs, and creepers, to clothe the earth; and his intestines for lobsters, shrimps, and eels for the rivers and the seas; and the blood of Ta'aroa got heated and drifted away for the redness for the sky and for rainbows. 225
But Ta'aroa's head remained sacred to himself, and he still lived, the same head on an indestructible body. He was master of everything. There was expansion and there was growth. 54
Ta'aroa conjured forth gods, but it was much later that man was conjured, when Tū was with him. 27
As Ta'aroa had crusts, that is, shells, so has everything a shell. 17
The sky is a shell, that is, endless space in which the gods placed the sun, the moon, the Sporades, and the constellations of the gods. 35
The earth is a shell to the stones, the water, and plants that spring from it. 19
Man's shell is woman because it is by her that he comes into the world; and woman's shell is woman because she is born of woman. 37
One canot enumerate the shells of all the things that this world produces.
Henry: 340-344 1
Source: Pao-raro, Rai-tupu, Auna, Moo, high priests of Porapora, and Tamera high priest of Tahiti, and Anani, chief of Tahiti
Date of recitation:: Pao-raro: 1822; Rai-tupu: 1822; Auna: 1822; Moo: 1822; Tamera: 1835; Anani: 1835 78
Chaotic Period
Te piri, a piri te fenua, te mau, a mau te fenua. Te reva, a reva te fenua. Te imi ra, a imi i te fenua. Te ore, a ore te fenua. Aore a uta, aore a tai, aore a ni'a, aore a raro. 76
Fana'e te tau o te po, fana'e te tau o te ao. Huru maumau, huru mahaha. O tahi rairai, o tahi a'ana. 43
O tahi nei a'a a fanau, o papa tau'a ti'a ia. E feo ē tei raro i te tai. E feo ē tei te mato, oia te mau vahi afаfа i te mato ra, o te mairiraa ofa'i ia. 70
E papa mato e te feo moana, e tu'ati, e matua, e tau'a ta raua. 28
E papa ofa'i, e papa araea, e tuati, e matua, e tau'a ta raua. 29
E papa iriiri, e papa otaota, e tua'ti, e matua, e tau'a ta raua. 30
E papa uri e te papa tea, e tu'ati, e matua, e tau'a ta raua. 27
E papa one e te papa repo, e tu'ati, e matua, e tau'a ta raua. 27
E papa tai e papa vai, e tu'ati, e matua, e tau'a ta raua. 26
E papa 'outu, e papa ri'oa, e tu'ati, e matua, e tau'a ta raua. 28
E papa tahatai, e papa a'au tu'ati, a matua, e tau'a ta raua. 28
Taua tau'a ra, o te tama'i ia ia raua, e ore ai na pu'e mea e ta hōe ai. 36
E papa hopara, e papa nohora'a, e tu'ati, 'aore e matua, 'aore e tau'a ta raua. 35
E mataetae rа te ta'ata i te fa'atu'ati'ati haere noa ra'a i taua mau mea nei! 36
'Naha ho'i Ta'aroa-nui! Na tahu'a oia iho i mata pu'upu'u hia'i Havai'i. 33
A tahi mata pu'upu'u a rire. A rua mata pu'upu'u, a rire. 'Ai'ai a'era te fenua. 35
O Te-tupu-o-'ai'ai a noho ia Tumu-iti fenua, a fanau ta'na, o Taune'e. Te ne'e maira te fenua. 42
O Tau-ne'e a noho i te Pautere-fenua, te tere noa maira te fenua. 29
O Pau-tere-fenua a noho ia Ara-'Arahu i te tumu, te 'arahu ra te fenua. 31
Pi'i atura Ta'aroa: "A tū mai te papa ia haere mai te one, ia fanau Te-pori ia Ta'ere i te muhu." 44
Te one? E one tuturi, e one pe'epe'e, e one hua, e one vari maira. I atura Ha-va-i-i i te one; e one i te 'aere nu'u, e one i te fenua mahora, e one i te ana vai, e one i te tororaa moua, e one i te 'aere nu'u ra'au. 96
A he'e mai te fenua, e ara piri na te tumu nui maira, no te he'era'a 'tu o te vai na te 'atau, e te tai na te 'aui. 48
Te ti'ara'a o Ta'a roa, ti'a na ia i te pu'e ava varivari. I ni'a i te a'au o te ho'e pae ava te ta'ahira'a o te ho'e ava'e, e i ni'a i te a'au o te tahi pae ava te-ta'ahira'a o te tahi avae. 84
A hi'o rа Ta'aroa, ta'o atura: "A tū mai te papa tū 'oi ei tūura'a no te mou'a. Ia vai mai te papa fenua ei fa'ahorahorara'a no te fenua e te tai." 67
No te rahu a Ta'aroa i riro ai te iho o te fenua ei fenua; riro atura Havai'i ei fenua no te rahu a Ta'aroa. 50
A oriori Ta'aroa i te iho o te fenua. Ueue ihora o Ta'aroa i te fenua, e aita i 'aueue a'e. Ua parau mai ra Ta'aroa: "O ta'u tao'a maita'i o ta'u fenu'a nei e!" 78
Ua ta'o atura Ta'aroa, rahu atura: "E Tū e, a haere mai ei tahu'a ia'u nei!" Ua haere mai ra o Tū tapu, o Tū tapu, o Tū tahu'a rahi a Ta'aroa. 67
Ua ta'o atura Ta'aroa: "A horahora mai i te one i ta'u va'a iti e! A horahora i te one o ta'u vaa nui e. A horo a ha'a, a horo a ha'a, a horo a ha'a, e ia oti roa!" 72
A hohora o Tū i te one, a horo a ha'a i te ta'o o Ta'aroa. 26
Fanau maira te a'a no te tupura'a o te fenua. 20
Fanau te ari'i, o a'a matamua, a noho ia i te a'a mata-rua. 27
Fanau te ari'i, o a'a mata rua, a noho ia i te a'a mata toru. 27
Fanau te ari'i o a'a mata toru, a noho i te a'a mata hа. 23
Fanau te ari'i, o a'a mata hа, a noho ia i te a'a mata rima. 25
Fanau te ari'i, o a'a mata rima, a noho ia i te a'a mata ono. 27
Fanau te ari'i, o a'a mata ono, a noho ia i te a'a mata hitu. 27
Fanau te ari'i, o a'a mata hitu a noho ia i te a'a mata varu. 27
Fanau te ari'i, o a'a mata varu, a noho ia i te a'a mata iva. 27
Fanau te ari'i, o te a'a mata iva, a noho ia i te a'a mata tini. 28
A tini te aro o te a'a. 10
A rau te aro o te a'a. 10
A mano te aro o te a'a. 10
A mano tini te aro o te a'a. 12
Tea'a toro i ni'a e te a'a toro i raro, te a'a toro i uta e te a'a toro i tai. A toro te a'a, a mau te one; papū atura te fenua. 56
Ua haapapu atura Ta'aroa i te apu o te ra'i, te pa'a ra, ia Rumia, na ni'a i te pou. 37
Ua ta'o atura, "E te Tumu-nui e te Papa-raharaha e, a toina mai ei pou, ei pou mua, ei pou muri." 44
Ua toina mai ra i te pou; o Hotu-i-te-ra'i ei pou mua, o Ana-feo ei pou muri, faaateatea 'tura Taaroa ia Atea, na nia iho; rahu atura i te varua mana no Atea e ati noa a'e. 82
Ua ta'o atura Taaroa, "E te Tumu-nui e te Papa-raharaha e, a toina mai ei pou; a pou hia'i to taua fenua; e pou hia, e poupou hia." 61
A ite a faarire, a toro. 11
Tia aera, o Hotu-i-te-ra'i ei pou mua; o Ana-feo ei pou muri; Ti'amа-ta'aroa, ei pou roto; i pou hia'i te pou ti'ara'a, te pou nohora'a, te pou fa'a'ere'erera'a, te pou 'orerorerora'a, te you vana'ana'ara'a, e te pou haerera'a. 101
O fa'aroa i te Tumu-nui, a fa'aroa i te Papa-raharaha, a fa'aroa i te piha, a fa'aroa i te 'opi a ra'i. A toro te ra'i, a 'a'ano te ra'i, i te pou fenua no Havai'i. 70
Te tupu o te pō, rаrа te pō. 10
Te tupu o te mou'a, rаrа te mou'a. 12
Te tupu o te vai, rаrа te vai. 10
Te tupu o te moana, rаrа te moana. 12
Te tupu o te to'a, rаrа o te to'a. 11
Te tupu o te ra'i, rаrа o te ra'i, e tua tini atura. 19
Te tupu o te ua, rаrа te ua. 10
Te tupu o te rimu e piapia, rаrа atura ia. 17
Te tupu o te uru ra'au, rаrа o te uru raau. 17
Te tupu o te ma'a, rаrа te ma'a. 10
Tupu o te aute, rаrа o te aute. 12
Tupu o te ra'au torotoro, rаrа o te ra'u torotoro. 19
Tupu te nana'ihere, rаrа te nana'ihere. 14
Ha'uti'uti e aho o te moana, o te vai, e o te fenua. Tupu te mau mea oraorao te tai, o te vai, e o te fenua, a rаrа i te tai, i te vai e i te fenua. 63
Ua hi'o ihora o Ta'aroa i raro, e ua hi'o atura i ni'a, ua 'ata a'era i te fa'i mai i to'na aro. 44
Te mata ra o te fa'i mai i ni'a, nаnа i te fa'i mai i raro; te mata ra o te fa'i mai i raro a nаnа i te fa'i mai i ni'a. 45
Ua pi'i 'hora Ta'aroa: "O vai tei uta na e?" Ua parau mai ra to uta, "O vau, O Tū-moua," "O vau o Tū-fenua,' '"O Puna-heuheu," "O vau, Vai-ari'i," Na Ta'aroa iho i tuu mai i vaho," "O vai tei tai na e?" "O vau, Tino-rua, te fatu moana, te fatu i tahua uo te moana." E atua tino rua tu'ati ia, no te moana. 131
"O vau. Tahuri-mai-to'a." O vau Tupu-o-te-moana," "O matou, to'a tini rau o te moana." "O oe i faatū hia 'i te iho o te moana." 54
"O vai te ni'a na e?" "O vau, o Atea, te tea nuu, te tea ra'i, te pori a nu'u, te pori a ra'i, huri hia i te fenua." 46
"O vai te raro e?" "O vau o Rua i te Tumu-nui." "O vau, O Rua i te Papa-raharaha." "O vau o Rua i te re'area," "O vau o Rua-i-te-muhumuhu." 57
"O vai te fa'aea i ni'a i teie fenua e?" "Matou, te mau mea oraora, o te horo haere, o te ne'e, e o te 'au haere." 50
"O vai to te moana e?" "Matou o te horohoro haere, o te ne'e haere, e o te 'au haere. O Ta'aroa ana'e te fatu ia matou." 52
E varua mana te fa'aapi i te moana i te mau tau ato'a o 'Oropa'a to'na i'oa, e reo haruru to to'na. 44
A ite Ta'aroa a fa'arirē. Ua fenua a'era te fenua, ua о atura ia i te mea oraora. E vai te tahe na te fenua, e miti te faaо i te moana, e ua о ana'e atura ia i te mea oraora. Tei roto ana'e a rа i te poiri ta'ota'o o te ra'i piri ia Rumia, i Ha-va-п-о, Ha-va-п-о, fanaura-a fenua; Ha-va-п-о, fanaura-a atua; Ha-va-п-о, fanaura'a ari'i; Ha-va-п-о fanaura'a ta'ata.
Confinement, the earth was confined, firmness held it. Atmosphere, the earth was atmosphere. Searching, there was searching for land. Nothing, there was no land. Inland was not yet formed, seaward was not yet formed, above was not yet formed, below was not yet formed. 75
The time for night ebbed. There was rapid progress, there was slow progress. There was thinness, and there was thickness. 31
The first generation of growth was born, it was affinity rocks. There is different rock in the sea from that of the cliff where there are clefts, whence stones roll down. 46
Rock from the cliffs and ocean rock may meet and unite, there is affinity between them. 26
Slate rock and clay rock may meet and unite, there is affinity between them. 23
Pebbles and crumbling rock may meet and unite, there is affinity between them. 23
Black rock and white rock may meet and unite, there is affinity between them. 23
Sandy rock and earthy rock may meet and unite, there is affinity between them. 23
Ocean rock and river rock may meet and unite, there is affinity between them. 25
Rock of the point and rock of the bay may meet and unite, there is affinity between them. 27
Rock of the shore and rock of the reef may meet and unite, there is affinity between them. 28
These affinities retain differences which prevent all these things from amalgamating together. 30
Rock that repulses and rock to sit upon may meet and not unite, there is no affinity between them. 30
But man would get impatient trying to unite all these things! 18
Behold Ta'aroa-nui! In himself were the devices that made uneven the face of Havai'i (Invoked-space-that-filled). 39
The first unevenness took place and there was applause. The second unevenness took place and there was applause. Then the earth looked well. 45
Te-tupu-o-'ai'ai (Growth-of-comeliness) dwelt with Tumu-iti of land, and there was born Tau-ne'e. Land was creeping in. 37
Tau-ne'e dwelt with Pau-tere-fenua (All-rushing-land), land came rushing in. 23
Pau-tere-fenua dwelt with Ara-'arahu (Growth-of-coal) in the foundation, coal came on in the land. 33
Then Ta'aroa cried: "Let the stratum rock stand out that sand may come, that Te-pori (Fatness) may be born for Ta'ere (Keel) in the murmurings!" 40
Sand? There came sand to kneel on, flying sand, fine sand, and muddy sand. Havai'i became full of sand; sand in the space for armies, sand on the plains, sand in the river beds, sand for the mountain ranged, sand for the forest wilds. 63
As land came rushing on, there was a narrow course around the great foundation whence fresh water flowed out to the right and the sea flowed out to the left. 50
The standing place for Ta'aroa there was over the disturbed waters of the passage of the reef. On the reef of one side he placed one foot, and on the reef of the pasage of the opposite side he placed the other foot. 72
And Ta'aroa looked and said: "Let the basaltic peaks stand to support the mountains. Let the stratum rock lie as a bed for the earth and sea." 44
It was the incantation of Ta'aroa that made the substance of the land land; Havai'i became land by Ta'aroa's incantation. 41
Then Ta'aroa molded the substance of the land, and he shook it, and it yielded not. And he exclaimed: "What good property I have in this land of mine!" 45
And he uttered this incantation: "O Tū (Stability), come forth to be an artisan for me!" And there came Tū, the sacred one, Tū, the great artisan of Ta'aroa. 53
And Ta'aroa commanded, saying: "Lay out the sand for my small canoe! Lay out the sand for my big canoe! Run and do, run and do, run and do, until all is done!" 45
And Tū spread out the sand, he ran and did as Ta'aroa commanded him. 22
Roots were born for growth in the world. 10
When the king, first generation of roots, was born, he lived for the second [generation]. 26
When the king, second generation was born, he lived for the third. 18
When the king, third generation was born, he lived for the fourth. 18
When the king, fourth generation was born, he lived for the fifth. 18
When the king, fifth generation was born, he lived for the sixth. 17
When the king, sixth generation was born, he lived for the seventh. 18
When the king, seventh generation was born, he lived for the eighth. 19
When the king, eighth generation was born, he lived for the ninth. 18
When the king, ninth generation was born, he lived for the tenth. 17
There were tens of roots. 8
There were hundreds of roots. 9
There were thousands of roots. 10
There were myriads of roots. 9
Roots that spread upwards and roots that spread downwards. Roots that spread inland and roots that spread seawards. As roots spread they held the sand; the land became firm. 46
Ta'aroa fixed the dome of the sky, the shell Rumia, upon pillars. 20
He said: "O Tumu-nui and Papa-raharaha, bring forth pillars, let there be a front pillar and a back pillar." 32
And there were brought forth pillars; Hotu-i-te-ra'i (Fruitfulness-of-the-sky) for a front pillar, and Ana-feo (Coral Aster) for a back pillar, and Ta'aroa extended the space, Atea (Vast-expanse), by means of them, and he invoked a great spirit to pervade Atea. 80
And Ta'aroa said: "O Tumu-nui and Papa-raharaha, bring forth pillars; there shall be pillars upon our land; there shall be pillars, many pillars." 43
When this was realized, there was applause, there was extension. 21
There stood, Hotu-i-te-ra'i for a front pillar; Ana-feo for a back pillar; Ti'ama-Ta'aroa (Perfect-purity), the inner pillar; and there were the pillar to stand by, the pillar to sit by, the pillar to blacken by, the pillar to debate by, the elocution pillar, and the pillar of exit. 83
There was extension of Tumu-nui, there was extension of papa-raharaha, extension of the chambers for the gods and man, and extension of the horizon. The sky was extended, it was widened with the pillars of the land of Havai'i. 71
Hades grew, and darkness extended. 9
Mountains grew, and they multiplied. 11
Water grew, and rushed on. 7
The ocean grew and rolled forth. 9
Rocks grew and increased. 7
The skies grew and extended until there were ten in number. 18
Rain developed and fell everywhere. 12
Moss and slime grew and increased. 10
Forests grew and increased. 8
Food grew and increased. 8
Paper mulberry grew and increased. 10
Creeping plants grew and increased. 10
Weeds grew and increased. 8
Life quickened in the sea, in the rivers, and on the land. Living things grew in the sea, in the rivers, and on the land, and they increased in the sea, in the rivers, and on the land. 52
Ta'aroa looked below, and then he looked above, and he laughed on seeing what was revealed to him. 35
The face of clearness above looked down upon clearness below; the face of clearness below looked up to clearness above. 41
Then Ta'aroa called out: "Who is in back there?" Those in back answered: "It is I, Tu-moua (Standing-mountain)," "I, Tu-fenua (Standing-land)," "I, Puna-heuheu (Rushing-spring)," "I, Vai-ari'i (Royal-river)," "Ta'aroa himself produced us all!" "Who is in front there?" "It is I, Tino-rua (Dual-body), lord of the ocean, the conjured lord of the ocean." He was a god of the Ocean with two joined bodies. 123
"It is I, Tahuri-mai-to'a (Upsetting-rock)," "Tupu-o-te-moana (Growth-of-the-ocean)," "we, myriads of ocean rocks." "Thou didst establish the nature of the ocean." 50
"Who is above there?" "I, Atea, the moving space, the sky space, the moving fatness, the fatness of the sky thrown off the earth." 34
"Who is down below?" "I, Rua (Abyss) in Tumu-nui." "I, Rua in Papa-raharaha." "I, Rua of ripeness." "I, Rua-i-te-muhumuhu (Source of noise)." 47
"Who dwells upon the land?" "We, living creatures, that are running to and fro, that are crawling, and that are swimming about." 35
"Who dwells in the ocean?" "We who run, who crawl, and who swim about. Ta'aroa is master of us all." 28
A great spirit ever pervades the sea, his name is 'Oropa'a (Unyielding-warrior), and he has a roaring voice. 38
When Ta'aroa saw all, he applauded. Earth had become land, and it was filled with living creatures. Fresh water flowed throughout the land, sea filled the ocean, and they were filled with living creatures. But all was still in the thick darkness of the close sky of Rumia, in Havai'i, the birthplace of land; Havai'i, the birthplace of gods; Havai'i, the birthplace of kings; Havai'i, the birthplace of man.
Henry: 351 1
Tane's chant over pia seeds
Turu, turu ai toa e, 9
I te pou o te hoa o te rai e, 13
E huea i tara o te rai e! 12
O Rū-roa ta'ata, 8
Turu hia e ra'i i turu hia. 12
Tuturu ai toa e. 8
Noho ai rа te ra'i i ni'a, 10
I te pia, te teve, e i te auariiroa.
Prop, now props the warrior, 7
With the pillar of the friend of the skies. 12
Cast up by enchantment will be the skies. 10
Tall Rū, the man, 5
Propped up the sky which is propped. 8
Now propped by the warrior. 7
Remain up, now sky, 5
Upon, pia, teve, and the umbrella tree.
Henry: 353-354 1
Source: Pao-raro and Ra'i-tupu, high priests of Porapora, and Tamere, a Tahitian high priest
Date of recitation:: Pao-raro: 1822; Ra'i-tupu: 1822; Tamere: 1845 70
Strife and reconciliation between heaven and earth
O tauа i te titiri pō no Ta'ere maopo'opo ma te Tumu-nui o tauа i te ta'ata e te ra'i feteui o Tane, e matua tauа no roto ia Ta'ere maopo'opo. 63
A riri te Tumu, titiri a'e atu ai e te ra'i, e ua nui e ua rotu, e i te hupe tu'u tu'u ore, topa aere te ua iritiriti, e vaevae a rō. 61
A riri te atua o Tane, i titiri 'ho ae ai i raro te atua o Tane i te ra'i feteui ra, e rauma'i, e aneane, a aneane te ao nei i te ā raro. 64
O tauа atu а i te titiri pō e i ni'a i te fenua, o tauа i te ra'i feteui o Tane! A riri ā te Tumu, tiria a'e ai i te o'e, ei tihitihi, ei tuava, ei mate, ei onohi, i te ta'ata. 79
A riri o Tane, atua o te mau mea purotu, titiri iho ai i raro, e 'ahune nui, e mataru oraora, ei ha'apori i te ao nei. 54
O tauа te titiri pō o Ta'ere e i te ta'ata; o tauа i te ra'i feteui o Tane! A titiri a'e atu ai te Tumu, i te moe pō, e te moe ao, i te ao nei. 64
A riri а te atua o Tane, tiria iho ai i raro, e mata ara i te ao, e moe no te pō. I maramarama te ao nei i te ā raro o te rā i te ao, i tupu te ta'oto o te ta'ata i te pō. 77
I titiri te Tumu i ta'na upu i ni'a ia Tane, titiri mai Tane i ta'na i raro i te Tumu, e matua taua no roto ia Ta'ere. 51
A 'ufa Tane, a riri Tane atate Tane a iriа Tane! A rave Tane i ta'na apa'i nui, e apa'i atu i te ta'ata ei popoa iti, e ei popoa nui ia teiruru mai ra i Ooro-hiti e i Ooro-peru, na tahua nui no Puna'auia, e apa'i atu i Fa'ato-ra'i, o te tau roa ia aau i Puna'auia, e fati atu te are poueru, e taua i te Ra'i-mahue, ta'ai na i tahi e roa tiara'a. Ta Tane ia ha'a i rave ai oia i ta'na apa'i, e ua opua i te tuva'u, e ua i te ino i tupu no te Pō mai i o atu i te ao marama nei, te hau o te ari'i Ro'o te roro'o ma ta'na ra taua, o Hoani. 247
E hahaere maite i te ao e Tane e, e tono a'e i to arere, ia Ro'o e e tahi manava no te ao mai, no 'oe, e ari'i Tane e! 53
Tei hea Tane? Tera te haere mai nei! Taui aere i te mata o Tane tu i roto i te mata o Tane tū i rapae! Eaha tei te rima o Tane? E ra'au ia e Pua tei te rima! 71
O Tane, raua o vai? Raua o Ro'o arere e haere i te ao, e tanu i te Pua, ei hauou, ei pō a'e no raua ite fai poiri e a hope ei ta'ai i te ruma ma te onohi i te ao. 78
O Tane e o Ro'o nui 'arere a fano mai i te ao! I na mua mai o Ro'o te vana'a ia Tane. A manava 'tu to te ao, e a tanu ia raua ra'au e pua, ei hauou, mai te tao o Tane i te Tumu, ia Ta'ere e ia Ro'o te roro'o, e i to'na ra hoa o Hoani e i te ta'ata: "O taua tama'i no tatou nei, i te taeae, e tama'i ae i te poipoi e faite a'e i te ahiahi, e tama'i a'e i te ahiahi e faite a'e i te poipoi." O te Pua matamua ia i te ao nei, e ra'au mo'a na Tane i Puna'auia i Tahiti te tanu ra'a hia. E Hau'ou te i'oa no te pua i te anotau tahito ra. 244
Faite roa tura to te po, e to te ao i to te ra'i, mou roa 'tura te umeumera'a o to te fenua i raro nei e to te ra'i feteui o Tane.
War waged in darkness with Ta'ere-of-all-skill and Tumu-nui against men and the sky eternal of Tane; it was vigorous contention that sprang from Ta'ere-of-all-skill. 49
Te Tumu got vexed, and so he cast forth into the heavens constant heavy mists that fell in heavy showers and rain as fine as the feet of ants. 41
Then the god Tane was angry, and he cast down from his eternal sky dry weather and clearness, so that the world was cloudless with the heat below. 37
There was war again in the darkness and on the earth against the eternal sky of Tane! Te Tumu was still more vexed, and cast forth famine to cause high bones, no flesh, death, and suicide to man. 59
This enraged Tane, god of beauty, and he cast down overflowing plenty and shoals of live fish, to cause fatness on the earth. 37
War raged in darkness, with Ta'ere, Te Tumu, and man; the war was against the sky eternal of Tane! Therefore Te Tumu cast up drowsiness to exist by day and by night in the world. 49
And god Tane was vexed again and cast down wakefulness for the day and sleep for the night. The world was illuminated with the sun burning below in the daytime, and sleep fell upon man at nighttime. 57
Te tumu applied his enchantments upon Tane, and Tane applied his upon Te Tumu. It was vigorous contention that originated from Hades. 45
Then Tane got enraged, Tane got vexed, Tane spoke angrily, Tane was petulant, Tane took up his great bat to strike down men into small pulps and into great pulps as they assembled at Ooro-hiti (Snoring-border) and Ooro-peru (Snoring-retreat), and the assembly grounds of Puna'auia [in Tahiti]; to strike Fa'ato-ra'i (Sky-conductor), that long projecting reef of Puna'auia, where the bursting of the surf makes war with the heavens that have been pushed up and have traveled away to other regions. This, Tane took up his bat to do, and he purposed to banish and cast down all evil that sprang from Hades, away from this world of light, where King Ro'o, the prayer chanter, reigned with Hoani (Tempter), his bosom friend. 214
O Tane, deal gently with the earth; send thy messenger, Ro'o, that he may obtain a welcome from the world for thee, O King Tane! 36
Where is Tane? There he is coming! He has transformed the face of Tane who stands within into that of Tane who stands without! What has he in his hand? He has a tree, a pua (Beslaria lorifolia) in his hand! 63
Who is with Tane? Great Ro'o, the messenger; they are going to the world, to plant the pua as a pledge of peace, to obliterate between them all mysterious imprecations, and to banish gloom, and self-destruction from the world. 69
Tane and great Ro'o, the messenger, flew down to the world! Ro'o preceded Tane to herald him. They were welcomed by the world, and they planted their pua tree as a pledge of peace, while Tane said to Te Tumu and Ta'ere, and to Ro'o, the prayer chanter, and his friend, Hoani, and to man: "As for conflict between us who are kinsfolk, let it be strife in the morning with reconcilation in the evening, strife in the evening with reconciliation in the morning." That was the first pua tree in this world, it was a sacred tree of Tane's planted at Puna'auia in Tahiti. Hau'ou (Pledge-of-peace) was the name of the pua in ancient times. 197
Thus Hades and the world were reconciled with heaven, and strife ended between the inhabitants of the earth below and those of the sky eternal of Tane.
Henry: 355-359 1
Source: Some of the reciters of The Creation Chant 17
The genealogies of the gods
Te vana'a a vai? Te vana'a a Titi-ma-tai-fa'aaro. E ti'a, e ra'a! A tau a! E tau a i hea? E tau a i te moera'a apiapi. Ara pa'i Ta'aroa tu tahua! 64
E mau ti'a tei ni'a, e mau ra'i tei raro. A tatau Ta'aroa i te atua i te nu'u atua i te pō. 42
A rahu atua i te pō ia Ta'aroa. O Ta'aroa nei i tū ra'i, ua fariua ei tata'u no te pō ei tupura'a atua. 52
A upu Ta'aroa i te tahu'a-nui, ia Tū-nui-a'e-i-te-atua; o Tū-maro-ura teie, Tū-i-te-ra'i-marama, Tū-i-te-to'i-aia-a-Ta'aroa. 60
Tū-ta'iri-moana, e fa'aro'o te 'are miti i to'na reo. Tū-atua-ha'apapu, 32
Tū-o-te-tau-i-ni'a-i-te-feia-e-meho-haere-ra, e mo'e roa ia i to'na maru. O te atua ia i hau a'e i te nu'u atua, no te mea ei rima 'oia no Ta'aroa. 68
O Tū-Metua teie, Tū-rahu-nui, Tū-nui-e-a'a-i-te-atua, o Tū-toā. 33
Fanau mai ra o Atea, e tamahine i roto mai i te apu o te ra'i, ia Rumia; o Atea ta'o nui, o te vai i te hiti'a o te rā e tae roa i te to'o'a o te rā, mai te fenua nei e tae roa i te ra'i. Ua api te aere i to'na varua. 99
Tei raro e nei Atea i taua pō ra, te tape'a hiara te pa'a o Rumia na ni'a iho e te fe'e nui e Tumu-ra'i-fenua, ote tupu i te tai. 58
O Tumu-nui e o Papa-raharaha; a nanа te mata o Tumu-nui i raro i te mata o Papa-raharaha, te mata o Papa-raharaha a nаnа i ni'a i te mata o Tumu-nui, fanau a'e ta raua ari'i o Te-fatu, 'oia te fatu nuu, fatu ra'i. 88
A noho Atea ia Papa-tū-'oi, a fanau ta raua, o Ra'i-tupua-nui-te-fanau-'eve, o te tupu nui o te ao, te mahora o te ao, o te rito o te ao. 62
He'e te tua o Ma-tohi-fanau-'eve, ei tahu'a na Ra'i-tupua-nui. 27
Na raua i ha'amahora i te ra'i, te ra'i tua tini; tapa ra'i. Tei ni'a roa a'e te ra'i niu tapu a Tane, e te Vai-ora a Tane, te vai apu vaha a te atua; tei muri mai te ra'i taura mai a Hiro. 81
A rahu Ta'aroa ia Uru, oia te fa'auru i ta Ta'aroa i fa'aue, o Uru ahuahu va'a a Ta'aroa. 44
E pure tei te nu'u tai mimiha; o te moana te marae nui o te ao nei. 30
O Fai te marae au noa. 11
O Rauti te tahu'a a Ta'aroa i te moana. 18
Hee te tua o Rima-roa (atua i ni'a i te nuu tama'i) o Faa-tae, o Nаnа, o Huri-aro, o Huri-tua, e o Amara, ei tahu'a ana'e na Ta'aroa. 57
Teie na arere a Ta'aroa; o Taiva, o Horo-fanae, e o Ire te ma'o uri purotu a Ta'aroa, oia o Fa'arava-i-te-ra'i. 51
Teie na arere a te nuu atua: o Neveneva, o Iri-nau, o Rei-tū o Ti'a-o-uri, Ti'a-o-atea, e o Te-ari'i-tapu-tuua, no te tu'ura'a tapu. 60
E atua ana'e te tahu'a e te arere, e mana to ratou i te Pō e i te ao nei. 34
Rahua maira te atua, o Ra'a; e mo'a, e mana, e hanahana, e mau riri to Ra'a atua. Ta'na ia i tu'u i te tairurura'a o te nu'u atua i te oro'a o te ta'ata i te ao nei. 73
He'e te tua, o Tū-papa, ei vahine na Ra'a o 'Iri-nau te 'arere o Ra'a. 30
A riri o Ra'a, o te pau ia ta'na i fa'atupu mai na roto mai i te mata'i. O Rapati'a taua mata'i ra, o te fenua te ho'o i taua mata'i ra. 59
Fanau maira ta Ra'a e o Tū-papa, te atua o Te-vā-hunuhunu. 27
He'e te tua, na atua ra o Te-muhumuhu e o Ruanu'u; he'e te tua, na atua vahine ra o Re'are'a, o Vana'ana'a, e o 'Orerorero; he'e te tua, o te atua Rua-tupua-nui maira. 73
Te-Muhumuhu te tau'a hi'i ia Rua-tupua-nui. A riri Rua-tupua-nui ia Te-muhumuhu, i tinai hia 'tura i te Re'are'a. 51
O tau'a hii ra ia Rua-tupua-nui, o Re'are'a, i tinaia 'tura i te Vana'ana'a. 35
A riri Rua ia te Vana'ana'a, te tau'a hi'i, tinaia 'tura ia i te Orerorero. 34
A riri Rua ia te Orerorero, tinaia 'tura i te tau. 23
O tau'a hi'i ia Rua i te tau; a riri Rua ia te tau, tinaia 'tura i te More. 34
O tau'a hi'i ia Rua i te More; a riri Rua ia te More, tinaia 'tura i te Piri. 34
A riri Rua i te Piri, tinai 'tura i Fa'a-rua-roa. 21
A riri Rua i te Fa'a-rua-roa, tinaia 'tura ia Hinahina-a-matie. 29
E mou'a, Turi-hana te mou'a, e mou'a ti'a fa'ataratara i te ra'i i tereira vahi. 35
Teie ta Rua-tupua-nui 11
Rua-tupua-nui-o-te-ra'i-e-te-fenua-nei; Rua-te-muhumuhu. Rua-te-re'are'a. Rua-te-vana-ana'a; Rua-te-'orerorero; Rua-te-hoa-tau; Rua-te-hoa-more; Rua-te-piri; Rua-te-fa'a-rua-roa; Rua-hinahina-matie; Rua-o-te-tai-i-ni'a-i-te-ra'i; Rua-o-te-tai-i-raro-nei; Rua-tupua-nui-a-te-Tumu-nui; o Rua-fa'atu-pua. 130
Rahua Hina-te-'iva'iva ei vahine na Rua-tupua-nui. 23
O Ta-to'a te arere i rahua na Rua-tupua-nui. 20
O Rua-hatu-tini-rau maira i te upu a Ta'aroa; ei atua i te Moana-urifa ei ari'i o te tai 'euea. Tino ta'ata to teie atua, e moti a'e i te hi'u o a'u. O Rua-hatu noa tahi to'na i'a. 84
O te tai manina i roto i te a'au o te Moana-urifa ta'na mau vahi hipara'a, e tei reira te apo'o ta'otora'a. 48
A tu'u i te 'arere na Rua-hatu, o Utu-te-au. 19
E i'a ana'e te vahine a Rua-hatu-tini-rau e ore e hope ia tai'o i te hua'ai. 36
O te Tumu-nui te tane, o Papa-raharaha te vahine, fanau maira ta raua, o Oro-pa'a; te vai noa maira ia atua i te moana, e api roa te ao nei. Aore a 'na e reo ia fa'i mai i te hina'aro. E vai upo'o tū noa mai ia mata'i hia ra. O te tie niho te 'are teatea e fati mai ra. E horomi'i noa ta'na i te ta'ata e i te vao ta'ata, e 'ore 'oia e ha'apae i te ari'i. Te pau noa nei te hoa'a pahi ato'a. E 'ore e ina'i hia ta'na e horomi'i, e 'aore a i ta'o mai e, "A tira vau." Ua tu'u ana'e te ta'ata i te moana ra, 'aore e 'itea te ho'i ra'a mai i te fenua. O tohorā te 'arere a Oro-pa'a. 258
Fanau maira o Mata-rua, tuputupua nui i raro roa i te moana poiri, ei atua no tereira vahi. Aore muri o to'na porahu, e rae o mua e rae o muri, e porahu mata rua. 74
A rahu Ta'aroa i te fatu no te moana, o Tino-rua, e rua huru i na tino e rua; e atua tahi huru, e taata tahi huru; i 'au haere noa oia i te moana, o to'na ia utuafare. E Ma'o te 'arere a Tino-rua. 87
A he'e te tua o Ma'a-tahi, o Tua-ra'a-tai, e atua no te moana. 27
Fanau maira to te ahu o te fenua, o Pere, atua vahine no te vera o te fenua, e vahine 'ehu; he'e te tua o Tama-ehu, 'oia o Tama-tea; e auahi te mana o taua na atua ra, e fa'aro'o noa ia i to raua ta'o i raro i te fenua e i te ra'i. Ei atua no te nu'u tau auahi taua na atua ra. 126
O Rua-tupua-nui te tumu a noho oia i te vahine, ia 'Ere'ere-fenua, fanau a'ere ta'na ari'i, o One, o te 'Ere'ere-fenua ia matahiapo. He'e te tua, o Ata atua maira; ua fa'aru'e atura o Rua-tupua-nui ia vahine. E atua vahine mana roa o 'Ere'erefenua, e haere ta'ata noa mai 'oia ra, e tapa'o ia no te pau o te fenua, i te vero 'aore ra i te tama'i. E atua maona puai o One. Na mua o Ata i te haere e fa'a'ite i tere o te nu'u atua ia fatata maira. E taui noa 'oia i te huru o te atua ta'na e hina'aro ra. E atua ha'avare noa oia.
Whose orator is it? It is the orator of Titi-ma-tai-fa'aaro (Refugee-of-the-open-sea). Arise, make sacred! Stay on! Stay on where? Stay on in the close sleeping space, Awake then Ta'aroa, standing on the assembly ground! 73
Above was held upright, the sky was held down. Ta'aroa called gods into being, a host of gods in darkness. 29
The bidding of Ta'aroa made gods in darkness. When he stood in the sky to call in darkness, it was to create gods. 32
Ta'aroa conjured forth his great artisan Tu-nui-a'e-i-te-atua (Stability-greatest-of-the-gods); this is Tu-maro-ura (Stability-of-the-ura-girdle), Tu-i-te-ra'i-marama (Stability-of-the-moonlit-sky); Tu-i-te-to'i-aia-a-Ta'aroa (Stability-of-the-clearing-axe-of-Ta'aroa); 93
Tu-ta'iri-moana (Stability-the-smiter-of-the-sea), the waves obeyed his voice. Tu-atua-ha'apapu (Stability-god-of-equilibrium); 46
Tu-o-te-tau-i-ni'a-i-te-feia-e-meho-haere-ra (Stability-who-hovered-over-fugitives-in-their-concealment); his shadow safely obscured them. He was god above the host of gods, because he served as hands for Ta'aroa. 73
This is Tu-metua (Father-stability), Tu-rahu-nui (Stability-the-great-conjurer), Tu-nui-e-a'a-i-te-atua (Great-stability-who-settles the gods), Tu-toa (Stability-the-warrior). 56
Atea (Vast-expanse) was born, a daughter within the dome of the sky, Rumia; Atea of great bidding extending from east to west, from the earth to the sky. Her spirit pervaded space. 53
Atea was quite low down in that time of darkness, the dome, Rumia, was held down over her by a great octopus named Tumu-ra'i-fenua (Foundation-of-earthly-heaven), that grew in the sea. 60
Tumu-nui and Papa-raharaha; the eyes of Tumu-nui looked down upon Papa-raharaha, the eyes of Papa-raharaha looked up to the eyes of Tumu-nui, and there was born their prince, Te-fatu (The-lord); he was lord of hosts, lord of the skies. 78
Atea dwelt with Papa-tu-'oi (Basaltic-peak), and there was born to them Ra'i-tupua-nui-te-fanau-'eve (Great-sky-developer-born-in-commotion); he caused the great developments of the world, the laying out of the world, the renovation of the world. 78
And there followed Ma-tohi-fanau-'eve (Clearing-adz-born-in-commotion), to be an artisan for Ra'i-tupua-nui. 38
They laid out the skies, the ten skies, they draped the skies. Above all is the sky of sacred omens of Tane, and of the Vai-ora-a-Tane (Living-water-of-Tane), the water for the gods to lap up into their mouths (Milky Way); just below is Hiro's sky of prophets. 75
Ta'aroa conjured forth Uru (Inspired), who inspired as Ta'aroa ordered him. He was Uru, the canoe bailer of Ta'aroa. 42
There was prayer in the moving, rolling ocean; the sea was the great temple of the world. 26
Fai (Ray-fish) was the swimming temple. 10
Rauti (Stimulator) was the artisan of Ta'aroa in the ocean. 22
There followed Rima-roa (Long-arm, who was a god of war) , Faa-tae (Cause-to-reach), Nana (Steadfast-gaze), Huri-aro (Face-turner), Huri-tua (Back-turner), and Amara (Restriction), all artisans for Ta'aroa. 66
Here are the messengers of Ta'aroa: Taiva (Estrangement), Horo-fanae (Early-runer), and Ire (Prize-winner), the handsome blue shark of Ta'aroa, that is Fa'arava-i-te-ra'i (Sky-shade). 60
These are the messengers for the host of gods: Nevaneva (Look-around), Iri-nau (Chilly-vigils), Rei-tu (Straight-neck), Ti'a-o-uri (Approver-of-darkness), Ti'a-o-atea (Approver-of-extension), and Te-arii-tapu-tuua (The-king-of-offered-sacrifices), for the offering of sacrifices. 90
The artisans and messengers were all gods; they had power in Hades and on earth. 23
Then was conjured forth the god Ra'a (Sacredness); holiness, greatness, glory, and holding anger were the attributes of the god Ra'a. These qualities he bestowed upon the assemblies of the host of gods at the ceremonies of men on earth. 72
There followed Tu-papa (Rock-abider), the wife of Ra'a. 'Iri-nau was his messenger. 27
When Ra'a got enraged, he caused destruction to come by the wind. Rapati'a (Steady-blowing) was the name of that wind, and land was the price of that wind. 44
Ra'a and Tu-papa (Rock-abider) begat the god Te-va-hunuhunu (Soothing-wind), who healed wounds and sicknesses on the battlefield. 40
Then were born the gods, Te-muhumuhu (The murmurings) and Ruanu'u (Source-of-armies), there followed the goddesses Re'are'a (Joyousness), Vana'ana'a (Eloquence), and Orerorero (Consultation); and there followed the god Rua-tupua-nui (Source-of-great-growth). 87
Te-muhumuhu was the nursing friend of Rua-tupua-nui. When Rua-tupua-nui got enraged with Te-muhumuhu, he was transferred to Re'are'a. 47
That nurse of Rua-tupua-nui, Re'are'a, transferred him to Vana'ana'a. 25
When Rua got enraged with Vana'ana'a, his nursing friend, she transferred him over to Orerorero. 31
When Rua got vexed with Orerorero he was taken to the seasons. 21
There was a nursing friend of Rua in the seasons; when he got angry with the seasons, he was placed with More (Ripeness). 35
There was a nursing friend to Rua in More; when he got angry with More, he was removed to Piri (Confinement). 33
When Rua got vexed in Piri, he was conveyed to Fa'a-rua-roa (Valley-of-long-cavern). 27
When Rua got vexed in Fa'a-rua-roa, he was transferred to Hinahina-a-matie (Gray-grass). 29
A mountain, Turi-hana (Din-of-work) was the mountain; it stood in peaks up to the sky at that place. 31
These are Rua-tupua-nui's attributes 15
Rua-tupua-nui-in-the-skies-and-on-earth; Rua-the-murmurer; Rua-the-joyful; Rua-the-eloquent; Rua-the-debater; Rua-the-friend-of-seasons; Rua-the-friend-of-ripeness; Rua-of-confinement; Rua-of-valley-of-long-cavern; Rua-of-gray-grass; Rua-of-the-ocean-in-the sky; Rua-of-the-ocean-below; Rua-tupua-nui-of-Tumu-nui; and Rua-of-sullenness. 115
Hina-te-'iva'iva (Gloomy-gray) was conjured forth to be a wife for Rua-tupua-nui. 28
Ta-to'a (Rock-smiter, the eel) was the messenger conjured for Rua-tupua-nui. 25
Rua-hatu-tini-rau (Source-of-fruitful-myriads) came forth by Ta'aroa's incantation; he was god of the Moana-urifa (Sea-of-rank-odor), king of the cast-up ocean. This god had a man's body joined to the tail of a billfish. Rua-hatu simply was one of his names. 83
The smooth waters within the reefs of the Moana-urifa were his mirrors, and in them were his sleeping pools. 34
To Rua-hatu was given the messenger, Utu-te-au (Bill-the-billfish). 21
All fishes were the wives of Rua-hatu-tini-rau, and his offspring were innumerable. 28
Tumu-nui was the husband, Papa-raharaha was the wife, and there was born to them Oro-pa'a (Dauntless-warrior); that god still exists in the ocean throughout the world. He has no language to tell us what he wants. He lies with his head upwards when the breezes come. The white, foaming breakers are his jaws. He swallows whole persons and fleets of people; he does not spare princes. The polished hulls of ships he also swallows. He takes nothing with what he engulfs, and has not yet said, "I have had sufficient." When once a person puts out to sea, he is not certain of returning to land. The whale was the messenger of Oro-pa'a. 188
There was born of the dark depths of the ocean a huge monster with two faces, as a god for those regions. He had no back to his head, but he had a forehead before and behind; it was a head with two faces. 62
Ta'aroa conjured forth a lord for the ocean, Tino-rua (Dual-body) of two natures in two bodies; one nature was that of a god, and the other nature was that of a man; he swam about in the ocean, which was his home. Sharks were the messengers of Tino-rua. 81
There followed Ma'a-tahi (First-branching) and Tua-ra'a-tai (Ocean-sacredness), as gods of the sea. 31
The heat of the earth produced Pere (Consuming-heat), goddess of the fire in the earth, and she was a blonde woman; then came Tama-ehu (Blonde-child), also called Tama-tea (Fair-child, a blonde); fire was those gods' agent of power; it obeyed them in the bowels of the earth and in the skies. They were the chief fire gods. 97
Rua-tupua-nui was the origin; when he took to wife 'Ere'ere-fenua (Land-blackness), there was born their king, One (Wrestler). This was the first-born of 'Ere'ere-fenua. There followed the god Ata (Shadow); then Rua-tupua-nui abandoned that wife. 'Ere'ere-fenua was a very powerful goddess; when she came in person it was the sign of destruction on earth, by storm or by war. One was a strong wrestling god. Ata went forth before the gods to tell of their near approach. He could change his form to that of any god he chose to represent. He was a deceiving god.
Henry: 359-363 1
Source: Rua-nui, a clever old woman of Porapora whose eyes were dim and form bent with age; the stars were identified with their equivalents in English in 1822 by the aid of Paora'i, counselor of Porapora, and in 1842 by the best authority in Tahiti
Date of recitation:: 1818 98
Birth of the Heavenly Bodies
Rua-tupua-nui te tumu; a naho oia i te vahine, ia Atea-ta'o-nui, fanau maira ta'na ari'i, o Feturere; hee te tua, o Marama; hee te tua, o te Rā maira; hee te tua, o Fetu-ava, hee te tua, o Fa'a-iti, o Fa'a-nui, o Fa'a-ta-potupotu, i te Ari'i o Mа-ra'i-re'a, hui tarava i te apato'erau. 123
A noho Fa'a-nui i te vahine, ia Tahi-ari'i, fanau a'era ta'na ari'i, o Ta'urua-nui e horo i te ahiahi, na'na e vana'a i te pō ma te ao, i te fetu, ma te marama, e te rā, ma te avei'a ei arata'i i te pahi o Hiro itua. Hee te tua, o Ta'ero i te pae o te rā, eo Matiti-tau. 119
A rara'o o Ta'urua-nui i to'na va'a te va'a o Mata-taui-noa, a fano i te taha tooa, i te Ari'i o Apato'a, a noho i te vahine ia Rua-o-mere, te avei'a e vai ra i te pae ra'i i te apato'a. 83
Fanau maira ta'na ari'i, o Maunu-'ura; o Maunu-'ura, e hiti mai i te ahiahi, e mata rua, e fetu 'ura, e atua e rere i tara te feau i to'na ra tau. 64
A rara'o o Maunu-'ura i to 'na va'a, o Te-ao-nui-e-rere-i-te-ra'i, a fano na te apato'a; a noho Maunu-'ura i te vahine, ia te Apu-o-te-Ra'i, fanau a'era ta'na ari'i, o Ta'urua-nui e faatere va'a ia Atu-tahi, e ei apato'a i to'na pō, e o Apaapa rua-manu. 114
Faatupu rа i te iho o te ra'i o 'Atu-tahi: Hee te tua, oia o Aro, oia o 'Ara'a, oia o 'Ara'ara'a, oia o Ha'amaru. No 'Atu-tahi te va'a, e hui feti'a i te 'uti'uti tau ni'a o te aro o te ra'i i te apato'a, o Ta'urua-nui te faatere va'a. Hee te tua, o Tau-ha maira. Hee te tua o Ta'urua-nui-o-te-hiti-apato'a. 136
A fano 'Atu-tahi i te to'oa o te rā, a noho i te vahine, ia Tū-i-te-noana-urifa; hee te tua, o Metua-ai-papa, Moana-'aere, o Moana--'a'ano-huri-hara, e o Moana-ohu-noa-ei-ha'amo'e-hara. 83
A noho Metua-ai-papa i te vahine, ia Te-ra'i-tu-roroa, fanau a'era ta'na ari'i o Fetu-tea, ei hoa tau, ei te tau ra oia hiti mai ai. 61
O Fetu-tea te ari'i; a noho i te tapo'i o te ra'i, fanau maira te fetu hitihiti, te fetu 'amo'amo nu'u nui, te fetu 'ai'aia rь'roa, e te fetu pura noa. 63
Hee te tu'a te Ma'ama'a-tai e na 'o'iri ai ata e rua e vai i roto i na apo'o i te Vai-ora a Tane. Tei reira te ma'o purotu, o Fa'arava-i-te-ra'i, te vai maira i roto i to'na apo'o tei piha'i mai te Pira'e-tea a Tane, tei te Vai-ora a Tane. 105
Te poupou o te ra'i ia Rumia ra, ua riro ana'e ia ei anā 'amo'amo niu i ni'a i te ra'i: O Anā-mua, e pou tomora'a 'tu i te 'apu to te ra'i, oia o Ana-Hoa; Anā-muri, ta'i Rio aitu, fa'arava'ai atu e te 'a'ahi, ei pou fa'a'ere'erera'a; Anā-roto, pou tiamа ta'aroa; Anā-tipū, e pou hiti nia'a, e pou tia'ira'a; Anā-heuheu-pō (or feufeu pō), fetu 'ura e fano i te 'aere ra'i i to'a, e pou hiti raro, e pou orerorerora'a; Anā-Tahu'a-Ta'ata-Metua-te-tupu-mavae e pou ti'ara'a; Anā-tahu'a-vahine-o-toa-te-manava e pou vana'ana'a ra'a; Anā-varu, e pou nohora'a; Anā-iva, e pou haerera'a; Anā-ni'a, pou fa'arava'aira'a; i te ra'i oti'a. 292
Ei purotu ana'e tei te fare 'eve'eve, ei toina a'e i te aro o Ta'urua, ave'ia e hiti mai i te ahiahi, ei nuna'a a'e i te aro o Ta'ero Ari'i. 66
A rara'o o Anā-heuheu-pō i te va'a, i te Farau-a-marō, e fano atura i te atu ra'i putuputu, a noho i te vahine, ia Tere-e-fa'aari'i-mai-i-te-ra'i, fanau a'ere ta'na ari'i, o Ta'uruanui i tui i te porou o te ra'i, te fetu e a'e i te tua o uru po'i i to'na tau. 117
A rara'o o Ta'urua-nui i tui i te porou o te ra'i i to'na va'a, te va'a o Marae-'oroua, a fano e tinai i te hi'u o te vero nui. O te hara ia o te taha i reirei ai Ta'urua i ni'a ia Ta'ero, i mata piri i te rā e rere i te 'ama'ama vera ia Atea. 110
A noho Ta'urua-nui i tui i te porou o te ra'i i te vahine, ia Te-'urataui-e-pа, a fanau ta'na ari'i, o te hui tarava ia Mata-ri'i, o Mere, e o Te-uru-mere-mere. 69
He'e te tua, o Ta'urua-nui-i-te-amo-'aha. 18
A fа te fenua! E fenua Paro'o-i-te-pa'urа. E mou'a ho'i to'na o A-fa'a-teniteni. E outu ho'i to'na, o Rave-a-tau. E marae ho'i to'na, o Tui-hana. E paepae ho'i to te marae Tui-hana. E e fare tatai i te 'aha tui hana. 90
A rara'o o Ta'urua-nui-amo-'aha i te va'a, o Te-iri-o-hotu, a fano na te hiti'a o te rā, a noho i te vahine ia Horo; fanau a'era ta'na ari'i, o Mahu-ni'a e o Mahu-raro. 72
O te Ta'urua teie i fa'aari'i tahi pae ia rupe a nu'u, e ia rupe a ra'i tahi pae. 38
E ari'i ana'e to Fa'a-hiti mai te pō mai, te ari'i e to'na fetu I topa hia i ni'a ia ratou te i'oa o taua mau fetu ra, e mau atura taua mau 'ioa ra i ni'a i te marae o te ao nei. 83
E moti taua mau fetu ra ia Tahiti-nui-mare'are'a, i te hiti'a o te rā; te marae ra o Nu'u-rua i Mo'orea; te marae ra o Tahu-ea i Ra'iatea; na marae ra o Ava-rau e o Vai-'otaha i Porapora, e te marae i te outu ra o Manunu-i-te-ra'i i Huahine. 109
I faupepe te ari'i maro tea i te iho o te pа o te marae i Vai-'otaha i Porapora; e i faupepe te ari'i maro-'ura i te iho o te pа i te marae o Taputapu-atea i Opoa i Ra'iatea. Fa'aari'i i te iho o te pа; o te pori o Fa'a-nui i Porapora, e o te a'e ia o te pori o Opoa i Ra'iatea.
Rua-tapua-nui was the origin; when he took to wife Atea-ta'o-nui (Atea-of-the-great-bidding), there wer born his princes, Shooting-stars; then followed the Moon; then followed the Sun; then followed the Comets; then followed Fa'a-iti (Little-valley, Perseus), Fa'a-nui (Great-valley, Auriga), and Fa'a-ta-potupotu (Open-valley, Gemini), in King Ma-ra'i-re'a (Clear-open-sky), which constellations are all in the north. 131
Fa'a-nui dwelt with his wife, Tahi-ari'i (Unique-sovereign, Capella in Auriga), and begat his prince Ta'urua-nui (Great-festivity, Venus), who runs in the evening, and who heralds the night and the day, the stars, the moon, and the sun, as a compass to guide Hiro's ship at sea. And there followed Ta'ero (Baccus, Mercury), by the sun, and Matiti-tau (Drooping-pendant, the Crow). 115
Ta'urua-nui prepared his canoe, Mata-taui-noa (Continually-changing-face), and sailed along the west to King South, and dwelt with his wife Rua-o-mere (Cavern-of-the-parental-yearnings, Southern Solstice, Capricornus), the compass that stands on the southern side of the sky. 85
There was born his prince Maunu-'ura (Fading-redness, Mars), who rises in the evening with two faces, a red star, the god that flies to offer oblations for thought in his season. 52
Maunu-'ura prepared his canoe, it was Te-ao-nui-e-rere-i-te-ra'i (Great-day-that-flies-through-the-sky), and he sailed south; Maunu-'ura dwelt with his wife, Apu-o-te-ra'i (Vault-of-heaven), and begat his princes, Ta'urua-nui (Fomalhaut), who steers the canoe of Atu-tahi (Single-bonito, Piscis-Australis), which stands south in its night, and Apaapa-rua-manu (Two-sides-of-birds, Crux). 125
Now let the nature of the sky of Atu-tahi be produced: There were born Aro (Make-way), 'Ara'a (Clearness), and 'Ara'Ara'a (Brilliance, three stars of the third magnitude), and Ha'amaru (Softness, the five smallest stars). The canoe belongs to 'Atu-tahi; it is a constellation in the clear, moteless sky in the south, and Ta'urua-nui (Fomalhaut) is the steersman. Then was born Tau-ha (Cluster-of-four, the Southern Cross), and there followed Ta'urua-nui-o-te-hiti-apato'a (Great-festivity-of-the-border-of-the-south, Canopus in Argo). 167
'Atu-tahi sailed to the west, and dwelt with his wife, Tu-i-tu-moana-urifa (Stand-in-the-sea-of-rank-odor, Hydra); then were born Metua-ai-papa (Parent-eater-of-rock, Corvus). Moana-'aere (Trackless-ocean, the clear sky under Hydra), Moana-'a'ano-hara (Wide-ocean-in-which-to-cast-crime, more sky), and Moana-'ohu-noa-ei-ha'amo'e-hara (Vortex-ocean-in-which-to-lose-crime, Crater). 123
Metua-ai-papa took to wife Te-ra'i-tu-roroa (Long-extended-sky, between Leo and Hydra), and begat his prince Fetu-tea (Pale-star, Saturn), a periodical friend that rises in his season. 61
Fetu-tea was the king; he took to wife the dome of the sky and begat the stars that shine and obscure, the great host of twinkling stars, the very small stars [named] "eaten into," and the phosphorescent stars (nebulae). 60
There followed the starfishes and two trigger fishes that eat mist and dwell in holes (vacant spots) in the Vai-ora a Tane (Living-water of Tane, Milky Way). The handsome shark, Fa'arava-i-te-ra'i (Sky-Shade) is there in his pool (the long clear space), and close by is the Pira'e-tea a Tane (White sea-swallow of Tane), Deneb in Cygnus, in the Vai-ora of Tane. 108
The pillars of the sky, Rumia, have become great twinkling stars in the heavens: Ana-mua (Front-aster, Antares in Scorpio) is the entrance pillar of the dome of the sky, that is Ana-hoa (Friend-aster); Ana-muri (Behind-aster), weeping for Rio, god of bonito and albicore fishers (Aldebaran in Taurus), is the pillar to blacken or tattoo by; Ana-roto (Inner-aster, Spica in Virgo) is the pillar of perfect purity; Ana-Tipu (Deviating-aster, Dubhe in Ursa Major), is the upper side pillar, the pillar to debate by; Ana-tahu'a-ta'ata-metua-te-tupu-mavae (Aster-the-fatherly-priest-of-man-who-grew-in-space, Arcturus in Bootes), is the pillar to stand by; Ana-tahu'a-vahine-o-toa-te-manava (Aster-the-priestess-of-brave-heart, Procyon in Canus Minor), the pillar for elocution; Ana-varu (Aster eighth, Betelguese in Orion), the pillar to sit by; Ana-iva (Aster-ninth, Phaet in Columba), the pillar of exit; Ana-ni'a (Aster-above, Polaris or North Star in the Little Bear) is the pillar to fish by in the boundary of the sky. 320
All the heavenly bodies were to beautify the rugged house (star-spangled sky), to pass before Ta'urua, the guiding star that rises in the evening, as a nation in the presence of King Ta'ero. 61
Ana-heuheu-po prepared his canoe, Farau-a-maro (Dry-shed), and sailed to the numerous heavenly fishes (Pisces), and took to wife, Tere-e-fa'aari'i-mai-i-te-ra'i (Errand-to-create-majesty-in-heaven, the sky there), and begat his prince, Ta'urua-nui (Jupiter), who struck the zenith of the sky, the star that mounts upon the back of early dawn in his season. 113
Ta'urua-nui, who struck the zenith of the sky, made ready his canoe, the Marae-'oroua (Enchanted-temple), and went forth and suppressed the tail of the great storm. This was the deviation that caused Ta'urua to lose his balance against Ta'ero, whose eyes were closed by the sun, flying in the burning expanse of Atea. 100
Ta'urua-nui, who struck the zenith of the sky, took to wife Te-'ura-taui-e-pa (Redness-exchanged-and-parted-with), and begat their princes, the constellations of Mata-ri'i (Small-eyes, Pleiades), Mere (Parental-yearning, Orion's belt), and Te-uru-meremere (The forest-of-parental-yearnings, all the rest of Orion). 97
And there followed Ta'urua-nui-i-te-amo-'aha (Great-festivity-the-senit-carrier, Sirius in Canis Major). 37
Land appeared! Noted for barrenness was the land. It had a mountain named A-fa'ateniteni (Be-boastful). It had a cape named Rave-a-tau (Take-for-ages). It had a temple named Tui-hana (Obituaries). There was a pavement to the temple of Tui-hana. And there was a house in which to learn the obits. 100
Ta'urua-nui-amo-'aha prepared his canoe, Te-iri-o-hotu (Fruitful-bark), and sailed eastward, and took to wife Horo (Avalanche); then were born his princes, Mahu-ni'a (Upper Magellan) and Mahu-raro (Lower Magellan). 72
This (Sirius) was the Ta'urua that created kings of the chiefs of earthly hosts on one side, and of the chiefs in the skies on the other side. 43
All were royal personages in Fa'a-hiti (Bordering-valley) from the period of darkness, and they each had a star. They bore the names of those stars, and those names have been perpetuated in their temples in this world. 66
The boundaries for their stars are Tahiti-nui-marearea (Great-Tahiti-of-the-golden-haze), in the east; the temple named Nu'u-rua (Two-fleets) in Mo'orea; the temple Tahu-ea (Invocation-for-deliverance) in Ra'iatea; the temples of Ava-rau (Divers-passages) and Vai-'otaha (Water-of-the-man-of-war-bird) in Porapora; and the temple of the cape Manunui-i-te-ra'i (Benumbed-of-the-sky) in Huahine. 136
Monarchs were invested with the yellow girdle within the walls of the temple of Vai-'otaha in Porapora; and monarchs were invested with the red girdle within the walls of the temple of Taputapu-atea at Opoa in Ra'iatea. Within those walls were they created sovereigns; hence arose the power of Fa'a-nui in Porapora, and hence arose the power of Opoa in Ra'iatea.
Henry: 364 1
The birth of winds
O Rā-ta'iri te metua tane, o Te-muri te metua vahine, fanau maira ta raua matahiapo, o Maoa'e-ra'i-aneane, ei ari'i no te mau mata'i atoa. 64
He'e te tua, o Pafa'ite; he'e te tua, o Mara'amu; he'e te tua, o Ha'apiti, oia o Fa'arua; a he'e te tua o Toerau, e mara'i-moana maira. 59
Te rahi ra te hu'ahua i tai, mаmа mai nei i uta, o taua To'erau-ma-ra'i-moana aihuma-huma ra.
Ra-ta'iri (Sun-striking, heat) was the father, Te-muri (Behind) was the mother, and there was born their first-born, Maoa'e-ra'i-aneane (North-east-trade-wind-of-the-clear-sky), which became king over all other winds. 62
There followed Pafa'ite (North-west-wind); then came Mara'amu (South-wind); then the boisterous Ha'apiti or Fa'arua (North-wind-with-two-currents); and afterwards came Toerau-ma-ra'i-moana (North-wind-with-clear-sky). 65
When the sea is plentifully capped outside and lightly capped inside the reef, it is then that To'erau-ma-ra'i-moana, deep and vast, is blowing.
Henry: 364-371 1
Source: Vara, Ara-Mou'a, high priest of Ra'iatea, and Mahine (Daughter), chief of Mai'ao and son of King Mato of Ra'iatea
Date of recitation:: Vara: 1823; Ara-Mou'a: 1823; Mahine: 1840 68
Tane, the man-god
'Aere e, 'aere 'ere e! 'Aore mata 'aore upo'o, 'aore ihu, 'aore e tari'a, 'aore vaha, 'aore 'ai, 'aore tua, 'aore 'ouma, 'aore 'ao'ao, 'aore 'opū, 'aore pito, 'aore huhа, aore tohe, 'aore e turi, 'aore 'avae, 'aore tapua'e 'avae! Eaha te tupu o teie tamaiti? 'Aere e, 'aere 'ere e! I fanau rа ia vai ia tama? I fanau ia Atea e ia Papa-tu-'oi, O te fanau'a 'una'una a Ta'aroa. 171
A horo a'ena te arere a te fanau'a 'una'una a Ta'aroa. Te arere ra o Horo-fana'e, a horo i te aro o te Tumu-nui, ia raua o Rua-tupua-nui! 62
A horo rа te arere, a ite mai o Tumu-nui e o Rua-tupu-nui, ua mānava maira, naō atura; "Horo-fana'e e! Tena 'oe?" 50
Naō atu nei o Horo-fana'e, "Teie au." 18
"A tahi 'io i tae mai ai i te Tumu e ia Rua-tupua-nui nei?" 28
"E 'io! E tere nui to'u! Ti'i mai nei au i te fare tahu'a a te Atua! Te tamaiti o Atea ua fanau, a ti'i e hamani." 51
Ua fanau ia tama? 9
"Ua fanau." 5
"A hi'o i te ti'a o tena tamaiti?" 14
"E pū-fenua! E pa'ipa'i nui! E 'aere e, e 'aere ere e! Te vai noa ra ia, te tiraha noa mai ra ia i te ama'ama nui o Atea." 56
"Tera na tahu'a e haere, o Huri-tua e o Huri-aro, ua ti'a to tere." 28
Tutui a'e ai a raua ete to'i i te rima, reva 'tura e huri tua i te tama, e huri aro i te tama. 41
Aita i ha'apā i te rima i ni'a iho; a mata'u, a ri'ari'a i te hau o te ari'i o Atea! I rave a'e ai a raua ete to'i, e huhura atura i raro i te aro o te Tumu. 72
Na arere ra o Ti'a-o-uri e o Ti'a-o-atea, i haere roa a'era i raro i Vai-tū-pō, i te aro o Ta'aroa. 47
"Mānava orua e Ti'a-o-uri e o Ti'a-o-atea! A tahi tere nui i tae mai ai i Vaitū-pō nei?" 44
"Tere nui ua hia a'e ai i Vai-tū-pō nei! Ti'i mai nei i to pu'e tahu'a na, e hopoi ei tahu'a no te tamaiti a te Ari'i, o Atea, aita i ha'apā te rima o na tahu'a o te Tumu-nui i ni'a iho, ua ri'ari'a i te hau o te ari'i o Atea." 105
"A, ua ti'a, tera mai o Rima-roa e o Nаnа; na tahu'a ia e haere." 26
Rere ana'e atura ia na arere e na tahu'a e ni'a i te tama ia Atea ra; hi'o a'ere o Rima-roa, hi'o ho'i-o Nаnа! Aita rа i ha'apа i te rima i ni'a iho i te tama, i mata'u i ri'ari'a i te Ari'i o Atea! I rave ai i ta raua ete to'i, i huhura atura i raro i Vai-tū-pō! 115
A ho'i na arere, o Ti'a-o-uri, e o Ti'a-o-atea i Vai-tū-pō ia Ta'aroa ra; mānava maira Ta'aroa, "A tahi а tere?" 51
"E! A tahi а tere nui to maua!" 12
"Ahiri!" 3
"Ti'i mai nei i to varua na, e hopoi ei varua a'e na te tamaiti o Atea-ta'o-nui!" 37
"Ua ti'a to orua tere, a hoho'i orua, tera mai to'u varua." 26
Fa'atupu atura Ta'aroa i te 'iri no te tama, ei huru no te tama, ia riro 'oia ei atua mana, ei taata purotu hope roa: te 'iri o te hutu, ei 'iri-matoru no te tama, te 'iri o te atae, ei 'iri taratara no te tama; te 'iri o te miti, ei 'iri taitai no te tama; te 'iri no te tumu ha'ari ei 'iri аfаfa no te tama; te 'iri purau ei 'iri pi'ei'ei no te tama; te 'iri o te 'ati, ei 'iri nifanifa no te tama; te 'iri mara, ei 'iri rairai no te tama; te 'iri apape, ei 'iri me'ume'u no te tama; te 'iri o te to'i, ei 'iri hinuhinu no te tama; te 'iri o te aito, ei 'iri 'ura'ura no te tama; te 'iri o te 'uru, ei 'iri tapau no te tama; te 'iri o te fai, ei 'iri vanavana no te tama; te 'iri pape, ei 'iri anuanu no te tama; te huru o te mata'i, ei 'iri manihinihi no te tama; te 'iri o te ma'o, ei 'iri pa'i'a no te tama; te 'iri o te mahana, ei 'iri vera no te tama; te 'iri o te ava'e, ei 'iri maramarama no te tama. Ua hope roa ia nau 'iri i ni'a i te tama; te 'iri o to'na huru, te 'iri, o to'na huru, te 'iri, o to'na huru, no te tama nei. 422
A ti'a e Atea, oe, e a noho! A fa'anoho rа i te tupu'ai upo'o o te tama. Fa'anohohia 'tura e Atea te tupu'ai upo'o o te tama. A fa'anoho rа i te pahu 'uru o te upo'o, e a fa'anoho i te iri e te rouru i ni'a iho, ei upo'o tahinu mono'i no te tama. Hope ana'e atura ia. A fa'anoho i te pani'uru. I fa'anohohia 'tura ei pani'uru no te tama. A fa'anoho i te horu upo'o, e te rae, ei rae hiehie, e a fa'anoho i te rahirahia o te tama. Ua fa'anohohia 'tura te horu upo'o, te rae hiehie, e te rahirahia o te tama. 221
Ua fa'anohohia rа te tari'a o te tama. A noho e tari'a turi ei tari'a afа, ei tari'a fa'aro'oro'o atu, ei tari'a fa'aro'oro'o mai, ei tari'i tauo'o, ti'ati'a rairai maita'i; e e raumea 'to'a to te tari'a o te tama. 95
Ia fa'anohohia te rua mata, Fa'anohohia 'tura te rua mata po'opo'o. A fa'anoho rа i te tu'e mata rumaruma, tu'ati'ati, e te mata o te tama; ei mata 'ana'ana, ei mata hipahipa, ei mata tutonu, ei mata 'amo'amo, ei mata hi'ohi'o, e ei roi mata to te tama. 108
Ia fa'anohohia rа te ihu o te tama. A noho ei ihu titi'aifaro, ei ihu feufeu, ei ihu 'oro'oro aore а rа e apo'o to te ihu o te tama. 59
Fa'anohohia 'tura te moi ta'a. I fa'anohohia te papari'a, e papari'a feoro, e papari'a taratara, e papari'a unouno'o, e papari'a papauru, roroa no te tama. I fa'anohoia te 'utu, ei 'utuu pe'epe'e, ei 'utu 'ume'ume, e 'utu 'ata'ata, e utu faita, ei 'utu me'ume'u. Ei i fa'anohohia te ta'ani'a e te ta'araro, e te ara niho ei niho 'ai mа'a no te tama. 153
I fa'anohohia te apu upo'o ei 'uru upo'o no te tama, ia fa'anohohia rа ei i i roto i te upo'o. I atura te 'uru upo'o i te roro. 57
A fa'anoho rа i te arero, ei arero mitimiti no te tama, ia hope maita'i te vaha, ei vaha paraparau. E a fa'anoho i te arapo'a ponapona e ei a'о 'ari'ari, ei rei no te tama. 75
Ia fa'anohohia te tapono e te moemoerua ei vaira'a turu 'a no te tama. Te rima, e ei e'e ruerue, ei pororima, ei 'apu'apu, ei 'apu rima, ei rimarima, e ei ma'iu'u rima no te tama. 82
Ia fa'anohohia te 'ouma raharaha, te ū pai, te 'ao'ao varavara e ei tuamo'o honohono, e ei tua fa'a'ohu no te tama. 54
A ti'a e Atea, oe, e a noho! A fa'anoho ei mafatu etuetu, ei upa'a ta'ue'ue, ei 'ufa'ufa ta'ue'ue, ei opu vaira'a mа'a, ei ate, ei hihirau'ape, e ei rаtа no te tama. Fa'anoho ei 'a'au rahi, fa'anoho ei 'a'au iti mi'imi'i. O te manava ia no te tama, e manava horuhoru. 121
Ia fa'anohohia rа te 'opū fatifati, e ei pito o'o'o, ei hoperemo purotu e ei tohe tuara. 41
A fa'anoho rа i te tapa po'opo'o, e ei huhа avarivari, fa'anoho i te turi, ei turi 'opa. A fa'anoho i te ivi fara no te 'avae o te tama, te 'avae rourou, ei momoa tau, ei poro 'avae ei tapua'e 'avae, ei manimani e te ma'iu'u panapana no te tama. 107
Ia hope maita'i roa te tupu o te tama. 17
A vehо rā i te tama i te 'iri hinuhinu ravarava, E a fa'ati'ati'a i te huruhuru ri'i i te po'opo'o ri'i 'iri e ati roa a'e. A oti, a noho te manava o Atea! 67
A ti'a a'e o Atea i ni'a, ia rave ai i ta'na ete pūpū tui e'e a'era, i hou mai ai i te 'uru menemene o te tama. I hou mai i te tari'a ro'oro'o, e fa'anoho a'eroa i te taturi i roto. Hou mai ai i te ihu, i houa mai ai te vaha paraparau e i te arapo'a o te tama. Hautiuti mai ra te tama, oto mai ra, ua ta'o atura, "E Atea e , ua mamae roa vau!" 158
Oti roa a'era te tupu o te tama, na Atea ana'e i rave. Riro atura te tama ei mea ora, na te varua o Ta'aroa i ha'api'i i te ha'a, i riro ai Tane-mata-morarai ei tamaiti hi'ora'a maita'i. Aore te mau tahu'a i rave atu ia Tane, i mata'u ana'e i te hau, i te mana o Atea. 121
Pa'ari atura o Tane; o Tane ti'a vaho, Tane ti'a i roto. A mamapu Tane, o Tane te mamapu. A hiohio Tane, o Tane te hiohio. Tane hoa rau. Tane hoa nu'u, o Tane hoa ra'i. A ite te nu'u atua i te rouru e te huruhuru o Tane, o te ore i au i to ratou huruhuru, topa 'tura i te i'oa e rimu. 121
Ti'a rа o Tane i ni'a, na'ō maira: "O vau maori teie, o Tane nui, atua o te mau mea purotu! I te mata a'a ra'i! O vau i te mata tui'au i to Ro'o te ro'oro'o." 68
Teie ta Tane: O Tane hoa nu'u, Tane aho roa, Tane fenua roa, Tane pau, Tane haruru, Tane totoia, Tane i to'ona i te ra'i ia Atea, Tane i te ra'i tua tini, Tane i te ra'i hamama, Tane i te hora. 81
E rua ta'o ta Tane, o Vero-nu'u, e niu te ra'au, e o Vero-ra'ai, e toa te ra'au. O na tore 'ere'ere e rua ia e vai mai ra i te Vai-ora i te ra'i. Te 'ufa o Tane e 'ufa i ni'a, e pohe! Te 'ufa e 'ufa i raro, e pohe! Te 'ufa, e 'ufa i tai, e pohe! Te 'ufa e 'ufa i uta, e pohe! Te 'ufa o Tahe e 'ufa i te fare, e pohe te maru i roto, e pohe te taata i te ma'i. A apa'i Tane i te taata, e popoa iti ia. O Tane te Atua o te mau tahu'a o te ao nei. Ei ahu no te tai o Tane. O Tane moeoho. 204
To te feia tarai va'a, to te feia papa'i fare, to te feia faati'a marae, i naō ana'e ia mau tahua'e: "Ei mata ora te ha'a, ei to'i horo!" No Tane aitu tahu'a, ia parau i tupu ai. 81
Fa'anoho atura Ta'aroa ia Tane i te ra'i tua tini te ra'i hamama tei reira te Vai-ora a te atua. E vai ai vaha na te atua; na te rima maui te apu atu i te vaha, e rima mo'a ia na te atua. 84
Tei taua vai ra o Ire, te ma'o purotu i faaora hia e Tū ma Ta'aroa ra, hou te fanau raa o te taata; i horo'a hia ia e Ta'aroa na Tane. 62
E pira'e iti 'uo, i fa'a'ai hia i te 'atoti 'ai ma'o purotu, tei te ra'i hamama a Tane; E manu iti hani, tau faaо rei na Tane, ei arere na ane, o Tae-fei-aitu te io'a o taua manu iti ra. E e nau manu ura nui purotu ato'a tei taua vai ora a Tane ra, o Tane-manu te io'a, i tono hia mai i to'na tau ei mono ia Tane i roto i te moana o teie nei ao. A ite te feia faatere pahi i taua mau manu ra, i te marere raa mai i tau haere ai i ni'a i te tira pahi e i te tai, e tapa'o ia e ua tia'i hia ratou e Tane, atua nui. E ore roa e ora i te vero ahiri ratou i hamani'ino i taua mau manu mo'a ra. 270
O Aruru te vahine ta Ta'aroa i rahu na Tane; e atua vahine mana oia, na'na i ha'apu'e i te mau mea purotu a Tane i to ratou mau vairaa. 61
Rahua maira o 'Apo-rau ei arere na Tane. 19
A tu'u а i te arere na Tane! E Tū e, e fano oe i te ra'i ta vero hia! E ata e, e ata tupu a'e! 40
E ata au a'e e! 8
E fano oe na te tai ta vero hia, 14
E ata e! e ata poiri, e ata fetui! 16
[ROO THE MESSENGER} 6
E fano oe i te ra'i ta vero hia. 14
E ata e, e ata ti'iti'i. 11
E ata e! E ata mareva. 10
Eiaha te ata hi'a, 9
Eiaha te ata tu noa, 10
Eiaha te ata ta'ata'a, 11
Eiaha te ata fare, 9
Eiaha te ata pū'a'a, 11
O atu ra i te ata pe'e noa, 12
O ata i te ata oehau, 11
Te ata ura, te ata re'are'a, 12
Te ata teatea, te ata taupe. 13
O atu i te ata verovero, 11
O atu i te ata haaviriviri 13
E te ata mahаhа! 5
A fano oe i te ra'i ta vero hia. 14
E ata e! e ata poiri, e ata fetu'i, 16
E ata pa'ari, hiti mare'are'a! 13
O Faurourou te ata, 10
E ta'ai na, ta'ai na, tupu, ta'ai na. 15
Ua hapu te ata paari 10
Ia Ro'o arere nui a Tane! 12
Ta'ai na, ta'ai na, tupu ta'ai na. 14
A moe o Ro'o nui i te ata, ta'ai na. 16
A hurihuri, a tauahi, 10
A faauta o Ro'o i te ata 12
A ta'ai na, tupu, ta'ai na. 11
A 'a'ai o Ro'o i te ata 11
A ta'ai na, tupu, ta'ai na. 11
A tatuatua o Ro'o i te ata 13
A ta'ai na, tupu, ta'ai na. 11
A hu'ihu'i o Ro'o i te ata 12
A ta'ai, tupu, ta'ai na. 10
A iti'iti o Ro'o i te ata, 12
A mamae ia Ro'o te ata, 11
A fanau ia Ro'o te ata! 11
Ta'ai na, tupu, ta'ai na. 10
A ta pahi'i o Ro'o i te ata, 12
A ta'ai na, tupu, ta'ai na. 11
E fare hua no Ro'o te ata 11
Ta'ai na, a tupu, ta'ai na. 11
A ne'e o Ro'o, a totoro o Ro'o i te ata, 17
Ta'ai na, a tupu, ta'ai na. 11
A haere o Ro'o i te ata, 11
A ta'ai, tupu, ta'ai na. 10
A pa'ari o Ro'o i te ata! 11
Hahaere e Ro'o ma Tū, 10
Tuava ē i te ata e rere 12
E ta'ai na, ta'ai na, 9
Tupu, ta'ai na e! 7
O Ro'o mua, Ro'o arere nui teie na Tane, i rahua e Ta'aroa, i fanau hia e Faurourou, te ata pa'ari mareare'a. 51
A rahu rа i te tahu'a na Tane. Teie ia! O 'oina, o Fаfа, o 'O'oia, e o Tuiora, na tahu'a nui ite a Tane. 43
Tei Mou'a-'ura i Uporu te fenua o Tane i te ao nei, i reira ta'na nu'u atua te tairuru raa i te anotau ta'upiti no te ao nei. 58
Tei re ra'i hamama o Tane na taata ihi 'ea ra; o Pа'щ o Huhura, o Hua-nu'u-marae, o Aruru-nu'u-rаrа, o Poro-a-uta, o Poro-a-tai, o Porapora-i-rau-ata, e na vahine tama, o Anei-ra'i, e o Tupetupe-i-fare-one. 85
O Tane e o 'Aruru, fanau maira ta raua tamaiti, o Fanau-tini, atua hua'ai rahi roa. E 'ore ta'na vahine e hope i te tai'o no te rahi.
O, shapeless, O, shapeless! No face, no head, no nose, no ears, no mouth, no neck, no back, no chest, no ribs, no abdomen, no umbilicus, no thighs, no buttocks, no knees, no legs, no sole of the foot! O, what growth is this little child! O, shapeless, o shapeless nothing! Who could have borne such a child? He is born of Atea and Papa-tu-'oi (Sharp-standing-rock), the handsome offspring of Ta'aroa. 113
Let the messenger of the handsome offspring of Ta'aroa run. The messenger Horo-fana'e (Early-runner), let him run to the presence of Tumu-nui, and of Rua-tupua-nui! 53
Then the messenger ran, and when Tumu-nui and Rua-tupu-nui saw him, they welcomed him, and said: "Horo-fana'e! Have you come?" 40
Horo-fana'e answered, "Here I am." 12
"Some great cause has brought you to Tumu and to Rua-tupua-nui?" 24
"There is a cause! I have a great errand! I have come for the body of artisans of the gods! The son of Atea is born, go and fashion him." 44
"Is the child born?" 4
"He is born." 3
"Did you notice whom he resembles?" 11
"A clod of earth! A huge jelly-fish! O shapeless, shapeless nothing! There he lies, extended in the great embrace of Atea." 38
"There are the artisans that shall go, Huri-tua (Back-turner) and Huri-aro (Face-turner), your errand is agreed to." 36
So these two strung their baskets of adzes upon their arms and went to fashion the back of the child, and to fashion the face of the child. 39
But they did not apply their hands to him; they feared, they dreaded the majesty of Atea! This was why they took up their baskets of adzes, and sped back to Tumu. 44
The messengers, Ti'a-o-uri (Approver-of-darkness) and Ti'a-o-atea (Approver-of-extension), then went away down to Ta'aroa at Vai-tu-po (River-in-Hades). 50
"Welcome to you both, Ti'a-o-uri and Ti'a-o-atea! A great errand has brought you to Vai-tu-po?" 34
"We have a great errand which has brought us to Vai-tu-po! We have come for your body of artisans, to take them to mould the son of Queen Atea, the artisans of Tumu-nui did not apply their hands to touch him, they dreaded the majesty of Atea." 77
"I agree, there are Rima-roa (Long-arm) and Nana (Steadfast-gaze); they are the artisans that shall go." 32
So those messengers and artisans flew up to the child with Atea, Rima-roa looked, and Nana looked! But the did not put forth their hands to touch the child, they feared and dreaded Queen Atea. This was why they took their baskets of adzes and fled back to Vai-tu-po! 80
Then the messengers, Ti'a-o-uri and Ti'a-o-atea returned to Ta'aroa at Vai-tu-po; he welcomed them, and said: "Another errand?" 43
"Yes! We have another great errand!" 11
"Let me hear it!" 5
"We have come for your spirit, to take it to the son of Atea-ta'o-nui (Vast-expanse-of-great-bidding)." 34
"You errand is agreed to, return, you two, there is my spirit." 19
Then Ta'aroa caused skins to grow for the child, to give him qualities, to make him a great god, a perfectly handsome man; the bark of the hutu to make the child hardy; the bark of the atae, for a rough skin for the child; the crust of the sea (salt), for a salt skin for the child; the bark of the coconut tree, for a porous skin for the child; the purau bark, for a skin full of fissures for the child; the bark of the 'ati, for a variegated skin for the child; the bark of the mara, for a thin skin for the child; the apape bark, for a thick skin for the child; the toi bark, for a shining skin for the child; the aito bark, for a red skin for the child; the uru bark, for a glutinous skin for the child; the skin of the rayfish, for a prickley skin for the child; the crust of the water (ice) for a cold skin for the child; the shark's skin, for a smooth skin for the child; the surface of the sun, for a warm skin for the child; the surface of the moon, for a light skin for the child. All these skins were placed on the child; the skin and its nature, the skin and its nature, for this child. 290
Arise Atea, thou, and establish! Now set the crown of the child's head. Then Atea set the crown of the head for the child. Now set the form of the skull of the head, and set the scalp with hair upon it, that it may be a head to anoint with oil for the child. All this was done. Set a nape of the neck. There was set a nape for the neck of the child. Set an opening of the cranium and a forehead, a war-like forehead, and set temples for the child. Then were set the openings of the cranium, the war-like forehead, and the temples for the child. 157
Now let there be set ears for the child. There were set deaf ears to become open ears, ears that could hear far off, ears that could hear close by, deep ears, nice and erect and thin; and there were lobes to the ears of the child. 71
Let there be set sockets for the eyes. And there were set deep sockets for the eyes. Now set frowning eyebrows that join, and eyes for the child; let them be bright eyes, glancing eyes, fixed eyes, winking eyes, observing eyes, and let the child have tears. 72
Now let there be set a nose for the child. There was a straight nose, to be a snorting nose, a snoring nose, but there were as yet no nostrils in the child's nose. 47
Then were set joints for the jaws. There were set cheeks, smooth cheeks, cheeks full of rage, flushed cheeks, wide, long cheeks for the child. There were set lips, pliant lips, pouting lips, laughing lips, sneering, thick lips. And there were set the upper jaw and the lower jaw, and rows of teeth, teeth for the child to eat with. 89
The exterior is set as a head for the child, now let there be set fullness for the head. Then the skull of the head got filled with brain. 39
Now set a tongue, a clamorous tongue, a voluble tongue, a licking tongue for the child, that the mouth may be perfect to talk with and to eat with. And set a knotty gullet and a slender throat, for a neck for the child. 64
Let there be set shoulders formed so as to rest against pillows in sleeping for the child. And set arms, and odoriferous arm-pits, elbows, wrists and palms to the hands, fingers, and finger nails for the child. 56
Let there be set a broad chest, a flat bosom, ribs wide apart, a jointed spine, and a flexible back for the child. 33
Arise Area, thou, and establish! Let there be set a throbbing heart, a swinging liver, swinging lungs, a stomach for a receptacle for food, a smilt, a caul, and kidneys for the child. Set large intestines, set small, curling intestines. These were the child's vitals, vitals containing a conscience. 87
Let there be set a folding abdomen, with a deep rounded umbilicus, comely loins, and parted buttocks. 31
Now set hollow groins, and shining, limber thighs; set knees, they must be bending knees. Let there be shin bones for the legs of the child, and turned out for the legs of the child, and turned out feet, full ankle bones, heels and soles to the feet, and toes with toe nails to push off with for the child. 82
Let the development of the child all be perfect. 13
And now cover the child with a sleek, brown skin. And set little hairs by all the pores of the skin. When this was done, the mind of Atea was set at rest. 40
Then Atea stood up, took her basket of gimlet shells under her arm, and bored into the round skull of the child. She bored into the ears to listen by, and placed wax in them. She bored into the nose and the talkative mouth and the throat of the child. The child then moved, he wept, and cried: "O Atea, I am in great pain!" 93
Thus the development of the child was perfected, accomplished it all. The child became a living being, it was the spirit of Ta'aroa that directed the work, and caused Tane-mata-morari (Tane-of-shapeless-face) to become a good-looking boy. None of the artisans touched Tane, they were all afraid of the majesty, the power of Atea. 105
Tane matured; Tane who stood outside, Tane who stood inside. Tane breathed heavily, Tane the heavy breather. Tane whistled, Tane the whistler. Tane of many friends. Tane the friend of armies. Tane the heavenly friend. When the hosts of gods saw Tane's hair, which was not like their feathers, they named it moss. 95
Now Tane stood up and said: "And so this is I, great Tane, god of all things beautiful! With eyes to measure the skies! I whose eyes will unite with those of Ro'o (Fame), the famous." 59
These are Tane's attributes: Tane friend of armies, Tane of long breath, Tane of distant lands, Tane the extirpator, Tane the resounder, Tane whose touch subjected, Tane who drew away the sky of Atea, Tane of the tenth sky, Tane of the open sky, Tane of extended arms. 82
Tane had two great spears, Vero-nu'u (Dart-upon-armies), of coconut wood, and Vero-ra'ai (Attacking-dart), of 'aito. These are the two dark streaks that still remain along the Vai-ora (Milky Way), in the sky. When Tane vented his rage above, there was death! When he vented his rage below, there was death! When he vented his rage at sea, there ws death! When he vented his rage inland, there was death! When Tane's wrath was poured forth in the house the shadows vanished from within, and people got ill. When Tane struck a man, he became a pulp. Tane was the god of all artisans in this world. Tane was a bailer of the sea. He was Tane who caused a restless, anxious mind. 202
Those who hewed out canoes, those who built houses, those who erected temples, all these artisans said: "Work with wakeful eyes, and with expeditious axes!" Tane, god of artisans, was the cause of this saying. 67
Ta'aroa placed Tane in the tenth sky, the open sky, where flows the Vai-ora of the gods (Milky Way). It was the water to lap up into the mouths of the gods; by the left hand they bore it to the mouth, that was the sacred hand to the gods. 63
In that water lives Ire (Prize-winner), the handsome shark that was rescued by Tu with Ta'aroa after man was created; Ta'aroa gave it to Tane. 45
There was a little white sea-swallow that was fed on remoras from off the handsome shark, in the open sky of Tane. It was a little pet bird that nestled against Tane's neck, upon his shoulder, as his messenger, named Tae-fei-aitu (Arrival-of-petitions-to-the-gods). And there were great handsome red birds that lived in the living water of Tane, named Bird-Tane, which he sometimes sent to represent him in the terrestial ocean. When mariners saw those birds flying overhead and alighting upon their ship masts and in the sea they knew they were protected by the great god, Tane. Sure destruction by storm would have been the penalty had they ill-treated those sacred birds. 199
Aruru (Collector) was the wife that Ta'aroa conjured forth for Tane; she was a great goddess who collected Tane's handsome things into their proper places. 47
Then was conjured as a messenger for Tane, 'Apo-rau (Catcher-of-many-things). 22
Give another messenger for Tane! O Tu, fly thou to the sky where the storm is gathering! There is a cloud, a growing cloud! 36
It is a rising cloud! 7
Fly thou over the tempestuous sea, 12
O the clouds! the dark cloud, the midnight cloud! 13
[ROO THE MESSENGER} 6
Fly thou to the stormy sky. 5
O the cloud! it is a wide-spreading cloud. 14
O the cloud! It is a flying cloud. 10
Not the slipping cloud, 6
Not the standing cloud, 6
Not the fleecy cloud, 6
Not the shelving cloud, 6
Not the inflated cloud, 7
But beyond the drifting cloud, 8
Beyond the changing cloud, 7
The red cloud, the yellow cloud, 9
The clear cloud, the drooping cloud, 11
Beyond the stormy cloud, 6
Beyond the furling cloud 7
And the vaporous cloud! 8
Fly thou to the lowering sky. 7
Oh the clouds! the dark cloud, the midnight cloud, 13
The frozen, gilded cloud! 7
Faurourou (Darling-child-caressed) is the cloud, 16
That travels on, travels, grows, and travels on. 11
Pregnant is the frozen cloud 8
With Ro'o the great messenger of Tane! 12
Travel on, travel on, grow and travel on. 11
Great Ro'o sleeps in the cloud travelling on. 14
Ro'o turns and caresses, 7
Ro'o sets himself in the cloud 9
As he travels on, grows, and travels on. 10
Ro'o feeds upon the cloud 9
As he travels on, grows, and travels on. 10
Ro'o is nude in the cloud 9
As he travels on, grows, and travels on. 10
Ro'o causes the cloud to throb 10
As he travels on, grows, and travels on. 10
Ro'o causes sharp pains in the cloud 12
The throes of parturiency with Ro'o overtake the cloud, 18
Ro'o is born of the cloud! 8
Travel on, grow and travel on. 8
Ro'o wears swaddling clothes in the cloud 12
As he travels on, grows, and travels on. 10
The cloud is an asylum for Ro'o 10
Traveling on, growing and traveling on. 11
Ro'o creeps, Ro'o reaches in the cloud, 13
Traveling on, growing and traveling on. 11
Ro'o walks in the cloud. 7
As he travels, grows, and travels on. 9
Ro'o is matured in the cloud! 10
Depart, Ro'o and Tū. 7
Turn back from the cloud that flies 9
And travels on, travels on, 7
Grows, and travels on! 5
This is Ro'o the first. Ro'o the great messenger of Tane, conjured by Ta'aroa and born of Faurourou, the frozen, gilded cloud. 40
Now conjure the artisans for Tane. Here they are! 'Oina (Sharpness), Fafa (Feeler), 'O'oia (Swiftness) and Tuiora (Canoe-setter), these be Tane's great learned artisans. 55
Mou'a-'ura (Red-mountain) in Uporu (Taha'a) was the land of Tane in this world; there his godly host assembled for earthly festivities. 42
In the open sky of Tane dwelt his people who were remarkably ingenious; they were Pa'u (Splasher), Huhura (Scamperer), Hua-nu'u-marae (Portable-house-of-refuge), Aruru-nu'u-rara (Collector-of-scattered-hosts), Poro-a-uta (Proclaimer-inland), Poro-a-tai (Proclaimer-seaward), Porapora-i-rau-ata (First-born-of-varied-laughing), and the prolific women, Anei-ra'i (Scented-shrub-of-the-sky) and Tupetupe-i-fare-one (Loiterer-in-sand-house). 145
Tane and 'Aruru begat their son Fanau-tini (Birth-of-many), who became a most prolific god. His wives cannot be counted as they are numerous.
Henry: 372-374 1
Source: Mahine, chief of Mai'ao, Anani, Tahitian chief, and Tamera, Tahitian high priest 33
Exchange of sexes between Atea and Faahotu and production of more gods
Fanau mai ra ta Fa'ahotu tama matahiapo, o Tahu mua. A fa'a'ai hia i te ū pa'i no Fa'ahotu, mate atura i te po'ia. Fanau maira o Tahu roto, fa'a'ai hia i te ū pa'i no Fa'ahotu, mate atura ia i te po'ia. Fanau mai ra o Tahu-muri fa'a'ai hia i te ū pa'i no Fa'ahotu, mate ato'a atura i te po'ia! 132
"Ua mate ana'e а ia mau tamari'i!" 15
"Ua mate!" 4
"Eaha e tia'i?" 7
"E tapiho'o paha taua o Atea!" 14
"A haere e tapiho'o." 9
Rere atura na 'arere o Ti'a-o-uri e o Ti'a-o-atea, e tae roa 'tura i te Vai-ora o Tane. 39
E mānava ta Tane: "Mānava orua, e Ti'a-o-uri e o Ti'a-o-atea, a tahi tere i tae mai ai orua i te vai 'ai vaha a Tane nei." 57
"E tere nui! E tere tapiho'o to maua i tae mai ai ia Tane nei!" 29
"Ahiri!" 3
"Te mata o Atea, e hopoi atu ei mata no Fa'ahotu, te mata o Ta'ahotu, e hopoi ia ei mata no Atea. E mau anei?" 50
"E mau roa ia!" 7
"Te huru tane o Fa'ahotu ra, e hopoi ana'e ia no Atea, e te huru vahine o Atea ra, e hopoi ana'e ia no Fa'ahotu. E mau anei ia?" 58
"E mau roa ana'e ia!" 10
A upu rа o Tane Mauri ihora o Fa'ahotu e o Atea. Na pu nauanau, na pu nahanaha, na tiraurau. 41
"A ara Atea! Tete a nu'u, tete a ra'i! I te pori o Atea, i te poiri o Atea i te marama o Atea! A pū a hiti rа! Ei tafa e Atea!" Ta Uru ia upu i te iho faahou raa mai o Atea. 79
"O vai teie vahine nui e vai mai nei?" 18
"O Fa'ahotu ia vahine ua tapiho'o i to'na huru tane i te huru vahine o Atea." 34
"A ho'i mai rа na pu'e atua!" 11
Ua ho'i te iho o na Tahu i roto ia Fa'ahotu, a tono tahi Tahu e ei ana mua i vaho, a tono tahi e ei ana mua. I tono Ro'o te roro'o ei ana mua, te puai ra o Ro'o; te matahiapo atura ia. Fanau atua maira ia Ro'o, e atua mana roa, o Ro'o muri. 109
Te pito o Ro'o fifiri rarama i roto, i te pito o te teina, o Fa'aroa, o Fa'aroa atea, o Fa'aroa 'ai'ai. Na'na i fa'aaui te fā no te faatano omore, na'na i fa'aau i te fenua aroraa, na muri atura oia ia Ro'o. Taua pito ra, o Fara tau te maire ia. 112
Teie ta Ro'o te roro'o e atua i'oa rau o Ro'o: Ro'o i te hiripo'i, Ro'o aninia, Ro'o tuiaroha, Ro'o i te mohimohi, Ro'o te hamama, Ro'o i te mаmа, Ro'o i te toiaha Ro'o i ni'a, Ro'o i raro, ro'o i uta, Ro'o i tai, Ro'o i poiri, Ro'o i maramarama, Ro'o te roroo'o i mauri i roto i te metua vahine. Ro'o i te hihio, Ro'o atua aho pau. E para hia te ma'i i te upu o Ro'o, e ora te ma'i ia Ro'o. 166
Fanau maira Tahu mua e ahi ta'a nu'u, oia te vana'a ia Tane aitu. Tahu roto maira, e ahi ta'a ra'i; fanau maira Tahu-muri, e ahi ta'a i te Pō. Ite ai te ta'ata i te tahu i te atua e i te varua-ino. 89
A noho Te-fatu i te vahine, ia Fa'ahotu, fanau ta'na atua vahine, o Ahahamea, o Hotu, o Te-pori ia Rua-Papa i te puo o te fenua, e o te Ohu-tū-mou'a; ei faatuputupu ia no te fenua. He'e te tua, o Hina-tū-a-ni'a, o Hina-tū-a-raro, Hina-tū-a-ra'i, o Hina-tū-a-uta, o Hina-tū-a-tai. 125
Ti oropa'a, ti huri hia; a fanau Te-pori ia Ta'ere, i Rua-papa i te puo o te fenua, e tu'ati ti'a i te Pō; o Ta'ere-ma-'opo'opo, o Ta'ere-matua-toitoi, a Tae'ere-pipine, o Ta'ere-fau'oa. E atua roa o Ta'ere! 92
A rahu rа i te tahu'a na Ta'ere-ma-'opo'opo! O Tura'i-po o Ti'iti'i-po o Faro, o Matamata-'arahu, o Aruaru-vahine, o Peperu, o Feu, o Atari-heui, o Tutono, o Tahu'a-muri, e o Mata'itai. Na tahu'a rarahi teie ia Ta'ere i Rua-papa i te puo o te fenua; e rave rahi atu а tahu'a i rahua mai e Ta'aroa na Ta'ere. Rahua maira, o Hoani, ei tau'a na Ta'ere; o Hoani-i-te-pō, Hoani-te-ao, Hoani-i-te-atua, Hoani-i-te-taata. Ua hope to paari i roto ia Hoani, te taua a Ta'ere-ma-'opo'opo. O Nevaneva te 'arere i tu'ua ei ve'a na Ta'ere mai roto mai i te piha atua. Aore e atua vahine i te fare tahu'a ia Ta'ere ra. 267
O Atea o tei ni'a tu'-ia mai te mata i to te vahine, o Hotu, i raro, fanau a'era ta'na ari'i o au-te-ro'oro-o, o Roro'o maira, e atua tahu'a pure. 64
Teie na tamahine a Ta'aroa e o Papa-raharaha: O Tū-poro-mai, na atua vahine tū poro mou'a na Ta'aroa; o Rau-ata-'ura, o Rau-'ata-mea, o Rau-penapena, e o Rau-'ati'ati, e nau atua vahine o te uru ra'au; o Ihi, e atua vahine no te feia pa'ari e te ite; e o Te-ā-noa, atua vahine no te ā noa raa i roto i te fenua; hee te tua, o Rio, atua fa'arava'ai i te a'ahi e te atu. 169
Te piha atua, e piha ē ia; te piha taata i to'na tua i te aro o ha'eha'a.
The first-born of Fa'ahotu was born, it was Tahu (Magician), the first. He was nursed on the flat bosom of Fa'ahotu and died of starvation. Inner Tahu was born and he was nursed on the flat bosom of Fa'ahotu and he died of starvation. Then last Tahu was born, and he was nursed on the flat bosom of Fa'ahotu and died also of starvation. 103
"So all those children are dead!" 10
"They are dead!" 5
"What shall be done?" 5
"Make and exchange [of sexes] perhaps with Atea." 15
"Go and make the exchange." 8
Then the messengers Ti'a-o-uri and Ti'a-o-atea flew up to the Vai-ora of Tane. 28
Tane greeted them: "Welcome to you both, Ti'a-o-uri and Ti'a-o-atea, an errand has brought you hither to Tane's water to catch into the mouth." 47
"It is a great errand! It is an errand of exchange that has brought us hither to Tane!" 26
"Let me know it." 4
"We want the face of Atea taken for Fa'ahotu, and the face of Fa'ahotu taken for Atea. Will that hold?" 34
"It will hold well!" 4
"Let all that is masculine in Fa'ahotu be taken for Atea, and all that is feminine in Atea be for Fa'ahotu. Will that hold?" 41
"All that will hold well!" 5
Tane used enchantments, so that Fa'ahotu and Atea fell into a trance. He willed it, he arranged it well, all was accomplished in attractive order. 46
"Awake Atea! Resound in the army, resound in the sky! In the fatness, in the darkness, in the light of Atea! Now be satisfied, arise! Be sonorous Atea!" This was the invocation of uru, the great canoe bailer of Ta'aroa as the consciousness of Atea returned. 88
"Who is this great woman here?" 9
"That woman is Fa'ahotu who has exchanged her masculine nature for the feminine nature of Atea. 34
"Now return, O body of gods!" 7
The essence of the Tahu returned into Fa'ahotu, one Tahu sent to say that he would come forth first, another said that he would be first. Ro'o the prayer chanter sent to say he would be first, and he was the strongest; he became the first-born. That Ro'o was born a god, a very great god, he was Ro'o the second. 90
Ro'o's umbilical cord got entangled by stratagem around that of his brother Fa'aroa (Extender), clear Fa'aroa, handsome Fa'aroa who set targets for the spear, and who chose the land for battlefields, so that he followed Ro'o. The umbilical cord became the fara tree from which hangs the maire fern. 91
These are the attributes of ro'o the prayer chanter, Ro'o was a god of many names: Ro'o in distress, Ro'o in dizziness, Ro'o in faintness, Ro'o in dimness, Ro'o in gaping, Ro'o in lightness, Ro'o in heaviness, Ro'o on high, Ro'o below, Ro'o inland, Ro'o seaward, Ro'o in darkness, Ro'o in the light, Ro'o the prayer chanter who was entranced in his mother, Ro'o the whistler, Ro'o the panting. Invocations to Ro'o were made to cast out diseases, and he cured them. 143
Tahu the first was born to encompass armies, he was god Tane's herald. Second Tahu followed to encompass the skies; then was born Last-Tahu to encompass Pō (Hades). From them men learned to kindle magic with the gods and demons. 65
Te-fatu dwelt with his wife Fa'ahotu, and begat his goddesses, Ahahamea (Exaltation), Hotu (Fruitfulness), Te-pori of Rua-papa (Fatness of Rock-chasm) in the center of the earth, and Ohu-tu-moua (Mountain-cloud-crest); they caused verdure upon the earth. And there followed Hina-tu-a-nia (Gray-above), Hina-tu-o-raro (Gray-below), Hina-tu-a-ra'i (Gray-of-the-sky), Hina-tu-a-uta (Gray-inland), and Hina-tu-a-tai (Gray-of-the-sea). 137
There was a crust, there was upheaving; and then was born of Te-pori, Ta'ere of Rua-papa (Keel-of-rock-chasm) in the center of the earth, which communicated with Pō, and Ta'ere-ma'opo'opo (Keel-of-all-skill), Ta'ere-ma-tua-toitoi (Keel-of-vigor-and-strength), Ta'ere-pipine (Keel-the-distributer), Ta'ere-fau'oa (Keel-the-joiner). A very great god was Ta'ere! 116
Now give artisans for Ta'ere-ma-'opo'opo! They were, Tura'i-po (Push-night-away), Ti'iti'i-pō (Fetcher-in-darkness), Faro (Hope), Matamata-'arahu (Soot-tattooer), Aruaru-vahine (Pander), Peperu (Steerer), Feu (Shake-out), Atari-heui (Unstable-heap), Tutono (Dispatch), Tahu'a-muri (Propeller), and Mata'ita'i (Reconnoiter). These were the chief artisans for Ta'ere of rua-papa in the center of the earth; and there were also many other artisans that were conjured forth by Ta'aroa for Ta'ere. There was conjured forth Hoani (Tempter), as a bosom friend for Ta'ere; he was Hoani-i-te-po (Tempter-in-Pō), Hoani-i-te-ao (Tempter-on-earth), Hoani-i-te-atua (Tempter-of-the-gods), Hoani-i-te-taata (Tempter-of-men). All craftiness was in Hoani, the bosom friend of Ta'ere-ma-'opo'opo. Nevaneva (Look-around) was the messenger appointed to communicate with Ta'ere from the house of gods. There were no goddesses in the house of artisans with Ta'ere. 316
The eyes of Atea above met those of his wife, Hotu, below, and they begat their prince, Fau-te-ro'oro'o (Famous-chief); and there followed Roro'o (Prayer-chanter), a god of priests for prayers. 62
These are the daughters of Ta'aroa and Papa-raharaha: Tu-poro-'tu (Stand-to-proclaim-away) and Tu-poro-mai (Stand-to-proclaim-near-by), goddesses to proclaim upon the mountains for Ta'aroa: Rau-'ata-'ura (Leaf-of-red-stem), Rau-'ata-mea (Leaf-of-pink-stem), Rau-penapena (Protecting-leaf), and Rau-'ati'ati (Prickly-leaf), goddesses of the forests: Ihi (Wisdom), goddess of the wise and learned; and Te-a-noa (Spontaneous-burning), goddess of spontaneous heat in the earth; and there followed Rio (Fishing-pole), god of albicore and bonito fishers. 177
The department for gods was a separate one, and that for people adjoining it below.
Henry: 374-376 1
Source: Tamera, high priest of Tahiti, and Pati'i, high priest of Mo'orea
Date of recitation:: Tamera: 1840; Pati'i: 1840 44
Birth of more gods
A hee mai te tua, e ia papama'ehe no te tai a tau te pō. 26
E pō fanaura'a atua, o te pō Mua-Ta'aroa; o 'Oro-taua te atua i fanau mai i tereira pō; 'Oro atua o te Reva e te Fenua nei; 'Oro haia; 'Oro atua o te Arioi. 76
O Hina-tū-a-uta te metua vahine o 'Oro, i ha'amaru hia e Ta'aroa i raro a'e i te 'ama'a uru i fanau mai ai o 'Oro, ei tamaiti na Ta'aroa. I Opoa i te ao nei o 'Oro te fanau raa hia; O Tai-'au, te tane o Hina-tū-a-uta, te metua fa'a'amu a 'Oro. 112
A rahu Ta'aroa i te vahine na 'Oro, o Tū-feufeu-mai-i-te-ra'i, he'e te tua, o Tautu e o Vai'ea atua a te 'arioi. He'e te tua, o Navenave, ei arere na 'Oro; he'e te tua o Tutae-avae-to'eto'e, ei tia'i tapu ha'apoua na 'Oro haia. 104
A he'e mai te tua, e a papama'ehe no te tai, a tau te pō; o te pō o Tireo, e pō rahura'a atua. Ia Hirivari, atua mahie i Havai'i; e ia Ta'i-varua, atua nui no te hau. A rahu Ta'aroa ia Te-uri e ia Haoa'oa, ei mau tuahine a'e na 'Oro. 110
To'o toru tau tamahine ta 'Oro e o Tū-feufeu-mai-te-ra'i, o te atua vahine mana roa ia no te tau hou; teie te huru o to ratou fanau ra'a mai 64
He'e te tua e a papamaehe no te tai, a tau te pō, o te pō 'Ohua, fanau maira o To'i-mata; he'e te tua, te pō o Mai-tū-fei-roa, fanau maira o 'Ai-tupua'i; he'e te tua, te po o Hotu, fanau maira o Mahu-fatu-rau. 93
I pee ana'e teie mau atua vahine e te nu'u atua vahine 'ape'e ia ratou, ia 'Oro e ta'na nu'u atua i te tama'i, i 'ore roa ratou i ma'iri. 64
O Mua-ra'au te pō, e pō fanau-ra'a atua, fanau maira o Mata-tahi, e atua mata tahi fa'atano roa ia atua; he'tetua, o Ta-muri, e atua i pe'e noa i te ta'ata ei tiai ia ratou i te ao nei.
The sea rolled, and the tides succeeded each other for a period of nights. 24
It was the birthnight of a god, it was the night Mua-Ta'aroa (First-severed); 'Oro-taua (Warrior-at-war) was the god born that night; 'Oro (Warrior), god of the air and earth; 'Oro, the manslayer; 'Oro, god of the comedians. 66
Hina-tu-a-uta (Hina-of-the-land) was the mother of 'Oro; she was overshadowed by Ta'aroa beneath a breadfruit branch, which caused the birth of 'Oro, the son of Ta'aroa. Opoa of this earth was the birthplace of 'Oro; Tai-'au (Sea-for-swimming), the husband of Hina-tu-a-uta, was the adoptive father of 'Oro. 99
Ta'aroa conjured a wife for 'Oro; she was Tu-feufeu-mai-i-te-ra'i (Stand-to-unfold-the-sky), and there followed Tautu (Domesticated) and Vai'ea (Saving-water), gods of the comedians. Then there came Navenave (Soother), the messenger for 'Oro, and also Tutae-avae-to'eto'e (Good-father-cold-legs), to keep guard over buried victims for 'Oro, the manslayer. 118
The sea rolled, and low tide followed for a period of nights; the night of Tireo (Breaking-forth) was a night for conjuring gods. There came Hirivari (Agitator-of-mud), god of development in Havai'i; and Ta'i-varua (Weeping-for-souls), a great god of peace. Then Ta'aroa conjured the goddesses Te-uri (Darkness) and Ha'oa'oa (Grossness) as sisters for 'Oro. 113
'Oro and Tu-feufeu-mai-te-ra'i had three daughters who were the greatest goddesses of later times; they were born in this manner 42
The sea rolled and low tide came, the night arrived, the night 'Ohua (Becoming-circular), and there was born the goddess To'i-mata (Axe-with-eyes); the sea rolled, and in the night Mai-tu-fei-roa (From-standing-for-long-prayers), 'Ai-tupuai (Eater-on-summit) was born; then came the night Hotu (Fruitfulness), and Mahu-fatu-rau (Fog-of-many-owners) was born. 106
These goddesses, followed by a host of other goddesses, always accompanied 'Oro and his host of gods to battle, whither they never failed to go. 43
Mua-ra'au (First-plant) was the night; it was the birthnight of gods; Mata-tahi (Single-eye) was born; he was a god with one eye, who saw very straight; and there came Ta-muri (Go-behind), a god who followed people to watch over them in this life.
Henry: 378 1
Mourners' proverb
"Mаta'i a heva, e ara ia Ta-iti, e vero!" E piri teie na te heva. "Look at the mourners, and beware of Ta-iti, or there will be a storm!" This was the mourners' proverb.
Henry: 379-380 1
Characteristics of the god To'a-hiti
Na'na i tia'i i te mau vahi va'iri ta'ue, e i te mato ia 'ore te ta'ata ia topa i reira, e na'na i pe'e haere i te feia haere i te peho ia 'ore ia ro'ohia i te ino. Ia taupщpщ te tahu'a ra i ta ratou ra'au toiaha e tō mai uta i te fa'a e i tai, e ani ia ratou ia To'a-hiti e tauturu mai. E 'itea noa hia e te haere maira i te 'atete o te ra'oere ra'au e te pe'e ra'a o te ofafa'i na te pae mou'a. Mаmа noa 'tura ia ta ratou hopoi'a, e tae 'oi'oi noa 'tura ta ratou ra'au i te vahi i titau hia ra. Na To'a-hiti ato'a i fa'aora i te feia ratere i te to'a pū e te pari i te anotau vero, e i te 'au poiri ia mo'e ra ta ratou fa'aterera'a. 285
O Ave-aitū te rahua mai ei 'arere na To'a-hiti. E atua ave roa ia atua, i itea hia ia fano mai i te ao nei. I tono hia 'oia e To'a-hiti ei arata'i no te nu'u a Tane i te tau tama'i. 87
He'e te tua, o Tifai-o-te-peho; na'na i fa'a'ore i te afаfа o te ra'au i tarai hia ra, na'na 'to'a i ha'api'i i te tahu'a i te tifai i te iri papararо. "E taura a Tifai," "Na Tifai ia taura." O te ta'o teie a te feia tarai va'a ra'a e te va'a na te ari'i, i ni'a i te taha mou'a, no te mea ia hope te va'a i te tarai hia ra, i ta'amu haere ia te tahu'a i te taura roroa na ni'a iho mai te fa'atautau atu na te hiti, na mua, e na muri, ei reira e tao atu ai ia Tifai e haere mai e tauturu ia ratou, a taoto noa ai mai te muhu ore i roto i te va'a. A ria ri'i a'e ua tae maira o Tifai, e haere noa 'tura ia te va'a ma te mea rave ore hia na te taha mou'a, ma te 'opa'opa 'ore mai te apere ra; e mai te hope mauroa ia te taura te pe'e ra'a, a he'e noa ai ite 'aivi e na te mau vahi maruarua ra, e tae roa 'tura i te fenua pāpū. Tu'ua tura ia i raro, 'aore roa e pahurehure a'e, ei reira e ti'a ai te tahu'a i ni'a, ha'apa'o atu ai i ta ratou 'ohipa. 419
E rave ia ratou i te taura e na'o ai te pehe, "E pū! E pū! E pā, e taura a Tifai!" E mama noa 'tura ia te va'a ia putō, e tae oioi noa 'tura i te farau i te marae o te tahua ra, e fa'aoti atura i reira. 94
Te pō o Mua-ra'au, e pō fanaura'a atua; O Tuete maira, atua no te taitai. He'e te tua, o Ta'i-iti-te-ara'ara, e atua haere ta'ata, na te to'a i te moana. He'e te tua, o Mаtua, atua no te taure'are'a. 89
[Birth of insects and advent of ghosts] 9
He'e te tua, o Pepe-Tū, o Pepe-Hau, e o Haaro-mata-raie atua no te mata-pō. 34
A api te ao nei i te 'oromatua no roto mai i te ta'ata pohe. Te oro-matua o te fa'auru i te upo'o ta'ata ra, e Oromatua maita'i ia, 'e'ita e hamani'ino i te feti'i i te ao nei. E varua ta'ata oriori noa mai te Pō mai ra, e here hia 'tu e te ta'ata ora, e ore ia e hamani ino mai. E oromatua nihoniho roroa, e varua ta'ata mai te Pō mai, e oromatua ai aru, e 'u'umi e e 'ai i te feti'i e te tahi atu mau ta'ata i te ao nei. E pohe te ta'ata ia uru hia ra e tereira mau oromatua i te ta'o o te pifao.
He presided over precipices and cliffs, to save people from falling over them, and he hovered over those who went far back into the valleys, to save them from harm. When artisans were burdened with dragging a heavy log out of a valley, they would invoke To'a-hiti (Bordering-rock) to help them. His approach was always made known to them by a rustling of leaves and the falling of stones down the mountain side. Then their burden became light, and they soon succeeded in taking the log to its destination. To'a-hiti also saved seafarers from being dashed against mid-ocean rocks and rugged coasts, in stormy weather and in darkness, when they lost their way. 195
Ave-aitu (Tail-god) was conjured forth to be a messenger for To'a-hiti. He was a god with a long tail, which was seen when he flew into this world. To'a-hiti sent him as a guide for Tane's hosts in time of war. 64
Then there came Tifai-o-te-peho (Mender-of-the-valley); he prevented wood that was being hewn out of splitting, and he also showed artisans how to mend planks that were injured. "The ropes of Tifai (Mender); these ropes are for Tifai," were the sayings of those who hewed out sacred or royal canoes upon the mountain sides, because when the canoe was hewn out the artisans would bind ropes around it with long ends streaming down from each side and end, and then they would invoke Tifai to come to their aid, and lie very still inside the canoe. In a little while a rustling wind would announce the presence of Tifai, and then the canoe seemingly would go of its own accord, down the mountain side as straight as a dart; and like the tail of the tropic bird would the ropes stream out as it went forwards over cliffs and avalanches down onto low ground. There it was let down without having received a single scratch, and then the artisans would rise out of the canoe to perform their part of the work. 312
They would take up the ropes and sing, "Blow! Yield! Yield by the ropes of Tifai!" And the canoe would become light to draw, and was soon taken to the shed in the builders' marae, there to be completed. 60
The night of Mua-ra'au (First-plant) was the birthnight of gods; there came Tuete (Shameful-standing), god of licentiousness. There followed Ta'i-iti-te-ara'ara (Low-cry-that-awakes), who appeared as a little man, god of warriors at sea. There came Matua (Strength), god of the vigorous. 88
[Birth of insects and advent of ghosts] 9
Then there came Pepe-Tu (Butterflies-of-stability) and Pepe-Hau (Moths-of-Peace), and Haaro -mata-rai (Eye-scooper-of-the-sky), god of blindness. 45
The world became full of ghosts of dead people, called oromatua. Those that occupied human skulls and were kept in people's homes were good oromatua; they would not hurt their relatives in this world. Ghosts that rambled back from Hades and were received kindly by living people would do them no harm. Ghosts with long teeth were also souls of human beings from Hades; they were devouring ghosts of darkness that would strangle and devour their relatives or other people in this world. People died when possessed by these spirits at the bidding of the sorcerer.
Henry: 383 1
Source: :Mo'o, a priest of Porapora, and Anani, a Tahitian priest
Date of recitation:: Mo'o: 1825; Anani: 1840
Animals 40
Te Pa'e-pua'a-maohi, e ata no 'Oro-tauа, atua ta haiа; o 'Oro-pua'a-mahui. E pa'e rata, fa'a'amu hia, e ia uru ra, itea hia ia e o 'Oro te noho ra i roto; e pau te ta'ata i tereira pua'a ia amu. Tei ni'a i te ra'i te tahi ta'a, tei raro i te fenua te tahi ta'a, tapa'o ia e ua hamama te vaha rahi o 'Oro, e horomi'i oia i te ari'i, te va'a-mataeinaa e te fenua. E taehae rahi atura ia pua'a, e papa upe'a rahi oia iho. 187
Te uri, no To'a-hiti mata 'oa ia ata; o 'aoa o uri, e tauturu ia, e paruru i te ta'ata.
The boar was a shadow of 'Oro-tauа (Warrior-at-war) as the man-slaying god; it was 'Oro-pua'a-mahui ('Oro-the-pig-revealing-secrets). When a gentle, domesticated boar got possessed, it was known that 'Oro was dwelling in him; that pig could devour a man. Pointing upwards to the sky was one jaw, and pointing downwards to the earth was the other jaw, which was the sign that the mouth of 'Oro was open ready to consume the king and his clans. That pig became very fierce, a great power in itself in the land. 149
The dog was the shadow of the elf, To'a-hiti (Bordering-rock-of-jovial-face). The bark of the dog was help; it was protection to man.
Henry: 386 1
Cry of swamped canoers to putu albatross
"E ta'u atua, Ta'aroa e! Ha'amaita'i i te moana na, ia tere. Ho atu na i te motu i te vahine e te tamarii e!" "Oh my god, Ta'aroa! Cause the sea to be calm and navigable. Permit us to reach the atolls with the women and children!"
Henry: 388 1
Song remembering birds of Tahiti
O Tahiti teie o te vai uri rau. Ua rau te huru o te 'oto o te manu. This is Tahiti of many shaded waters; various are the songs of the birds.
Henry: 393 1
Saying by priest of the Cricket when land was in danger of being laid waste
"E atoatoa, e Ra'i ma'i, ua fаtata taua mau ma'i nei i te pohe; homai i te upe'a i to'u rima ia maoro a'ena, ananahi to outou i'oa ro'o apо e naupa'i!" "It is a tempestuous wind, it is Rai-ma'i (Sky-of-sickness), a tottering government; these sick persons are nearly dead! Let me hold the net (control the government) for a season; tomorrow you will obtain new names of fame!"
Henry: 394 1
Concerning the multitude of gods
Nana, te atua no Havai'i, fanaura'a fenua! No Havai'i, fanaura'a atua; no Havai'i, fanaura'a ta'ata! Te atua i roto, te atua i vaho, te atua i ni'a, te atua i raro, te atua i tai, te atua i uta, te atua fa'ahoho'a, te atua hoho'a ore, te atua taho'o hara, te atua fa'aora hara, te atua 'ai ta'ata, te atua haia, te atua fa'aora ta'ata, te atua o te pō, te atua o te ao, te atua o te ra'i tua tini! 179
E tai'o hia anei te atua? 13
E ore e hope te atua ia fa'ahiti hia! 18
O Fare-fare-mata'i te fenua no te nu'u atua i te ra'i, te fenua o te pape-ruru e te pape hau. 39
E mana nui roa to te nu'u atua, E mata ra'a to te atua, E hou'u te ta'ata, e fatiou te mau ra'au, e oriorio, e mahe'ahe'a roa, e mimi'o ino to te fenua e to te moana i te mana o to'na rima, i te aho o to'na paoa ihu. 95
E tari'a to te mau mea atoa o te fenua e te moana; to te mata'i, to te vero, to te fafatutiri, to te puahiohio, e to te ureure ti'a moana, e fa'aro'o; e tari'a to te feti'a, to te ava'e, to te rā, to te uira, to te tau ma te tai'o, to te moana hа'uriuri, to te mau mautai, i fa'aro'o ana'e ia i te reo o te nu'u atua.
Behold the gods of Havai'i, the birthplace of lands! Of Havai'i, the birthplace of gods; of Havai'i, the birthplace of people! Gods internal, gods external, gods above, gods below, gods of the ocean, gods of the land, gods incarnate, gods not embodied, gods of retribution, gods to pardon sin, man-devouring gods, gods slaying warriors, man-saving gods, gods of darkness, gods of light, gods of the ten skies. 116
Can the gods all be numbered! 8
The gods cannot all be numbered! 9
Fare-fare-mata'i (House-sheltering-breezes) was the land of the host of gods in the sky, land of collecting, cool waters. 35
All the hosts of gods had great power. Their glance was holy. Man crouched, trees bent down, all on land and in the sea withered, grew pale, and shrank under the power of their hands, before the breath of their nostrils. 60
Everything in the land and in the sea had ears; the winds, the storm, the thunder, the whirlwind, and the waterspout, all had ears to hear; the stars, the moon, the sun, the lightning, the seasons, the sea of rank odor, things innumerable obeyed the bidding of the hosts of gods.
Henry: 395-398 1
Source: Tamera, high priest, and Mo'a, high priest
Date of recitation:: Tamera: 1840; Mo'a: 1840 36
Order finally established
E te Tumu-nui e, 'eaha te ra'au nui e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e 'eaha te manu 'ai'ai fa'a e fa'aea 'tu i te ama'a e ai i to'na pua; e 'eaha te manu o te moana e fa'auta i te ofa'ara'a i to'na 'ama'a? 89
E Tane e, e maiore te raau e ti'a i te aro o Atea; e 'omama'o uri e te 'omama'o pua fau, na manu 'ai'ai fa'a e fa'aea 'tu i to'na 'ama'a e e ai i to'na pua; o te pira'e-tea e te pira'e ere'ere te manu o te moana e fa'auta i te ofa'ara'a i to'na ra ama'a. 114
E niu, o te hau roa te omou i te mau raau atoa, e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e vini te manu 'ai'ai fa'a e fa'aea i to'na ama'a e 'ai i to'na pua. 65
E tau ato'a hia te ama'a e te manu o te moana. 21
E mapē te ra'au, e torea e arevareva te manu 'ai'ai fa'a e fa'aea i to'na ama'a e e ai i te pua, i te pae vai. 52
E tamanu te ra'au, e ua rau te manu oto navenave e fa'aea i to'na ama'a e ai i to'na pua. 41
E toa te ra'au, e otaha e te manu pūtū te e tau mai i te ama'a i te aro o Atea. 38
E tou te ra'au, e rau te manu e te manumanu te fa'aea i to'na ama'a e e 'ai i to'na pua. 39
E mara te ra'au, e a'a taevao te manu e fa'aea i to'na ama'a, i te aro o Atea. 36
E to'i te ra'au, i ita'e te manu e fa'aea i to'na ama'a e ai i te pua. 32
E 'avai (apape) te ra'au e ti'a i te aro o Atea e ita'e (Itata'e) te manu e fa'aea i to'na ama'a, e ai i tona pua. 52
E 'aoa (orā) te ra'au e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e 'u'upa te manu 'ai'aifa'a e fa'aea 'tu, e 'ai'ai i to'na mā'a ri'i. 54
E hutu te ra'au nui, e otu'u, e 'ao te manu nui e tau mai i to'na ama'a i mua i te aro o Atea. 43
E te Tumu-nui e, 'eaha te ra'au pua no'ano'a e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e eaha te manu e ato i to'na ra pua, eaha te manu e 'ai i te pua? 60
E Tane e, te pua, te tiare, e te hutureva te ra'au pua no'ano'a e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e vahine te manu e ato i to'na ra pua. Te pepe e te purehua te 'ai'ai i te pua. 72
E te Tumu-nui e, 'eaha te ra'au marumaru e ti'a i te aro o Atea, 'eaha te manu e fa'aea 'tu e 'ai tama'i noa i to'na pua, mahiti ē atu ai te manu ta'i navenave? 72
E Tane e, e hau (fau), te ra'au marumaru e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e manumanu huru rau te fa'aea; e 'iore e u'a te fa'aea 'tu e 'ai tama'i noa 'i i to'na pua, e mahiti e ai te manu ta'i navenave. 85
E te Tumu-nui e, 'eaha te ra'au ha'a o te fenua e ti'a i te aro o Atea, eaha te manu 'ai'ai fa'a, e 'ai atu i te ma'a e haehae i te ra'oere? 64
E Tane e, e ti te ra'au ha'a e tia i te aro o Atea; e ope'a te rere i roto i te 'ama'a e vivi te manu e ai i te pua o tera ra'au, i te rua hiti; e ta'ata te 'ai'ai i te a'a momona; e taure'are'a te haehae i te raoere, ei rautо i te nu'u toa o Tane hoa nu'u; e e hui tapairu o te Ari'i vahine te 'ato i te ra'o'ere re'are'a, no'ano'a, ei fa'a'una'unara'a, e te fa'ahei i te pua. 167
Te tumu fara no'ano'a; o te fara e hotu i te fara tea, te fara e hotu i te fara 'ura, e te fara e hotu i te hinono 'uo, purotu ra, te ra'u ha'eha'a ia e ti'a i te aro o Atea; e o Roma-tane o te Rohutu-no'anoa te fa'aea 'tu i roto i to'na 'ama'a no'ano'a. E oro, e te hei fara e te hinono, te hamani hia ei fa'a'una'una i te ta'ata i e e titoe hia te ra'o'ere 'ei hu'a pe'ue. E ta'ata e te pua'a te'ai i te 'i'o fara. 177
E mati te ra'au, e tutu ha'a, e 'aito, e te 'arioi te rave i te huoro fa'a'ura'ura. 36
Te tumu mei'a huru rau te ti'a i te aro o Atea, o te manu huru rau o te fa'a, te pepe, e te rō, te 'ai i te pua e te mā'a. E ta'ata te 'ai i te mā'a e te rave i te ra'o'ere. 74
E fe'i te ra'au e tia' i te aro o Atea, i uta i te vao o te fa'a e i raro i te fenua pаpū; e rupe e 'iore e ua rau te huru o te manu 'ai'ai fa'a e 'ai i te mā'a. E ta'ata te 'ai i te fe'i e ato hia te fare o te ta'ata taevao i te ra'o'ere. 107
E pa'i-taro te ra'au e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e mo'ore, e meho mata e te 'avae 'ute'ute, o te tuo, te manu e ti'a i raro a'e i to'na maru. E Ta'ata te 'ai i te pota e te mā'a o te taro. 78
E farapepe ('ie'ie) te ra'au o te taha mou'a ra e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e pepe e te purehua e te u'u'pa te manu 'ai'ai fa'a e 'ai hia 'tu ai to'na ra mā'a. E Ta'ata te rave i te a'a, e rau te ha'a. 86
E tamore e 'opaero te ra'au o te vai e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e piao te manu e tau e rere atu, e ei reira te 'oā patapata e fa'aea ai. E aretu, e mo'u, e te mati o te mahora te ra'au ha'eha'a e ti'a i te aro o Atea, e manumanu rau e vivi te fa'aea 'tu i reira. 119
E te Tumu-nui e, 'eaha te ra'au e fa'a'una'una i te taha mou'a, e aha te fa'aro'oro'o haere hia na te 'aivi ra? 49
E Tane e, o te rātā pua ura o te mou'a, te pohue e tafifi na te tumu nui, e anuhe e amo'a, e te mau ra'au o te mato ra, te fa'a'una'una i te taha mou'a; e pinai te faro'o-ro'ohia na te 'aivi ra. 85
E te Tumu nui e, 'eaha te manu e fa'aea i te ra'au i mua i te aro o Atea? 34
E Tane e, e huhu, e mo'o, e veri, e te potipoti huru rau, te fa'aea i te uru ra'au e i te fare i mua i te aro o Atea. 51
E te Tumu-nui e, 'eaha te ra'au nui e fa'atopa i te ra'o'ere e fa'atupu fa'ahou ai ia tae i te tau? 46
E Tane e, e vо, e orā, e ataē te ra'au nui e fa'atopa i te ra'o'ere, e fa'atupu fa'ahou i a tae i te tau. 48
E te Tumu-nui e, e nafea te mā'a i mua i te aro o Atea? 26
E Tane e, e auahi te 'ai'ai i te mā'a na te ta'ata, na te auahi e turama i mua i te aro o Atea. 45
E nafea te vai i te vai? 11
E hue e 'ano'ano e ponapona 'ofe nui te fari'i i te vai e amo haere noa 'i. 34
E nafea te tai? 7
E hue te fari'i i te tai, E va'a, e pahi te fa'ateretere na te tai. 28
E te Tumu-nui e, 'eaha te pi'i a fa'aro'oro'o haere hia na te fa'a? 29
E Tane e, te oto manu e te manumanu, te 'uā pua'a, te 'aoa o 'urо, e te tuō ta'ata te pi'ie e fa'aro'ohia na te fa'a. 51
E te Tumu-nui e, 'eaha te manu e haro ra'i i te mania no te topara'a ua ra? 32
E ope'a te manu e haro ra'i i te mania e tupu mai i te topara'a ua ra, e Tane e! 35
E te Tumu-nui e, 'ovai te fa'aea i te outu fenua, 'ovai te fa'aea i te ri'oa fenua e 'ovai te fa'aapi i te fenua nei? 55
E hui-ari'i te fa'aea i te outu fenua, e ra'atira te fa'aea i te ri'oa fenua, e ta'ata te fa'aapi i te fenua nei, e Tane e. 57
E Tane e, na vai e ta'ahi i te repo fenua, na vai e fa'a'apu i te fenua, e na vai e ha'apohe e fa'aora 'tu i te mau mea ora no te fenua? 59
E Ta'ata te ta'ahi i te fenua e ta'ata te fa'a'apu i te fenua, e ta'ata te haapohe e te fa'aora i te mau mea ora o te fenua, e Tane e!
O Tumu-nui, what trees shall stand in the presence of Atea, what birds of the valley shall inhabit their branches and eat their flowers, and what sea birds shall build their nests in their branches? 56
O, Tane, the breadfruit tree shall stand in the presence of Atea, the dark thrush and the light yellow thrush are the birds of the valley that shall dwell in its branches, and eat its spikes; and the white sea-swallow and the black sea-swallow are the birds that shall build their nests in its branches. 81
The coconut tree, with head towering above all other trees, shall stand in the presence of Atea, and the whistling parrakeet is the bird of the valley that shall dwell in its branches and eat its flowers. 59
Sea birds shall also lodge in its branches. 12
The mape (Inocarpus edulis) is the tree; the whistling plover and the bird of paradise shall dwell in its branches and eat its flowers, on the river bank. 44
The tamanu (Callophyllum) is the tree, and numerous are the sweet singing birds that shall dwell in its branches and eat its flowers. 37
The toa (Casuarina) is the tree, and the man-of-war-bird and the albatross shall alight upon its branches, in the presence of Atea. 40
The tou (Cordia) is the tree, and various birds and insects shall inhabit its branches and eat its flowers. 32
The mara (Nauclea forsteri) is the tree, and the parrakeet with green and red feathers is the bird to inhabit its branches in the presence of Atea. 47
The toi (Alphitonia zizyphoides) is the tree, and the laughing-gull shall live in its branches and eat its flowers. 35
The apape (Panax) is the tree that shall stand in the presence of Atea, and the laughing-gull shall dwell in its branches and eat its flowers. 40
The banyan (Urostigma prolicum) is the tree that shall stand in the presence of Atea, and the wild pigeon is the bird that feeds in the valleys that shall live there, and eat its little figs. 55
The hotu (Barringtonia) is the great tree, and the stork and the heron are the great birds that shall alight on its branches in the presence of Atea. 44
O Tumu-nui, what trees bearing sweet flowers shall stand in the presence of Atea, and what birds shall pluck its flowers, and what insects shall feed upon the flowers? 46
O Tane, the pua (Beslaria lorifolia), the tiare (Gardenia tahitensis), and the hutureva (Cerbera forsteri) are the trees bearing sweet flowers that shall stand in the presence of Atea. Women are the birds that shall pluck their blossoms, and butterflies and moths shall feed upon their flowers. 92
O Tumu-nui, what shady tree shall stand in the presence of Atea, what living creatures shall dwell in it and quarrel over eating its flowers, and cause the sweet singing birds to fly away? 56
O Tane, the hau (Hibiscus tiliaceus) is the shady tree that shall stand before Atea; numerous kinds of insects shall dwell there; rats and hermit-crabs shall dwell in it and quarrel over eating its flowers, which will cause the sweet singing birds to fly away. 75
O Tumu-nui, what low plants of the land shall stand before Atea, what birds that feed in the valleys, or what living creatures shall inhabit their branches and eat their flowers and roots and tear their leaves? 62
O Tane, the ti (Cordyline terminalis) is the low tree that shall stand before Atea; the swallows shall fly among its branches, the grasshopper shall feed on the flowers of that plant by the bordering chasm; man shall chew its sweet roots; vigorous men shall tear its leaves, which shall stimulate the host of warriors of Tane, friend of armies; and the queen's waiting maids shall gather its yellow, fragrant leaves, for adornment, and wear its flowers in garlands. 129
The hala of sweet odors; the hala producing yellow strobiles, the hala producing red strobiles, and the hala that bears the beautiful white blossoms are the low trees that shall stand before Atea; Roma-tane, guardian of Paradise, shall dwell in its fragrant branches. Rosettes and garlands of the strobiles and flowers shall be made for ornaments by man, and the leaves shall be torn into strands for mats. Man and beast shall eat the strobiles. 129
The mati (Ficus tinctoria) is the tree; cloth-beaters, warriors, and arioi shall make use of its berries for red dye. 38
The banana trees of many kinds shall stand before Atea, and numerous birds of the valleys, butterflies, and ants shall feed on their flowers and fruit. Man shall partake of their fruit, and use their leaves. 62
The mountain plantain shall stand in the presence of Atea, up in the recesses of the valleys, and on low ground; the mountain-pigeon, the rat, and many kinds of birds that feed in the valleys shall eat the fruit. Man shall eat fe'i, and the wild man shall thatch his house with the leaves. 83
Taro patches shall stand before Atea, and the duck, and the rail with red face and legs, that shouts, are the birds to dwell beneath their shade. Man shall eat the taro leaves and roots. 54
The ieie (Freycinetia) is the plant of the mountain sides to stand before Atea, and butterflies, and moths, and the wild pigeon are the living things that feed in the valleys, to eat its fruits. Man shall take its roots for many uses. 72
The watergrass and bulrushes of the river shall stand before Atea; the dragon fly shall halt and fly among them, and there shall dwell the speckled rails. Bunch-grass, the spear-grass (gladdon) and the lawn grass are the low plants to stand before Atea, and various insects and grasshoppers shall dwell in them. 79
O Tumu-nui, what plants shall ornament the mountain sides, and what sounds shall be heard among the cliffs? 30
O Tane, the rata (Metrosideros polymorpha) with red blossoms of the mountains, the pohue (Convolvulus) that creeps over the great trees, the anuhe (pectinate fern), the amoa (Nephrolepis exaltata), and all the plants of the cliffs, shall ornament the mountain sides; and the echo shall resound among the rocks. 93
O Tumu-nui, what living things shall live in the woods and houses in the presence of Atea? 29
O Tane, the wood-bee, the lizard, the centipede, and various beetles, shall live in the woods and in the houses in the presence of Atea. 46
O Tumu-nui, what great trees shall shed their leaves and grow again in their seasons? 28
O, Tane, the vi (Spondias dulcis), the ora (banyan) and the atae (Erythrina) are the great trees that shall shed their leaves and grow again in their seasons. 49
O Tumu-nui, what shall be done with the food in the presence of Atea? 23
O Tane, fire shall render eatable the food for man to eat, and fire shall give light in the presence of Atea. 36
What shall be the containers of fresh water? 12
The gourd, the coconut bottle, and big bamboo joints shall hold water to carry it conveniently everywhere. 31
What shall be done with the sea? 9
The gourd shall hold sea water; canoes and ships shall sail over the sea. 22
O Tumu-nui, what cries shall be heard in the valleys? 16
O Tane, the cries of birds and insects, the squealing of pigs, the barking of dogs, and the shouts of people shall be heard in the valleys. 39
O Tumu-nui, what bird shall soar up into the sky in the calm caused by the rain falling? 25
The swallow is the bird that shall soar into the sky in the calm that follows the falling of the rain, O Tane! 29
O Tumu-nui, who shall dwell upon the points of land, who shall live in the bays, and who shall replenish the earth? 31
Royal families shall dwell upon the points, gentlemen shall live in the bays, man shall replenish the earth, O Tane. 33
O Tumu-nui, who shall tread the soil, who shall cultivate it, and who shall kill or spare the living creatures upon the land? 37
Man shall tread the soil, man shall cultivate it, and man shall kill or spare the living creatures upon it, O Tane.
Henry: 398-399 1
Source: Tamera, high priest, and Mo'o, high priest
Date of recitation:: Tamera: 1840; Mo'o: 1840 39
Tumu or Taaroa exalts Tane
Teie ta Ta'aroa i tu'u na Tane, te fanau'a 'una'una o Ta'aroa 28
E marae iti tei ia te Tumu; e marae nui tei ia Tane. E tahu'a iti tei ia te Tumu; e tahu'a rahi tei ia Tane. E pahu iti tei ia te Tumu; e pahu nui tei ia Tane. E fatarau iti tei te marae ia te Tumu; e fatarau nui tei ia Tane. E Atua 'aha tei ia te Tumu, e mea iti te 'ura, e Atua aha 'ura rahi tei ia Tane. E 'opani iti tei te pā o te marae o te Tumu; e opani roa tei te pā o te marae o Tane. E ava'a iti tei te marae o te Tumu; e ava'a nui tei te marae O Tane. 211
E tuturi iti tei ia te Tumu; e tuturi nui tei ia Tane. E aho iti tei ia te Tumu no te tapa'au i to'na marae e aho nui tei ia Tane. E Tapa'au iti tei ia te Tumu, ei mono a'e i te tahu'a i te otira'a e te upu i ta'na marae; e Tapa'au nui tei ia te Tumu. E viri iti ta te Tumu; e viri nui tei ia Tane. E hoe iti tei ia te Tumu ei poura'a mai na te manu mo'a i te marae; e hoe nui tei ia Tane. E tira iti tei ia te Tumu, ei taura'a manu mo'a i te marae; e tira nui tei ia Tane i to'na marae.. E Ahu tapu ha'eha'a tei te marae o te Tumu; e ahu teitei to te marae o Tane. 255
E Manu iti te tau mai te moana mai i te marae o te Tumu ra, e Toroā te tau i te marae o Tane. E Toroā te tau mai i te marae o te Tumu ra, e Ruru te tau atu i to Tane marae. 77
E Oroā iti to te Tumu ra; e Oroā rahi ia to Tane. 24
O Tane maori teie; e atua mana roa! Na Ta'aroa Tane i ha'amana, e no roto ana'e mai ia Ta'aroa to Tane mana. E mau ohipa nehenehe ana'e ta Tane i rave. Aita 'oia i taparahi i te ta'ata i muta'aiho ra; aria roa, i muri roa i te paura'a o te fenua i te miti nei, i riro ai ei atua ta haia, aita re'a noa iho rā.
This is what Ta'aroa did for the god Tane, the handsome offspring of Ta'aroa 24
Tumu had little temples; Tane had great ones. Tumu had a few priests; Tane had many priests. Tumu had small drums; Tane had big drums. Tumu had a few altars for his temple; Tane had many altars. Tumu had gods in sennit with a few red featehrs; Tane had gods in sennit with many red feathers. The enclosure of the temple of tumu had a small rear entrance; the enclosure of Tane's temple had a broad rear entrance. The temple of Tumu had a small sacred enclosure within; that of Tane had a spacious one. 149
Tumu had a few stone slabs to lean against for prayers; Tane had many leaning slabs. Tumu had a few stone pillars, upon which the coconut-leaf images to represent the priests were placed, in his temple; Tane had many pillars. Tumu had a few coconut-leaf images to represent his priests in his temple; Tane had many in his. Tumu had a few coconut-leaf rosaries in his temple; but Tane had many in his. Tumu had a few paddles [poles] erected [by which the sacred birds descended into the temple]; Tane had many paddles. Tumu had a few masts upon which the sacred birds alighted in the temple; Tane had many masts in his temple. Tumu had a low sacred wall to his temple; Tane had a high wall to his temple. 204
If a samll sea bird alighted upon the temple of Tumu, a surf-duck settled upon Tane's temple. If a surf-duck alighted upon the temple of Tumu, an albatross descended upon Tane's temple. 56
When Tumu had a little religious ceremony; Tane had a great one. 23
This then was Tane; he was a very great god. Ta'aroa made him great, and all his greatness emanated from Ta'aroa. All Tane's work was beautiful. He did not slay men in former times; it was only very recently, long after the Deluge, that he received the homage of human sacrifices, but they were not numerous.
Henry: 399-402 1
Source: Ara-mou'a, Ra'iatean scholar, and Vara, Ra'iatean scholar
Date of recitation:: Ara-mou'a: 1817; Vara: 1817 45
The Birth of New Lands
Ia tupu a te fenua mai Havai'i atu! 17
O Mariua te fetu, o Aeuere te ari'i 18
I Havai'i, fanauraa fenua. 13
Mauri i te poipoi a ee 12
I te au marere i hiti tovau. 13
Ia tari a oe! Tari a rutu mai i hea? 17
E rutu mai i te Moana-urifa, I hiti tooa! 19
Areare te tai, o Vavau matahiapo, 16
I te nuu ai rua; 8
E o Tupai, na motu rii a te Arii. 15
A rutu a, areare te tai, o Maurua (Maupiti). 20
Areare a, o Ma-pihaa, 10
A Pu-tai (Manu-a'e) 8
O Papa-iti (Te-miromori). 10
Ia tari a oe! Tari a rutu mai i hea? 17
A rutu mai i hiti'a! 9
Areare te tai, o Huahine nuu piri fatu, 18
I te moana o Marama. 9
Ia tari a oe! Tari a rutu mai i hea? 17
Areare te tai, o Maiao-iti manu, 16
I te moana o Marama. 9
Ia tari a oe! Tari a rutu mai i hea? 17
Te fetu o Mariua a rere i toa, 14
A rutu mai i to'erau i hiti'a! 14
Areare te tai o Nu'u-roa 12
I te aru e huti i te Tai-o-vaua. 15
Tari a oe! Tari a rutu mai i hea? 15
O Te au a marere 8
I hiti atu o Tai-o-vaua, 12
A rutu i reira! 7
Areare te tai, o Pupua. 11
Rutu a'e i toerau roa! 11
Areare te tai 7
O Nuuhiva roa, 7
I te are e huti 7
I te tai o vavea. 8
Tari a oe i toerau i tooa! 14
Rutu i hea? 5
E rutu i vavea! 7
Areare te tai, o Hotu-papa 12
O te vavea. 5
Tari a rutu a oe i te vavea! 13
Areare mai, o Tai-nuna, fenua 14
I o atu i Hotu-papa. 9
Areare te Tai o Putu-ninamu, 13
O Ma-ahu-rai te fenua; 10
Areare a, 5
O Outu-taata-mahu-rei. 11
Areare te Tai o Nu'u-marea, 13
O Fata-pu maira. 7
Areare te Tai-o-manunu 11
O Te-vero-ia te fenua. 10
Tari a oe! 5
Tari a rutu mai i hea? 10
I toerau. 5
Areare te tai, o Matai-rea 13
Te fenua o te pahu rutu roa; 12
O Taputapuatea te marae hoho roa, 16
E rutu i hea? E rutu i toerau. 14
Areare te tai, o Arapa iho; 13
O Raparapa iro. 7
Tei tai atu o Tai-Rio-aitu. 14
Tari a oe! E au tia ia hea? 14
E au tia i te taha o te ra, 12
E au tia i te Uru-meremere. 13
O atea te maunu a tae 'oe, 13
Tupu o ura, 5
E tupu i rei o te moua 11
A tae oe, 5
Moti mai ai te moua i o atu e! 15
A huti te vera hiehie; 10
Tupu o 'ura, tupu i rei 10
Moti mai ai 6
Te moana i ō atu e! 10
Oia o Aihi (Vaihi, or Hawai'i), 15
Fenua o te matau nui; 10
Fenua e а noa mai 8
Te vera hiehie; 7
Fenua huti hia mai, 9
Na te matapo'opo'o o vavea, 12
Mai te Tumu mai! 7
O atu, Oahu ia.
Let more land grow from Havai'i! 10
Mariua (Spica) is the star, Aeuere (Offering-cloth) is the king 21
Of Havai'i, the birthplace of lands. 11
The morning apparition rides 10
Upon the flying vapor of the chilly border. 11
Bear thou on! Bear on and strike where? 13
Strike upon Moana-urifa (Sea-of-rank-odor), In the border of the west! 23
The sea casts up Vavau (Porapora) the first born, 15
With the fleet that strikes both ways; 9
And Tubai (Stand-flat), little islets of the king. 13
Strike on, the sea casts up Maurua (Hold-two, Sir Charles Saunder's Island). 22
Strike on, they are Ma-pihaa (With-springs, Lord Howe Island), 17
Pu-tai (Sea-cluster, Birds-there, Scilly Island), 13
Papa-iti (Small-rock, the Thespesia, or Bellinghausen). 17
Bear thou on! Bear on and strike where? 13
Come and strike east! 7
The sea casts up Huahine (Gray-fruit) of the fleet that adheres to the master, 24
On the sea of Marama (Moon). 10
Bear thou on! Bear on and strike where? 13
The sea casts up Maiao-iti (Little-claw) of the bird, 17
In the sea of Marama. 8
Bear thou on! Bear on and strike where? 13
The star Mariua flies south, 10
Come and strike northeast! 8
The sea casts up Nu'u-roa (Long-fleet) 12
In the rising waves of Tai-o-vaua (Shaven-sea). 17
Bear thou on! Bear on and strike where? 13
The vapor flies 5
To the outer border of Tai-o-vaua. 14
Strike there! 4
The sea casts up Pupua (Presented, Honden Island). 15
Strike far north! 4
The sea casts up 5
The distant Nuuhiva (Fleet-of-clans, Marquesas), 15
Of the waves that rise up 8
Into towering billows. 7
Bear thou on to the northwest! 9
Strike where? 4
Strike the towering wave! 8
The sea casts up Hotu-papa (Surging-rock) 12
Of the towering wave. 7
Bear thou on! and still strike the towering wave. 15
There comes Tai-nuna (Mixed-up-shoal), land 14
Beyond Hotu-papa. 6
Sea of Putu-ninamu (Sooty-tern) casts up; 13
Ma-ahu-rai (Cleared-by-the-heat-of-heaven) is the land; 18
There is cast up again, 8
Outu-taata-mahu-rei (The-people's-verdant-headland). 19
the sea of the Nuu-marea (Host-of-parrot-fish) 15
Casts up Fata-pu (Clustering-pile). 10
Tai-o-Manunu (Sea-of-cramps) casts up 12
Te-vero-ia (Fish-producing-storm) Island. 12
Bear thou on! 5
Bear on and strike where? 8
Strike north. 3
The sea casts up Matai-rea (Breeze-of-plenty), 15
Land of the long beating drum; 8
Taputapuatea is the temple with long court yard. 16
Strike where? Strike north. 7
The sea casts up Arapa (Basket, island) alone; 15
Raparapa (Angular, island) alone. 12
Just over the sea is Tai-Rio-aitu (Weeping-for-god-Rio, Aldebaran). 25
Bear thou on! And swim where? 9
Swim towards the declining sun, 8
Swim towards Orion. 6
Distance will end at thine approach, 11
Redness will grow, 4
It will grow on the mountian figurehead 14
At thine approach, 6
Where the mountain is the boundary over there, O! 17
Angry flames shoot forth; 6
Redness grows, grows on the figurehead 11
Bounding in 4
The ocean over there! 8
That is Aihi (Bit-in-fishing), 9
Land of the great fishhook; 8
Land of raging fire kindling 8
Angry flames; 3
Land drawn up, 3
Through the undulations of the towering wave, 15
From the foundation! 7
Beyond is Oahu.
Henry: 402-403 1
Source: Mahine, chief of Mai'ao, Anani, a Tahitian chief, and Tamera, a high priest
Date of recitation:: Mahine: 1822; Anani: 1833; Tamera: 1833 54
Creation of man
Te mata o Tū ma Ta'aroa i nana i raro i te piha taata. Ua apo'opo'o a'era raua 37
"Ua tupu te fenua, ua tupu te ra'i, e ua tupu te moana; ua о ana'e ia i te mea oraora. Ua api te piha atua i te atua, na hea rа te piha taata e au ai?" 68
"E hamani rа i te taata!" A rahu ra Ta'aroa i raro i te aro o ha'eha'a, tu maira o Ti'i ho'e roa ra taata. O te taata matamua roa 'ino ia i te ao nei. O Ti'i ahu one. Ti'i ma'ara'a uta. Ti'i ma'ara'a i tai, Ti'i haamou-huna, Ti'i fa'aina toi. E 'ao 'uo te Ti'i, e 'Ao fa'auru i te pō e te ao i ta Ti'i e fa'aue atu. 139
O Na-pō-titi e o Na-po-tаtа te rahua mai e Ta'aroa ei hoa varua ino na Ti'i i te pō, ape'e mai nei i te ao nei. 50
A noho Te-fatu i te vahine, ia Faahotu, fanau mai ra o Hina-te-'u'uti-maha'i-tua-mea, O Hina ai tua, Hina ai aro; e mata i mua e e mata i muri to Hina, atua vahine fanau taata matamua roa i te ao nei. 90
A noho tamahine o Ti'i-ia Hina te-'u'uti-mahai-tua-mea, oia o te 'ai tua e te 'ai aro, fanau a'era ta raua, o Uru-o-te-oa-ti'a; hee te tua, o Hina-'ere'ere-manua, muri iho o Hina-nui-fa'ahara-ma'au, o Rua-faa-ra'i maira. I amui te hua'ai o Ti'i e o Hina i te hua'ai o te nu'u atua ei tane e ei vahine i tereira tau, i te pō ra. 151
O Ti'i e o Hina, i tu ra'i piri, na fariua i te ao ei tata'u no te ao, ei tupuraa taata rii ia no te ao, i te piha taata. Ua api a'era te piha taata i te taata, a ite Ta'aroa e faarire. 85
I te rahiraa o te taata, fanau maira te pe'ape'a; fanau ta te pe'apea, o te pa'ari; fanau ta te pa'ari, o te tau, fanau a'era ta te tau, o te tahitohito. 65
A fanau mai ta Ti'i e ta Hina-maha'i-tua-mea tamarii, te ari'i nui maro 'ura; e hua'ai na te atua mai te pō mai. A tū mai te taata i rahua e Ti'i ma Hina-mana'i-tua-mea, oia te taata ri'i, te manahune o te ao nei. A noho te ari'i nui i te taata ri'i, fanau maira te hui-ra'atira o te ao nei. A noho te hui ari'i i te hui-ra'atira fanau maira te ari'i ri'i o te ao nei. 167
O te outu roroa te 'ai'a fenua o te hui ari'i; tei reira te marae nui o te fenua, e 'ore e mo'e. O te 'o'o'a hohonu te 'ai'a fenua o te hui raatira. A о te fenua i te taata a rаrа i te mau vahi ato'a. Tei tai e tei uta te fenua o te taata ri'i, e piri haere ia fenua i to te feia mana.
The eyes of Tū (Stability) with Ta'aroa (The-unique-one) looked down into the room for man. They consulted together
50
"We must now make man" [was the decision]. So Ta'aroa conjured up from below, and there stood forth Ti'i (Fetcher), only one man. He was the very first man in this world. He was Ti'i, clothed in sand, Ti'i the propagator inland; Ti'i, the propagator seaward; Ti'i, secret destroyer; Ti'i, the axe sharpener. Ti'i had a white heron, that bewitched by day and by night all whom he bid it enter. 111
Na-po-titi (Lingering-night) and Na-po-tata (Retarded-night) were conjured forth by the Ta'aroa as demon friends for Ti'i in darkness, and they followed him into this world. 49
Te-fatu (The-lord) dwelt with his wife, Faahotu (Be-fruitful), and they begat Hina-te-'u'uti-maha'i-tua-mea (Gray-to-extract-and-mitigate-many-things), Hina who ate from before and from behind; a front face and a back face had Hina the goddess, who was the first woman born in this world. 84
Ti'i took to wife in her girlhood,, Hina-te-'u'uti-mahai-tua-mea, she who ate from before and from behind, and they begat Uru-o-te-oa-ti'a (Inspired-of-the-house-of-high-chiefs); there followed Hina-'ere'ere-manua (Hina-black-and-hasty-tempered); next came Hina-nui-faahara-ma'au (Hina-the-great-and-sulky), and then was born Raa-faa-ra'i (Source-of-kings). The children of Ti'i and Hina intermarried with the gods at that period, in darkness. 144
When Ti'i and Hina stood in the close sky, and turned to the earth to call to the world, it was to create common people for the world, in the department of man. Thus the room for man was filled with people, and Ta'aroa saw it and applauded. 70
When people multiplied, trouble was produced; trouble begat wisdom; wisdom begat cunning; cunning begat mockery. 34
When Ti'i and Hina-maha'i-tua-mea (Hina-mitigator-of-many-things) begat children they became the high royal family of the 'ura girdle; they were descendents of the gods from darkness. When people stood forth conjured into being by Ti'i and Hina-maha'i-tua-mea, they became the common people, the plebians of the world. When the royal family espoused common people, they begat the gentry of the world. When the royal family espoused the gentry, they begat the nobility of the world. 142
The long capes were the inheritance of royalty and the nobility; there stood the great temples of the land which could not be hidden.. Deep bays were the inheritance of the gentry. As the land got thickly populated, the people spread everywhere. On the seashore and inland were the lands of the plebeians bordering on the lands of the great.
Henry: 404-405 1
Source: Auna, Mo'o, Ra'i-tupu, and Pape-aru, priests of Porapora
Date of recitation:: Auna: 1822; Mo'o: 1822; Ra'i-tupu: 1822; Pape-aru: 1822 54
Discontent of the gods in darkness
E ru'i roa te ru'i a Rumia ia ta'o; a ta'ota'o te pō, te pō roa ia ta'o. A 'iu te pō i te pō roa ia ta'o, o te pō roa fenefenea, te pō o Rumia! E tahi te umi i te 'arere, ta'o ti'i i te 'iu maroaroa o te pō. O te tai'oraa fenua, o te ta'o i te apa'i nu'u, o te ta'o ia o te apa'i ra'i piri. O te ta'o tena i ta'o hia e te rua o te ana'i e o te ana'a. 157
A ti'ei i te fe'e nui mau ra'i fenua. A faro te Tumu-nui e a faro. Tohua to te manu ta'ira'a, o aru tahatai a e'e mai i uta nei, o aru a e'e atu i tai na. 69
A tahu pohe Tū ia te fe'e nui mau ra'i fenua, aore atura rа te fe'e nui i mate ia Tū. Te fetotono ra te nu'u atua ia Hotu i te ra'i piri. A tahu pohe o Rua-tupua-nui ia te fe'e nui. O Rua-tupua-nui te tahu'a i mate ai te fe'e nui, o Tumu-ra'i-fenua. 111
"Ua mate o Tumu-ra'i-fenua!" "Ua mate!" "Ua mate!" O te ta'o ia mai te apa-to'a e te apa-to'erau, mai te hiti'a o te rа e tae atu ite to'o'a o te rа. Te tape'a noa ra rа 'oia i te ra'i; e fe'e nui opatapata 'ere'ere-'uo o Tumu-Ra'i-fenua tomo atura to'na varua i roto i tereira huru fe'e i te moana. 126
Ta'o atura o Hina-te-u'uti-maha'i-tua-mea ia Rua-tupua-nui e; "Eiaha oe e tahu pohe marō noa i te ta'ata, e 'ori'orio noa rа oe i ta oe i te taata, e na'u e fa'aora." Aita 'tura te ta'ata i tahu pohe hia e Rua-tupua-nui.
The night of Rumia (Upset) was a long night to name; it was thick darkness, the long night to name. The nights would be millions in the long night to name, it was the long, wearisome night, the night of Rumia! The messengers went at ten-fathom paces, with orders to end the shameful millions of nights. These were orders from the land, orders from the congregated hosts, the orders from those gathered in confined sky. These orders came from the source of the careful and the anxious. 135
There was exploring of the great octopus holding the sky to the earth. Tumu-nui (Great-foundation) considered and was thoughtful. There were ominous signs in the cries of the birds and in the breakers along the shore that came up inland and receded to the sea. 81
Tū conjured death upon the great Octopus holding the sky to the earth, but it did not die by his agency. All the hosts of gods were raging with anger with Hotu (Fruitfulness) in confined sky. Then Rua-tupua-nui (Source-of-great-growth) conjured death upon the great octopus, and he was the conjurer who caused the great octopus Tumu-ra'i-fenua (Foundation-of-earthly-heaven) to die. 120
"Tumu-ra'i-fenua is dead! He is dead! He is dead!" This was spoken from south to north, from the east to the west. But he still clung to the sky, he was a great spotted octopus, black and white, and his spirit entered into that kind of octopus which still exists in the deep ocean. 80
Hina-te-u'uti-maha'i-tua-mea said to Rua-tupua-nui: "Do not insist upon conjuring man to death but only cause him to fade, and I will resuscitate him." So man was not conjured to death by Rua-tupua-nui.
Henry: 405-407 1
Source: Tamera, high priest of Tahiti, and Patii, high priest of Mo'orea
Date of recitation:: Tamera: 1825; Patii: 1825 46
Attempt to raise the sky
"E tua'u i te Ra'i piri i teienei, e Te-mumuhu e! A rara'o na i te va'a o te hiva, ia ti'i atu i te tahu'a ia te Tumu-nui e ia Rua-tupua-nui, e ti'i mai e toto'o i te ra'i i ni'a, ia ō mai na te maramarama!" Te vana'a ia na Uru te mahea, o te ahuahu nui ia Tū ma Ta'aroa. 122
A rarao rа Te-mu muhu i te va'a, fano atura te 'arere, o Horo-fana'e, i te aro o te Tumu-nui e o Rua-tupua-nui. 46
E mānava ta raua: "Tena oe, Horo fana'e?" 18
"Teie au!" 5
"A tahi tere nui to 'oe i tae mai ai!" 17
"E tere nui to'u i tae mai ai i te aro o te Tumu-nui e o Rua-tupau-nui nei." 35
"Ahiri i to tere!" 7
"Ti'i mai nei au i te tahu'a i te fare tahu'a o te Ari'i nei, e ti'i e fa'aatea i te ra'i piri o Rumia." 46
"Ua ti'a; terа mai na tahua, o Rima-roa e o Fa'atae." 22
Te tahu'a, o Rima-roa, raua o Fa'atae, a huhura a'e i ni'a ia Atea, i te ra'i piri. Aore rа i haapae i te rima i ni'a ia Atea, i mata'u a'e i te hau o te ari'i o Atea. I tutui a'e i ta raua 'ete to'i, a huhura i te aro o te Tumu. 103
A rere te arere o Horo-fana'e i te aro o Ta'ere, i raro roa ino. "Tei ia Ta'ere matua-toitoi te fare tahu'a nei." 50
Mānava ta Ta'ere: "Horofana'e, o oe tena?" 18
"O vau teie!" 6
"A tahi tere nui i tae roa mai ai oe i raro ia Ta'ere nei!" 28
"E tere nui roa to'u! Homai i to pu'e tahu'a nei e haere e fa'aatea i te ra'i o Atea i raro ē." 44
"Tera mai ta'u pu'e tahu'a, a rave a fa'ata'a iho." 21
Tutui e'e a'e ai na pu'e tahu'a ra, o Tū-ra'i-pō, o Matamata-arahu, o Aruaru vahine, o Peperu e o Faro, i ta ratou ete to'i, hia'e ai i nia roa i te aro o Atea. Aita ra te ho'ē i ha'apа i te rima e fa'aatea i te ra'i! A mata'u, a ri'ari'a i te mana o Atea! I rave a'e ai a ratou ete to'i, i huhura 'tura i raro i te Pori ia Ta'ere ra! 150
Naō atura o Horo-fana'e te feruri: "Tei ia Ta'ere a maoti te fare tahu'a nei! Ta'ere-ma-'opo'opo, Ta'ere-pipine, Ta'ere-fau-oa, Ta'ere-matua-toitoi." 66
Ho'i atura o Horofana'e ia Ta'ere roa. O Ta'ere a tono а i na tahu'a ia Mata'ita'i, Tutono, e o Feu. I haere noa rа ia i ni'a e mata'ita'i ia Atea, aore i ha'apā i te rima, i hi'o noa ia Atea! Mata'u a'era ia Atea! I ri'ari'a i te hau o Atea! Rarave aera a ratou ete to'i i vai noa i te e'e, huhura 'tura i raro i te Pori, i te fare tahu'a aTa'ere. 158
"Tei ia Ta'ere а rа te pu'e tahu'a nei!" 15
A tono rа Ta'ere i te 'arere ia Nevaneva i te piha atua e ti'i ia Tahu'a-muai e ia Atari-heui. A reve raua i ta raua tau to'i, o Tupu-au'iu'i ta Tahu'a-muai to'i e o Tupu-anuanua ta Atari-heui, e haere roa tura raua e ni'a roa ia Atea, e tara-tarai ia Atea, e ti'a papa ia Atea, e iuiu ia Atea, E tavaivai ia Atea! 155
A hi'o rа ia nau atua ia Atea, a mata'u, a ri'ari'a i te hau o Atea! Tа ete atura a raua to'i, huhura roa 'tura, ho'i atura i te piha tahu'a! 62
"Aore atura maori a te Tumu e tahu'a, aore ho'i a Ta'ere e tahu'a e maea'e ai te ari'i, ia Atea, e ta'a i te ra'i piri ia Rumia i te fenua nei!" 67
"Aore roa ia!" O te ta'o teie o te mau atua. Fanau atua taata maira. 33
[Birth of the demigods] 6
Fanaua maira ta Ta'aroa e ta Papa-raharaha, o Moe-hau-i-te-ra'i, e tino vahine, e poti'i herehere na te metua. A hee te tua, e maeha'a, o Rō-'ura'-ro'o-iti e у Rō-fero-ro'o-ata. O Huri te vahine na Rō-'ura, e o Po'i-ē te vahine na Rō-fero, Tei raro roa i te papa o te moana to ratou utuafare, tei te Pō. 133
Te mata o Atea a taupe i raro i te mata o te vahine ra, o Hotu, fanau maira ta raua, o Rū-te-to'o-ra'i, o Ru-afa'i-ra'i, o Rū-i-totoo-i-te-ra'i, o Rū-i-ta'ai-i-te-fenua e io'a ana'e teie no te taata ho'e, o Rū, i tuha i te fenua i raro a'e i na oti'a fenua, te Hiti'a-o-te-rā, te To'o'a-o-te-rā, te Apa-to-a, e te Apa-to'erau; e te Hiti-i-to'a e te Hiti-i-toe'rau, te To'o'a-i-To'a, e te To'o'a i To'erau. A hee te tua, o Hina-fa'auru va'a, o Hina-ta'ai-fenua ia Rū, o Hina-i-a'a-i-te-marama, o Hina-nui-te-arara, Hina-tutu-ha'a, ta'ata hoē. I fa'aea 'oia i te marama e ara i te pōite feia ratere, e te tutu ha'a na te atua. E tutu ha'a ta'na heiva i te ava'e. 292
A noho Rū i te vahine ia Rua-papa, fanau maira ta raua, o Uahea o te Fare-ana poiri taotao. I roto i taua fa'aeara'a poiri ra te puta raa o to'na avae i te hata to'a. 78
O Uahea te vahine, o Hihi-Rā te tane, fanau maira, ta raua, o Mā-ū-i-mua, oia o Mā-ū-i nui tahu'a pure matamua roa o te ao nei. Hee te tua, Mā-ū-i-muri, Mā-ū-i-roto, Mā-ū-i-taha, Mā-ū-i-poti'i, oia o Hina-hina-tō-tц-'io; e i muri roa maira o Mā-ū-i-upo'o-varu, oia o Mā-ū-i-pū-fenua to'o ono ia Mā-ū-i. 154
E tamari'i mairi pū fenua o Mā-ū-i hopea mai te paipai ra te vehi o taua Mā-ū-i hopea nei, aore te metua i ite e huru ta'ata to roto. 66
"Ua mate te tama nei!" "Ua mate?" Ua mate roa!" "A ota'a i te maro pu'upu'u, a ta'ai i te ti'iti'i rouru e ia hope ra te tui hana a taora 'tu i te tai!" 64
Hope atura te ota'a e te ta'ai, tuia hana a'era, tei te tai atura! Te mafatu rа o Mā-ū-i, te oraora noa ra ia i roto i to'na ouma A painu rа, a painu noa i te are miti e! A ite mai na tupuna i te tai o Rō'ura ma Rōfero i te ota'a painu, haru ihora, rave atura i te tama iti mai roto mai i te vehо, ite atura e e ta'ata ora, e ta'ata upo'o varu; e tahi upo'o nui ii ni'a, e ono upo'o rii i fa'a'ati na te rei. A hi'i i te tama i roto i te ana feo i raro ae i te moana, tupu atura e pa'ari atura. 222
Ua naō atura taua ma tupuna ra: "Ua ite a'era 'oia e nofea mai 'oia?" "Aore e mea e toe i tera huru ta'ata upo'o varu! A hio a'ena i tera ra huru fa'aturuma." 74
'Aria ri'i a'e, hoi atura Mā-ū-i i te ana o te metua vahine ra; tei reira o Uahea e na tamari'i a pae a patōtō atu ai teie Mā-ū-i i te uputa, e inaha te ti'a noa ra ia ta'ata upo'o varu! Ua ui atura te metua vahine, "Ovai ho'i oe?" 113
Ua ta'o atura te tamaiti; "O Mā-ū-i ho'i au." 22
Naō atura o Uahea: "O Mā-ū-i-mua teie, o Mā-ū-i-muri, o Mā-ū-i-roto, o Mā-ū-itaha, e o Mā-ū-i-poti'i; teie ana'e ia pu'e Mā-ū-i e pae, tei te Fare-ana nei, e nofea 'tu а ia Mā-ū-i hou?" 97
Ua ta'o atura teie Mā-ū-i: "Ovau teie, Mā-ū-i-pū-fenua, o Mā-ū-i-ti'iti'i o te rа, e Uahea! Te tui hana i roto i Fare-ana poiri u e! To maro puupuu i putii hia i te rouru tiitii ra e Uahea e! 'Are, 'are ra vau i te tua i Havai'i e! Mai roto mai au i te ana o te moana, e Uahea, io Rō'ura ma Rōfero ra. I tu'ia noa na to'u pu'e upo'o varu i ni'a i te feo o te ana i raro i te moana e Uahea e!" 187
Putaputa roa 'tura te manava O Uahea e na tamari'i i te Fare-ana poiri ra! Ua ite ana'e atura ia e o te tahi mau a Mā-ū-i teie, ua ora mai te moana mai. Faaea roa 'tura o Mā-ū-i-upo'o-varu i te Fare-ana i te metua vahine ra e te tahi pae tamari'i. O te Mā-ū-i teie i to'o i te ra'i e i ta'ai i te fenua; o te Mā-ū-i teie i here i te rā, e rave rahi atu а ta'na haa. 172
Are'a o Mā-ū-i-nui tahu'a nei, i vare'a noa ia i te ru'uru'a ma te 'ea'ea i te apiapi o te pō ra. 'Aore i tere maita'i te pure i tereire tau, 'aore e marae i oti no te pure.
"The confined sky must be banished now, O Te-mumuhu (The-murmuring)! Prepare the canoe of the clan, go for the artisans of Tumu-nui and Rua-tupua-nui to come and draw up the sky, that light may come in!" This was the speech of the fair Uru (Inspired), the famous canoe bailer of Tū with Ta'aroa. 93
Te-mumuhu prepared the canoe, and then the messenger Horo-fana'e (Early-runner) sailed to the presence of Tumu-nui and Rua-tupua-nui. 47
They both welcomed him: "Have you come, Horo-fanae?" 17
"Here I am!" 4
"A great errand has brought you hither!" 12
"I have a great errand which has brought me to the presence of Tumu-nui and Rua-tupua-nui." 31
"Let us hear your errand!" 8
"I have come for artisans from the kings' house of artisans, to go and expand the confined sky of Rumia." 32
"We agree to it; there are the artisans, Rima-roa (Long-arms) and Fa'a-tae (Cause-to-reach)." 31
The artisan, Rima-roa, with Fa'atae, hastened up to Atea, to the confined sky. But they did not reach their hands to touch him, they feared the power of King Atea. So they strung together their baskets of adzes and returned to the presence of Tumu. 76
Then Horofana'e flew into the presence of Ta'ere (Keel) to the lowest depths, saying, "Ta'ere, strength-of-artisans, then must have the artisans needed." 45
Ta'ere welcomed him: "Horofana'e is that you?" 16
"This is I!" 3
"A great errand has brought you all the way down into the presence of Ta'ere!" 24
"I have a very great errand! Give me your body of artisans, to go and expand the sky of Atea, which is close down." 34
"There is my body of artisans, choose from them." 13
So all those artisans, Tu-ra'i-pō (Push-night-away), Mata-mata-arahu (Soot), Aruaru vahine (Tattooer), Peperu (Pander-steerer), and Faro (Hope), strung their baskets of adzes under their arms, and went up to the presence of Atea. But not one of them stretched forth his hand to expand the sky! They feared and dreaded the greatness of Atea! Then they took their baskets of adzes and fled back to Pori (Fatness), where Ta'ere was! 130
Horo-fana'e then reflected: "Ta'ere must still have the required artisans! Ta'ere-ma-'opo'opo (Ta'ere-of-all-skill), Ta'ere-pipine (Ta'ere-the-distributer), Ta'ere-fau'oa (Ta'ere-the-joiner), Ta'ere-matua-toitoi (Ta'ere-of-vigor-and-strength)!" 84
So Horofana'e returned to Ta'ere and Ta'ere again sent artisans; they were Mata'ita'i (Reconnoiter). Tutono (Dispatch), and Feu (Spake-out). But they only went up and looked upon Atea, they did not reach forth their hands to touch him! They looked at him! And they dreaded his majesty! So they took their baskets of adzes that remained under their arms, and returned to Pori to the house of artisans of Ta'ere. 131
"But [said they] Ta'ere must still have the required artisans!" 19
Then Ta'ere sent the messenger Nevaneva (Look-around) to the room of gods, for Tahu'a-muai (Propeller) and Atari-heui (Unstable-heap), and they two took their adzes. Tupu-au'iu'i (Ancient-growth) was the adz of Tahua-muai and Tupu-anuanua (Growth-of-the-rainbow) was the adz of Atari-heui, and they went directly up to Atea, to chip Atea, to prop him up with rocks, to put him into deep sleep, to make short work of Atea! 139
But those gods looked upon Atea. They feared, they dreaded the majesty of Atea! And they placed their adzes in their baskets and fled back to the room of artisans. 51
"So, then, Tumu has no artisans, and Ta'ere has none, that can raise the king, Atea, that can separate the confined sky of Rumia from the earth!" 44
"They have none at all!" This was what the gods said. And then were born demigods. 22
[Birth of the demigods] 6
There was born to Ta'aroa of Papa-raharaha Moe-hau-i-te-ra'i (Peaceful-sleep-in-the-skies); she had a woman's body, and she was a girl much loved by her parents. There followed two sons who were twins, Ro-'ura-ro'o-iti (Red-ant-of-little-fame) and Ro-fero-ro'o-ata (Tied-ant-of-laughing-fame). Huri (Overthrow) was the wife of Ro-'ura, and Po'i-e (Strange-season) was the wife of Ro-fero (Tied-ant), conjured forth by Ta'aroa. Far down beneath the ocean bed was their home in the nether land. 154
The eyes of Atea glanced down at those of his wife, Hotu (Fruitfulness), and they begat Rū-te-to'o-ra'i (Transplanter-who-drew-the-sky), Rū-afa'i-ra'i (Transplanter-the-raiser-of-the-sky), Rui-totoo-i-te-ra'i (Transplanter-who-expanded-the-sky), Ru-i-ta'ai-i-te-fenua (Transplanter-who-explored-the-earth); all these names are for one man, Rū, who divided the earth in east, west, south, and north; and southeast, northeast, southwest and northwest. And there followed Hina-fa'auru (Gray-the-canoe-pilot), Hina-ta'ai-fenua (Gray-who-explored-the-earth with Rū), Hina-i-a'a-i-te-marama (Gray-who-stepped-into-the-moon), Hina-nui-te-araara (Great-Gray-the-watch-woman), Hina-tutu-ha'a (Gray-the-cloth-beater), one person. She staid in the moon to watch over travelers on earth at night, and over cloth beaters for the gods. Cloth beating was her pastime in the moon. 266
Rū dwelt with his wife Rua-papa (Rock-chasm), and they begat Uahea (Bereavement) of the Fare-ana (Cavern-house) of total darkness. In that dark abode, she pricked her foot with a sharp rock. 58
Uahea was the wife, and Hihi-Rā (Sun-ray) was the husband, and there were born of them Mā-ū-i-mua (First-Mā-ū-i-Invocation), who was great Mā-ū-i, the first priest in this world. There followed Mā-ū-i-roto (Next-Mā-ū-i), Mā-ū-i-roto (Inner-Mā-ū-i), Mā-ū-i-taha (Side-Mā-ū-i), Mā-ū-i-poti'i (girl-Mā-ū-i), who was Hina-hina-toto'io (Hina-fair-whose-every-hair-drew-drew); and lastly came Mā-ū-i-upo'o-varu (Mā-ū-i-with-eight-heads), who was Mā-ū-i-pu-fenua (Mā-ū-i-of-the-earthly-clod); there were six who were names Mā-ū-i. 203
The last Mā-ū-i was prematurely born, enveloped in an earthly clod; like a jellyfish was the covering of this last Mā-ū-i, and his parents did not know that there was a developed being within it. 61
"This child is dead!" "Is he dead?" "He is quite dead!" "Wrap him in a breadfruit-bark loin girdle and tie it on with the hair headdress, and when the prayer for the repose of his soul is ended cast him into the sea!" 65
The wrappings and binding were done, the prayer was over, then he was thrown into the sea! But the heart of Mā-ū-i was still fluttering in his bosom while he floated and floated on the waves of the sea! And his ancestors beneath the ocean, Ro-'ura and Ro-fero, seeing the bundle floating about, caught it, and they took out the little boy from the envelopes and saw that it was a living person, a person with eight heads; one great head erect, and six small heads around it from the neck [sic]. They nursed the child in a coral cave beneath the ocean, and he grew up and became matured. 180
Then those ancestors thus spoke: "Does he know whence he came?" "Nothing can escape that sort of man, with eight heads! Look how reflective he is!" 42
Not long afterward the sixth Mā-ū-i returned to the cave of his mother; Uahea was there with her five children when this Mā-ū-i knocked at the door, and behold there stood a man with eight heads! And the mother enquired: "Who can you be?" 76
The son answered: "I am Mā-ū-i, of course." 16
Uahea replied: "Here are Mā-ū-i-mua, Mā-ū-i-muri, Mā-ū-i-roto, Mā-ū-i-taha, and Mā-ū-i-poti'i; all these five Mā-ū-is are here together in this Fare-ana, and from whence then comes another Mā-ū-i?" 86
Then this Mā-ū-i answered: "This is I, Mā-ū-i-pu-fenua (Mā-ū-i-of-the-earth-clod), Mā-ū-i-ti'iti'i (Mā-ū-i-of-the-headdress), son of the Sun, O Uahea! O the soul reposing prayer in the dark, damp Fare-ana! Thy breadfruit-bark girdle bound with the braided hair, Uahea! Swept was I then by the billows of the ocean around Havai'i! I have come from the cavern of the deep, Uahea, where Ro'ura and Rofero are. My eight heads have been bumping upon the coral of that cave beneath the deep, O Uahea!" 174
Then were sorely pricked the hearts of Uahea and her children in the dark Fare-ana! They knew that this was really another Mā-ū-i, returned alive from the deep. And so Mā-ū-i with eight heads remained in the Fare-ana with his mother and her other children. This was Mā-ū-i who drew up the sky and traveled over it to the land; this was Mā-ū-i who noosed the sun, and many more works did he do. 125
But as for the great Mā-ū-i the first, he slept huddled up and panting in the confined darkness. Prayers could not be properly conducted at that period, and a temple to pray in could not be made.
Henry: 409-413 1
Source: Tamera and Pa-ti'i
Date of recitation:: Tamera: 1833; Pa-ti'i: 1834 34
The raising of the sky of Rumia
Tauto'o a'era o Rū i te ra'i ia Rumia, no to'na ari'i, o Anā-iva o te ra'i. A toto'o rа i te ra'i, e ni'a roa i Mou'a-raha i Porapora, e i Moua-avarivari i Havai'i Tauturu a'e ai i te pia, te teve, te auari'iroa parahurahu, e i te farero roroa o te pa'u tai. 117
I afa'i noa a'era o Rū i te ra'i i ni'a, e aore i maraa i taua to'ora'a ra, pu'u ihora te tua, fera ihora te mata, totoro ihora te a'au mi'imi'i no roto ia Rū i rapae, topa 'tura i te pae o te ra'i i Porapora, riro atura ei ata o te ta'o hia e, o te Rua-nu'u-a-Rū i teie nei a tau. 128
Ua hi'o maira o Tino-rua, mai te moana mai, toto'o a'e ai oia i te ra'i no to'na ari'i no Oropa'a o te moana. Aita 'toa 'tura te ra'i i mana'a ia Tino-rua. 70
Te hi'o maira o Mā-ū-i-ti'iti'i Mā-ū-i-ta'o: "A'e! a tahi tao'a to tatou ra'i e! 38
Pe'e a'e te ra'i i ni'a naō ia, e ra'i taetae'a, topa iho i raro ei pa'a, o veve hiti! (E fenua veve ia.) Tapu atu na i te ave fe'e, haamamae roa 'tu na ia Atea, fa'ata'a ia Rumia i te tua, fa'ata'a ia Rumia i te aro, fa'ata'a i te pou mua, te pou roto, te pou muri, te pou tū, te pou hahaere, e ia ta'a roa!" 137
I toto'o a'era Mā-ū-i i te ra'i no to'na ari'i o Rehua-i-te-ra'i, e mana'a 'tura ia Mā-ū-i e huru teitei roa 'tura. O te mana'a noa ana'e ra, aore i oti te to'oraa o te ra'i ia Rū e ia Tino-rua, aore ato'a ia Mā-ū-i. Vaiiho noa 'tura ia i te ra'i, i vaiiho pu'e haere noa. Ua tahuri haere noa i te mau'a e i te uru ra'au nui. 155
I ti'i atura Mā-ū-i i te taura ta'ai fenua, i te tauhiro o te ra'i, i te tititi no te matamata o te ra'i i oraora, e no te tautinana o te ra'i i te fenua. Mau atura te ra'i ia Mā-ū-i, na'na i ta'ai i te mou'a teitei roa i te tura e fa'airi atura i te ra'i na ni'a a'e. 122
Ua ti'i atura Mā-ū-i i te tahu'a e haere mai e ō i te ra'i, e ha'a e ia oti te 'ere'ere o te ra'i i te ō hia, Ia pаpū maita'i roa te ra'i i ni'a roa, e ha'amahuta i te atua na roto. 85
Fano atura Mā-ū-i i ni'a i te ra'i tua tahi, i te ra'i tua rua, i te ra'i tua toru, i te ra'i tua hа, e mairi anae mai o nei e varu ra'i, tae atu ai i te ra'i hamama a Tane, oia te ra'i tua tini. 86
E mānava ta Tane, "O oe tena e Ma-u-i-ti'iti'i?" 21
"O vau teie!" 6
"A tahi tere nui to oe?" 10
"E tere nui roa to'u!" 9
"Ahiri!" 3
"Te 'apu o te rai te pe'e mai nei i ni'a, te tautinana noa ra i ni'a i te mou'a o te fenua, e te vai poiri noa ra o roto. Tipapa mai nei au i te tahu'a ia oe nei e ti'i a'e e ō, e faataa roa 'tu i te ra'i piri i te fenua." 99
Fa'ati'a 'tura o Tane, o oia iho te haere a fa'ata'a i ta'na pūpū ha'a. Reva 'tura Mā-ū-i. 42
Pūpū haari te pūpū i tō ē ai te mata one o Atea ia Ta'urua po'ipo'i. E pūpū tohe roa te pūpū i tō ē ai te mata one o Atea ia Ta'urua ahiahi. E pūpū taratara te pūpū i tō ē ai te mata one o Atea ia Pipiria ma. E pūpū fa'ahiti te pūpū i tō ē ai te mata one o Atea ia Ta'ero. 150
Tui e'e atura Tane i ta'na ete pūpū, rave a'era i te tape o te ra'i i te rima, ta'o ihora, "tei hea ta'u pira'e iti 'uo nei? e Tae-fei-aitū e, tei hea 'oe?" 71
"Teie au." 5
"Haere mai." 5
A rere te manu iti 'uo i ni'a iho i te tapono o Tane reva atura raua. Ma'iri mai ra te rai hamama a Tane, e tua tini te ra'i i ma'iri atu, tae roa mai nei Tane i te ao nei. 76
"O te aruriruri o te pūpū, o te anapanapa o te pūpū, ta 'oe e haere; te pūpū e te anapanapa, e ta'ahi oe i rаira, i te fa'a iti ma te apiapi, o te ruru mai te eaea, e Tane apo'a rau e! E e'e 'oe i reira!" Te ta'o ia o te 'arere manu iti o Tane, rere ē atura. 119
Ta'ahi atura o Tane i te fa'a iti apiapi ma te anapanapa o te pūpū e hi'o atura ia Atea, hi'o a'era i te Fenua. A ha'a ra! 57
Ravea mai e Tane te raau nui, ei ti'aturu ma te tauto'o. Ei aha rа te to'o? Ei to'o mua, ei to'o muri, ei to'o roto, e i to'o vaho, e i too 'tu i te fenua mai te ra'i, ei ta'iri mata'i, ei vave'a i te tua o Atea, ei haiа mono i te nanu o Tane! 106
A ō rа Tane, e a hou rа i ni'a ia Atea i tena pu'e pūpū, e pa'aina 'tura i ni'a! 36
Te nanu ra o Atea! a naō te pa'aina 'tu te reo i ni'a! "E Tane e, a iriti atu i to pūpū e i te tape o te ra'i, ua mamae au!" A ō noa rа, a hou noa, e a tura'i noa o Tane, e ta'a roa 'tura o Atea, pe'e roa 'tura e ni'a roa! Ta'a ihora o Atea, ateatea noa 'tura ia te ao nei. 123
Te marua, te tapotu, i te fa'afa'a, i te piha 'tu, e i te piha mai. Ei te piha hea? Ei te piha tairurura'a, e i te piha hororaa! Purara mai ra i vaho, mai te tuoro e te tapi'i te tahi i te tahi! Te nu'u atua mai to ratou piha na mua, te nu'u ta'ata mai to ratou piha a ria ri'i a'e. Te hope'a teie o na po a 'iu, te pō roa ia Rumia. 141
I tono Te-fatu ei ia'na mua, i tono Rua-nu'u ei ia'na mua, a tono o Ro'o-te-roro'o, oia o Mo'o muri ei iana mua, e o te puai rahi rа o teie mau atua, o Ro'o muri ia, i fa'areia mai ai i vaho nei. O Ro'o-te-roro'o. 98
Ei ia Ro'o te fa'aro'o, ei aiai te faaroo, ei atea te fa'aro'o. A vahi i te tua i te ari'i o Ro'o. 47
Ua ari'i o Ro'o i to'na 'euea. 15
E afa'i i te huru o Ro'o: E huri tau, o Ro'o i te pō, o Ro'o i te ao tei ia'na te pō, tei ia'na te ao. 46
Ta Ro'o tau'a i noa'a mai no roto i te fare tahu'a ia Ta'ere ra, o Hoani, oia te hoani i te atua e te taata i te pō, e i te ao, na roto e na ni'a a'eiteie nei ao, aore r? i tae i te ra'i. 85
Ei te nu'u atua te pō, ei te taata te ao. I te pō ana'e te atua te fanau ra'a, i te ateateara'a o te ao nei. 52
Ta'a ē maira i te rai te ave o te fee nui, o Tumu-ra'i-fenua, o te tahu pohe hia e Rua-tupua-nui, topa atura i toa, riro atura ei fenua taua fee nui ra, oia te fenua ra o Tupua'i e vai noa ra i teie nei a tau. 98
'A'eho pua 'ura te tau i te pae ra'i i te pō ia mutu ra mai Tireo e tae atu i ni'a ia Hiro ma Ho'ata, ta te atua ia Rumia i fa'ahiahia. Ei pou no te ra'i, o te ta'ohia e taua mau atua ra e, o Ra'i-pua-t?tа. 93
Aruerue te pure ia vanaa a tau te pō; no te pō roa ia ta'o, no te pō a Rumia ia mutu, ma Tireo; no Hiro ma Ho'ata ia mutu, ma Motu, po hopea no te ava'e.
At last Rū drew up the sky, Rumia (Upset), for his king, Aster, the ninth of the sky (Betelguese in Orion). So he drew and drew the sky until it reached the summit of Mou'a-raha (Flat-hill) on Porapora and of Moua-ava'rivari (Slender-hill) on Havai'i (or Ra'iatea). And he propped it with the flat tops of the pia (Tacca pinnatifida), the teve (Amorphophallus campanulatus), the auari'i'roa (Terminalia catappa), and the tall tree coral from the shoals of the sea. 146
Rū only lifted the sky, but he did not succeed in quite raising it when he became hump-backed, his eyelids became ectropion, and he got badly ruptured, so that his small intestines dropped away and settled in the horizon of Porapora, and there they became clouds which are called the Rua-nu'u-a-Rū (Source-of-hosts-of-Rū) to this day. 105
Then Tino-rua (Dual-body) looked from the ocean and went and struggled with the sky for his king, Oropa'a (Dauntless-warrior), of the deep. But the sky did not get lifted up by Tino-rua. 52
Mā-ū-i-ti'iti'i was looking on and this was his speech: "Ah, what a fine thing our sky is! 29
If it ascends upwards, we shall say it is a sky that reached up, and if it fall as a crust, it will be poor-border! (That meant poor land.) Cut away the arms of the octopus, give Atea real pain, separate Rumia behind, separate Rumia before, separate the front pillar, the inner pillar, the back pillar, the pillar to stand by, and the pillar of exit so that he may be quite severed!" 115
So Mā-ū-i struggled with the sky for his king, Rehua-i-te-ra'i (Pollus-of-the-sky), and he succeeded in raising it to a good height. But it was only raised, the lifting of the sky was not accomplished by Rū or Tino-rua, nor by Mā-ū-i. They just left the sky thrown together in a heap, upset by mountains and great forests. 95
Then Mā-ū-i went for ropes to tie the land, for propping stones for the sky, and for wedges to place through the gaps of the sky still adhering to the earth. He tied the ropes upon the highest mountains and worked at the sky until he set it upon them. 71
Then Mā-ū-i went for other workers to come and dig away the sky, to work until the darkness was excluded, to set it firmly on high for the gods to fly through. 43
Mā-ū-i flew up to the first sky, to the second sky, to the third sky, to the fourth sky, and thus he passed through nine skies until he reached the open sky of Tane, which is the tenth sky. 48
Tane welcomed him, "Is that you, Mā-ū-i-ti'iti'i?" 19
"It is I!" 3
"You have a great errand?" 9
"I have a very great errand!" 9
"Tell it me!" 3
"The dome of the sky is coming up, but it is still clinging to the tops of the mountains of the earth, and all is still dark within. I have come to you for artisans to go and dig out, and completely sever the confined sky from the earth." 67
Tane agreed to go himself, and sorted out his shells for work. Mā-ū-i went away. 26
The coconut shell was what drew out the face of the sand of Atea to the morning star. A long Turritella shell was what drew out the face of the sand of Atea to the evening star. It was a prickly shell that drew out the face of the sand of Atea to Castor and Pollux. It was a sharp-edged shell that spread out the face of the sand of Atea to Mercury. 103
Tane carried his basket of shells under his arm, and took the sky measure in his hand, and he said, "Where is my little white sea-swallow? Tai-fei-aitu (Arrival-of-petitions-to-the-gods), where are you?" 64
"Here I am." 4
"Come hither." 4
So the little while bird flew onto Tane's shoulder, and they two departed. The open sky of Tane was left behind, and they passed through ten skies; then Tane arrived in this world. 49
"Go to the unsettled shells, to the flashing of the shells; to the shells and flashing, tread thou there in the little, confined valley, of huddling and panting, O, Tane of all skill! Tread thou there!" This was what the little bird messenger of Tane said, and flew away. 72
So Tane stood in the confined valley among the flashing shells, and looked at Atea, then he looked at the earth, and he worked! 39
Tane took great logs, they were for props and levers. But what were the levers for? They were to draw the front, to draw the back, to draw the inside, to draw the outside, to sever the earth from the sky, to ward off wind, to be props to the back of Atea, as slain men in effigy for the rage of Tane! 83
Now Tane dug and bored upon Atea with his shells, and the sound resounded on high! 25
Then Atea was enraged! and his voice thus resounded on high! "O Tane, withdraw your shells and the sky measure, I am in pain!" But Tane went on digging and boring, and pushing until Atea was quite detached and ascended up on high! Then Atea was free, and light came into the world. 86
There was tumbling and rolling over each other, in the ravines, in that department and in this department. In what departments? In the assembly room and the room to run from! They all dispersed outside, shouting and clinging one to the other! The host of gods from their department first, and then the host of people from the department a little afterwards. This was the ending of the millions of nights of the long night of Rumia. 119
Te-fatu sent word that he would have the prestige, Rua-nu'u sent to say he would be the first. Ro'o-te-roro'o (Fame-the-prayer-chanter), who was Ro'o the second, said he would be first; but the most powerful of all the gods was Ro'o the second as they were set free in this world. It was Ro'o-te-roro'o. 89
It was for Ro'o to make pious, to make piety glorious, to spread piety abroad. Let there be division made for king Ro'o. 42
Ro'o became king by his own power. 10
Give Ro'o his attributes: Ro'o the changer of the seasons, Ro'o of the night, Ro'o of the day. Night and day were his. 35
Ro'o's bosom friend, whom he obtained from the house of artisans of Ta'ere, was Hoani (Tempter), who became the tempter of gods and man, in darkness and in light, within and around this world, but not in the skies. 62
The night was for the gods, and the day was for man. It was only in the night that gods were born after the world was made clear. 32
The arms of the great octopus, Tumu-ra'i-fenua, who was conjured to death by Rua-tupua-nui, became detached from the sky, and they fell away south, and the great octopus became land, which is Tubua'i (Summit) [of the Austral Islands], which remains there to this day. 81
There were reeds bearing red blossoms that stood in the horizon after the dark period had passed away from [the night of] Tireo (Breaking-forth) to [the nights of] Hiro (Cunning) and Ho'ata (Jester), which the gods of Rumia greatly admired. They were supporters of the sky, which the gods named Ra'i-pua-tata (Sky-of-the-blossoming-rods, the aurora). 99
Prayers resounded with eloquence throughout the nights; from the long night to name, the night Rumia as it passed, to Tireo; from Hiro and Ho'ata as they passed, to Motu (Sundered), the last night of the moon.
Henry: 413-415 1
Source: :Tamera and Pa-ti'i
Date of recitation:: Tamera: 1834; Pa-ti'i: 1834 31
After the sky was raised
E ao i ite ai te taata i te huru o te fenua e i te ata o te ra'i. E ao i ite ai i te 'aere o Atea. E ao a tū mai ai o Hina-te-'u'uti-mahai-tua-mea i vaho, a ueue ti'a ai i te ro'o pū, e ro'o fai, e inaina e tupa e 'onana miti, e 'onana vai. 114
Hee te tai e ahiahi, hee mai ra, e ava'e e feti'a. E ra'i heuia te ra'i, aore taa raa, aore e vairaa no te rā, aore vairaa no te ava'e e te feti'a, te hee haere noa ra ia i roto i te ra'i heuia no te tuia haapurara raa hia e Atea. 109
Teie te tau i patu ai te taata i ta ratou marae matamua. I Opoa i Havai'i te patu raa hia, e na Mā-ū-i, tahu'a matamua, i ha'amo'a na Ta'aroa nui, o te ta'o hia e; "E tino, e arii Ta'aroa tupu a'e, 'au moana 'aere." 99
Ua fa'ati'a ratou i te fare, e ua fa'a'apu i te fenua, e pūpū atura ma te au i ta ratou apoaroa i to ratou atua, ia Ta'aroa, e ua rave pаpū atura Mā-ū-i i ta'na ohipa tahu'a, i te tau o ra'i heuia. 96
Ta'o ihora tane ia Mā-ū-i upo'o varu: "tera mai na 'arere, o Ti'a-o-uri e o Ti'a-o-atea, a ti'i i te ari'i ia Rai-tupua, tei te mao roa ai ata ra, i te roto o te Vai-ora a Tane." 81
Fano atura Mā-ū-i e na 'arere ra i te Vai ora a Tane i te ma'o purotu ra. Faarooroo mai ra ratou i te reo i taua roto ra: "Pira'e, Pira'e e! tei hea ta oe atoti iti e 'ai?" 78
"Tera tei muri!" 6
"Muri i hea?" 5
"Tei muri faarere ia tatauru!" 14
"E hopu vau?" 5
"A hopu!" 3
A Hopu a'e rа te ari'i Ra'i-tupua, i raro i ц roa, e noa'a maira te 'atoti horo'a 'tura na te manu iti hani e 'ai. Ae a'era Ra'i-tupu i ni'a i te vai, nana 'tura te mata i na tipapa. Fa'afatata ihora, naō atura: Manava outou, e Mā-ū-i, e Tia-o-uri, e Tia-o-atea! A tahi tere nui i tae'a mai ai i te Vai-ora o Tane nei!" 141
"E tere nui roa to matou! I tii mai nei ia 'oe e Ra'i-tupua, e haere a'e e fa'aafaro i te ra'i heuia." 48
"Ua fanau a'era o raro ra'i?" 13
"Ua fanau." 5
"Eaha ana'e ia?" 8
"E ata, e tuaivi mou'a, e marari, e hue noa, e a'ere ra'au to te fenua. Te vai heui noa mai ra te ra'i i ni'a 'tu, te ava'e te rа, e te feti'a, ua purara ē ana'e, na 'oe rа e fa'anoho ia nahonaho?" 84
"A e! Ua ti'a, a haere rа outou." 14
"Hoi mai nei Mā-ū-i, o Ti'a-o-uri, e o Ti'a-o-atea, ia ra'i heuia. 33
Te ari'i ra o Ra'i-tupua, i ti'a na i ni'a, ne'e a'e i te pae vai, huhume rarirari ihora i to'na maro e ta'o atura i ta'na tahu'a, a Mа-tohi tu'iro'o i fa'aea 'tu i te ra'i hamama a Tane i to'na ha'a. 83
Te mata ra o Ra'i-tupua a nаnа ti'a i ni'a, a rere ai oia Ra'itupua e, mairi mai ra o ra'i hamama tua tini a Tane, ua ma'iri mai ra o ra'i tua iva, o ra'i tua varu, o ra'i tua hitu, o ra'i tua ono, o ra'i tua rima, o ra'i tua hа, o ra'i tua toru e o ra'i tua rua, a tū rа o Ra'i-tupua i ni'a ia ra'i tua tahi a nаnа i te pu'e ra'i heuia, naō atura; 'Aere heuie! 'Aere 'aere e!" Ina rapae roa te ra'i, e te mau mea 'toa i roto. A pau te fanau o marama i roto, a pau te fanau o rā i roto, a pau te fanau te feti'a i roto. 225
Fano maira o Ra'i-tupua e raro roa i te fenua nei. Nаnа 'tura te mata i uta, a pau te fanau te mou'a, a pau te fanau te mato, te 'aivi, te peho, te fa'a, te 'aere ra'au e ua о i te manu te 'iore e te mo'o. Ua pau te fanau te orа, te mati, te purau, e te fara; ua totoro noa te a'a mai te ama'a mai, e tae i te repo fenua. A pau te fanau te tamanu, te tou, te amae, te mara, te atae, te vi, te tutui, te toi, te ohe, e te anuhe i roto. A pau te fanau te vai tahe te roto hopuna, te pū vai, e te ofafai i roto. 210
E raau pa'ara te pu'e ra, no te va'a; o na ra'au tena i tupu i to'a, tafifi i to'erau; na ra'au tena i tia'i hia i te va'a tapu a Tane. E farapepe to te mata-vao, ei 'ie'ie e ta'ai i te va'a tapu a Tane. 87
To mata o Ra'i-tupua i nаnа ti'a i tai, hi'o atura, ua pau te fanau miti i roto; e moana, e e pa'u to te miti; a pau te fanau te i'a, te tohorа, te a'au, te rimu, te to'a, te pūpū, te feo, e te pu'a i roto. Tei ni'a mai te hei ava'e, te tapi'i, te ureure-ti'a-moana, e te puahiohio. A pau te fanau te ra'i uri e te ra'i tea i roto; e ao tea e ao uri to te fenua nei. 155
Te mata o Ra'i-tupua a hi'o ti'a mai i te ao o te taata, a ite e ua pau te fanau fenua; e ri'oa, e 'o'o'a, e 'outu toro i tai; e tahora e e muri a vai to reira; e 'a'aihere, e tiare, ua rau te ma'a; e tō, e mei'a, e fe'i, e umara, e te uhi a pau te fanau te uri e te 'iore, 'are'a te pu'a e te moa aitа ia. E te ti'a noa maira te oire, te fare no te ta'ata, e te marae purera'a.
It was day time when people beheld the landscape and the clouds of the sky. It was day time when they saw the endless space of Atea. It was day time when Hina-te-'u'uti-mahai-tua-mea stood out and shook forth famous trumpet shells, famous ray-fishes, little sea-eggs, land crabs, sea prawns and fresh-water prawns. 92
The sea rolled and evening came and there followed the moon and stars. The skies were in confusion, in them nothing was set; there was no place for the sun, no place for the moon, and the stars had no set places, all were gliding about in confusion because Atea had pushed them out of order. 91
This was the period when the people erected their first temple. It was built at Opoa in Havai'i, and was dedicated by Mā-ū-i, the first priest, to the great Ta'aroa, of whom it was said: "Ta'aroa is a being, a king, who grew and swam in the depths of space." 81
They built themselves houses, and cultivated the soil, and presented their peace offerings in a becoming manner to their god, Ta'aroa, and Mā-ū-i, the priest, entered fully upon his sacerdotal duties, while the sky was in confusion. 76
Then Tane said to Mā-ū-i with eight heads: "There are the two messengers, Ti'a-o-uri (Approver-of-darkness) and Ti'a-o-atea (Approver-of-extension), go [with them] for King Rai-tupua (Sky-developer); he is with the long shark that eats clouds in the lake of the Vai-ora of Tane (the dark space in Milky Way)." 96
So Mā-ū-i and those messengers flew up to the lake of the Vai-ora of Tane, where the handsome shark was. They heard voices in that lake thus: "O Pira'e (Sea-swallow), Pira'e! which little remora do you wish to eat?" 70
"There it is behind." 6
"Behind where?" 4
"It is behind, swimming off!" 7
"Shall I dive after it?" 7
"Dive!" 2
So King Ra'i-tupua dove down in the distance, caught the remora, and took it to the little pet bird to eat. Then Ra'i-tupua (Sky-producer) came along on the surface of the water, and he beheld the messengers that had come for him. He approached them and said: "Welcome to you all, Mā-ū-i, Ti'a-o-uri, and Ti'a-o-atea! A great errand has brought you to the Vai-ora of Tane!" 122
"We have a very great errand! We have come for thee, Ra'i-tupua, to go and set in order the sky in confusion." 35
"Is the lower sky delivered of its burden?" 12
"It is delivered." 6
"What has it produced?" 6
"There are clouds, mountain ranges, clear spots, upheavals, and dense forests upon the earth. The skies above remain in confusion, the moon, the sun, and stars are all displaced abroad, but thou wilt set them in proper order?" 70
"Oh, yes! I am willing, you may return now." 12
So Mā-ū-i, Ti'a-o-uri, and Ti'a-o-atea returned to the sky in confusion. 28
King Ra'i-tupua arose, crept up the river bank, and all dripping, fastened on his loin-girdle and then he bid his famous artisan, Ma-tohi (Clearing-adz), remain in readiness to work in the open sky of Tane. 63
The face of Ra'i-tupua was turned upwards; he flew, and he left behind him the open tenth sky of Tane, he left behind him the ninth sky, the sixth sky, the fifth sky, the fourth sky, the third sky, and the second sky, and then Ra'i-tupua stood upon the first sky and beheld all the skies in confusion, and he exclaimed: "O vast confusion! Immensity of space!" The skies and everything within them extended away outwards. The moon was produced within, the sun was produced within, the stars were all produced within. 137
Then Ra'i-tupua flew down to the earth. He looked inland and saw produced mountains, cliffs, hills, woods, valleys, and extensive forests, which were filled with birds, rats, and lizards. There were produced the banyan tree, the mati, the purau and the fara; all these had long roots extending from the branches, down to the ground. There wre produced the tamanu, the tou, the amae, the mara, the 'atae, the vi, the tutui, the bamboo, and the pectinate (fern). There were produced running streams, quiet lakes, ponds and stones within. 156
There were long rods for the use of canoes; rods that grew from the south forming thickets to the north; those rods were in readiness for the sacred canoes of Tane. There was the ie'ie, in the recesses, with long fibers with which to tie the sacred canoes of Tane. 79
Ra'i-tupua turned his face seawards, and there he saw the ocean produced within; there was the deep sea, and there were also shoals within; there were produced the fishes, whales, the reefs, seaweeds, rocks, shells, corals, and limestone within. Overhead were clouds, the moon halo, the sun halo, the waterspout, and the whirlwind. There were produced darkness and light of the skies within; and there were dark days and light days upon the earth. 134
The eyes of Ra'i-tupua looked towards the dwelling place of man, and he saw land was produced; there were gulfs and bays with capes stretching out; there were rivers and friths; there were weeds, flowers, and a variety of food; sugar-cane, bananas, plantains, sweet potatoes, and yams. Dogs and rats were also born, but pigs and fowls had not yet come into being. And there stood the settlement, houses for the people, and a temple to pray in.
Henry: 415-420 1
Source: :King Pomare in Tahiti; Mahine, chief of Maiao; Pati'i, high priest of Mo'orea; Tamera, Tahitian high priest.
Date of recitation:: King Pomare: 1833 or 1834; Mahine: 1833 or 1834; Pati'i: 1833 or 1834; Tamera: 1833 or 1834 73
Disorder dispelled
A manava Tane it Ra'i-tupua naō atura: "E ti'a 'oe e Ra'i-tupua, e a noho, ia fa'anohohia rа o ra'i heui noa, mai te 'afaro e te purotu!" 60
Ma'au fa'aro'oro'o i te tao o Uru i te pua i ra'i tae, e a riri. A pare rа Tane ma Rua-nu'u. O Atea ra i hara i te ma'au! E ma'au ru'iru'i na te pō; e ma'au ro'oro'o na te ao. 76
E ma'au taupepe a nu'u tama'i e te nu'u tahu'a; e ma'au taupepe a ra'i; ma'au i te ta'ata uri, ma'au i te 'ehu, e i te mata pō; e ma'au i te ava'e hapa, te ava'e fe'efee, te tete'a, i te pupure, i te 'eiа, i te aiharuma, e ma'au i te roiroi. Te ma'au o Hina 'ai tua, o Hina 'ai aro te ma'au o na pu'e ruahine ra, te pito i ta'a i te tua; e te ma'au o te teiaha o te tino o te ruhi-ruhi! Eaha rа? Aue, aue rа! 176
O Atea ra, i taua ma'au ra i ta'ita'i na e i te aro o Tane na'na. O Tane ra i taua ma'au ra, i ta'ita'i na e i te aro o Atea na'na. O Atea ra i taua ma'au ra, fa'ahoia na i te aro o Tane na'na. 86
A vae na rа! Ua oti atura i te vae. Ua upu i roto ia Atea. Ahiri ia vae! 34
Vae 'oirа; e moe pō, e moe ao, tuhura a'e i te tua o Atea. E tupapa'u, e ma'ama'a-tea e haere i te aro o Tane. Na Tane e fa'a'ore i te ma'au, ia purotu te mau mea ato'a. 76
Na pu'e ruahine atua ra, riro atura ia ei tia'i fenua i te ao nei. Oia o Hina-maha'i-tua-mea, o te 'ai tua e 'ai aro no te mea e ruahine metua ta'ata 'oia, tera to'na io'a, o Ruahine-metua. E mea maoro roa i to'na itea 'ore faahou hia e te mata ta'ata, i itea noa hia e tei piha mai 'oia; i te ahiahi ri'i, ia 'oa'oa noa te rua'au vahine ri'i ra, e ia 'arearea noa, e naō ia te ta'ata e, "Teie mai nei o Ruahine-metua." 199
Na Ruahine ra, o Teuri, o Haoaoa, o 'Orerorero, o Vana'ana'a, o Tahua'a, o Moeruru'a, o Auna, o Fa'aпpū, o Tamaumau-'orero, o Puonoono, o Fa'aпpō, o 'Aiaru, o Arutaruta-tamaumau-auahi, e vahine iti mau o te mi'omi'o roa ma te mata uraura no te tamaumau noa raa i te auahi i ta'na ahi o te ore roa i pohe. O Ruahine nihoniho-roroa atua vahine fa'atupu 'ino, o Nihoniho-tete'i e vahine taehae 'ai taata, o Firifiri-aufau, e o Ai-tupuai. 205
Te atua vahine mana ra o Pere, ei atua ia no te auahi ā noa o te fenua. O Tama-'ehu, te tuane a'e o Pere, ei atua ia no te ahu o te fenua i te pō ra. E ao to Pere i raro i te fenua, 'aore e vera; tei ni'a mai te auahi e ā noa ai. E fa'aeara'a mana to Pere i raro i te fenua, e ape'e mana ana'e ta'na ia haere na raro e na ni'a i te fenua o te ao nei. 162
A fa'anoho rа Ra'i-tupua i te rai heui noa. Mai ta te tahu'a e 'apapa i te vae pahi ra to Ra'i-tupua ha'a i te ra'i hui noa. 53
Na Tane i faito maite i te area o te ra'i, i ta'na tape ra'i. Fa'anoho atura o Ra'i-tupua i te Marama, i te Rā, e i te feti'a, i te moana 'ere'ere o te Ra'i mai raro atu nei, mai te fa'apapu atu i to ratou mau vaira'a o Ma-tohi i ni'a roa. 104
Ateatea 'tura o Atea ei ma'uera'a na te atua. Terа ta'na tuha'a i raro a'e i te 'apu o te ra'i; o te mata'i, te ata, te anuanua, te reva, e te mau peu ato'a i te reva ra. Mau roa 'tura te ra'i o Rumia, 'a'ano atura i taua mau tahu'a ra. 102
Fa'anoho atura Ta'aroa i te mata atau no Atea, o Ta'urua e horo i te ahi-ahi, naō atura Ta'aroa; "Ei ao fefe mua fenua, ei tō, ei hauhau, ei hau fenua noho; to mata atau o Ta'urua, e Atea e." 92
Fa'anoho atura Ta'aroa i te mata maui o Atea, o Ta'ero, naō atura; "A hotu te riri, a hotu te tama'i i te ao nei; to mata maui, o Ta'ero, e Atea e!" 66
[Division of property] 7
Tei roto i te Apu nui o te Rai, tei te moana ereere, oia te aehai, oia te rai hamama o Tane, oia te rai tua taa, te hui tarava e te fetu taa noa te faanoho raa hia maite purotu e Tane, atua ote mau mea purotu. O te feti'a 'amo'amo, te feti'a nui o te Ra'i, te ava'e, te rā, o te ua, o te mata'i, o te tapu-tea, te tapi'i, te anuanaua, o te 'uti'uti, te tohu-ura, te mau pati'i ata ato'a, na Ra'itupua ma Tane i fa'anoho. Na Tane ana'e ia i faapurotu, o to Tane ana'e ia feti'i. 212
A ti'a rа Tane, a hihio, a mamapu! Ua ta'o atura; "Ahiri rа, a vae na а." 27
Fa'aue a'era Ta'aroa, "A vae na rа!" 15
"E tuna tari'a roroa, e tuhura i te aro o Tane. E tuna hihi roroa, e tuhura i te tua o Atea. E tuna hiti popoto, e haere noa i te aro o Tane. Te tuna nui opapata, te tuna e rio i te pū ra, e tuhura i te tua o Atea." Te tuna e rere i te 'ie'ie, te tuna e Parie, afi'i nui parahurahu e haere noa i te aro o Tane. Te tuna e Pa'uo, e tuhura i te tua o Atea. Te tuna e ai ori, e haere noa i te aro o Tane. 175
Te nato, e tuhura i te tua o Atea, e te 'oo'pu ri'i tore ra e haere noa ia i te aro o Tane. Te oura vai e te onana,e e tuhura i te tua o Atea." 64
"Te ma'au ra, o Tetea, 'oroaru i Havai'i, o te tae mai raro mai i te puo'orora'a o te vai, e taua'ia'i i te mahana i ni'a i te ofafa'i i te tau rii mаmа ra, e fa'aea noa ia ei tuputupua, i to'na iho vahi i rapae roa i te pari. Te mau tuputupua no raro i te rio'a hohonu ra, ia vai а ia i reira." 131
A haa mai rā o Rua-tupua-nui naō atura 21
"E te Tumu-nui, e Tane e, 'eaha te i'a i te tai e mahuta i te tau ma te tai'o?" 33
"E Rua-tupua-nui e, e Marara te i'a e rere roa i ni'a i te tua, i te tau ma te tai'o. E hare, e ouma, e 'orare, e tehu, ia ta'au atu ai te ia puto'a, e rere i te tau ma te tai'o." 78
"E te Tumu-nui, e Tane e, eaha te i'a nui e mahuta i te moana i te tau ma te tai'o?" 36
"E 'A'avere, e 'au, e 'ou'a, te 'A'ahi, te 'Auhopu, te Mahimahi, e i'a ta'au atu á te i'a e Rua-tupua-nui e, e mahuta i te moana i te tau ma te tai'o. E e ava te i'a e mahuta i te vai e te tai i te tau ma te tai'o." 92
"E te Tumu-nui, e Tane e, eaha te i'a e 'au noa na te moana atea e putoi ai i te mata are? E 'eaha te i'a e ofa'a e pato i te huoro i te one tapa tai?" 68
"E Rua-tupua-nui e, e tohora, e ma'o, e honu, e humо, e huru rau te i'a nui e au noa na te moana atea, e putoi ai i te mata 'are. E e honu te of'a e pātō i ta'na huoro i roto i te one i tahatai." 86
"E te Tumu-nui, e Tane e, eaha te i'a e haro i te mata a to'a?" 26
"E Rua-tupua-nui e, e pahoro, e maito, e ume, e 'i'ihi, e maene, e mu, e 'o'iri, e fai, ia tini rau te i'a rii 'una-una, e te puhi huru rau, te haro i te mata o te to'a." 71
"E te Tumu-nui, e Tane e, eaha te i'a i tai e pao, e imi i te rua?" 29
"E Rua-tupua-nui e, e puhi e fe'e, e varo, e 'oura, e 'ohiti, e te papa'a huru rau, te pao e imi i te rua." 45
"E te Tumu-nui, e Tane e, eaha te ia e huri ai i raro to'na mata?" 28
"E Rua-tupua-nui e, e fetu'e, e vana, e 'ina, e hava'e, e ma'oa, e hihi, e poreho, e pū, e pūpū huru rau atu а, e taramea, e ma'ama'atai, e rori, e ta'au atu а te i'a e huri ai i raro to'na mata." 84
"E te Tumu-nui, e Tane e, eaha te i'a e hi'o ai i te rā?" 25
"E Rua-tupua-nui e, pārau, e pāhua, e tio, e 'ahi, e 'u'u, e rau atu а te i'a apa rua e hi'o atu i te rā." 48
"E te Tumu-nui, e Tane e, navai te i'a e te pūpū o te moana e fa'atore e e ha'apurepure haere?" 43
"E Rua-tupua-nui e, na Tohu, atua i te ana i te moana e parai 'una'una hope i te i'a e te pūpū o te moana."
Tane welcomed Ra'i-tupua and said: "Arise, Ra'i-tupua, and establish, now cause the sky in confusion to be set in order and beauty!" 45
Ma'au (Unsightliness) listened to the speech of Uru (Inspired) in the recesses of the extended sky and was enraged. Then Tane and Rua-nu'u took up the fort. Atea had become defective with unsightliness! Unsightliness throughout the night; unsightliness throughout the day. 84
Disgraceful lagging in the army and the body of artisans; disgraceful, lagging in the sky; unsightly dark persons, unsigthly fair ones, and blind ones. Unsightliness of club feet, of elephantiasis, of phantoms, of albinos, atrocious thefts, and greediness; unsightliness in the stillness. The unsightliness of Hina who ate behind and before, and of the old women, whose umbilici had twisted round to their backs; and the unsightliness of bodies that were weighed down with age! What then? Alas, alas then! 145
Atea took all this unsightliness into the presence of Tane as his. And Tane took it into the presence of Atea as his. But Atea returned them into the presence of Tane as his. 59
Now make a division of them! Division is made, Atea has invoked it within himself. Show the division! 35
"This then is the division," said he, "night sleep and day sleep shall play upon the back of Atea. Ghosts and pale lunatics shall go into the presence of Tane. Tane shall put an end to unsightliness that all things may become beautiful." 69
The old women goddesses became guardians of the world. There was Hina-maha'i-tua-mea, who ate before and behind; as this old woman was the mother of man, she was called Ruahine-metua (Old-mother). Long after she disappeared from human eyes, her presence was felt in the evenings. When old women were happy and merry, people would say, "Ruahine-metua has come among us." 116
There were the old women, Teuri (Blackness), Haoaoa (Ruggedness), 'Orerorero (Orator), Vana'ana'a (Eloquence), Tahu'a (Artificer), Moeruru'a (Dreamer), Auna (Solicitude), Fa'aipu (Linguist), Tamaumau-'orero (Tale-bearer), Puonoono (Persistence), Fa'aipo (Ball-maker), 'Aiaru (Harbinger-of-death), and Arutaruta-tamaumau-auahi (Seizer-of-food-the-fire-kindler), who was a very little, wizen woman, with fiery red eyes from being parched by continually kindling the fire of her furnace which never died out. And there were also Ruahine-nihoniho-roroa (Old-woman-with-long-teeth), goddess of strife and cruelty, Nihoniho-tetei (Ghoul), a fierce man-devourer, Firifiri-aufau (Genealogist), and Ai-tupuai (Eater-on-the-summit, probably on the octopus). 261
The great goddess Pere (Consuming-heat) must be goddess of spontaneous burning of the earth. Tama-'ehu (Blond-child), the brother of Pere, must be god of heat in the nether lands. Pere has light down in the earth, without heat; above is the fire ever burning. Awe-inspiring is the residence of Pere down in the earth, great are her attendants that follow her below and above the surface of the world. 120
Ra'i-tupua then set in order the skies in confusion. As a shipbuilder sets one plank above another so Ra'i-tupua worked at the skies in confusion. 51
Tane measured the spaces between each sky with his sky measure. Ra'i-tupua set the moon, the sun, and the stars in the blue depths of heaven from below, while his artisan, Ma-tohi, adjusted them from above. 63
Atea became clear for the gods to fly through. These were his possessions beneath the dome of the sky, the wind, the clouds, the rainbow, the atmosphere and all it contains. The sky of Rumia became fixed and extended by those artificers. 71
Then Ta'aroa placed as a right eye for Atea, Ta'urua (Venus), who runs in the evening, and he said: "It is to be a light bending before the earth, to lead it, to give great peace, peace to the inhabited world; thy right eye is Ta'urua, O Atea." 81
And Ta'aroa placed as a left eye for Atea, Ta'ero (Mercury), and said: "Let anger be kindled, let war rage upon the earth: thy left eye is Ta'ero, O Atea." 50
[Division of property] 7
In the great vault of heaven, in the blue depths, in the measureless space, in the open sky of Tane, in many skies, one above the other, were the hosts of constellations and Sporades set beautifully by Tane, god of beauty. The twinkling stars, the great stars of the skies, the moon, the sun, the rain, the wind, the lunar rainbow (pale-pledge), the halo, the rainbow, the silvery, mottled calm sky, the ominous, red cloud, and all the layers of clouds were set in order by Ra'i-tupua with Tane. All these Tane made beautiful; they were all his family. 164
Then Tane stood and whistled and breathed heavily! and he said, "Now let us see, and continue to make division." 36
And Ta'aroa said, "Now make division!" 14
"The eel with long ears (pectoral fins) shall sport in the presence of Tane. The eel with long barbels shall sport upon the back of Atea. The eel with short barbels shall go freely into the presence of Tane. The great spotted eel, and the rio (a great black eel) of the pools, shall sport upon the back of Atea. The eel that springs along the ieie [called] the parie, with a great flat head, shall go freely into the presence of Tane. The light-colored eel shall sport upon the back of Atea. The eel that feeds upon the plantains that drop in the water shall go freely into the presence of Tane. 175
The nato shall sport upon the back of Atea, and the little striped 'oo'pu shall go freely into the presence of Tane. The shrimps and prawns shall sport upon the back of Atea." 49
"The unsightly Tetea (White-monster) of the dark hole in Havaii, which comes up from beneath through the bubbling waters to bask in sunshine upon the stones in calm, clear weather, shall remain as a phantom in his own place, away among the outside bluffs of the seashore. The hideous monsters down in the deep gulfs shall remain there." 101
Then Rua-tupua-nui set to work and said 14
"O Tumu-nui, O Tane, what fishes of the sea shall leap up in their appointed seasons?" 29
"O Rua-tupua-nui, the flying-fish shall soar high from the ocean in his season. Young tunnies, sardines, white-bait, mullets, and scores of other fishes that form shoals shall leap up in their seasons." 61
"O Tumu-nui, O Tane, what great fishes shall leap in the ocean in their season?" 27
"The swordfish, the saury pike, the porpoise, the albicore, the bonito, the dolphin, and scores of other fishes, O Rua-tupua-nui, shall leap in the ocean in their seasons. The salmon shall leap in the rivers and the sea in its season." 74
"O Tumu-nui, O Tane, what fishes shall swim at large in the great deep, and rest upon the crest of the wave? And what fish shall lay and hatch its eggs in the sand of the seashore?" 50
"O Rua-tupua-nui, the whale, the shark, the turtle, and the seal, and many kinds of great fishes shall swim at large in the great deep, and rest on the crest of the wave. And the turtle shall lay and hatch its eggs in the sand of the seashore." 67
"O Tumu-nui, O Tane, what fishes shall twirl through the coral?" 18
"O Rua-tupua-nui, let the parrot-fish, the surgeon-fish, the leather-jacket, the red-fish, the yellow-fish, the blue-fish, the gar-fish, the ray-fish, and let myriads of little ornamental fishes, and numerous eels twirl through the coral." 67
"O Tumu-nui, O Tane, what fishes of the sea shall burrow and seek dwelling-holes?" 25
"O Rua-tupua-nui, the eel, the octopus, the squilla, the lobster, the sand-crab, and the various sea-crabs, shall burrow and seek dwelling-holes." 44
"O Tumu-nui, O Tane, what fishes shall move about with their faces downward?" 24
"O Rua-tupua-nui, the big-spined urchin, the fine-spined urchin, the little urchin, the short-spined urchin, the Turbo, the periwinkle, the tiger-cowrie, the trumpet-shell, and other various kinds of shells, the sun-star-fish, the sand-star-fish, the sea-cucumbers and scores of other fishes shall roam with their faces downwards." 92
"O Tumu-nui, O Tane, what fishes shall face the sun?" 16
"O Rua-tupua-nui, the pearl-oyster, the Tridacna, the oyster, the clam, the mussel, the various other bivalves shall face the sun." 40
"O Tumu-nui, O Tane, who shall put stripes and patterns upon the fishes and shells of the deep?" 27
"O Rua-tupua-nui, Tohu (Pointer), god of the chasms in the deep, shall paint in perfect, gorgeous colors, the fishes and the shells of the deep."
Henry: 423-426 1
Source: :Tataura, as written down by his grandson Tupaia, a schoolmaster at Motu-tapu, Ra'iatea
Date of recitation:: 1887
The Breadfruit 46
O Noho-ari'i te ari'i! 10
O Rua-ta'ata te metua no te uru. No Ra'iatea oia, tera te marae, o Toapuhi; tera ta'ua vahine o Rumau-ari'i, o Ahu-noa te marae, o Tai-pari 'tahi i'oa no tereira marae. No mutaa roa iho i te tau i ai noa hea'ite araea ei maa. 105
Fanau mai ra to raua ta-mari'i to'o maha; o Tara-te-feiao te matahiapo, o Huo-totoi-ae i Muri ae, o Terau-haehae i muri 'ho; tau tamaroa to'o toru; e o Tauaroaro te maha, e tamahine, hoe roa ra tuahine iti. 94
Tae aera i te hoe tau i o'e ai teie fenua i te tau o te ari'i ra Noho-ari'i o te oe i taohu 'i o Uturoa e, o Uturoa i te Rere-a-fara, e fara te maa; o Uturoa i te fa'a-araea, e araea te maa; o Uturoa i te Haha-teve, e teve te maa; o Utu-roa i te Tupa iri ava, e tupa te maa! 127
Tupu aera te aroha o Rua-ta'ata e te vahine, i to raua tamari'i i te poia, rave atura, tui e ihora i nia i te moua, i roto i te hoe ana iti, fa'aea iho ra i reirae ai i te mamau. E ia tae i te hoe ahiahi, poroi atura Rua-ta'ata i te vahine 112
"E Rumau-ari'i e! ia ara oe ia poipoi e, e haera oe i rapae, e hi'o oe i ta'u rima e rau uru ia, e hi'o oe i i te tumu e te maaraa e rua o te ra'au, o to'u ia tino e to'u na avae, e hi'o oe i te maa menemene i nia iho, e uru ia no to'u nei upo'o. E te hune i roto i taua maa ra, o to'u ia arero. E rave oe e tunu i taua maa ra, e paru i te vai, e fa'a'ai atu i to taua tamari'i, ia paia maitai aena o ratou." 193
Haere atura Rua-ta'ata i rapae; fa'aea 'tura te vahine mai te taa ore o te manao, i roto i te ana i te pu'e tamari'i ra. 53
I te poipoi roa, tia aera taua vahine ra i nia, haere atura i rapae, hi'o aera i ni'a, e ua maru roa taua vahi ra i te hoe ra'au purotu. Te vai noa ra te mau mea 'toa i poroihia e te tane ra, e ua mairi te uru maoa i raro ae i taua tumu ra. I mairi hia ai taua fa'a iti ra i te i'oa ia Tua-uru. 139
Te itera'a 'tu ia te vahine i te auroa o te parau a te tane; rave oto maite atura oia i taua ma'a ra, tunu ihora i te auahi, e a ama, afai aera e te vai e ha'apao atura i ta te tane i parau; fa'a'ai atura na te mau tamari'i e amu ato'atura oia iho. Aita ra taua ma'a ra i fa'a'avarihia na te Ari'i, mai ta te ta'ata i matau ra, na taua feti'i iti ra i fa'a'avari, e i feti'i iho hoi ratou no te ari'i. 185
I te ho'e mahaue haere atura te teuteu ari'i i uta i taua peho ra tinao i te puhi e te oura e te o'opu, e ite ihora ratou i te hune e te pa'a uru o te panu atu i roto i te pape, rave aera e amu iho ra i te toetoea ri'i ma'a no ni'a iho parau aera, "E ma'a maitai rahi teie e! No fea mai nei ra? 135
To ratou ia imira'a tu i te vaira'a o taua ma'a ra, e uta roa i te peho tae atura i taua fa'a iti ra, itea ihora te tumu o taua uru ra! Tei pihai ho taua vahine ra, ua ui atura, "Eaha teie ma'a?" Parau mai ra taua vahine ra, "E 'Uru." "Nofea te roa'a ra'a mai?" "Teie, no roto mai i ta'u tane ia Rua-ta'ata, o te fa'ariro ia'na iho ei uru ma'a no te tai i to maua tamari'i i te ma'a ore i teie nei oe." 182
Fa'ahiahia 'tura ratou i taua tumu ra, i te tauperetau haere noa ra'a i raro; ua hope roa te mau huru ato'a o te uru i ni'a i taua tumu ho'e ra. Iriti hia 'tura taua tumu uru ra e te teuteu ari'i, afai hia 'tura i tai, i te fenua o taua vahine ra tanu hia 'tura i te marae tupuna ra, i Ahunoa. 133
Tei reira te ho'e ta'ata no Taha'a, ua taihi aera oia i te ho'e a'a o taua tumu Uru ra, afai atura i Taha'a te tanu ra'a; tupu atura ta'na e hotu aera. Mau noa 'tura te i'oa o taua ta'ata ra, o Taihi no tona taihira'a i te a'a uru. 105
A pofai ra te teuteu ari'i i te uru maoa a fa'atomo i te va'a tauaua, a fa'atai i te pu roa o te mai'ai, hoe atura i Opoa i te vahi rahi e 'ai mua na te ari'i te ma'iai o te fenua. 85
Ite iho ra te ari'i o Noho-ari'i i taua ma'a ra e mea maitai rahi, fa'aue atura i te teuteu ari'i e ti'i e iriti mai e tahiti i taua tumu ra i Opoa e aratai ato'a mai i na fatu a taua ra'au ra. Ti'i atura, afai roa hia maira taua tumu ra i Opoa, tanu hia 'tura i mua i te aro o te ari'i. Tei reira te ho'e vahine, o Toea-nui-oe-hau te i'oa, no ni'a i te peho mai, tipe'e atura i te tahi paia'a, hopoi atura i uta te tanura'a, tupu atura te uru i reira, i parau hia i taua peho ra e o Maiore. E i'oa 'tura ie no te 'uru o te pi'ira'a ia Mahuru ari'i no Ra'iatea i taua i'oa ra uru. E upo'o atura te i'oa o te uru ta'ata, no te auraro ia 'na i te ravera'a i tera i'oa. 310
Ua oto o Ru-mau-ari'i e na tamari'i i taua ra'au ra, aita ra i maoro ua tupu maira te ohi no te a'a i motu i uta, e uru pu atura te pupu e hotu oioi ana'e atura. 76
I parau hia te uru i hotu a Porapora i tahito ra e, o te Uru a Teiti, no te mea na te ho'e vahine no reira, o Teiti te i'oa i rave mai i te a'a 'uru no Opoa e i tanu i Porapora. O te tumu uru matamua roa i tupu i Porapora, o te tumu 'uru ia a Teiti.
Noho-ari'i (King's-seat) was the king! 11
Rūa-ta'ata (Man-pit) was the parent of the breadfruit. He belonged to Ra'iatea; his temple was Toapuhi (Eel-rock); his wife was Rumau-ari'i (Real-royal-haste), and her temple was Ahu-noa (Only-to-wall), another name of that temple being Tai-pari (Seaward-bluff). This was very long ago when red clay was used as food. 101
Those two persons had four children: Tara-te-feiao (Prayers-with-earthly-ceremonies), the eldest; Huo-totoi-ae (Stray-game), the next one; Terau-haehae (The-torn-leaf), another; these three were boys; and the fourth was Tauaroaro (Misty-season), a girl--only one little sister. 89
There came a time when there was a famine in this land, in the reign of Noho-ari'i; this was the cause of Utu-roa (Long-cape) being spoken of as Utu-roa fleeing to the fara, fara was the food; Utu-roa of the red clay--red clay was the food; Utu-roa resorting to the acrid teve, for that was the food; Utu-roa of the bitter-backed land crab--land crabs were the food! 117
Rua-ta'ata and his wife were filled with pity for their starving children, so they took them and carried them up into the mountains to a cave, and there they staid to eat ferns. One evening, Rua-ta'ata said to his wife 70
"O Rumau-ari'i! when you awake in the morning, go outside, and you will see my hands which have become leaves; look at the trunk and two branchings of the tree, and they will be my body and legs; look at the round fruit upon it, which will be the cranium of my head, and the heart inside the fruit will be my tongue. Roast the fruit, soak it in water, beat off the skin, and eat some, and feed our children also with it that they and you may no longer be craving for food." 141
Then Rua-ta'ata went outside, and his wife, not comprehending him, remained in the cave with their children. 34
Early in the morning, the woman arose, went out, and looked up, and saw that all around the place was shaded by a beautiful tree. Everything was as her husband had foretold to her, and there was ripe breadfruit that had fallen upon the ground beneath the tree. This is why that little valley is called Tua-uru (Place-of-breadfruit). 101
Then the wife knew the meaning of her husband's words; and weeping, she collected the fruit, which she roasted; and when they were cooked, she carried them into the water and did as her husband had directed her, and then she fed her children with breadfruit and ate some herself. But that food was not inaugurated by the king according to the custom among the people; this small family themselves ate the first fruits, although they were related to the king. 130
At last one day, the king's servants went up into that valley to catch some eels, shrimps, and o'opu (Eleotris fusca), and seeing the core and skins of the breadfruit that the water had carried down, they picked them up and ate the little pieces of breadfruit that remained on them, and they exclaimed, "What very good food this is! Whence does it come?" 104
So they went in search of the place of that fruit in the back of the valley, until they reached the little dale, and there they saw the wonderful tree. The woman was near it, and they said to her, "What is this fruit?" She answered, "It is uru (head, or breadfruit)." "Where does it come from?" "Here, from my husband, Rua-ta'ata, who let himself become breadfruit because of his sorrow for me and our children without food." 125
They all admired the tree, with its branches bending downwards, laden with all the different varieties of the breadfruit known in these islands. Then the king's servants took up the tree, carried it down to the coast to the woman's land and planted it by her family temple, Ahunoa. 79
Then there was a man from Taha'a, who wrenched off a root from the breatfruit tree and took it to Taha'a, where he planted it; and it grew and bore. Then that man's name became Taihi (Wrencher), because he had wrenched off the breadfruit root. 74
The king's servants picked some ripe breadfruit, with which they loaded the canoe that was used for errands of homage; they blew the trumpet shell to anounce the arrival of firstfruits and paddled off to Opoa, the great place where the royal family inaugurated the feast of the firstfruits of the land. 91
Then King Noho-ari'i found the food very good and ordered his servants to go and take up the tree and transplant it at Opoa and to bring the owners of the tree with them. So they went and brought them to Opoa and planted the tree in the presence of the knig. A woman there named herself Toea-nui-oe-hau (Great-sensational-remainder), and she begged for a bunch of roots, which she took and planted in a valley far back; and there they grew, so that the valley was named Maiore (Almost-without). This appellation became the name for head (breadfruit), after King Mahuru of Ra'iatea was named Uru, and peoples' heads were ever afterwards called upo'o in deference to him in adopting that name. 218
Ru-mau-ari'i and her children wept for the tree; but it was not long before shoots sprang up from the roots that were broken inland, and they formed a clump of trees which soon brought forth fruit. 55
The first head (breadfruit) produced at Porapora long ago was called Teiti's, because a woman from there named Teiti (Smallness), took a root from Opoa and planted it at Porapora. The first head (breadfruit) ever planted at Porapora was called the head tree of Teiti.
Henry: 426 1
Source: :Pu-fara-motu and Mo'o, priests; and Ma'i, king of Porapora; and generally from priests on Tahiti and Mo'orea
Date of recitation:: Pu-fara-motu: 1824; Mo'o: 1824; Ma'i: 1824; other Tahiti and Mo'orea priests: 1824 73
The first god's house
E pa'a tino no Ta'aroa iho te fare atua matamua i roto i te marae. 30
I te ho'e mahana i haapohe na Ta'aroa, e ti'a mai nei te varua i te atea, painu noa 'tura te tino i te tai; ua parau ihora oia i na tamahine na'na ra: "Popoti'i, popoti'i e! e hia va'a i tua?" Ua parau maira na tamahine; "Au a huru, au a huru!" Ua ta'o atura taua varua o Ta'aroa ra; "O vai ra ia?" Ua parau mai ra na tamhine; "O oe iho pa 'i!" 151
A hi'o rа taua na tamahine a Ta'aroa ra i taua pera ra! I rave na Ta'aroa i to'na manava ei pati'i ata marevareva, to'na toa'hua e to'na 'i'o ei pori no te fenua, to'na rima ei faaetaeta fenua, to'na ma'iu'u ei apu e ei poa i'a, e to'na aau ei oura e ei puhi no te vai e te tai. 126
Ua iriti a'era o Ta'aroa i to'na mata atau i taua pera no'na ra, e i hō a'era na Tū-poro-'tu, ua iriti a'era oia i to'na mata aui, e i hō a'era ia na Te-ā-noa. Ua parau atura o Ta'aroa i taua na tamahine ra: "A ti'i orua i taua vaa ra." 113
I haere atura raua i taua paa tino o Ta'aroa ra, e ua tаtа i te riu, e toto ia no Ta'aroa, oia te 'ute'ute i 'ute'utehia 'i te ra'i; e no reira te anuanua nei, no te toto o Ta'aroa i tаtа hia e na tamahine ra no roto i te pa'a tino o Ta'aroa. E ia oti i te ahuahuhia, ua mā ia o roto, ua rave atura na tamahine i taua va'a ra, e ua afa'i atura i roto mai i te 'ava'a marae. 169
Te ivi tuamo'o ra, o te tahuhu ia; o to'na 'ao'ao, o te ta'ota'o ia no te fare atua; o to'na ivi ouma ra, o te raupo'i ia, e to'na ivi papa, ote unuunu ia no te fare atua.
The first god's house in the temple was the empty body of Ta'aroa's own person, and it became a model for all other god's houses. 38
One day Ta'aroa let himself go into a trance and his spirit stood away in space while his body floated in the sea; then he said to his daughters: "Oh, girls, girls! how many canoes are there at sea?" And the daughters replied: "It is like one, it is like one!" Then Ta'aroa's spirit said: "Who can it be?" And they answered: "It is thyself assuredly!". 106
So all those daughters of Ta'aroa looked at the body! Ta'aroa had taken his vitals for broad, floating clouds and his flare and his flesh for fatness of the earth, his arms and hands for strength for the earth, his nails for shells and scales for the fishes, and his intestines for shrimps and eels of the rivers and of the sea. 92
Then Ta'aroa took out his right eye from his body and gave it to Tu-poro-'tu (Stand-to-proclaim-away), and he took out his left eye, and gave it to Te-a-noa (Spontaneous-burning). And Ta'aroa said to those two daughters, "Go and bring that canoe." 79
So they two went for the empty body of Ta'aroa and bailed out the leakage, which was his blood, and it became the redness in the sky; and the rainbow sprang from the blood that those daughters bailed out of the empty carcass of Ta'aroa. When the bailing was done, all was clean within and the girls took up the canoe, and they carried it into the holy of holies of the temple. 112
The backbone was the ridgepole, the ribs were the supporters of the god's house, the breast-bone as the capping of the roof, and the thigh-bones became the carved ornaments around the god's house.
Henry: 427-429 1
Source: King Tama-toa of Ra'iatea; his priest Vai-'au; his priest Tito.
Date of recitation:: King Tama-toa: 1820; Vai-'au: 1820; Tito: 1820 55
The discovery of fire by friction
O Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-а te metua o te auahi. 18
Aore auahi i ni'a i te fenua i te anotau pō ra. I ai noa te taata i te mā'a ota ma te mamae o te opū, no te reve'a ore ia tunu. 61
E i te pe'e ra'a o te ra'i ia Rumia i ni'a, e te ite ra'a o te taata i te ao, hina'aro atura i te tuva'u roa i te pō o to ratou utufare, hinaaro atura i te auahi, ei auahi tunu ma'a, ei auahi tiahi i te poiri i te pō. 102
Feruri noa 'tura o Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-а ua tao atura i ta'na vahine, ia Ma-hui-ē, e i na hoa, ia Tuturi e ia Faarori 52
"Eaha rа e na'upa 'i te auahi nei? Peneia'e tei ia tatou nei te auahi te vai noa raa!" 41
Ua reva a'era o Faarorо i te to'a o te tai, e pu'a, ei aurima, e ua rave i te ho'e ofa'i nui o te fenua ei 'au'ati; a hi'a noa rа e pau noa 'tura te pu'a i taua ofa'i 'au'ati ra, aore auahi i ama. Tamata ato'a ihora i te hi'a i te raau ota, i te fāmei'a, e i te mā'a iho, aore e faufa'a. Ua rave ihora i te ho'e ōmore toa, e ua hi'a i taua ofa'i ra; āea ihora, poto roa 'tura te ōmore, po'opo'o roa 'tura te ofa'i, aore rā e auahi i ā. 206
Ia tae rā i te ho'e tau, ua hi'o a'era o Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-а i te ho'e ra'o nui 'ura'ura i te tauraa i ni'a i te tahi amaa fau maihe, e aro atura. Ua ta'o atura to'na mana'o: "Aria, tei te fau maihe nei paha te auahi!" Ua parau mai ra ta'na vahine; "Eaha ta oe e oremo'o noa na?" Naō atura oia; "E ra'o nui 'ura'ura, ua tau mai i teie nei amaa mai po e aro atura, te ta'o nei to'u mana'o e tei taua fau nei paha te auahi." Ua ta'o atura te vahine; "Oia mau! A vahi na i tena amaa marō, a tamata i te hi'a i te auahi." 237
Ua rave iho ra te tane ua vavahi i taua ma'a ra'au ra, ua haere ato'a mai te vahine e na hoa, ua mata'ita'i i te tamataraa i te hi'a i te auahi. E ma'a fau nui marō te 'au'ati e ma'a vahi iti taraihia no taua ra'au ra te aurima. 107
Aore i maoro, ama roa a'era te auahi! Ua huhuti Tuturi i to'na io rouru, ei tamau, e aita i ura; ua tii i te rimu no te tai ei tamau, e aore а i ama! Rave ihora i te nonoha marō o te fare nei, e oihia, tapiri atura i taua ma'a auahi o te ra'au ra, ama roa a'era, aita rа i maoro, pohe atura. Tapiri atura i te puru ha'ari e ama 'tura ia auahi mai te ura ore. Haere atura i te raau maro e tutu'i atura, e aita i roroa, ura roa tura te auahi rahi mai te anapa uira ra te maramarama. 224
Umere ana'e atura ratou mai te naō e: "O ta tatou tao'a maita'i te auahi nei e! I teie nei rа, ua ma'iri iho nei te ai i te mā'a ai ota." 66
A imi rа i te autahu no taua auahi ra, e ama'a marō ana'e, e auahi nui tei hamani hia. Pō a'era, maramarama noa 'tura te atura'i fenua i te auahi, rahi noa 'tura te umere e te mata'ita'i o te taata! Ua haere mai ra te arii, pūpū hia 'tura taua auahi ra na'na. 122
Ua ui a'era te ari'i e: "Eaha rа te tamau o teie nei auahi e tae'a maita'i ai i te ao?" Ua ta'o a'era te vahine o Ao-ao-mā-ra'i-а ra: "Tera te ra'au maita'i, e to maua ari'i, e tutui pē, e rahurahu huru pē." 97
Oia 'tura, ua rave tamau anae ihora te taata i te auahi. Te 'au'ati fau nei i hi'a hi'a, te nonoha maro nei i oioi hia, te ahi nei i tapiri e pū hia; a ura te nonoha, itapiri hia te puru ha'ari e ama 'tura mai te ura ore, a tautahu i te ra'au marō, a maramarama te atura'i fenua i te pō. Te ama'a tutui pē nei i rahurahu i te auahi tamau, te tutui na i tupa'i hia, tuitui hia tutu'i hia i te auahi, i maramarama 'i te atura'i fenua i te pō nei. 207
O Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-а te ta'ata matamua o te tunu i te mā'a i teie nei fenua. E te mā'a matamua i tunu hia e mei'a ia, e rerera'i. E mā'a maita'i rahi roa, o te mataura'a ihora ia te taata i te mā'a ama, maita'i noa 'tura te opū i te mā'a mahanahana. 116
O te pō e nei rа, ia tua'u ē hia 'tu! E uta rа i hea? E uta i te moana o te hiti'a-o-te-rā! E uta i hea? E uta i te marae i Havai'i nei! E uta i hea? E uta i te avae manu e pou i uta ra! E uta i te pō i hea? E hopoi ē atu i te pō ra! E uta i hea? E uta i te Rā-tūnū. 124
O Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-а maori te metua o te auahi, e o Ma-hui-ē, ta'na vahine, te tamau atu ia ore ia pohe. 47
E tutui nei i tuitui hia i te niau ta te taata Tahiti mori i ite i mutaaiho ra, aita 'tu. Ua ite noa te taata Tahiti i te faatahe i te haari ei monoi rouru, aore roa ra i ta uiti hia ei mori. Na te orometua Beretane nei i haapii i te hamani i te mori haari, e tera te mori haari matamua, e one i tuu hia i roto i te apu haari, i ta uiti hia 'i i te tapa nei, o te taviri hia i nia i te niau, e faaati hia 'tu ai i te mori. 195
Tei vai noa maira te ofai auati nui o Faarori i Tainuu i Raiatea i teie nei a tau, i Uturoa.
Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-a (More-light-beneath-clear-sky) was the father of fire. 23
There was no fire upon the earth's surface during the dark period. People ate raw food, which produced colic, because they had no means of cooking it. 49
And when the sky of rumia was raised, and people saw the light, they wished to banish night entirely away from their homes, and so they wanted fire, fire to cook their food with, fire to drive away the darkness of night. 64
And Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-a reflected and said to his wife Ma-hui-e (By-new-regime), and to his friends, Tuturi (Kneel) and Faarori (Toughen); "By what means can fire be obtained? It may be that we have it existing with us." 69
And Faarori took a rock from the sea--it was limestone--for the hand attrition, and he took a great stone upon the shore for the under attrition; he rubbed until the limestone got diminished by the land stone, but no fire was kindled. And he tried friction upon green wood, upon banana trunks, and upon food itself, but to no purpose. Then he took a toa spear and applied it to the stone; it got heated and worn short, and the stone got deeply indented, but no fire was kindled. 149
But one day Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-a happened to be looking at a large red fly which alighted upon a dry fau branch, and there it disappeared. Then he thought to himself: "What now perhaps there is fire in the dry fau." And his wife said to him: "What are you soliloquizing about?" He answered: "A great red fly alighted upon this dry branch and then disappeared, so I am thinking that there may be fire in this fau tree." 126
"That is right." said the wife, "split open that dry branch, and try to obtain fire by friction." 23
Then the husband took the piece of wood and split it open, and the wife and friends came also to see the attempt to produce fire by friction. The piece of wood used for under attrition, was a big piece of the dry fau, and the upper attrition wood was a small piece of it cut into shape. 93
It was not long when fire was kindled! Tuturi pulled out his hair, one by one, to keep the fire burning, but it did not blaze; then he got seaweed for tinder, and still it did not burn. Finally he got some dry house grass, rubbed it till it was pliant and held it against the fire in the wood, and then it blazed but soon went out. They applied dry coconut husk, and that caught fire but only smoldered. Then they went for dry kindling wood and applied it, and soon a great fire was burning as brightly as the flashes of lightning. 148
And they all applauded and exclaimed: "Oh, what a treasure we have in this fire! There will now be an end to eating uncooked food." 43
And they went for kindling wood for the fire--it was all dry wood--and a great fire was made. Night came and the face of the earth was illuminated with the fire; then there were loud praises and many people came to see it. The king came, and the fire was presented to him. 82
And the kind said: "What can retain this fire that it may last until daytime?" The wife of Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-a replied, "There is good wood, O our king, the decayed tutui [Aleurites], it will smolder when decayed." 68
And so it was that people obtained fire and perpetuated it. The fau wood was rubbed, the dry house grass was softened by the hand, placed against the fire, and blown upon; the grass blazed, coconut husk was applied and retained the fire smoldering, dry kindling wood was applied and it made a great fire, and the face of the earth was illuminated at night. Coconut husk and the decayed tutui kept the fire perpetually smoldering; the candle-nuts were beaten open, they were strung together, and lighted with fire and thus the face of the earth was illuminated at night. 172
Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-a was the first person who cooked food upon this land. And the first food that he cooked was the banana called rerera'i [a large round kind]. It was found very good food, and from that time people became accustomed to cooked meals, and their digestive organs derived comfort form the warmth of the food. 101
But as for darkness, let it be banished away! But carry it whither? Carry it to the ocean in the east! Carry it whither? Bear it to the temple of Havai'i, here! Carry it whither? Carry it to the feet of the birds that alight inland! Carry darkness whither? Take it away to the nether lands! Carry it whither? Take it to the sun half lost to view! 95
So Ao-ao-ma-ra'i-a was the father of fire, and Ma-hui-e, his wife, perpetuated it, so as to keep it from dying. 38
Candle-nuts strung together with the stem of the coconut leaf formed the only lamp known to Tahitians formerly. Tahitians knew how to melt coconut milk for hair oil, but they never placed tapers in it for light. It was the English missionaries who taught them to make lamps of coconut oil, and the first lamps in Tahiti were made by placing sand in a coconut shell, and standing a taper of tapa or cotton twisted upon a piece of coconut leaf rib in it, surrounded with oil. 141
The great attrition stone named Faarori is standing at Tainu'u (Moving-ocean) to this day, at Uturoa.
Henry: 429-430 1
Source: Hotu, Pufara-motu, and Mo'o, priests of Porapora; and Tataura and his grandson, chieftains of Motu-tapu in Ra'iatea
Date of recitation:: Hotu: 1825; Pufara-motu: 1825; Mo'o: 1825; Tataura: 1885; Tataura's grandson: 1885 78
Maui, the high priest
E Mā-ū-i te i'oa o te pure i ni'a i te marae, no Mā-ū-i tahu'a o te fa'atupu i te ha'apa'ora'a pure. 47
I te pe'era'a o te ra'i i ni'a te fano maira te atua na roto ia Atea, e te noho haere ra te taata e ati roa a'e i te ao nei; ia rahi rа te marae e te tahu'a e au ai, ia fari'i maita'i hia te atua. Ua rave papū ihora Mā-ū-i i ta'na ohipa toro'a tahu'a nui a te atua mai te anotau i te pō mai. 136
Ho'e roa ra ino to taua ao nei, aore e 'ohipa i oti maita'i no te hiti-ra'a e te topara'a 'oi'oi o te rā. A tahu i te ahi mā'a i te po'ipo'i, e a ha'opo'i, aore i ā te mā'a, pō atura; a ama te ahimā'a e a hua'i, aore i pa'ia maita'i te taata ua po faahou atura! Ai rorо noa'tura te taata i te ma'a no taua ahi-mā'a ra, no te rū i taua mahana poto ra, e teruteru noa 'tura te utu o te taata i te ma'ero no te amu raa i te ape 'aiota. 200
O uru po'i te rā i haere atu ai Mā-ū-i i to'na tere fa'a'ati fenua e fa'ati'a i te marae i te fenua api, e fa'anoho haere i te tahu'a pipi na'na. O te tau Anā-mua, o nuu tautau iho i mua, o nu'u tautau a'e i muri. Ua tae noa ihora i tua ro'ohia ihora i te pō. E ao a'e a tautau Mā-ū-i i te fenua i piri mario i raro a'e i te moana, ro'ohia i te pō! 167
Tae atura i te fenua, o Fa'anā te fenua, te patu ra i te marae, o Apo'o-'ao te io'a o taua marae ra, e ho'e noa iho 'ofa'i, o te ofa'i faoa, i te tu'ura'a i tereira mahana, pō atura. Po'ipo'i a'era, ua rave fa'ahou atura i te ohipa, e te patu ra i te marae, tahataha maira te mahana. 127
A ite rа o Mā-ū-i, a ta'io i te hihi rа e ua ahura. Ua ahuru ato'a te taura ta'na i rave, mau roa a'era te hihi o te ra iā Mā-ū-i, ta'amu hia 'tura i ni'a i te mato, aore e 'aueuera'a. Mau roa 'tura te rā, patu ana'e atura te taata i te marae e fa'aoti hope maita'i atura i taua mahana ra. E ia oti roa, tu'u fa'ahou atura Mā-ū-i i te hihi rā tere fa'ahou atura te rā mai muta'a ihora. 181
Fa'aoti atura ra Mā-ū-i i ta'na ohipa i reira; tu'u atura i te tahu'a i te marae apо, i 'Apoo-'ao, ho'i atura i Havai'i e ta'na ato'a ra tau nu'u, e apo'opo'o i te mau atua e te taata e nafea rа e roa'i te mahana.
Mā-ū-i (Invocation) was the name of prayers in the temple, so called after Mā-ū-i the priest, the founder of religious rites. 46
After the sky was raised, the gods were flying through Atea, and people were establishing themselves throughout the earth, but there was need of more temples and more priests, in order to receive the gods in a befitting manner. Then Mā-ū-i entered fully into his duties as high priest of the gods from the period of darkness. 101
There was but one drawback to this world, no work could be properly accomplished because the sun rose and set too soon. When an oven was heated in the morning and the food was placed in it, the victuals were not cooked when nightfall came; when the food was cooked and the oven was opened, people had not properly partaken of their meal when it was night again! So they ate rare food from the oven, in those short days, and their lips became swollen from irritation in eating ape (Alocasia macrorrhiza) only half cooked. 162
The sun was just rising when Mā-ū-i set out on his journey to visit all lands, to build temples upon new lands, and to establish there the priesthood which he had trained. It was during the period of Antares (in Scorpio) and he had a fleet passing on before and a fleet pressing on behind. They had no sooner got out to sea when they were benighted. When daylight came, Mā-ū-i fished up land that was jambed beneath the sea, and they were again benighted! 142
At length they reached an island named Fa'ana (Pacify), and they were erecting a temple--Apo'o-'ao (Heron-pit) was the name of that temple--and only one stone, the chief cornerstone, was laid that day when night came. The following morning they resumed their work, and they were making the wall of the temple when the sun began to decline. 98
When Mā-ū-i saw that, he counted the rays of the sun and there were ten. Then he took ten ropes with which he firmly secured the rays of the sun, and he tied them to a rock so that they could not be shaken. The sun was thus fixed, and the people built the walls of the temple and completed it that day. And when all was finished, Mā-ū-i let go the rays, and the sun continued its course in the same manner as before. 122
But Mā-ū-i ended his work there; he left priests with the new temple named 'Apoo-'ao, and returned to Havai'i with his fleets to consult with the gods and people what to do to prolong the day.
Henry: 431-433 1
Source: Hotu, Pufara-motu, and Moo, and added to by Mrs. Nu'u Hills, of Honolulu, a native of Vata'oae, Tahiti
Date of recitation:: Hotu: 1825; Pufara-motu: 1825; Moo: 1825; Mrs. Nu'u Hills: 1901 64
Noosing of the sun
Rari rahi atura o Mā-ū-i-i-upo'o-varu, Mā-ū-i-ti'iti'i o te Rā, i to'na ra metua, i te rā. Ua riri no te mea aita te metua vahine i amu i te mā'a mai te au, e ua aroha i te mea i pu'u noa, to'na utu i te ape aiota. Ua riri ato'a i te iteraa e aore i tere maita'i te ohipa a te tua'ana, no te poto o te mahana. 144
Hamani a'era Mā-ū-i i te here e here i te rā. Here pa'ari ta'na i ha'a, e here ro'ā, e here mati, e here 'ie'ie, e here more, e te here nape, o te tutau ana'e hia i te tai Rave atoa 'tura i te firi rouru o Hina-hina-tō-tō-io, te tuahine a'e o Mā-ū-i. 113
Haere atura Mā-ū-i i te auaha ana mai roto mai, hi'o atura te torotoro ri'i ra te hihi rā i tai. 'Ou'a 'tura i ni'a i te a'au, te roroa maira te hihi mahana, e i te fāra'a mai o te pū mahana, taora atura i te here na ni'a iho, e mau atura i ni'a i te 'ai o te rā. 120
'Ou'a maira Mā-ū-i i ni'a i te fenua mai ni'a mai i te a'au, ta'amu 'oi'oi atura i te taura o te rā i ni'a i te ho'e ofa'i tū roa i fatata mai, e tia'i ihora i te hope'a. Ha'uti'uti maite ihora te rā i roto i te taura, otu'itu'i atura, te opua ra o Mā-ū-i e 'ou'a 'tu i ni'a i te rā. 134
5. Naō atura o Uahea te ta'o i te tamaiti: "E ara pa'i oe e Mā-ū-i, a ama a'e oe i te rā." Aore rа Mā-ū-i i taia, tei nia 'tura i te rа te ta'ahira'a. 70
Naō atura o Mā-ū-i: "Eiaha rа! O vau teie, o Mā-ū-i! ua mate roa oe ia'u 'a'uanei." 44
Te haere ihora te puai o te rā! ta'i tua rau e i ni'a, pa'apa'a a'era, motumotu ihora te rahi o taua mau here ra, toe noa ihora te here rouru o Hina ra. 68
Ua fa'ateniteni a'era o Mā-ū-i i ni'a iho i te rā: 'E'ita oe e ora ia'u; O Mā-ū-i teie, Mā-ū-i-nui, Mā-ū-i-ti'iti'i-o-te-rā!" 66
Ua parau maira te rā; "A mau iho nei au i te here rouru o Hina-hina-tō-tō-io na e! Ia ora vau!" 46
Ua naō atura Mā-ū-i: "E ore oe e ora! Ahiri oe i haere rii noa, e ama ia te mā'a na ta'u metua vahine, e eita ia ta'u tua'ana e mau noa ia oe i ta'na ravera'a ohipa. Ua haere 'oi'oi noa rā oe." 98
Ua tao atura te Rā; "Ia mate au ra, eita ia ta outou maa e noa'a, e ore roa e maramarama no te patura'a mara'e, e riro rа ei poiri ana'e. E tu'u rа oe ia'u e na'u e fa'atere maita'i i ta outou ohipa." 93
Naō ihora o Mā-ū-i; "E'ita anei o e haavare mai?" 26
Ua ta'o atura te Rā, "E ore au e ha'avare, e tatara rа oe i teie taura mauiui rahi!" 40
Ta'ahi atura Mā-ū-i i te pū o te ra, tahi pū e paruparu atura; tatara atura i te taura rouru. Haere rii maite atura te rā aore i rū faahou te fano i te ra'i. 75
Te mau noa maira te taura o Mā-ū i te rā, e itea noa hia e te taata. O vai-rorea te i'oa o taua mau taura a Mā-ū-i ra e mau noa mai i nia i te ra. 73
Maita'i roa 'tura te ao nei; ta'i rua 'tura ahi mā'a i 'ama i te mahana ho'e, pa'ia 'tura te taata i te mā'a rave maita'i. Oti nahonaho maita'i atura te 'ohipa. Maururu a'era Mā-ū-i i to'na metua, i te rā, e maururu ana'e atura to te ao nei i te rā. 114
The following is an interesting addition to the legend 18
Te vai ra te ana o Mā-ū-i i te moti ra'a 'tu o To'а-hotu e o Vai-rа-ō. Tei tahatai atu i te papa o te pae i Vai-rа-ō tahi tapua'e avae o Mā-ū-i i te ta'ahi ra'a 'tu i ni'a i te a'au, e tei ni'a i te a'au te tahi tapua'e avae, i to'na here ra'a 'tu i te rā. Te vai ra te vai inu a Mā-ū-i i roto i te papa i te tai i piha'i atu i te tapua'e avae i tahatai ra. 161
Tei Mata'oae te vaira'a o te ofa'i i tamau hia te taura o te rā; tei piha'i 'ho i te vai, o Vāvi e ua motu te 'ofa'i i te taviri-ra'a o taua mau taura a Mā-ū-i ra, o te ta'o noa hia. 85
Tei te mou'a ra o Pō-'uo-mata i uta 'tu te ana i ta'o hia e, te ofa'ara'a otaha a Mā-ū-i, i teie a tau. 49
The state of the world after the sun went slowly was changed 15
Huru ē atura te ao nei. He'e maira te tua, e ahiahi, topa maira te ua ora, e ua nui, e ua rotu maira. He'e maira te tua, e ahiahi, e ua 'iritiriti, e vaevaearō, e te ua toriri. He'e maira te tua, e ao, e pati'i ata, e rauma'i. He'e maira te tua, e ahiahi, e tohu-'ura, e ra'i aneane. He'e maira te tua, e ao, e ra'i pō'ia, muri maira e 'ura auara'i. A toto 'ura aua ra'i, a mea aua ra'i, e ra'i to pura, e vero. He'e te tua e ahiahi, e hei'ura, e anuanua ava'e maira, e ua maira. He'e te tua, e ao, e rā hihi maira, e rā tō vevero, e rā tō hihira, e rā tū nu'u. A pau te fenua te uira, te fafatu-tiri, te anuanua, te tapu-tea te tohu 'ura; a pau te fanau te 'uti'uti tohu tama'i.
Now Mā-ū-i-upo'o-varu, Mā-ū-i-ti'iti'i, son of the sun, became enraged with his father, the sun. He was enraged because his mother could not enjoy her food, and he was sorry for her having her lips swollen from eating ill-cooked ape. He was enraged also in finding that the work of his elder brother could not progress properly because of the shortness of the days. 115
So Mā-ū-i made nooses with which to catch the sun. He made strong nooses of the bark of roa, of mati, of ieie, of fau, and of coconut sennit, all of which he steeped in the sea. And he also took a braid of hair of his sister, Hina-hina-to-to-io (Hina-fair-whose-every-hair-drew-drew). 95
Then Mā-ū-i went to the mouth of the cave, from within, and looked, and saw the rays of the sun just appearing out at sea. He leaped on to the reef as the rays were lengthening, and when the sun's disk appeared, he threw his nooses over it, and they held around the neck of the sun. 85
Mā-ū-i leaped back on to the land from the reef, he quickly twisted the ropes of the sun around a long stone that stood close by, and fastened them, and awaited the result. The sun struggled within the ropes and jerked them, and so Mā-ū-i purposed leaping up onto it. 83
And Uahea said to her son: "Look well to thyself, Mā-ū-i, lest thou be burned in the sun." But Mā-ū-i had no fear, and he went up and stood upon the sun. 50
And Mā-ū-i said: "Desist now! This is I, Mā-ū-i! Thou wilt die by my hands soon." 27
The sun gained strength, he went on for some distance and all the nooses got burned and broken except the one made of Hina's hair. 39
Then Mā-ū-i thus boasted as he stood upon the sun: "Thou canst not escape me; this is Mā-ū-i, great Mā-ū-i, Mā-ū-i-ti'i-ti'i-o-te-ra!" 52
The sun answered: "Ah, I am caught by the noose of hair from Hina-hina-to-to-io! Let me go!" 29
Mā-ū-i replied: "You will not escape! Had you gone slowly, my mother's food would have got cooked, and my brother would not have had to hold you in doing his work. But you have been going fast." 61
The sun said: "If I die, you cannot find food, there will be no light by which to build temples, all will be in darkness. But let me go, and I will cause your work to prosper well." 50
Then Mā-ū-i said: "Will you not deceive me?" 17
"I will not deceive you," replied the sun, "but unfasten this very painful rope!" 25
Then Mā-ū-i stamped upon the disk of the sun so that it got cracked and weakened, and he unfastened the rope of hair. The sun then went slowly, and never again hastened its course in the sky. 58
The other ropes of Mā-ū-i still remain attached to the sun; they are easily seen by people. Vai-rorea (Water-pushed-up) is the name of those ropes of Mā-ū-i that remain on the sun. 64
So the world became perfect, two ovens of food were cooked in a day, and people were satisfied with properly prepared victuals. Work was then done with system. Mā-ū-i was pleased with his father, the sun, and all the world was also pleased with him. 75
The following is an interesting addition to this legend 18
The cavern of Mā-ū-i is on the boundary between To'a-hotu and Vai-rа-ō. On the rocky shore of the Vai-rа-ō side is one footprint of Mā-ū-i as he stepped away out on to the reef, and upon the reef is the other footprint, which he made as he noosed the sun. A pool of drinking water that was Mā-ū-i's is in a rock in the sea close by the footprint of the shore. 122
In Mata'oae stands the stone around which were attached the ropes of the sun; it is by the river Vavi (Rashness), and around it are spiral indentations, said to be from Mā-ū-i's ropes. 60
Upon the mountain Pō'uo-mata (Night-of-white-face) inland, is a cave which is called the nest of Mā-ū-i's man-of-war-birds, to this day. 44
The state of the world after the sun went slowly was changed 15
The world was then changed. The sea rolled, and it was evening, and there fell hailstones which were great raindrops and there followed heavy rain of a day's duration. The sea rolled and it was evening, and there fell showery rain, drizzling rain, and pouring rain. The sea rolled, and it was day, and there appeared broad, flat clouds and fine weather. The sea rolled and it was evening, and there appeared red signs and a clear cloudless sky. The sea rolled and it was day, and there was a lowering sky followed by threatening redness. When threatening redness knocks, when it works, the sky carries flashes, and storms follow. The sea rolled and it was evening, then there was a red wreath [moon halo], a lunar rainbow, and rain followed. The sea rolled and it was day, and there followed the sun with rays, the sun that draws showers, the sun with long slanting rays, the sun that stands over armies. There were produced lightning, thunder, the rainbow, the mock-rainbow (pale-covenant), ominous redness, and there were produced flashes ominous of war.
Henry: 433-436 1
Heralding of the fish
Teie te taupo'o no Tahiti, oia te matarufau i te parau fa'ataratara o te fenua. 37
Ha'amata i te fenua i ta'a 'tu, o Tai-'a-rapu, i Hiti o te ara pi'opi'o: Ei ha'amatara'a o te afi'i i'a o Matarufau. Ei ihu no te i'a o Mou-'oro. Ei apo'o-ihu o Ana-reiа. Ei papauru atau o Tiare-iti. O Horo-nui-a-Pai-i-te-ruea i Anuhi ra te papauru 'aui. Ei 'auae ni'a o Tahuareva. Ei 'auae raro Tau-tira. Ei niho o te i'a o Po-fatu-ra'a. Ei arero o To'e-hau-hau. Ei 'arapo'a o Vai-turumu i Pueu. E mata 'atau o Fara-'ari. Ei mata aui o Ete ahu. O raro a'e i te 'arapo'a o Pueu e o Afa'ahiti. 230
Ei pehau 'aui o Hitia'a. Ei pehau 'atau o Papara. Ei 'i'o tua Te-pori-o-nu'u. Ei 'i'o aro te Pori-o-mano. Ei topatopa no te i'a o Pu-na-au-ia. Ei ha'apori i te atau o 'Utu-ai-mahu-rau i Pae'a. 90
Ei piha'a o te i'a o Vai-hi-ria. Ei tara ni'a o Orohenā. Ei tara raro o Matavai. Ei opū Hapaiano'o. Ei mafatu Tapahi. ei ha'apori i te aui Te-one-ahua. Ei pito o Motu-a'au. Ei pufenua Te-'etu-roaroa. Ei tau-upu Tahara'a. Ei 'a'o no te i'a Pufau i Hotuarea i Fa'a'a. 128
Ei firifiri Fanatea, te 'otia ia e moti atu ai ai o Fa'a'a, e ha'amata ai Puna'auia. Ei tima'a aui o Torea. Ei tima'a 'atau o Tata'a. 66
Inaha rа te hi'u o te i'a rahi o Tahiti nei! O 'Outu-maoro te hope'a o taua hi'u nei. 37
O Tahiti Toa. 6
O Tahiti-nui, o Tahiti-iti, 12
I ta ana'i hia; 7
'Oia o Tahiti niu roa, 11
O Hiti roa i ni'a. 8
Teie te parau taratara na to Tahiti 16
Tahiti nui a Tū. 8
O Tahiti a 'Oropa'a. 9
O Tahiti-nui pai'umara'a o te rā. 16
O Tahiti-nui roa i hiti ni'a; 13
Na te tua te rā te pai'uma. 12
O Tahiti i te afeafe rau. 12
O Tahiti o te Hiti-i-te-ara-pi'opi'o. 16
O Tahiti-nui tae pahi, 10
O Tahiti rei pahi, 8
O Tahiti-nui moe aru, 10
Tahiti-nui ia rua papa. 11
O Tahiti o te 'ura tea. 10
Na o 'Orohenā, te tara ni'a 12
E tū i te ra'i atea! 10
E ti'a te ti'i 'ura i na taha nui, 14
Tei ni'a mai te roto. 9
'Aura'a o te Mo'orā 'ura. 12
O Tahiti-nui mare'are'a! 11
Onioni te moa 7
I uta i mahu rau. 8
O Tahiti teie o te vai uri rau, 15
Ua rau te huru o te 'oto o te manu. 15
Tahiti rahi, 'ata'ata noa! 11
Tahiti-iti, Mo'orea! 9
Mo'orea e fa'aau hia i te fe'e, 15
Mo'orea i te rаrа varu, 'anaira'a mou'a 16
Oti'a o na mataeina'a e varu. 14
Mo'orea o te a'era'a o te mata'i. 15
E fenua topa i te muri a hoe 13
Ei utari i te tere ra'a mai 13
O Tahiti-nui i te hiti o te ra'i. 14
Tahiti-iti i tau hia na e te atua, 16
Fenua i tau hia e te Ari'i Ra'apoto, 17
I te tau 'a'ore e atua i Tahiti-nui. 17
O 'Aimeo (Ai-meho), te tua ro'i i te hau o te tōā; 24
O te horora'a o te tōā i ha'ati hia i Tahiti-nui. 24
To all these boastings Ra'iateans would answer 16
"Tahiti 'eve'eve! 7
Tahiti-nui manahune, 9
Tahiti-nui atua 'ore, 10
Tahiti nui moe'arue, 10
Tahiti rahi fa'aea, 9
O Tahiti fa'aro'ore, 9
Tahiti rahi fa'efa'ea, 10
Tahiti reomona. 7
Tahiti-iti e tu mai i hiti, 12
Mo'orea i te rārа varu e, 11
'Oe ato'a tahi pae o to matou i'a! 16
Tahiti-nui e Tahiti-iti 11
Mai Havai'i nui te a uta, 12
Havai'i nui te a tai miti, miti 14
E vai te pō. 6
Havai'i nui 'a poti'i 'au, a Terehe! 16
Te roro iti e, te roro taitai e, 14
E ara ia Tahiti, 8
A vare, ia raro ino vau e! 12
E i'a na maou Tahiti. 10
E mautai 'ura tea ta 'outou, 14
Te pu'e noa rаrа ta matou 'ura 'u'ute." 14
To this retort the Tahitians would reply 12
"Eaha ho'i to Tahiti e 'ino ai ai Ra'iatea? E topara'a mahana ho'i e te avae na matou o Ra'iatea. E fari'i pehu ho'i na matou o Ra'iatea. E hiti mai te mahana i Tahiti nei, e ma'iri atu i Ra'iatea na; e pai'uma te avae i Tahiti nei e ma'iri atu i raro na. Na te hiti'a-o-te-rā nei te 'otaha te ma'ue i te po'ipo'i, e ei Ra'iatea na i te ahiahi fa'atopa 'tu ai i to ratou huruhuru, e ho'i noa mai ai i Tahiti nei. O Tahiti o Hiti-ni'a, o Ra'iatea o HIti-raro. 208
O raro ho'i outou i tō'o'a na, o ni'a matou i te hiti'a o te rā nei. Ia tae mai to Ra'iatea i Tahiti nei, te parau ra e te fa'atere nei i ni'a, e o ni'a mau а ia. Ia ho'i atu rа ratou i Ra'iatea, e na'o ia e, te fa'atere nei i raro, e o raro iho а ho'i o Ra'iatea no Tahiti."
This is the heralding of Tahiti, to assert its greatness in extolling the land. 23
Beginning with the peninsula, Tai-'a-rapu, Border of the crooked paths: Matarufau (Herald) is the crown of the head of the fish [the eastern extremity of the bluffs]. Mou-'oro (Extinct-warrior) is the nose of the fish [on the Bluffs]. Ana-reiа (Dry-caves) are the nostrils [they are twin caves]. Tiare-iti (Small-tiare, an islet to the east) is the right cheek. Horo-nui-a-Pai-i-te-ruea (The-great-ascent-of-Pai-into-the-mist) at Anuhi (Sliding-off) is the left cheek. Mount Tahuareva (Floor-in-space) is the upper jaw. Tau-tira (Set-mast) cape is the under jaw. [The cave] Po-fatu-ra'a (Darkness-ruled-by-sacredness) contains the teeth of the fish (rocks). To'e-hau-hau (Cold-dampness) is the tongue [at Tautira]. Vai-turumu (Water-of-confused-sound in Pueu (White-jambo) is the throat. Fara-ari (Tapering-fara) is the right eye. Ete-ahu (Flinch-from-heat) is the left eye. Pueu and Afa'ahiti (Make-mention, border-of-divultion) are the under part of the throat. 299
Hiti'a is the left pectoral fin. Papara (Yellow fort) is the right pectoral fin. Te-pori-o-nu'u (The-fatness-of-hosts) is the back caudal flesh. Te-pori-o-mano (Fatness-of-thousands) is the under caudal flesh. Pū-na-au-ia (The-trumpet-is-mine) is the lower extremity of the abdomen of the fish. 'Utu-'ai-mahu-rau (Cape-eating-mists) in Pa'ea (Fort-of-refuge) is the fatness of the right side. 121
Vai-hi-ria (Water-gushing-later) lake is the blowhole of the fish (like those of a whale). Mount Orohenā (Front-dorsal-fin) is the upper horn. Matavai (Beginning-of-water) is the horn of the ventral fin. Hapaiano'o (Confluent-waters) is the full part of the abdomen. Tapahi (Cleaver) is the heart. Te-one-ahua (Heated-sand) is the fatness of the left side. Motu-a'au (Reef-islet) is the umbilicus. Te-'etu-roaroa (Long-uprooting) is the central point. Tahara'a (Slope) is the anal fin. Pu-fau (Clump-of-fau) at Hotuarea (Bearing-space) in Fa'a'a (To heat) is the fat from the fish. 187
Fana-tea (White-bow) is the caul that is the terminus between Fa'a'a (To-heat) and Puna'auia (The-trumpet-is-mine). Torea (Plover, a hill on the left side of the block house at Fa'a'a) is the beginning of the caudal fin on the left side. Tata'a (Precipitous) hill is the right corresponding side of the caudal fin. 101
Behold, then, the tail of this great fish, Tahiti! Outu-maoro (Long-cape, at Puna'auia) is the end of this tail. 37
Tahiti of the warriors. 8
Great-Tahiti and Little-Tahiti, 11
Standing in a row together; 8
They are Tahiti the long tract of land, 11
The long upper border. 6
Here are boastful sayings of the Tahitians 15
Great-Tahiti of Tū, 8
Tahiti of 'Oro-pa'a (Dauntless warrior, the god of the ocean). 21
Great-Tahiti, the mounting place of the sun. 14
Great-Tahiti, long tract of the upper border; 13
Upon its back climbs the sun. 7
Tahiti of many peaks, 7
Tahiti with Hiti-i-te-ara-pi'opi'o [Taiarapu-peninsula], 23
Great-Tahiti which arrived like a ship, 13
Tahiti with the figurehead [Taiarapu Bluffs], 16
Great-Tahiti lying in woods, 9
Great-Tahiti of rocky chasms, 8
Tahiti of the yellow feathers. 10
Behold 'Orohena (First-dorsal-fin), the upper horn 14
That stands in the open sky! 6
The feather seekers frequent its great slopes, 15
Upon the summit is the lake 9
Where swims the red-feathered duck. 10
Great-Tahiti of the golden haze! 11
The fowls challenge boastfully 8
Amid the inland mists. 6
This is Tahiti of many shaded waters, 11
Varied are the songs of the birds. 10
Grand, jovial Tahiti! 7
Little-Tahiti, Mo'orea (Offshoot)! 12
Mo'orea compared to an octopus, 12
Mo'orea of eight radiations of mountain ranges 19
Dividing it into eight districts. 10
Mo'orea, which is struck by the wind. 9
Land which fell over the helm 7
And followed in the wake 8
Of Great-Tahiti in the horizon. 11
Little-Tahiti first alighted on by the gods, 12
Land upon which settled King Ra'apoto (Brief-sacredness, a god), 18
While Great-Tahiti had no gods. 10
'Aimeo (Eater-in-refuge), the bed of peace for the warrior; 22
Thither fled the warriors, when closely pursued in Great-Tahiti. 19
To all these boastings Ra'iateans would answer 16
"Tahiti torn away! 6
Great plebian Tahiti, 8
Great-Tahiti without gods, 9
Great boastful Tahiti, 8
Grand heedless Tahiti, 7
Disobedient Tahiti, 8
Grand capricious Tahiti, 9
Tahiti of insinuating voice. 12
O Little-Tahiti, standing on the border, 12
Mo'orea with eight radiations, 12
Thou art also a portion of our own fish! 14
Great-Tahiti and Little-Tahiti. 11
From great Havai'i sweeping inland, 12
Great Havai'i sweeping out into the salt, salt ocean 19
That stands from darkness. 5
Great Havai'i of the girl swimmer, Terehe! 14
O little brain, O tempered brain, 11
Beware of Tahiti, 7
Lest thou be deceived, and I get worsted below! 15
A fish of ours is Tahiti. 9
Yellow feathers may abound with you, 12
But red feathers have we in abundance." 13
To this retort the Tahitians would reply 12
"How can Tahiti be underrated by Ra'iatea? The setting place of our sun and moon is Ra'iatea. The recipient of our rubbish is Ra'iatea. The sun rises over Tahiti, and sets over Ra'iatea; the moon ascends over Tahiti and sets down there. The man-of-war-bird flies from the east here in the morning, and arrives at Ra'iatea to drop its feathers in the evening, and return free to Tahiti. Tahiti is Hiti-ni'a (Upper-border), Ra'ia-atea is Hiti-raro (Lower-border). 156
You are indeed below in the west, and we are above in the east here. When Ra'iateans come to Tahiti, they say they are sailing up, and it is really up. But when they return to Ra'iatea, they say they are sailing down, and Ra'iatea is really down from Tahiti."
Henry: 437-439 1
Source: King Pomare II; Mahine, a chief; Tamera, a priest
Date of recitation:: King Pomare II: 1822 and/or 1824; Mahine: 1822 and/or 1824; Tamera: 1822 and/or 1824 55
The departure of the fish
E'ere teie i to Tahiti tiaraa mai tahito mai. E mea tahiti-hia mai Tahiti i hiti'a nei mai Havai'i-nui mai, no reira taua ioa nei o Tā-hiti. E i'a nui i te tere ra'a mai, riro fa'ahou ai ei fenua, mai te Pahi rei mua nui ra. 106
O te tahi ia pae no Havai'i, tu'ati atu ai i Uporu (Taha'a), ua api roa to tai mai Hiva i Opoa i uta, e tae roa-'tu ai i tai i Uporu. E fenua tū tahi, o Havai'i-nui te а uta e te а tai. 84
E fenua o Tahiti no na aito ra, o Vai-ta-fa'i, o Terа-tai, o Tai-to'a, o Tautai, o Tai-nui-atea, o Tai-ta'ata, o Marua-to'a, o Pau-fata, o Peu-rū-aro, o Mārō, o Mavete, o Te-uri, e o Te-'ehu. 84
I te ho'e tau, e unuunura'a tei Opoa, te utuafare a te atua; e mo'a i Havai'i-nui, 'aore i 'aaoa o moa, 'aore i 'aoa o 'uri, 'aore pua'a, 'aore ta'ata i oriori haere. Aore mata'i, manaia rahi to te tai. Tae a'era i te ho'e mahana i tereira tau, hara 'aera te ho'e poti'i purotu, o Tere-he, o te haere huna noa e 'au haere i te vai i te pae fare. Riri maira te atua, fa'atupu atura i te hopi'i e paremo atura Tere-he. 'Au maira te ho'e tuna nui 'aita 'tu, 'a'ore i itea i tera tau e i teie, mai roto mai i te ho'e 'o'ō i raro i te tahora vai, o te horomi'i noa i taua poti'i ra. 261
Ho'e ta'ata rava'a ore i 'ite i taua mea ra, 'oia te tupuna vahine ruhiruhia o te poti'i, o Mou'a-ha'a, o te hi'o e 'a'ita ra i te fare, haere mata'u noa 'tura i te atua e imi; ite a'era e ua na te vai te haere, e i te taera'a i reira, inaha te topa ra i raro a'e i te vai, e ria ri'i a'e riro atura i te tuna nui, horomi'i hia 'tura. Topa hia 'i te i'oa o te tupuna vahine, o Mavete-'ai-tuna. 171
A uru rа te tuna i te varua o te poti'i, a hae, a pahae i te a'a a rаrа, a topatopa te ra'au! A ha'amata, a oti, o pera ua noa'a ta'na i'a nui i te fenua i tae'a hia na te ara hohonu i raro roa i te fenua. Tei Opoa te afi'i, tei tai roa i Uporu te hi'u, te tu'u ra'a ia te i'a i tai, a ta'ai na. A fā roa i te tai, tai fā roa a te i'a taui ra'i; teie a riro ai Tahiti nei. 164
'A'ore te atua i fa'arue i te unuunura'a i Opoa no teie mea, maori rа o Tū-rahu-nui, tahu'a a Ta'aroa te fa'atere mai i taua i'a nei; tei ni'a 'oia i te afi'i, i Tai-'a-rapu, i te terera'a mai, fa'anoho atura i hiti, ho'i atura i te nu'u atua ra. 112
E tūra'a nui to te i'a i te tere ē ra'a, 19
A fā 'tu ai i te pae-ra'i hou 14
O te ra'i hou e! 7
O Tahiti, urua e te varua 12
O te poti'i ra, o Terehe. 10
Mai te pahi rei mua nui ra o Tahiti i te tae ra'a mai i Hiti-ni'a. Ei tara ni'a te mou'a teitei hau, o 'Orohenā, Ei tara muri, o Tahiti-iti, Mo'orea i te rara varu, e fenua topa i te muri a hoe, ei utari no te terera'a mai o Tahiti-nui. 105
Tū noa mai nei Havai'i i to'na ra vaira'a, vai taha'a noa mai nei Uporu i ta'ohia'i e o Taha'a, ta'a ē noa 'i i te area i ropū. Ei topatopa no te i'a na fenua ra o Me-tū (Meti'a), e o Te-ti'a-roa, i te fa'aera'a mai i Hiti ni'a Ei topatopa no Mo'ore'a Mai'ao-iti, i te To'o'a-o-te-rā. 130
'A'ore hui ari'i i ni'a i Tahiti a te toa i te tere ra'a mai, o na fatu toa ra e te va'a mata'eina'a te tia'i i te fenua i te ta'a ē ra'a; i ta'o hia'i e o Tahiti-manahune.
Tahiti did not always stand where it now is. Tahiti was transplanted here in the east from Great Havai'i (Ra'iatea), hence the name Tā-hiti (Transplanted). It came away as a huge fish, and then became land again; it resembled a ship with a great figurehead. 84
It formed part of Havai'i, connecting it with Uporu (Taha'a). The sea was filled with it inland from Hiva (Clan) by Opoa (Indented) to the outer border of Uporu. All was one land, Great Havai'i, that swept inwards and outwards. 70
Tahiti was a tract of land owned by the warriors, Vai-ta-fa'i (Fixed-by-revelation), Tera-tai (That-sea), Tai-to'a (Rocky-sea), Tautai (Fisherman), Tai-nui-atea (Great-boundless-sea), Tai-ta'ata (Sea-of-people), Marua-to'a (Fall-of-rocks), Pau-fata (Consumed-on-altar), Peu-ru-aro (Habit-of-speedy-fighting), Maro (Persistance), Mavete (Unfolding), Te-uri (Darkness), and Te-'ehu (The-blonde). 126
There was once a time of sacred restriction at Opoa, the home of the gods; there was hallowedness in Great-Havai'i, when no cock must crow, no dog must bark, no pig, no man must walk abroad. The wind blew not, and the sea was very still. At last, one day during that time, a comely maid, named Tere-he (Wrong-errand), transgressed by stealing away to swim in the river near her home. This displeased the gods, so that they caused numbness to overcome Tere-he and she was drowned. Then there swam up an eel of wonderous size. Such as was never seen before or afterwards, from a great hole in the bed of the river, which swallowed her whole. 187
There was one person powerless to save, who saw all this; it was the aged grandmother of the girl, named Mou'a-ha'a (Low-hill), who, missing her at home, ventured out with fear of the god to find her; and she traced her to the river, where she arrived only to see her sink beneath the water and shortly afterwards taken by the great eel and swallowed whole. For this reason was the grandmother named Mavete-'ai-tune (Expanding-eel-devourer). 131
Now the eel got possessed with the spirit of the girl, it got enraged, it tore up roots as it rushed about, and trees were overthrown! It began and it ended, the corpse had now developed a great fish of the land into which it found a passage deep down in the earth. The head was at Opoa, the tail extended far out from Uporu (Tahaa) and the fish set out to sea and traveled. It appeared away off in the sea, the sea that appeared in the distance, of the fish changing skies; this is what became Tahiti. 159
The gods did not forsake the sacred services at Opoa because of this, only Tu-rahu-nui (Stability-the-great-conjurer), artisan of Ta'aroa, guided the fish in its course; he stood upon its head, Tai-'a-rapu (Disturbed-sea), as it came away; he set it in the east, and then he returned to the host of gods. 98
Oh, the fish stood grandly as it moved away, 12
And verged out towards the new horizon 12
Of a new sky! 3
It was Tahiti, possessed 8
With the soul of the maid, Terehe. 11
Tahiti-nui (Great-Tahiti) arrived like a ship with a great figurehead (high cliff) at Hiti-ni'a (Upper-border). Orohenā, the highest mountain, was the first dorsal fin [as the name implies]. Tahiti-iti (Little-Tahiti), Mo'orea (Off-shoot) with eight radiations [mountain ranges], was the second dorsal fin, land that fell over the helm and followed in the wake of Tahiti-nui. 121
There stands Havai'i in its place, and Uporu remains exposed, for which reason it is called Taha'a(Nakedness); they are severed by a straight [that rolls] between them. The islands of Me-ti'a (Thing-standing) and Te-ti'a-roa (Standing-afar-off) were droppings of the fish as it halted at Hiti-ni'a. Mai'ao-iti (Little-claw) was dropped off from Mo'orea (Offshoot) in the west. 112
There was no royal family upon Tahiti of the warriors as it came away; the warriors who owned it and their clans took charge of the land as it broke loose; for this cause it as named Tahiti-manahune (Plebeian-Tahiti).
Henry: 439-443 1
Cutting the sinews of the fish
Te i'a ra o Tahiti, ua pаpū ia i to'na ra tūra'a hou, ia 'oti'oti rаte uaua ia ore ia ha'uti fa'ahou, e ia pāpū to'na tūra'a i te vahi ho'e, ia pāpū 'amuri noa 'tu e au ai. 84
E 'oro'a o Ha'apapura'a-fenua, e to'i o Te-pā-huru-nui-ma-te-vai-tau, no te 'oro'a 'oti'otira'a i te uaua i'a, ia Tino-rua, te fatu moana. 62
I te tae ra'a 'tu i hiti, te vai ta ho'e noa ra Tahiti e Tai-rapu, 'a'ore i ta'a i te 'o'oa o Te-aua'a, 'are'a rа na ana'ira'a mou'a nui hei, e vao te 'are'a i ropū, i te vahi e haere hia i teienei e te tai. 91
A tū maoro te fenua; a fanau te u'i apп i te fenua, a para te mei'a, a i'i te fe'i, a a'aoa te moa i te uru, a 'aoa te 'uri i tahatai, a pipi'i te niho o te pua'a, a pa'aiea te 'ava, a pua te taro, a farara te tō, a puri te mahi, a taroea te aute i te fenua. O Ta-fa'i toa upo'o tū te ta'o: "E tāpū maite i te uaua o taua i'a nei, e tāpū, e tāpū, e 'e tāpūpū! O Vai-ari, o Vai-'uriri, o 'Ati-ma-ono o Pa-para, e fa'a'ta'a 'tu ai To'a-hutu i te uru tatara, e o Riri, To'o-tea e o Vai-uru i Mata-'o-ae; e fa'ata'a ē atu ia tiri ha'ati te mata'i i te upo'o o te i'a, ia pāpū te nohora'a o te i'a." 272
A haere mai na toa e tinai i te fenua: Tera-tai a 'ite, te rima a tinai, 'aore ra e faufa'a; o Tautai a 'ite, oTai-nui-atea a 'ite, o Tai-ta'ata a 'ite, homai e tinai i te fenua i ta ratou to'i, 'aore ana'e rа i motu ri'i a'e i taua mau 'aito ra. Topa ihora te tahu'a ra o Pou-'ou-ma-fenua i taua vahi ra, o Te-'aua'a. 143
Na 'aito Fare-ti'i-o-te-ra'i; na 'aito o Fare-'a'ama-o-te-pō; na 'aito o te fenua tapu, o Huri-ma'a-vehi; o na 'aito ana'e ia o nu'u ti'a ma raro, i te vao o Tahiti-nui; a 'ite, a tinai i ta ratou to'i, 'a'ore rа e faufa'a! Topa ihora te tahu'a ra, o Pou-'ou-ma-fenua, i taua vahi ra, o Te-'aua'a. 126
Ua ta'o ihora o Ta-fa'i, toa upo'o tū e: "Aria, ei atua! O ta'u atua e 'ite e! O atua i te ra'i, o atua ta'ata, e ha'mai e tinai i te fenua nei! E ta'i au i ta'u faufa'a i tua, no outou te ue. Ta'u moe e 'ite, moe i te pō e moe i te ao, ha'mai e tinai! Ta'u Marama e 'ite, o Marama i te ra'i, o Marama ta'ata, ha'mai e tinai! E ta'i au i ta'u faufa'a ia Marama. 164
'Aore rа e atua i ha'apa'o mai. 14
Te parau maira te 'aito ra o Marua-to'a: "Ia mau maoti to faufa'a! Ei faufa'a 'ha rа to faufa'a? 'Eiha 'ei faufa'a 'irimore. Te huruhuru tei to tua e hutia e matorutoru, e mamae, e 'ore 'oe e ta'i?" 87
"E 'ore," te ta'o ia o Ta-fa'i. 12
"E huruhuru tei to ta'a e hutia, e matorutoru, e mamae, e 'ore 'oe e ta'i?" 32
"E 'ore." 3
"Te huruhuru i to tu'e mata, i to hihi mata, i to pa'oa ihu, e huhutia, e 'ore e matorutoru, e mamae, e 'ore 'oe e ta'i? 50
"E 'ore!" 3
"Ia mau maoti rа i to faufa'a. A rara'o i to va'a, a topa i te i'oa o Te-pā-tea." 35
Te 'arere, o Ta-fa'i, e te tau'a a'e, o 'Ohu-na, a tere raua i to'a i Tupuai i te aro o te Ari'i Marere-nui-marua-to'a. 52
A 'ite mai Marere-nui ua ta'o maira; "Mānava 'orua, Vai-ta-fa'i e 'Ohu-na! A tahi tere nui i tae mai ai i to'a i Tupua'i nei." 57
"E tere nui ia! Te i'a nui ra o Tahiti, e 'o'oti i te uaua, e fa'ata'a ē i te 'arapo'a, ia 'ore ia ha'uti fa'ahou." 53
"'Ovai te tahu'a o tena 'ohipa?" 13
"'A'ore! Ua tamata ana'e te mau toa o te fenua ma te faufa'a 'ore; 'aore roa te i'a i motu ri'i a'e i te to'i te tahu'a." Fa'a'ite hua hia 'tura te parau no taua mau toa ra, e ua ta'o atura te ari'i; "Ahe! Pohera'a mata'i ia." 98
Na'o atura taua na 'arere ra; "Ti'i mai nei maua ia 'oe, e te Ari'i Marere-nui e, e haere a'e e rave ia manuia taua 'ohipa ra." 59
"'Ovai te atua i tena na ha'a?" 13
"'A'ore! 'A'ore e atua i fa'aro'o mai, te vai noa maira Tahiti-manahune ma te atua 'ore. 39
Feruri ri'i atura te ari'i o Tupuai, ta'o atura: "E 'ore au e tae, na te to'i o Te-pā-huru-nui-ma-te-vai-tau, e parau 'oe, e Vai-ta-fa'i, e no te 'oro'a o Tino-rua, te fatu moana, ei 'oti'oti i te uaua o te i'a, o Tahiti, Tāpū atu ai." 105
Na 'arere, o Vai-ta-fa'i e o 'Ohu-na a fa'aineine i te tere. A rave i te to'i i'a, Te-pā-huru-nui-ma-te-vai-tau, e mea teiaha roa, e ria ri'i a'e, fa'atere atura na to'erau. 76
Ho'i atura i Tahiti i te tairurura'a nu'u toa e te va'a mata'eina'a ra, ua manava maira ui atura; "Teihea ihora to 'orua tere?" 58
Ua ta'o atura raua, "Teie ia," i te fa'aite ra'a i taua to'i nui toiaha ra. 36
Ua ti'a maira taua toa upo'o tū ra, o Tafa'i, mau maira i taua to'i nui ra i to'na rima nui, e na'o maira; "O te to'i rahi teie o Te-pā-huru-nui-mai-te-vai-tau, no te 'oro'a o Tino rua, te fatu moana, ei 'oti'oti i te uaua o te i'a nui, o Tahiti nei! Ia o mai te tupu fenua, ia o mai te tupu 'ere'ere, ia o te mata'i ata, ia o mata'i atu i tua mou'a, ei mou'a ninivaru; ei ha'a vana'a ana'e i te ra'i atata!" 185
Urua 'tura te to'i, māmā roa a'era i te rima o Ta-fa'i, tāpū atura, amaha ohie noa 'tura te fenua i te tāpūra'a. 'A'ore atura te rahi ato'a o taua mau toa ra i fa'aea e ta'aroa 'tura te arapo'a, huti mi nei te upo'o o te i'a i muri, vai noa 'tura i to'na ra vahi no taua vao nui i ropū i na ana'ira'a mou'a teitei o Tahiti-nui nei, te ma'a fenua 'ari'ari i topa hia o Tara-vao, i piha'i iho i te 'o'o'a pi'opi'o e tae atu i tua, o te topa hia e te tahu'a ra o Te-'aua'a. 'Aua'a taua to'i ra, oi 'ore atu e 'o'o'a. 235
E o taua mau fenua i fa'ata'a hia e te tai ra, topa hia'tura i Te-vā-i-uta e i Te-vā-i-tai; o Vai-ari, o Vai-'uriuri, o Ati-ma-ono, e o Pāpara, te fenua, o Te-vā-i-uta; e o te fenua i ta'a ra te topa hia o Te-vā-i-tai. 100
31:Oti atura te tāpūpū ra'a uaua o te i'a, pāpū atura te fenua o Tahiti-nui. Topa hia'tura te i'oa o te upo'o o tei'a, o Te-va-i-tai, o Tai-'a-rapu, no te mea ua rapu te moana i to'na ta'aē ra'a 'tu i tai; o Hiti-i-te-ara-pi'opi'o, no te mea tei te hiti 'oia i te 'ō'o'a pi'opi'o o Te-'aua'a. Vai noa 'tura Tara-vao nui ti'a ma raro, Tara-vao nui ari'i 'ore, ta'aē atu ai Vai-ari nui i te a'ara, o Vai-'uriri nui a tere maohe. Topa hia 'tura Tafa'i o Vai-ta-fa'i, no taua ohipa ma'na nei.
Tahiti, the fish, had become stable in its new position, but it was necessary to cut its sinews to prevent it from moving, so that it might remain stable in one place ever afterwards. 55
Haapapura'a-fenua (Making-land-stable) was the ceremony, Te-pa-huru-nui-ma-te-vai-tau (The-imposing-looking-fort-that-stands-for-ages) was the axe for the ceremony of cutting the sinews of the fish, for Tino-rua (Dual-body), lord of the ocean. 76
On arriving at the border, Tahiti and Tai-a-rapu were united in one land; they were not divided by Te-auaa gulf; but the two great mountain ranges were separated by a plain, where the sea now enters. 67
The land had been long standing; new generations were born in the land, bananas were ripe, mountain plantains were matured, cock-crowing resounded in the woods, dogs were barking on the seashore, hogs' tusks were turned upwords, ava plants had matured, taro was blossoming, sugar-cane was leaning forwards, fermented breadfruit was working, the paper mulberry song was heard in the land. Then said the victorious warrior, named Ta-fa'i (By-revelation): "The sinews of this fish must be well cut; they must be cut, cut and cut! Variari (Billowy-river), Vari-'uriri (Gray-plover-river), Ati-ma-ono (Tribe-of-six), and Pāpara (Yellow-fort) must then be severed from To'a-hutu (Spraying-rock), of the tatara breadfruit, and Riri (Anger), To'otea (Light-wooden-idol), Vai-uru (Possessed-water), in Mata-'o-ae (Spade-for-sacrifices); they must be separated that the wind may freely blow around the head of the fish, that the fish may remain stable." 280
Then came the warriors to smite the land: Tera-tai (That-sea) saw and laid on his hands, but to no effect; Tai-toa (Rocky-sea) saw and smote to no effect; Tautai (Fisherman) saw, Tai-nui-atea (Great-boundless-sea) saw. Tai-ta'ata (Sea-of-people) saw, and came and smote the land with their axes; but none of those warriors succeeded in making an impression upon it. Then the priest, Pou-'ou-ma-fenua (Post-barked-to-the-ground), named that place Te-aua'a (The-but-for-that). 151
The warriors of the Fare-ti'i-o-te-rai (House-of-imps-of-the-sky); the warriors of the Fare-'a'ama-o-te-po (Fire-house-of-Hades); the warriors of the sacred land (Paradise) of Huri-ma'a-vehi (Wrapped-food-spread-out); all these were warriors of the hosts that stood below, upon the plain of Great Tahiti; they saw, they smote with their axes, but to no purpose! Then the priest Pou-'ou-ma-fenua named that place Te-'aua'a. 136
Then said Ta-fa'i, the victorious warrior: "Wait, we must have gods! O gods that I know! Gods of the skies, demigods, come and smite this land! I shall yield my strength to the sea, and commotion shall be yours. My sleep that I know, night sleep and day sleep, come and smite! My Moon that I know, Moon in the sky, Moon for man, come and smite! I shall yield my strength to the Moon." 104
But no god responded. 6
The warrior, Marua-toa (Falling-of-the-rock), then said to him: "Muster up thy strength! But what kind of strength hast thou? Let it not be free fighting, lest thou fail. Should the hairs of thy back be plucked to subdue, to give pain, wouldst thou not cry?" 68
"No," was the reply of Ta-fa'i. 8
"Should the hairs of thy beard be plucked to subdue, to give pain, wouldst thou not cry?" 25
"No." 1
"Should thine eyebrows, thine eyelashes, or the hairs of thy nostrils be plucked, would that not subdue, give pain, make thee cry?" 38
"No." 1
"Then muster up thy strength. Prepare thy canoe and name it Te-pa-tea (The-white-fort)." 23
So the messenger, Ta-fa'i, and 'Ohu-na (Spun-around), his bosom friend, sailed south to Tupuai (Summit), into the presence of King Marere-nui-marua-to'a (Great-soarer-falling-from-rocks). 60
When Marere-nui saw them he said: "Welcome to you, Vai-ta-fa'i (Fixed-by-revelation) and 'Ohu-na! A great errand has brought you south to Tubuai." 50
"It is a great errand! The great fish, Tahiti, its sinews must be cut, its throat must be rent asunder that it move not again." 37
"Who are the artisans for that work?" 10
"There are none! The warriors of the land have all tried to no purpose; no impression has been made upon the fish with the axes of the artisans." Then they told all concerning those warriors, and the king replied, "Ah! They are defeated in a good cause." 79
And the messengers said: "So we have come for thee, O King Marere-nui, to go and lay on your hands to accomplish that work." 37
"What gods have you in your efforts?" 11
"None! No gods have heeded us, Tahiti-manahune stands there without gods." 24
The king of Tubuai reflected and then replied: "I shall not go, there is the axe, Te-pa-huru-nui-ma-te-vai-tau, and you, Vai-ta-fa'i, say it is for the ceremony of Tino-rua, lord of the ocean, to cut the sinews of the fish, Tahiti, and then cut." 78
So the warriors, Vai-ta-fa'i and 'Ohu-na prepared to depart. They took the fish axe, Te-pa-huru-nui-ma-te-vai-tau, which was a very great and heavy one, and soon they set sail northwards. 59
They returned to Tahiti to the assembly of the hosts of warriors and clans, who, as they welcomed them, enquired, "What is the result of your errand?" 42
And they replied, "Here it is," holding up the great, heavy axe. 19
Then the victorious warrior, Tafa'i, came forward, and holding the axe in his great hands, he said: "This is the great axe, Te-pa-huru-nui-mai-te-vai-tau, for the ceremony of Tino-rua, lord of the ocean, to cut the sinews of this great fish, Tahiti! That the growth of the land may find room, that the lowering blackness may pass through, that the wind may sweep around the mountains, that the mountains may be circumambulated, all for heralds of the awe-inspiring sky!" 140
Then the axe became possessed, it became light in the hands of Ta-fa'i, and he chopped the land, which at once yielded to the stroke. Then all the warriors did not cease chopping until the sinews of the throat were cut asunder, and the head of the fish drew backwards, so that there remained stationary of the great plain between the two lofty mountain ranges of Great-Tahiti only an isthmus, now called Tara-vao (Corner-plain), with a lock of winding gulfs opening into the ocean, which was named by the priest, Te-'aua'a. But for that axe there would have been no gulf. 171
And the land thus divided by the sea was called Te-vā-i-uta (Main-plain), and Te-vā-i-tai (Ultra-plain); Variari (Billowy-river), Vai-'uriri (Gray-plover-river), Ati-ma-ono (Tribe-of-six), and Pāpara (White-fort), forming the main Te-va; and the severed land was named Te-va-i-tai (Ultra-Te-va). 94
So the cutting of the sinews of the fish was completed, and the land of Great-Tahiti became stable. Then the head of the fish, Te-va-i-tai, was also named Tai-'a-rapu (Disturbed-sea), because the ocean was disturbed as it separated outwards; Hiti-i-te-ara-pi'opi'o (Border-of-the-winding-paths) because it borders upon the winding gulf of Te-'aua'a. Thus remained great Tara-vao standing below, great Tara-vao without a king, severed from the great Vari-ari, of sweet odor, and from Vai-'uriri, that moved off gracefully. Then was Tafa'i named Vai-ta-fa'i, because of this work that he did.
Henry: 444 1
Source: King Pomare II, Mahine (a chief), Tamera (a priest)
Date of recitation: King Pomare II: 1825; Mahine: 1825; Tamera: 1825 57
Migration of the gods to Moorea and Tahiti
Na nia i te mata'i te atua te fano mai i Tahiti, 21
Horo atua te ta'ata ma te mata'u 14
I roto i te ana e te fa'afa'a ri'i 15
O te aivi o te fenua, 10
I ni'a i te apu'u mou'a 11
A fanae te po, a fanae te ao, 13
Mai te titotito ra'a manu ana'e ra 15
Te ma'a ri'i i reira! 9
Ti'a nui te Aumea 9
I mau te a'a i te fenua; 11
E Tori'i e, e ura i te ra'i, 12
Ua ha'ati Tautira i te ura mea! 15
E hau matau to te atua 11
I te auaha ōre e! 10
Tia'i oma'oma'o i Tautira ra e! 15
Haoa a tae ho'i i Tautira 13
I te moemoe i te ta'ata 'ore e, 14
E hau atua i horo e ai 12
Te ta'ata i Tautira e; 10
Tautira te fa'aeara'a o te mau atua, 18
O Aera'a-i-te-mata'i! 10
Te parau ra te atua, e horo e ai te ta'ata, 19
Te parau maira te atua; 11
"Homai, i Aera'a-o-te-mata'i, 13
Te uru ta'ata i te toa." 10
E te parau maira te ta'ata 12
"Eita matou e tae i tenana vahi, 15
E matau matou i te hau o te atua!" 16
E fa'aruera'a ia fenua, 12
Ei oma'oma'o te tia'i eiaha te ta'ata.
Upon the winds did the gods fly to Tahiti, 11
Then the people fled away with terror 11
Into caves and ravines 8
Of the mountainous land, 9
And upon the mountain peaks. 10
The night ebbed, the day ebbed, 8
Only like birds' peckings 6
Were their morsels of food at that time! 13
Grandly stood the gills (of the fish) 8
As the roots of the land held firm; 9
O Tori'i (Vehiatua, high chief), red was the sky, 15
Redness encompassed Tautira! 10
A dreaded rule was that of the gods 11
With no interpreter! 6
Attended by the thrushes of Tautira! 11
When Haoa (Vehiatua) went to Tautira 15
Lonely without people, 8
It was ruled by the gods which had caused to flee 14
The people of Tautura; 9
Tautira, the dwelling place of the gods, 12
Aeraa-i-te-matai (Mounting-place-of-the-wind)! 17
The gods spoke, and then the people fled, 11
The gods said 4
"Give us, at Aeraa-o-te-matai, 13
The heads of warrior men." 8
And the people answered 8
"We shall not go thither, 6
We are in dread of the reign of the gods!" 13
And then the land was abandoned, 9
Thrushes guarded it and not people.
Henry: 445-448 1
Source: Paparua, a teacher in Tahiti; Mo'a, a high priest in Tahiti
Date of recitation: Paparua: 1829; Mo'a: 1829 50
The deluge, Tahitian version
I pau ihora Tahiti i te tai, o Tahiti nui e o Tahiti iti! 'A'ore pua'a, 'a'ore moa, 'a'ore 'iore 'a'ore manu, 'a'ore uri i toe, maori ra ta to'o rua ta'ata i fa'aora mai. Na o te atua ta manu e te manumanu i haru i te ra'i i 'ore ai. 102
E mata'i rahi Huatau, e ua e e vai rahi, e te mata'i tiriaha, ma te puahi'ohi'o. Ua pe'e te ra'au rarahi mai te pai a'a 'toa i ni'a, e mai te mau papa ato'a, i roto i te reva, i taua mata'i rahi e te puahi'ohi'o ra. 95
O te ho'e ra tau ta'ata to'o rua, te tane e te vahine, te to'e ra ia. Ua rave a'ere te vahine i ta'na fanaua ri'i moa, ua rave ihora te tane i ta'na pinia ri'i pua'a, ua rave atura te vahine i ta'na fanaua ri'i uri ma'ohi e ta'na 'iore ri'i, o te'ai hia ei 'ina'i i muta'aihora, e ua rave maire te tane i ta raua ota'a pe'ue e te tapa. Te haere atura e imi i te ha'apūra'a. 166
Ua hi'o atura te tane i Orohenа, e ua parau atura i ta'na vahine: "E horo taua i ni'a i tera ra mou'a teitei roa." 51
"Na'o maira te vahine: "Eiaha taua e haere i reira!" 24
"Eaha e 'ore ai? O te mato roa moa iho ia, e 'ore ho'i taua e taea e te miti i reira." 40
"Eaiha, e taea 'toa ia i te miti, e a'e ra taua i ni'a i teie nei ma'a mou'a fafeneu, i ni'a ia Pito-hiti nei, 'e'ita taua e taea e te miti i reira." O raua 'tura i reira. 80
Fa'aea putuputu ana'e atura taua na ta'ata e rua ra, e ta raua 'to'a mau peu ri'i ora, i ni'a i o te mou'a, ia Pito-hiti; a'ita i taea e te miti, te vai taha'a noa ra ra to ratou fa'aeara'a mai te fare 'ore, e ama'a ra'au te paruru. 104
Pau ihora te fenua i te tai e te vai. Mo'e roa a'ere Orohena i raro, o taua mou'a, ra o Pito-hiti ana'e ra tei toe atu na. Mai te tai tua ra o ni'a ia Tahiti iti, 'a'ore ia e mou'a i toe i ni'a. 88
Ru'i ahuru a'era, ua pahe'e ihora te tai, hi'o ihora raua ta'ata e te vahine te viriviria ri'i o te mou'a; ru'i fa'ahou, o te tapotura'a o te mou'a, te teitei haere ra'a. Ua parau ihora: "Ua mаha te riri o Ta'aroa tahi Tumu! Ua pohe, ua ririo te tai, ua pa'apa'a te tai, ua ta'a ra taua i te moari nei Te hui hoa, ua pohe, te hui ari'i ua pohe, te fenua ua pau, e te mou'a ua va'u ti'iti'i hia! E pohe rahi teie, e manava huhui noa 'tu a taua, e tatua noa 'tu i te opu i te taura, e pohe atu a taua 'to'a!" 226
Ua horohia te mou'a, ua о'о te peho i te ofafa'i; e ia huru papamarō roa ra te fenua, oriori haere a'era taua na ta'ata to'o piti ra, purara a 'tura te pua'a, te uri, te moa, e te 'iore, haere ana'e atura e imi haere i te ma'a na ratou iho. 106
Neoneo haere noa 'tura te fenua i te ta'ata pohe, te pua'a te uri e te moa, ho'e ana'e tiraha noa ra'a. Te pohepohe haere noa ra te ia i roto i te ana ri'i, o to ratou ia apo'o i raro iho nei i te tai. Ua tahiri paoo hia te fare ua maruarua ana'e te marae. 116
Ua unu a'era te mata'i, te haere noa ra te manino i te rahira'a, e manino roa a'era i ni'a i te fenua, te mairi noa maira te mau ofаfa'i e te mau ra'au i taihi tumu hia ra, e o te pe'e i te puahi'ohi'o i ni'a roa i te reva o te topatopa mai i ni'a i te fenua mai te ua rotu ra. Te pe'ape'a а te pe'ape'a mai te ra'i mai. 139
Ua na'o atura te vahine: "E hoa, i ora mai nei taua i te miti e te vai, e e pohepohe atu ra taua i teie nei mau ofafa'i e te ra'au e mairi haere mai nei! Ei hea ra taua e noho ai?" 85
Neneva 'tura raua, ua parau ihora te tane: "E 'ō atu vau i te tahi apo'o ei nohora'a no taua, a pohe a'e ho'i taua i te mairihia e teie nei mau ofa'i e te ra'au!" 76
O ihora oia i te rua i te taha mou'a, i te pae fa'a vauvau atura i te nonoha pohe miti, nina 'tura i te one i te auaha, opani atura i te papa. A noho raua i roto mai te poia riaria e te moemoe e te mehameha, a fa'aro'o noa ai raua i te topara'a o te ofa'i e te ra'au, e mea haruru rahi ia, e te pina'inai noa ra te fa'a i te haruru. E varavara ri'i a'era te topara'a mai, ua tatai tahi noa ihora, e mao roa aera, mаmū roa a'era. 195
Tia'i atura ra raua e ru'i ho'e atu, e ao a'era, ua pohe roa taua mata'i ino ra, ua 'ore roa te ofa'i e te ra'au ua topa mai. E ra'i aneane to ni'a, ti'ati'a 'tura raua i rapae, o te pu mou'a ana'e ra ia i te puera'a i mua i te aro. 'Ao're e ra'au, o te repo uraura ana'e ra ai, e te papa e te mato purepure; ua maro roa te fenua. 150
To raua ia popoura'a i tahatai, tapitapi haere atura i te fare 'ore; ua nina roa hia te pu ra'au rarahi, 'a'ore rа nia'u, 'a'ore rauoro, 'a'ore more, 'a'ore a'eho ei ato i te fare ahiri i fa'ati'ahia te ra'au. Ua ha'apapa noa ihora raua i te ra'au roroa ei paruru a'e no raua. E araea e te ia te ma'a i i a'e ai te opu. 148
O tahi nei aru'i, e poipoi a'era, fanau ihora ia vahine, to'o piti, e maeha'a, tamаroa e te tamаhine. Ua mihi ihora taua na metua ra i te ma'a 'ore na to raua tamari'i. 'A'ore a'e e taro i te ua'a ra'a, a'o're ava i te paia'a ra'a, 'a'ore meia i para i ni'a, 'a'ore to i te farara ra'a. 'A'ore aa ri'i i itea noa iho, ahiri ho'i e pohiri ri'i a'e i tupu mai. Ua mihi ato'a raua i te veve; 'a'ore pu'upu'u, 'a'ore 'orā, 'a'ore aute ia tutu i te ha'a ei tapa vehi a'e no te tamari'i! 213
Fanau fa'ahou ihora te vahine, ho'e nei aru'i e poipoi a'e ua fanau te tama; 'a'ore а i mā'ahia, ua pa'ari te tamari'i. I roa a'era te tahatai i te ta'ata a'ahu 'ore! O te matahiapo ra, ua taoto ia i to'na muri a'e, e tei muri a'e, taoto atura ia i to'na mua. 118
A'ita rea noa iho tau ua pahute te ta'ata, api roa a'era te fenua i te ta'ata api. O taua na ta'ata ra te fa'atupu-ui, to'o piti noa iho raua, te tane e te vahine i api ai Tahiti-nui e Tahiti-iti i te ta'ata i muri a'e i te paura'a i te miti. 109
Area te ra'au, tupu atura ia, ruperupe maira te fenua. Ho'e nei po e ho'e ao, ua hotu atura te maiore, ua oteo a'era te ha'ari, 'a'ore e ma'a i toe i te hotu. 72
Hi'o atura e ta'ata i te fatara'a o te ma'a i te ominira'a o te pua, ru'i toru noa iho nei te tupura'a, ua ahune roa te fenua i te ma'a. Ua 'ai atura i te ma'a e paia maitai atura. 82
Ato hia 'tura te ma'a fare, tutu atura i te ha'a, ahua mai nei te ta'ata i te ahu. Totoro atura te hue i ni'a i te fenua. 52
E inaha, te vai noa nei Tahiti! Te heeuri nei, te i nei te peho e te mou'a i te mau mea ora e i te ma'a. Te i nei o aro-rua i te i'a, e 'a'ore tamutera'a o te ma'a! Te ti'a noa mai ra ho'i o Pito-hiti i te to'oa i Tahiti. E te vai noa nei a te ofafa'i ta'ata'a i mairi i ni'a i te fenua ra, e atai noa a'e Tahiti, mahere ra paha ua mau atura tahi pae i te repo fenua.
Tahiti was once submerged by the sea, both Great-Tahiti and Little-Tahiti. No pigs, no fowls, no rats, no dogs remained, except those that were preserved by two persons. The gods caught up the birds and insects into the sky and saved them. 66
There came a strong north wind, rain, and freshets, with a destructive storm and whirlwinds. Great trees were caught up by the roots, with all kinds of rocks, and were carried up into the air by that tempest and the whirlwinds. 59
But there was one couple, a man and his wife, who were spared. The woman took her little chickens, the man took his young pigs; the woman took her young dogs and rats, which in former times were eaten for meat, and the man took their roll of mats and clothes. They were going to seek a place of refuge. 91
The husband looked up at Mount Orohena and said to his wife: "Let us run up to that highest mountain." 33
The wife answered: "We must not go there!" 12
"Why not?" That is the hightest peak, and the sea cannot reach us there." 19
"No, that will also be reached by the sea. But let us ascend this cone-shaped mountain, up on Pito-hiti; there the sea cannot reach us." So they both went thither. 48
Those two persons, and all the living things that they had in their possession kept close together upon Pito-hiti; the sea did not reach them; but their abode was all exposed; they had no house, and so they erected boughs of trees for shelter. 72
Then all the land of Tahiti and Taiarapu was flooded by the sea and fresh water. Mount Orohena was submerged; only Mount Pito-hiti remained above water. Like the open ocean was the surface over Little-Tahiti [Mo'orea]; no mountain was left above [the surface]. 89
Ten nights thus passed, when the sea subsided, and the man and his wife looked and beheld the tops of the mountains just appearing; another night passed, and the mountain ranges were rising. Then they said: "The anger of Ta'aroa, the unique foundation, is appeased! The sea is calm, it has gone down, it is dry, but we are left between heaven and earth. All our friends are dead, our chiefs are dead, the land is destroyed, and the mountains are clean shorn! This is a great disaster; were we to brace our intestines between planks, were we to girdle our abdomens with ropes, still we also must die!" 188
Upon the mountain were landslides, and the valleys were filled with stones; and as the land got dry, those two persons walked abroad, and the hogs, dogs, fowls, and rats went forth; they all went their own way to seek nourishment for themselves. 65
There was putrefaction upon the land from dead people, hogs, dogs, and fowls, that were all lying side by side. Fishes were dying in little caves in which they had lodged while beneath the sea. All the houses were swept away, and the temples had fallen down. 73
When the wind was dying out, and calmness was spreading everywhere upon the land, there were stones and whole trees that had been torn up by the roots and carried high into space by the whirlwind falling thickly to the earth like heavy rain. Trouble after trouble came from the skies. 81
Then the woman said: "Friend, we have been saved from the sea and fresh water, and now we shall die by the falling of these stones and trees that are coming down! Where shall we dwell?" 51
They looked around, and the husband said: "I shall dig a hole for us to dwell in, or we shall die from the falling of these stones and trees!" 41
And he dug a chamber on the side of a mountain, facing a valley, laid the floor with grass that the sea had killed, strewed sand at the entrance, and closed it with a stone slab. Then they staid in there painfully hungry, lonely and frightened, for a night and a day, listening to the falling of the stones and trees. The report of them was very loud, and the valleys resounded with the echoes. The falling gradually became less, then single, until it ceased, and there was perfect silence. 139
But they waited one night longer, and when day came the bad wind had quite abated, and the falling of the stones and trees had quite ceased. A cloudless sky was overhead when they stood outside, and only the bare mountains met their gaze. There were no trees, but only the red soil and stratum rock, and spotted boulders lying exposed; the land was quite dry. 107
Then they went down to the seaside, and were greatly perplexed because of having no house; all the clusters of great trees were leveled down, but there were no coconut leaves, no fare leaves, and no purau bark, or reeds to use for thatching a house if they erected the wood. So they simply stacked long poles together and formed a shelter for themselves. Red clay and fish were their only food to fill the stomach. 126
One night passed, and morning came, then the woman was delivered of twins, a boy and a girl. The father and mother bewailed the famine because of their children. There was no taro blossoming, no ava sending out roots; there were no ripe bananas above them, and there was no sugar-cane leaning forward. There were no roots to be found. Ah, if there were only a few scions shooting up! They also bewailed their poverty; there was no breadfruit tree bark, no banyan bark, and no paper mulberry, to beat into cloth for clothing for the children! 166
The woman was again delivered of children; one night would pass, and as the day came a child was born; the food had not yet grown when the children got matured. The shores became thickly populated with people not dressed! The elder child married the younger, and the younger child married the elder. 86
It was not long before there was a multitude of people; the land was filled with a young nation. That one couple were the progenitors; the man and his wife were the means of replenishing Great-Tahiti and Little-Tahiti with people, after the flood. 80
As for the plants, they sprang up at last, so that the land became verdant. Then in one night and one day, the breadfruit began to form, the coconut sheaths were protruding, and no food was behindhand in developing. 60
The people looked and saw the fruit clustering as they developed from the blossoms, and after only three nights' growth the land was filled with plenty. People ate of the food and became well satisfied. 58
24:Finally, houses were covered with thatch, cloth was beaten out, and people were clothed. Gourds spread out over the land. 37
And behold, Tahiti still exists! It is luxuriant, the valleys and mountains are filled with living creatures and food. The sea between the shores and the reefs abounds with fishes and there is no limit to food! Mount Pito-hiti stands in the valley of Papeno'o in North Tahiti, and the loose stones that fell upon the land are still lying all over Tahiti; but perhaps some of them have fixed in the soil.
Henry: 448-452 1
Source: Paora'i, a counselor; Vai'au, a priest of Porapora; Paoraro, a priest of Ra'iatea; Pati'i, a high priest of Mo'orea
Date of recitation: Paora'i: 1822; Vai'au: 1822; Paoraro: 1822; Pati'i: 1824 84
The deluge, Raiatean version
Ua pau a'enei teie fenua i te miti. Ua maoro te ra'i i te pee ra'a i ni'a, te to'o rua nau ta'ata e fa'aea ra, e taua raua, o Te-aho-roa, te fatu fare, e o Ro'o te taua o te fa'aea i iana ra. 88
Ua haere raua i te ho'e tau e taia i roto i te moana i roto mai i te a'au. E tutu Oeo te tautai. 47
Tae a'era o Ro'o ma Teahoroa i Toamarama, motu iti i te paeau i ni'a i te Ava rua, noa'a mai ra te oeo i reira. E tautai manuia rahi, hape a'era ra raua i te apo'o feo o Ruahatu-tini-rau, atua o te Moana-'urifa, e vahi mo'a roa na'na Ro'ohia 'tu te taotooto maira Ruahatu i roto i taua ana i raro i te moana ra, aita rа raua i ite. 154
Tu'u atura Ro'o ma Teahoroa i ta raua matau i tа'ai hia i te ofa'i, i raro i te tai, mairi atura te tahi matau e te ofa'i ato'a, i ni'a i te tupuai upo'o o te atua! Ara 'tura ia, te haro ra 'oia i to'na rouru, mau atura te matua e te ofa'i i te rima. Hi'o atura o Ro'o ma Teahoroa i te otuituira'a o te anave, e mea uana roa, manao ihora raua e i'a! Ua huhuti maira i te anave i ni'a, e fatata maira i te va'a, e ina'a! Ua hi'o ihora raua i te maevaevara'a o te rouru roroa e te putuputu! Ua ta'o atura raua: "A tae ho'i ia taua e, e ta'ata teie, e'ere i te i'a! E tuputupua ia no te moana! Ta'ata pohe taua!" 280
E ni'a roa a'era Rua-hatu i te va'a, hi'o riri maira i taua na ta'ata ra! Ua ui maira: "O vai 'orua na?" 46
Na'o a'era raua: "O maua, o Ro'o ma Teahoroa." "Nei? O vai to 'orua i'oa?" 33
Ua paraua atura Teahoroa: "O maua pa'i, o Roo' ma Teahoroa! ua hara mai nei maua, i te taiara'a i teie vahi mo'a, e fa'aroa ra oe ia maua e te Ari'i e! E 'ore roa maua e hape fa'ahou mai i teie nei vahi." 99
Na ui maira taua tuputupua ra: "'E fetii anei ta 'orua i uta na?" 30
"E, e fetii to maua i uta i Opoa, i tae mai ai maua e hо i te i'a na matou. I toa-marama nei." 43
"E vahine anei ta 'orua i uta na?" 15
"E, e vahine ho'i ta maua." 11
"E va'a mataeina'a ato'a ta 'outou i reira?" 21
"E, e va'a mataeina'a ta matou." 14
"E hui ari'i ta outou?" 11
"E, e hui ari'i ho'i ta matou." 13
"Tei reira ato'a te poti'i ari'i ra o Airaro, o te here hia e te atua o te moana?" 37
"E tei reira ho'i ia poti'i ari'i." 16
"E tamari'i anei to 'orua i uta na?" 16
"E, e tamari'i e te mo'otua ho'i." 14
Na'o maira o Rua-hatu: "A ti'i na 'orua e parau atu ia ratou ato'a ra e, e haere mai i tai nei, i Toa-marama nei, i tenana, eiaha roa e oununu." 67
No te poti'i ari'i maitai ra, o Airaro, 'outou e ora ai. Ei Toa-marama nei 'outou e noho ai auanei, e ta'ata e tae mai i onei ra e ora ia. 69
Ua riri 'au ia 'orua i ha'apeapea ia'u, ua hamani 'ino 'orua ia'u. E 'ore ra vau e 'ato aruru i te rave! E ta'ihi-tumu roa vau! Ei teienei 'aru'i e ninahia 'i e au te mou'a ra, Te-mehani-ave-ari'i, i Opoa a'era, i te miti. E mou ho'i o Ra'iatea ato'a. O vau, O Rua-hatu ari'i o te tai euea!" 137
Hoho'i hotatara noa 'tura o Ro'o ma Teahoroa i uta, i Opoa, e ti'i i to raua fetii, to raua tamari'i, te mo'otua, ta raua vahine; e ti'i i te pue ari'i e i te va'a-mataeina'a. Te fаtata maira e tahatai a hi'o te ta'ata no uta, a ite, te t'iati'a noa ra to raua poniu i te matautau rahi! 127
Ua ta'o atura raua i to ratou ato'a i uta ra e, "Mai haere tatou i tai, i Toa-marama, e noho atu ai i teie nei а! I poroi hia mai maua e te ari'i Ruahatu e eiaha to'otahi o 'outou nei e noho i uta na i teie nei 'aru'i. No maua te hara i riri mai ai 'oia, e 'a'uaei e ninahia ai Te-Mehani-ave-ari'i i te tai, eaha 'outou e ora ai? E 'ore roa te ho'e e toe noa iho i uta nei. O te ta'ata, te moa, te 'uri, te pua'a, e te 'iore o te tae i Toa-marama te ora." 213
O Tane-u-poto te ari'i i Opoa i tereira tau, ei tamahine a'e o Airaro, Ha'aputuputu oioi atura raua i te ari'i vahine e te fetii ari'i ato'a, 'a'ita te tahi i mairi, fa'auta ana'e hia ihora i ni'a i te motu, ma te taupщpщ 'ore. Ua fa'aro'o mai te fetii, o te utuafare o Eo'o ma Teahoroa e hope roa, e tahi pae va'a-mata-eina'a, i taua parau ra. Ua ata noa ihora ra thi pe va'a-mataeina'a! Amuamu a'era to'o tahi, fa'aturituri ihora to'o tahi i te tari'a. E pou turi roa ana'e ia; tari'a rei pahо atura to ratou, e 'ore atura ta Ro'o ma Teahoroa parau i ō i te pū tari'a. 261
A fa'aineine, ea ana'e ra tei fa'aro'o i te parau a Ruahatu o te tai euea! I hoe mai te horuhoru rahi i tai i Toa-marama. Ma tapae ihora i reira ni'a te tahi pae i te va'a te noho ra'a, tei ni'a te tahi pae i te motu, 'a'ore e muhumuhura'a! Tera ana'e te manu, te tuturahunui e te manumanu, ata a te atua, ua haru ana'e hia e ta ratou iho atua, i ni'a i te ra'i no taua ati ra. 169
Roroa ri'i a'era, fa'aro'o ihora te ta'ata i te mura'a o te tai, te pa'apa'aina ra'a o te tai i ni'a i te uru ra'au i tahatai, te ahehera'a a te farero e te u'urura'a e te arearera'a o te miti o te ha'amo'e i te a'au. 97
Mai te toa-pu i te moana ra to ratou fa'aeara'a, te vai marō noa ra o Toa-marama, no te mea tei reira te poti'i ari'i ra o Airaro, i here hia e te atua o te moana. 74
Huru tui a'era te ru'i, te hutu noa ra te miti i ni'a, e te nina ra ia i uta i te fenua. 37
Itea hia na te marama Te-Mehani-ave-ari'i, e inaha, ua moe roa i te tai; mai te moana rahi fa'aaro ra o uta ia hi'o atu. Area ra taua toa iti i nohohia e te ta'ata ra, 'a'ore roa i tae'a i te tai, o te huru ia te huru. 99
Topa tаue maite ihora to ratou ta'oto e ia aahiata, ara a'era, hi'o atura te pahe'e ra te miti i tua e ia po'ipo'i roa a'era, ua roroma, ua pa'apa'a roa 'tura te a'au, ua tohitohi ivi atura. E hinu tai a ia, hape hia ra e a'ita i hutu puai iho nei te miti. 118
I hi'o atura te ta'ata i te fenua, e ua ofatifati roa hia te ama'a ra'au, ua huri roa hia te a'a i ni'a, te vai ehuehu noa ra te tai i te pehu fenua i tahatai! Hoe atura ratou i uta i taua po'ipo'i ra, hi'o atura ratou i te toi paia, i te farero e te i'a pohepohe e te mau apu ia, te pue haere noa ra i nia i te pae. 'A'ore roa e ta'ata o uta, ua pau roa ia, ua tutumihamihahia ia i te tai. 'A'ore fare, ua marua te marae, 'a'ore manu i rere haere, 'a'ore roa pua'a i te etu haere ra'a i te fenua, 'a'ore moa i totereo, 'a'ore 'uri i horo haere, 'a'ore e ma'a i te pu uru. Ua ano ana'e, ua ma na'o roa ino ia, e te i ra te pae mou'a e te tapotura'a o te mou'a i te mea pohe, te apu i'a e te farero e te feo. Te vai noa ra i reira i teie nei а, taua mau mea o te tai ra, e itea noa hia ia e te feia e 'imi atu. 368
Fa'aea ana'e atura te ta'ata i uta, hoho'i ana'e ihora i to ratou ra fenua i Opoa fa'aea 'tura ma te mā'a 'ore. Anoi noa hia atura te i'a i te 'araea i tereia tau, i ora mai ai. Ru'i ho'e nei te ra'au te teoteo fa'ahou ra'a mai; avae ho'e nei, ruperupe roa iho ra te fenua, no te tau atura te mau ma'a toa te tupu. 145
Ora a'era te hui ari'i e te ta'ata ri'i o te fanau mai te po mai, e te mau mea oraora o te fenua, I fa'ahou atura te fenua i ta ratou hua'ai. Tu'ua fa'ahou hia maira te manu, te tuturahunui, e te manumanu ri'i mai te ra'i mai, i ta ratou mau fa'aeara'a a'ita rea noa iho tau, tahi atura o te fenua nai huru e i tei te anotau i mua i te paura'a i te miti ra.
This land has been deluged by the sea. A long time after the sky was raised, there resided at Opoa two men who were bosom friends, Te-aho-roa (Long-breath), who was the host, and Ro'o, his friend who lived with him. 63
It happened one day that they went to fish in deep water within the borders of the reef and were dragging for pompanos. Ro'o and Teahoroa arrived at Toa-marama (Rock-of-the-moon), a small islet on the upper side of Ava-rua (Double-passage), and there they found pompanos. Their fishing was a success, but they unguardedly went to the coral grotto of Ruahatu-tini-rau (Source-of-fruitful-myriads), god of Moana-urifa (Sea-of-rank-odor), which was a very sacred spot to him. They happened to arrive just when Ruahatu was taking a nap in that grotto of the deep, but they did not know it. 182
Ro'o and Teahoroa dropped their fishhooks, which were attached to stones, down into the water, and one of the hooks fell with the stone upon the crown of the head of the god. This awoke him, and as he drew his fingers through his hair, he took hold of the fishhook and stone! Ro'o and Teahoroa saw the jerking of the line, and as it came up towards the canoe, lo! they saw spreading out, long thick hair! And they exclaimed: "Woe be to us both, this is a man, and not a fish! It is a monster of the deep! We are doomed men!" 158
At last, Rua-hatu got up into the canoe, and he scowled upon the men! Then he asked: "Who are you two?" 32
They answered: "We are Ro'o and Teahoroa." 15
"Aye? What are your names?" 9
And Teahoroa answered: "Assuredly we are Ro'o and Teahoroa! We have transgressed in coming to this sacred spot to fish, but forgive us both, O King! We will never again err in coming to this place." 62
Then the monster asked: "Have you relatives inland?" 16
"Yes, we have relatives inland, at Opoa, which is why we have come here to fish, at Toa-marama." 31
"Have you wives inland?" 8
"Yes, we have wives inland." 8
"Have you clans there also?" 9
"Yes, we have clans." 5
"Have you a royal family?" 9
"Yes, assuredly we have a royal family." 12
"Is the princess Airaro (Eat-below), who is beloved of the gods of the ocean, there also?" 29
"Yes, the princess is certainly there." 10
"Have you children inland?" 8
"Yes, indeed, we have children and grandchildren." 13
Rua-hatu said: "Go and tell them all to come out here, to Toa-marama, immediately; do not delay. 33
Because of the good princess Airaro, you shall be saved. You must all be here, on Toa-marama ere long, and whoever comes here shall be saved. 48
I am vexed with you for disturbing me; you have been unkind to me. But I will not only pluck the tips of the branches, I will overthrow to the foundation! This very night will I submerge Mount Te-mehani-ave-ari'i (The-heat-of-the-line-of-kings), at Opoa, in the sea. All Ra'iatea shall certainly be destroyed. It is I, Rua-hatu, king of the mighty ocean." 110
Ro'o and Teahoroa paddled towards the land to Opoa, with a creeping sensation over them as they went for their families, their children, grandchildren, and their wives; and also for the royal family and their clan. As they approached the shore, the people saw that the hair of their heads stood on end from great fear! 97
They said to everybody on shore, "Come, let us all go off to Toa-marama, and abide there, at once! King Rua-hatu desired us to tell you that nobody must remain on the mainland here tonight. We two have trangressed and incurred his displeasure, and soon Mount Te-mehani-ave-ari'i will be submerged in the sea, and how could you escape here? Not one will be spared here on the mainland. Only the people, fowls, dogs, pigs, and rats that go to Toa-marama will be saved." 148
Tane-u-poto (Man-of-short-banishment) was the king at that time, and Airaro was his daughter. They quickly assembled the queen and all the royal family, not one of whom was missing, and they were borne off to the islet without drawbacks. All the household of Ro'o and Teahoroa and some of the people of the clans gave credence to the message. But others laughed! Some mocked, whole others turned a deaf ear; they became as deaf posts, as the ears of ships' figureheads, so that the words of Ro'o and Teahoroa could not enter their ears. 167
So all those who heeded the message from Ruahatu of the mighty ocean got ready and paddled away! They paddled in great terror, out to Toa-marama. There they landed; some staid on their canoes, and some on the islet; and there was not a sound to be heard among them! All the birds, spiders, and insects, shadows of the gods, were caught up by their respective deities, into the skies, for the emergency. 122
After a while, the people heard the murmuring of the sea, the crackling of the branches of the trees by the waves of the mainland, and the rattling of coral and the rushing sound of the confluent sea which covered the reef. 65
Like the mid-ocean rock was their resting place, Toa-marama, and it was left dry, because of the presence of the princess Airaro, beloved of the sea gods. 49
As the night advanced, the sea was splashing upwards and rising high above the mainland. 25
By moonlight they saw that Mount Ta-mehani-ave-ar'i was completely submerged by the sea; all inland appeared like the trackless ocean. But that little rock where the people were was not reached by the sea; it remained just as it was. 71
They all fell into a deep sleep until daybreak, when they awoke and saw the sea was gliding out to the ocean; then in the morning the tide was low, the reef was quite dry, it stood up completely bare. The sea was unrippled as though it had not just been wildly tossing. 80
The people looked toward the land, and saw that the branches of the trees were all broken and uprooted, and the sea along the shore was mixed with debris from the soil. Thither they paddled that morning, and they saw slimy rocks, branches of coral, and dead fishes, and shells of Mollusca scattered over the shore. There were no people inland; all were swept away by the sea. There were no houses, the temples had falled down; there were no birds flying about, no pigs uprooting the earth, no fowls crowing, no dogs running about, and there were no fruits upon the clumps of trees. All was desolate, all was clean swept. The sides of the hills and rising grounds were filled with dead things, and with Mollusca shells and branching coral and rocks. The shells and corals from the sea still remain there, they can easily be found by those who seek them. 238
The people remained on shore; they returned to their land in Opoa and were there without food. They ate red clay with fish at that time, which saved their lives. In one night the trees began to bud again, in one month verdure covered the land, and then every kind of food came in its season. 92
Thus were preserved the royal family, and people that had sprung from the dark period, and the animals of the land. The land was again replenished by them. The birds, spiders, and insects were sent down from the skies to their dwelling places; and it was not long before the land appeared as it had been during the period before it was inundated by the sea.
Henry: 452-454 1
Source: Pati'i, a high priest of Mo'orea 23
Temples after the deluge
Ua fao ihora te ta'ata i te marae api i Ra'iatea e a patu, o Tаhu-'ea ia marae, o Rua-hatu te fatu. Tu-u i te tia'i'o 'Oā-hо-vari. E tau paturaa marae i hia, e firi ra'a nape e imi ra'a ura na te atua. 90
I au atu Rua-hatu, ari'i o te tai euea, i Huahine nui, e ua vahi ihora i na ava, o Apo'o-uhu e o Pe'i-hо; fao ihora i te marae, o Mata'i-re'a. Tu'u i te outu i tai o Manunu-i-te-ra'i, o Vai-ta-raea te vai. Pā ihora i te atua, o Tane. 106
Au maira Rua-hatu i Huahine iti, e ua vahi ihora i te ava, o Fare-re'a. 33
Au maira Rua-hatu i Mai'ao iti, e ua vahi ihora i te ava, o Ava-rei! fao ihora i te marae, o Pō-'ura, Pā ihora i te atua o Ta'aroa. Tu-u i te vai i raro o Vai-fa'are, tu'u i te mou'a i ni'a o Ravea. 92
I au maira o Rua-hatu e i ni'a i Mo'orea, vahi ihora i te ava i toa, o Ti'a-oua; fao ihora i te marae, o te Ahuru-a-tama. Tu'u i te tahua i raro, o Punipuni-area, tu'u i te vai, o Fa'a-toro-manava, tu'u i te mou'a, o Te-fa'aupo'o. Ei atua Rua-hatu iho i reira. 117
Au ti'a maira o Rua-hatu i na Tao-e-ha i tooa, hi'o a'era 'oia i uta, e ua vahi ihora 'oia i te ava o Tao-te-ha. Fao ihora i te marae, o Nu'u-rua i Varari; tu'u i te mou'a i ni'a, o Fare-'ea, tuu i te tahua i raro, o Ta-tere e o Pā-hoa; tu'u i te vai, o Taia-miti. O Rua-hatu iho te atua i reira. 134
Au atura Rua-hatu e i tō'oa-i-apato'erau, i Pape-toai, vahi atura i te ava, o Fa'a-uru po. Fao ihora i te marae, o Te-pua-tea, o Māta'i-re'a, e o Ahuare. Te mou'a i ni'a, o Te-ra'i-maoa; te tahua i raro, o Tarava; te vai, o Vai-ta-ra'a-e-pū, o Papapa-reva, o Te-pahu o Ue-roa, e o Tai-moana. O Tane te atua i reira. 142
Au atura Rua-hatu i Tahiti, vahi atura i te ava i Papara i toa o Fa'are'are'a. Fao ihora i te marae o Maha'i-atea. Ta'aroa te atuta i reira. 65
'Au maira i tooa i hiti, i Tai-arapu, tapae atura na roto i te are miti fati o te pari; fao ihora i reira i te marae, o Mata-hihae. Pa ihora te atua, o Tama-ehu, atua no te auahi, i reira. 85
Ta'a 'tura te ha'a na te ta'ata, i tu'u hia e Rua-hatu, i te tau patu ra'a marae, i muri a'e i te pau ra'a o te fenua nei i te miti. 55
O te aufau teie na Rua-hatu i te ha'amo'a ra'a i taua mau marae i patu hia ra 37
"Tapu aena, huru 'tu na! Ora fa'ati'a, ora ha'amana, ora fa'aora, ora nui a ma! 33
Ia ora to va'a taura, e Rua-hatu e! Ia ora to fa'a'ai pua'a, to imi 'ura i te tua motu, to tu'u rahui, to pu'e ta'ata o te fenua nei; tahitia mai i ta matou pure!"
People erected corner stones and built a new marae in Ra'iatea, named Tahu-'ea (Magical-deliverance), and Rua-hatu was the master of it. The guardian placed there was 'Oa-hi-vari (Blackness-fishing-in-mud). It was a period of repairing fallen marae, or braiding sennit, and of seeking ura feathers for the gods. 105
Rua-hatu, king of the mighty ocean, swam to Great-Huahine, where he broke open the passages, Apo'o-uhu (Aperature-of-the-parrot fish) and Pe'i-hi (Prayer-for-fishing), and he erected the corner stones of the temple Mata-'i-rea (Breeze-of-plenty. The cape outside is Manunu-i-te-ra'i (Benumbed-of-the-sky), and the water is Vai-ta-raea (Water-of-over-exertion). That [region] was given to the god Tane. 130
Rua-hatu swam to Little-Huahine, and broke open the passage Fare-re'a (House-of-plenty). 30
Rua-hatu swam to Mai'ao (Sir-Charles-Sander's-Island) and opened the passage, Ava-rei (Passage-with-a-neck); then he erected the corner stones of the temple Po-ura (Red-night), which was given to Ta'aroa. The river below is Vai-faare (Water-in-waves), the mountain above is Ravea (Means-used). 95
Rua-hatu swam to Mo'orea and opened a passage in the reef on the south (at Afareaito) named Tia-oua (Stand-to-leap); then he erected the corner stones of the temple, Ahuru-a-tama (Tens-of-children). The assembly ground below is Punipuni-area (Hiding-in-spaces), the river is Faatoro-manava (Affection-going-forth), the mountain is Te-fa'aupo'o (The-heading). Rua-hatu was god himself there. 132
Rua-hatu swam on to Tao-e-ha (Four-confederates, district of Ha'apiti), in the west; he looked inland and broke open the passage Tao-te-ha (Say-the-healing-prayer, now called Taota). He set the corner stones of the temple, Nu'u-rua (Double-fleet), at Varari; the mountain above is Fare-'ea (House-of-refuge), the assembly grounds below are Ta-tere (Moving-stroke) and Pa-hoa (Fort-of-friends); the river is Taia-miti (Dread-of-sea). Rua-hatu was himself god there. 152
Rua-hatu proceeded north-northwest, to Pape-toai and opened the passage, Fa'a-uru-po (Night-piloting). He set the corner stones of the temples, Te-pua-tea (The-white-flower), Mata'i-re'a (Breeze-of-plenty), and Ahuare (Wall-by-the-waves). The mountain above is Te-rai-maoa (The-pierced-sky); the assembly ground below is Tarava (Lie-across); the rivers are Vai-ta-raa-e-pu (Water-of-sacredness-and-trumpet), Papapa-reva (Consumed-in-depth), Te-pahu (Closed-in), Ue-roa (Long-struggle), and Tai-moana (Deep-sea). Tane was god there. 168
Rua-hatu then swam to Tahiti and opened the passage at Papara in the south, named Fa'are'are'a (Make-joyful). He set the corner stones of the temple, Maha'i-atea (Extensive-mitigation). Ta'aroa was the god there. 73
He swam southeast to Tai-arapu and landed amid the surging waves of the bluffs; and there he set the corner stones of the temple, Mata-hihae (Eyes-flashing-with-rage), which was given to Tama-ehu (blond-child), god of fire. 66
Thus was set work for the people by Rua-hatu during the period for erecting temples, after the flood. 30
Here is the address made to Rua-hatu in consecrating those temples that were built 27
"Let sacredness reign, give praise! It is deliverance approved, deliverance made powerful, deliverance to save, great purifying deliverance! 49
Save thy body of priests, O Rua-hatu! Save thy pig feeders, thy feather seekers on the atolls, thy restrictors, thy people inhabiting the land, harken to our prayer."
Henry: 454 1
Lines handed down in memory of 'Oā-hо-vari, the god of quagmire
Te varua mana oe, 8
Hae-i-te-'oā, i Tаhu-'ea, 11
E taata oe no Vaiuru e!
Thou art the great spirit; 8
Hae-i-te-'oa, at Tahu-'ea; 11
A man thou art of Vaiuru (Haunted-waters).
Henry: 455-458 1
Tane's voyage and struggle with Atea
O Tane ma Rua-nu'u, e te vahine a Tane, o 'Aruru, e na tahu'a e rua, o 'Oina ma Fafa, a fano i aitu tere. A fa'atere i te va'a, o Fa'atere-apu, e Maoae te mata'i a pū а i te fa'atere, e tere noa ihora na te tua ra'i e tae roa a'era i te Apu o Atea, tata 'tu te tere, a iri te va'a, tu paopao 'tura te va'a! 130
A tara oiri te fao'tere, a oineine i te aro o Atea! A pe'e tau tara te fa'atere, ui i na tahu'a o 'oina ma Fāfā; na tahu'a ia i tōtōhia i o atu te tari'a atau o Atea, ia fa'anu'u atu, 'a'ore i nu'ua! 96
A ti'a ra Tane i ni'a i to'na va'a i 'ore atura i tae i te tere aitu nei! Tao atura Tane: "O vau teie, o Tane i te Vai-ora! O taua tupu i te aroaro nei ia purara, o Atea ia tina'i!" 82
Ua ta'o maira o Atea: "E Tane e, o tau mata'i e hia 'i Atea ia 'oe?" 32
"E mata'i ta'u, o te hui ta mua; e mata'i ta'u, o te hui ta raro; e matai ta'u, o te hui ta muri!" 39
"E Tane e, e hia Atea ia 'oe? E tama'iti Tane, e matuatua ovau, o Atea, na'u 'oe i fanau e Tane! O na tapu nei ra e hia 'tu ai Atea ia oe?" 65
"E tapu ta'u e hia 'tu ai oe Atea!" Pūa rа e Tane i na hui mata'i ato'a ra huita mama mai ra i ni'a ia Tane, hiahia i onei atu ra ia Atea! Na tapu ato'a o Tane ra, i mama hia onei atu ia Atea! 89
A fa'atere a Tane i to'na va'a, a tere a tau a hiti, i tere noa e a tau a hiti! E rua i te hiti'a-o-te-rā, e rua i te tō'o'a-'o-te-rā, fenua puautau, fenua mata'i ona. Te va'a a pae i te pae onei atu o atu a pae i te etu hapai. Te teni, i hiti te teni, e ava o roto, i Vavau te ava, i Vavau i Tahiti nui rua papa! Tau tape ia ie, ta'ai na i teni. O Tane rа i ui na i te vahine, ia 'Aruru! "E 'Aruru e, e nafea ra ta'u va'a e u ae i rapae nei? Nao atu nei o 'Aruru:" 205
"E nafea 'urа!" A hi'o maitai Aruru, na o atura: "Na uta, e na tai, e na rapae mai 'oe, e to'oto'o a'e i te tahi ha'ati'a o te ra'i na." I to'oto'o a'e Tane na uta e na tai, e a to'oto'o i te tahi ha'ati'a o te ra'i; a mauu i te tua i raro a'e i te ra'i tu matoru! 111
A ta'o atu a 'Aruru: "To'oto'o a'e 'oe i te tera 'tu a uiau o te rai, na o, e a'ereere, o tai atu, o te ra'o atu, o te va atu." To'oto'ohia i reira e Tane, e a'ereere, e hinuhinu tai! A tata ra Tane i te tai i te va'a, o Tane atura mauri, ei ahu no te tai! Ua tae atura mauri taua na atua o te ra'i hamama ra i to ratou tere aitu! Tei Vavau atura ratou. 158
Paupau atura te aho o Tane, a fa'aea na i te tua poro o te va'a. Tane a ti'a i ni'a, Tane a hi'o, i hihi'o, i mamapu Tane! E mānava ta ro'o te ro'oro'o e te nu'u atua o te ao nei i taua feia tere aitu ra. 91
A opua Tane ma Hoani i te haere i raro roa ia Ta'ere ra, fano atura i reira. E manava ta Taere ia raua, ta'o atura: "O oe tena, e Tane nui, atua o te mau mea purotu?" 75
Ua ta'o a'era Tane: "O vau ho'i teie, o Tane nui i te mata a'a ra'i, i te mata tuiau i to Ro'o te ro'oro'o!" 47
"A tahi tere nui to oe?" E tere nui to'u ia Ta'ere maopoopo nei!" 29
"Ahiri!" 3
"Fa'ahope roa mai na oe i to maopoopo ia vai atoa mai i roto ia'u nei." 35
"Ua ti'a roa ia ia'u e ta'u taeae." 18
*** 0
Ua fa'aea a'era Tane ia Ta'ere ra, e tau ē maira, A mau roa te pa'ari o Ta'ere maopoopo ia Tane. Ho'i mai nei Tane i ni'a i te ao nei. Hope atura te tere aitu o taua mau atua o te ra'i ra, a tu'u fa'ahou te va'a o Tane i tua. 105
Mairi maira Vavau, mairi maira te teni. O Tane a fa'aō i to'na va'a na'o a, na te fenua mata'i ona, nao a, na te fenua puautau. A fa'atere a na te rua i to'o'a e na te rua i te hitia, i tere noa a tau e a hiti, a tau e a hiti, e tae roa 'tura i te Vai-ora o te ra'i o Tane! 120
Tane i ti'a i ni'a, a to'oia ia Atea! O Tane ma Ruanu'u a apo'opo'o! Ua ta'o atura Tane; "O vau teie! O Tane tupua i te mata hoa rau, o Tane hoa nui, Tane hoa ra'i! E taua e tupu i teienei i te aroaro, te atua o Atea e tina'i!" 105
Ta'o atura o Ruanu'u: "Ua riri maoti 'oe, e te tamaiti purotu a te atua, e Tane e!" 37
"Na riri au!" 5
"Eaha tau maha'i e Tane hi'a 'i Atea ia 'oe? E tamaiti e 'oe, e Tane, e ta'ata metua o Atea, e ta'ata matuatua o Atea. Na Atea 'oe i fanau, e Tane! E Tane e! Mai raro maoti 'oe i te fare tahu'a ia Ta'ere, tau maha'i i roa'a mai i te fare tahu'a o Ta'ere maopoopo?" 121
"E, mai reira mai au! E maha'i ta'u i roa'a mai! Te hui ta mua, te hui ta roto, e na hui ta muri, ia Atea ra, tei ia Tane ia! E ru'uru'u vau i te moana o te ra'i, e meha'a i te tai o te ao, i te taura, e heheu atu ai. E to a, e fa'atae e au. O maro e rere ei ara no Tane, e tū fa'arere atu e tū fa'arere mai; e arere o manu iti i raro e ti'i ra i te ha'a fa'aoti o Ta'aroa tuhi mate." 171
"'E'ita o Atea e mate ia 'oe e Tane e! e tamaiti e 'oe, e ta'ata metua Atea, na Atea 'oe i fanau! E Tane, e Tane e! Eaha tau maha'i e hi'a 'i Atea ia 'oe?" 72
"E Ruanu'u e, eiaha 'oe e fa'ataiа mai! E maha'i ta'u! E hoa ho'e nei e ha'ari huia 'tura ia te ra'i o Atea!" 50
"E 'ore Atea e hi'a i tereira, e Tane! Mai raro ra ho'i 'oe i te fare tahu'a o Ta'ere, e Tane e, eaha 'tu a tau maha'i i noa'a mai?" 57
"E maha'i atu a ta'u! Ta'u ta'o toa nei o Vero-ra'ai e puta roa ia te apu. E upu e taora 'tu ai au, e fa'atano ia Atea ia mate roa." 61
"Haere maite 'oe i te apu, e Tane e! E tu'u i te apoarau i e tahi hauou ei mānava na 'oe io Atea, to Ari'i e! Ei tamaiti 'oe, e Tane, o Atea iho to metua." 74
*** 0
O Tane rа i riri a'ena i te apu, i iha i te apu, i tote i te apu! 27
O Tane ra a ti'a a'e i ni'a i to'na ra'i, a upu i te ta'o toa, a haere ri'i maite, ta'ora f'atano roa 'tura Tane i te ta'o na te ra'i tua iva e tae a'era i ni'a ia Atea; ti'a faufa'a'ore noa a'era te ta'o i ni'a ia Atea, ho'i mama atura ia Tane ra. 109
Na tapu nei ra i hia'ahia 'tu i ni'a ia Atea, i ho'i mama noa mai i ni'a ia Tane! Vai aueue 'ore noa ihora Atea i to'na vahi e ina'a noa nei. Ei ite ana'e te hui atua e 'a'ore Atea i mate i te upu a Tane, 'a'ore i puta i te ta'o mana o Tane. 112
A hihi'o Tane, a mamapu Tane, i to'na ra ra'i! A maha te riri o Tane i ni'a ia Atea, haere e atura Tane! 44
Tei hea o Tane? Terae te haere mai nei, ua taui Tane tu i roto ia Tane tu i vaho. Eaha tei te rima? E niu na raua o Atea, o fetu-rere ei hei ia Atea, no te 'opū nui haparapara ia Atea, "Ta'ai i te ruma ma te tauа, a titiri ē atu i te ra'i! A ti'a te avae a ua i te po, a ti'a te ra, a ua i te ao i te aroaro o Atea, ei purotu, ei ruperupe no te fenua, no te ao o Ro'o te Ro'oro'o." 173
O te ta'o teie a Tane a na'o atu ai ia Atea: "E tama'i a'e i te poipoi ia hau a'e i te ahiahi; e tama'i a'e i te ahiahi ia faite a'e i te poipoi, i te taetae nei."
Tane and Rua-nu'u and 'Aruru (Collector), Tane's wife, with the two artisans, 'Oina (Swiftness) and Fafa (To-feel), set out on a voyage of deity. They sailed in the canoe, Fa'atere-apu, by the northeasterly wind which blew for the sailing, and they passed through all the skies unobstructed until the reached the dome of Atea, when the sailing was retarded, and the canoe became stranded and stood indented! 126
Then they sailed in a slanting direction, but were repulsed by the presence of Atea! Enchantments were thrown out to sail by, but derisive flames appeared in the sky of Atea! The artisans 'Oina and Fafa were consulted; and these artisans struck the outer, right ear of Atea to make him move off, but he was unmoved! 101
Now Tane stood up in his canoe, which could not go on the voyage to deity! And Tane exclaimed: "This is I, Tane of the living waters! Let this growth of lining be dispersed, let Atea be no more." 60
And Atea answered: "Oh, Tane, what wind hast thou to cause Atea to fall?" 24
"I have wind, all the head winds; I have wind, all the inner winds; I have wind, all the winds from behind!" 28
"O Tane, can Atea fall by thee? Thou art but a lad, but I, Atea, am a vigorous elder; it was I who begat thee, Tane! But by what force can Atea fall by thee?" 50
"I have force that will make thee fall, Atea!" So Tane caused all the winds to blow at once, and they fell only lightly sideways upon Tane, but fell short of Atea! All the forces of Tane came short of affecting Atea! 65
So Tane set sail again in his canoe; he sailed on from age to age, and continued to sail from age to age! They came to an abyss in the east and an abyss in the west; they passed land with rushing tides and land with light breezes. The canoe beat hither and thither, into contrary currents. Shoals became visible, and a harbor within; at Vavau (Papeno'o) was the harbor, Vavau in great Tahiti of the rocky caverns! The sails were reefed in and tied, out on the shoals. And now Tane asked his wife, 'Aruru: "O 'Aruru, what shall we do with my canoe in peril out here?" 177
Aruru answered: "What indeed!" Then she looked out well and said: "Turn inland, and turn out and push along with the pole and make one circuit of the sky." And Tane pushed in and out with the pole, and he made one circuit of the sky; then there was a grating sound in the ocean under the lowering sky. 90
And 'Aruru said again: "Push on towards that other point in the sky over there; there is a haven, free from the ocean, free from obstacles, free from towering waves." So Tane pushed on thither, and there was the haven, with smooth sea! Then Tane bailed out the sea from the canoe, and thus did Tane become a bailer of the sea! So those gods from the open sky arrived on their journey to deity. They had reached Vavau (Papeno'o). 135
Tane was out of breath, and he rested a little while in the bows of the canoe. Tane stood up, Tane whistled, he whistled and breathed heavily! Ro'o, the famous, and all the host of gods of this world welcomed them that had come on a voyage of deity. 75
Tane and Hoani proposed going down below, to Ta'ere, and so they flew there. Then Ta'ere welcomed them, and he said: "Is that thou, great Tane, god of all things beautiful?" 53
Tane answered: "This is indeed I, great Tane, whose eyes measure the skies, whose eyes unite with those of Ro'o, the famous!" "Thou hast a great errand?" 51
"I have a great errand here, to Ta'ere-of-all-skill!" 17
"Show it." 2
"Impart all the skill that thou hast in thee to me, that I may possess it also." 22
"I am quite willing, my brother." 9
*** 0
Tane dwelt with Ta'ere for a period, and he obtained all the science of Ta'ere-of-all-skill in himself. Then he returned to this world. Thus ended the visit of deity, of those gods of the skies, and Tane's canoe set out to sea again. 73
Vavau receded, the shoals were left behind. And Tane guided his canoe again along the land of light winds, and by way of the land of rushing tides. They sailed again by the abyss in the west and the abyss in the east, and continued to sail from age to age, and from age to age, until they reached Vai-ora (Living-water) in the sky of Tane! 103
Tane stood up and declared war against Atea! He held council with Ruanu'u! And thus he spoke: "This is I! Tane who grew up in the midst of many friends, Tane of great friends, Tane of heavenly friends! War shall now rage against the lining; the god, Atea, must be annihilated!" 84
Ruanu'u answered: "Thou art angry, no doubt, O Tane, handsome son of the gods!" 24
"I am angry." 3
"What means hast thou, Tane, to cause Atea to fall? Thou art but a lad, Tane, and Atea is a parent; he is a vigorous elder. It was Atea who gave thee birth, Tane! O Tane, thou hast come then from the house of artisans where Ta'ere is, what means hast thou obtained from Ta'ere-of-all-skill?" 96
"Yes, I have come from thence! I have obtained means! All that is foremost, all that is secondary, and all that is last, possessed by Atea, shall become Tane's! I shall bind the ocean of the sky, and ensnare the seas of the world with a rope and then let them break forth. I shall draw and scatter them. My loin girdle shall fly to clear the way for Tane, it shall stand to fly away and stand to fly back, and the little bird messenger shall go down to fetch the finishing stroke of Ta'aroa, whose course is death." 139
"Atea will not die by thee, O Tane! Thou art but a child, Atea is a parent; it was he who begat thee! Tane, O Tane! What means hast thou to cause Atea to fall?" 53
"O Ruanu'u, do not dispirit me! I have means! A single flash of lightning will make the sky of Atea become as a pricked coconut!" 41
"That will not make Atea fall, O Tane! But thou hast come from the house of artisans of Ta'ere, O Tane; what other means hast thou obtained from there?" 49
"I have other means! Here is my toa spear, Vero-ra'ai (Attacking-dart); it will pierce through the dome. Incantations shall accompany it as I throw it upon Atea, so that he will surely die." 60
"Go gently to the dome, O Tane! Present a peace-offering in the rear to obtain a welcome for thee from thy King Atea! Thou art the son, O Tane, and Atea himself is thy parent." 55
*** 0
But Tane was vexed for a time with the dome; he was enraged with the dome; he spoke angrily of the dome! 32
Now Tane stood up in his sky, he used enchantments upon his toa spear, he walked gently along, and lanced his spear adroitly through nine skies onto Atea, but it stood without power upon him and rebounded lightly towards Tane. 69
Thus all the forces stealthily directed towards Atea returned without effect to Tane! And Atea has stood unmoved in his place to this day. All the hosts of gods were witnesses to testify that Atea did not die by the enchantments of Tane and that the mighty spear of Tane did not pierce him. 87
Tane whistled and breathed heavily in his sky! Then his anger was appeased, and he went away! 27
Where is Tane? There he is coming; Tane who stands within is transformed into Tane who stands without. What is in his hand? A peace-offering for himself and Atea; it is a shooting star for a token of deference to Atea, for the great enciente full of ripeness of Atea. "Bind up all gloom and war and cast them away from the skies! As the moon rises, let it rain at night; as the sun rises let it rain in the day-time, from the lining of Atea, to beautify and fertilize the earth, the world of Ro'o, the prayer chanter." 159
This is what Tane said as he remarked to Atea: "When strife arises in the morning, let it be peace in the evening; when contention arises in the evening let it be reconciliation in the morning between kinsfolk."
Henry: 458 1
Source: Pape-au, a Tahitian scholar
Date of recitation: 1824 32
Ru and Hina explore the Earth
A paepae Rū i te va'a i te po raa, ia ao ae a reva 'tu ai. A fano i Hitia, tae aera i Tahiti-iti, o Mo'orea e ae a i te mata'i, e i Tahiti-nui ia Hiti-i-te-ara-piopio. A haati i tereira na fenua. A fano atu a o Rū ma; ua oti ana'e te fenua i te tuha hia mai e raua; na te apato'a, na te apato'erau mai, na te hitia, na te to'a mai, ua oti ana'e ia i te tuha hia e Rū toa iti, Rū toa nui, ia Rū i taai i te fenua, e ia Hina-fa'auru-va'a, te tuahine ae, na'na teie pehe 218
E honuhonu o te vai e! 10
E toetoe o te vai e! 10
E oura ri'i o te vai, 10
E ihaa o te vai, 8
E onana o te vai, 8
Te ipua o te vai! 8
Ata-pua i te vai i uta na 12
E hirinai, e aea! 9
Te mata roa o tia fenua, 11
A tia e a hi'o, 7
A nana i uta ia tu-mou'a! 12
Temata roa o Tia-fenua, 11
A tia e a hi'o! 7
E nana i tai ia Te-fatu-moana! 14
Te mata roa o tia-fenua, 11
A ti'a, a nana i nia ia Atea ra! 15
Te mata roa o tia fenua 11
A ti'a e a hi'o! 7
A nana i raro i te aro ia Te-tumu, 15
Ia te meho i te vavai, 10
Ia te puna-tau-tua, 9
Ia te puna-tau-aro, 9
Ia te are i Hiti, 8
Ia te are i To'a, 8
Ia tu poa, ia ahu poa,, 11
Ia ehu nui totoro i orovaru.
Rū lay to at night and sailed on in the day time. They sailed east and arrived at Little-Tahiti, Mo'orea struck by the wind, and at Great-Tahiti with Hiti-i-te-ara-piopio (Taiarapu). They sailed around those islands. Rū and his companion sailed on; the islands were all located by them; from south to north, from east to west, they were all located by Rū the dear valiant one, Rū who explored the earth, and by Hina-faauru-va'a, his sister, whose song was as follows 150
O depths of the rivers! 6
O coldness of the rivers! 7
Little shrimps of the rivers, 7
Great shrimps of the rivers, 7
O prawns of the rivers, 6
O fullness of the rivers! 7
The waters inland reflecting flowers 10
That approach and recede! 8
Let the farsighted who dwell on land 9
Arise and see! 6
Look inland to the settled mountains! 12
Let the farsighted who dwell on land, 9
Arise and see! 6
Look over the sea of Te-fatu-moana (The-lord-of-the-ocean)! 21
Let the farsighted who dwell on land, 9
Arise, and behold Atea above! 12
Let the farsighted who dwell on land, 9
Arise and see! 6
Look below in the presence of Te-tumu 13
At the jungles and the rushing streams, 10
At the fountains of the deep, 10
At the fountains of the surface, 11
At the waves of the east, 8
At the waves of the west, 7
At the stable nooks, at the burning nooks, 12
At the great development extending over the eight directions.
Henry: 458-459 1
Source: Pao-raro, high priest of Porapora; Rai-tupu, high priest of Porapora; Tamere, a Tahitian high priest 47
The canoe of Tumu-nui
A rara'o te Tumu-nui i to'na va'a i ni'a roa i te mou'a ra i Orohena o Vai-tu-huhua taua va'a o te Tumu ra. A tuhura te va'a o te Tumu i te vai o te roto mou'a, a topa i taua va'a ra ia Vai-tuhura-i-te-aro-o-te-Tumu. I to'ia i te farau, a topa i taua va'a ra, o Vai-vai-farau-i-te-aro-o-te-Tumu. 129
Fa'aterehia te va'a e te Tumu a topa te i'oa o taua va'a ra, o Vai-tie-fa'anu'ua-i-te-aro-o-te-Tumu. 45
I vai a tau na taua va'a ia te Tumu ra, i moeapohia 'tura e Tane i te po a topa Tane i te i'oa o taua va'a ra, o Ahura-moemoe-a-pō. Riro atura ia va'a ia Tane. I heuea e Tane, i ni'a i to'na ra ra'i, te ra'i tini hamama, a topa i te i'oa i taua va'a ra, o Ra'i-heuea-a-Tane. 124
A fa'atere Tane i to'na va'a i te ra'i hamama o Tane, te vai piri mai ra te apu o Atea. A topa i te i'oa o taua va'a ra, o Fa'atere-apu-i-te-aro-o-Tane. Ta Tane ana'e ia mau i'oa i topa i te riro ra'a mai ia Tane taua v'a ra.
Te Tumu-nui prepared himself a canoe on the top of Mount Orohenа, and its name was Vai-tu-huhua (Water-on-the-summit-of-the-mountain). As Te Tumu's canoe sported in the waters of the mountain lake, it was named Vai-tuhura-i-te-aro-o-te-Tumu (Water-playing-in-the-presence-of-Tumu). The canoe was drawn into a shed and then it was named Vai-vai-farau-i-te-aro-o-te-Tumu (Water-of-the-shed-in-the-presence-of-Tumu). 140
Te Tumu sailed in his canoe, and named it Vai-tie-fa'anu'ua-i-te-aro-o-te-Tumu (Water-carried-and-moved-away-in-the-presence-of-Tumu). 50
That canoe remained for a period with Te Tumu, when it was seized one night by Tane, and he named it Ahura-moemoe-a-po (Fisherman's-prayer-in-night-dreams). Then the canoe was Tane's. And he threw it up into his sky, the tenth open sky, when it was named Rai-heuea-a-Tane (Sky-thrown-by-Tane). 88
Tane sailed his canoe in his clear open sky, but the dome of Atea was close up against it. And the canoe was named Fa'atere-apu-i-te-aro-o-Tane (Cruiser-of-the-dome-in-the-presence-of-Tane). All these were the names that Tane gave the canoe after it became his.
Henry: 461-462 1
Source: Tu-pa-ia, a schoolmaster, who learned it from his aged grandfather, Ta-taura, a raatira (chieftain) of Motu-tapu, Ra'iatea
Date of recitation: 1886 63
Sacred canoe song of Ru
Tei muri Te-ao-tea-roa, te mua te moana atea! 21
Tei muri o Rū, tei mua o Hina! 14
Pehe ihora o Rū 8
"Tutai, tutai au i te fenua, 13
Te-apori, Te-apori e! 9
Tutai, tutai au i te fenua, 13
A mau maite a'e i Maurua." 13
A pii ra te tuahine, o Hina, 12
I nia i te au poueru; 11
"E Rū e! E fenua te fa'atautau nei, 17
O vai ia fenua?" 8
"O Maurua; tuu i te tiai i nia iho, 17
Maurua nui te afera." 10
A pehe a o Rū 7
"Tutai, tutai au i te fenua, 13
Te-apori, Te-apori e! 9
Tutai, tutai au i te fenua, 13
A mau maite ae i Porapora." 13
A pii ra te tuahine, O Hina. 12
I nia i te au poueru, 11
"E Rū e! E fenua te fa'atautau nei, 17
O vai ia fenua?" 8
"O Porapora; tu'u i te tiai i nia iho, 17
O Porapora nui te fanau tahi, 13
Porapora i te nu'u ai rua, 12
O Porapora i te hoe mamu, 11
Porapora i te rau ura mea, 12
Porapora te fati a nu'u." 10
A pehe a o Ru 6
"Tutai, tutai au i te fenua, 13
Te-apori, Te-apori e! 9
Tutai, tutai au i te fenua, 13
A mau maite ae i Taha'a." 12
Te pii ra te tuahine, o Hina, 12
I nia i te au poueru 11
"E Rū! E fenua te fa'atautau nei, 16
O vai fenua?" 6
"O Taha'a; tuu i te tiai i nia iho, 16
O Taha'a nui ma rai hau." 11
Pehe noa 'tura o Rū 9
"Tutai, tutai au i te fenua, 13
Te-apori, Te-apori e! 9
Tutai au i te fenua. 10
A mau maite ae i Ra'iatea." 14
Te pii ra te tuahine, o Hina, 12
I nia i te au poueru 11
"E Rū e! E fenua te fa'atautau nei, 17
O vai ia fenua?" 8
"O Havai'i, tu'u i te tiai i nia iho, 17
O Havai'i i ae hau te amaama, 15
O Havai'i nui ia ufa te marai. 15
Hi'o ra'i i tai te Omamao; 12
Horue na i te tai i Arei, 12
O Putu iti a taa i te tua! 12
O Ma-uru, te tane, o Ma-uru te vahine, 15
A hiti hoi, a tau hoi, e Rū! 13
To ia ia horo, ia horo ta'u va'a i e! 17
To ia i uta, to ia i tai, 12
To ia ia horo, ia horo ta'u va'a i e! 17
To ia i muri, to ia i mua, 12
To ia ia horo, 7
Ia horo ta'u va'a i e!"
Behind was Te-ao-tea-roa, before was the vast ocean! 19
Rū was astern, Hina was ahead! 11
And thus Rū sang 5
"I am drawing, drawing [thee] to land, 10
Te-apori, O Te-apori! 9
I am drawing, drawing [thee] to land, 10
Now hold steadily on to Maurua" 11
Then cried his sister, Hina, 8
Upon the foaming waves 8
"O Rū! land is looming up, 9
What land is it?" 4
"It is Maurua; let its watchword be, 11
Great Maurua forever." 9
Rū sang again 6
"I am drawing, drawing [thee] to land, 10
Te-apori, O Te-apori! 9
I am drawing, drawing [thee] to land, 10
Now hold steadily on to Porapora." 11
Then cried his sister, Hina, 8
Upon the foaming waves, 8
"O Rū! land is looming up, 9
What land is it?" 4
"It is Porapora; let its watchword be, 11
Porapora the great, the firstborn, 10
Porapora of the fleet that consumes two ways, 14
Porapora of the muffled paddle, 10
Porapora of the pink leaf, 9
Porapora the destroyer of fleets." 11
Rū sang again 6
"I am drawing, drawing [thee] to land, 10
Te-apori, O Te-apori! 9
I am drawing, drawing [thee] to land, 10
Now hold steadily on to Taha'a." 10
Then cried his sister, Hina, 8
Upon the foaming waves; 8
"O Rū! land is looming up, 9
What land is it?" 4
"It is Taha'a; let its watchword be, 10
Great Taha'a of peaceful sky." 10
Rū continued to sing 8
"I am drawing, drawing [thee] to land, 10
Te-apori, O Te-apori! 9
I am drawing [thee] to land, 8
Now hold steadily on to Havai'i (Ra'iatea)." 16
Then cried his sister Hina, 8
Upon the foaming waves 8
"O Rū! land is looming up. 9
What land is it?" 4
"It is Havai'i; let its watchword be, 11
Havai'i that towers exceeding in glory, 13
Great Havai'i when enraged in its beauty. 15
The thrush looks seawards into the sky; 10
Riding upon the surf of 'Arei [in Huahine], 15
The dear albatross will be left behind! 11
Ma-uru (Changing-season) the husband, Ma-uru the wife, 17
Will come indeed forever, O Rū! 12
Draw it to run, that my sailing canoe may run! 13
Draw it to the shore, draw it to sea, 11
Draw it to run, that my sailing canoe may run! 13
Draw it behind, draw it before, 9
Draw it to run, 4
That my sailing canoe may run!"
Henry: 464 1
Source: Papearu, a Tahitian scholar
Date of recitation: 1854 35
Tahitian circuit of navigation
A hope te fenua te tuha hia e Rū ma Hina, a fano ā Mā-ū-i e ta'na nu'u va'a i te tai no ta'na ari'i no Ama-tai-atea. A tae 'oia e ta'na ta'ata i te fenua, oti vitiviti ihora te marae, e fa'anoho i te tahua. 93
I tae i na Hiti. Tae i Hiti'a, i te Tua Motu e i Ma'areva. I tae na to'a, na Tupuai, na Rurutu, na Fenua-ura, Rimatara, Manitia, e i tae i Raroto'a, i Rimitera e i Te-ao-tea-roa o te Maori. Ua tae ana'e na reira. I tae na to'a, ra Tutuira, Uporu, Tavai'i, e na Vavau, na Atiu, Ahuahu, e o Ma'atea. Tae na to'erau, na Nu'u-hiva roa e na 'Aihi ahuahu.
After Rū and Hina had located lands, Mā-ū-i and his flotilla sailed again over the ocean, for his king, Ama-tai-atea (Outrigger-of-the-expansive-ocean). As he and his people arrived at lands, they built temples conveniently and assigned them to priests. 86
They went to the borders. The went to the east, to the Tuamotus and to Mangareva. They went south, to Tubuai, to Rurutu, to the Paroquet Islands, Rimatara and Mangaia and on to Rarotonga, to Rimitera, and to Te-ao-tea-roa (The-long-white-land) of the Maoris [New Zealand]. They went everywhere in these directions. They went west, to Tutuila, Upolu, Savai'i (Samoa); and to Vavau, Atiu, Ahuahu, and Ma'atea (or Makatea, formerly called Papatea). They went north, to the distant Marquesas and to burning 'Aihi (Hawaii).
Henry: 468-470 1
Source: Aita (No), a Porapora scholar
Date of recitation: December 24, 1825 35
Tu-i-hiti and Hau-vanaa
Matamata-taua, a taua ia Tumu-nui i Tahiti-To'erau, e ei tamahine a'e o Hau-vana'a. 40
Taoto a'era te Ari'i Tū-i-hiti ia Hau-vana'a 'a'ore ra i piri. Toina atu ai te hana i te metua, fa'aora hia mai ai i rapae e te metua. 63
Ua puta atura te hani i roto i te 'a'au o te tamahine, ta'i atura ta'i atura i te Ari'i Tū-i-hiti. 44
Ua parau atura te metua; 12
"Ua piri to vahine." Haere atura oia i te vahine ra. Ua parau mai ra te vahine 35
"I hea 'oe, e te Ari'i Tū-i-hiti? i oto noa na vau ia 'oe!" Ua parau atura te tane 38
"No te aha 'oe i oto mai ai ia'u? Parahi ra'a roa to'u io 'oe nei, e 'a'ita 'oe i parau maitai mai ia'u, e inaha ua mauru te pae o to'u 'upo'o i to'u oto. Teie ra ta'u parau ia 'oe, e ta'u vahine, e poroi atu na vau ia 'oe, e haere au i to'u ra utu'afare i to'u ra fenua." Ua parau atura te vahine, 139
"Eiaha 'oe e fa'arue ia'u!" Ua parau te tane. 22
"A, tei ia 'oe iho, e ta'u vahine. Ua hina'aro 'oe i te haere 'atoa taua io'u ra e parahi ai?" Oto noa 'tura te vahine, nao atura 59
"E, e poroi na ra vau i ta'u na metua." 16
Haere atura i te metua ra ma te oto, manao 'ino atura te metua tane e e mea taparahi hia oia e tana tane, ua ui mai ra; 55
"E Hau-vana'a, na vai 'oe i taparahi? E ari'i 'oe io'u nei, 'e'ita 'oe e aa hia e te ta'ata." Na o atura te tamahine 52
"'E'ere au i te mea taparahi hia." Fa'ai'te roa 'tura i te parau. Ma te nao e, e reva raua e te tane i to'na ra fenua i Hiti-au-rereva. Ua parau mai ra Tumu-nui 70
"Te parau atu na vau ia 'oe e ta'u tamahine, eiaha 'oe e nonoa i to tane, e ari'i tena no Hiti e e fa'aho'i 'oe i tereira huru. E i teienei, e pau to va'a-mataeina'a i tena; e rave rahi te toa i te moana. Oia o Pu'a-tu-tahi, o Ahifa-tu-moana, o 'Are-mata-roroa, o Are-mata-popoto, o Pahua-nui-api-taa-i-te-ra'i, o Anae-moe-oho, o Tupe-io-ahu, e o 'Otu'u-ha'a-mana-a-Ta'aroa! E i teienei e ta'u tamahine, eiaha 'oe e haere; e fa'aea mai 'oe i onei, i to na metua nei." Nao atura te tamahine 224
"E 'ore roa vau e parahi." Nao atura te metua tane 22
"'E'ita 'oe e oto ia'u e i to metua vahine?" 20
"E oto ho'i au, e hau ra to'u u oto I ta'u tane." 21
"A haere, E mаrō ari'i to oe; 'e'ita e fati ia tapea." Haere atura te tamahine i te tane ra, e ua parau mai ra taua ari'i ra 56
"Ua ta'a maitai to manao e Hau-vana'a, e e haere 'atoa 'oe i to'u ra fenua? 35
"E haere 'atoa vau!" Nao atura rá te tane 17
"Teie ra ta'u parau ia 'oe, e ta'u vahine. E parahi i te fenua nei, e hi'o i te metua e to 'oe va'a-mataeina'a, e to 'oe mou'a, e to 'oe umere." Ua parau mai ra te vahine 76
"'E'ita roa vau e parahi." Ua parau atura te tane: "Eiaha ra, e ta'u tuahine, e taoa ta'i te metua e te fenua ia moina a'e taua i te ahinavaira. Eiaha, e ta'u tuahine, 'e'ita ia e 'itea fa'ahou hia mai e te mata te fenua nei!" 105
"E haere atoa taua!" 10
Ua fa'ati'a mai ra te tane, ua parau mai ra 20
"A rave mai i to taua a'ahu, e to taua ma'a moe'a."
Matamata-taua (Endless-strife) became the bosom friend (wife) of Tumu-nui (Great-foundation) of North-Tahiti, and Hau-vana'a (Government-of-orators) was their daughter. 57
King Tū-i-hiti (Stability-of-the-border) took as his wife Hau-vana'a, but she cared not for him. She turned away pining for her parents, and so the parents withdrew her from him. 52
Then love pierced the heart of the daughter, and she fretted for King Tū-i-hiti. 25
And the parents said to him 8
"Your wife has become attached to you." And so he went to his wife. She enquired 27
"Where have you been, King Tū-i-hiti? I have been weeping for you!" The husband replied 31
"Why have you been weeping for me? I remained a long time with you, and you did not speak kindly to me, so that you see the hair of my head has partly fallen out from grief. Now this is what I wish to say to you, my wife, I am taking leave of you, and am returning to my home in my country." The wife replied 94
"Do not forsake me!" The husband said 11
"Ah, it rests with yourself, my wife. Do you wish to go with me to my home to dwell?" The wife wept freely, and she said 32
"Yes, but I must first bid farewell to my parents." 12
So she went to her parents still in tears, and her father suspecting that her husband had beaten her, said 29
"Hau-vana'a, who has been beating you? You have been a princess with me, no one daring to assault you." The daughter replied 43
"I have not been beaten." And she told them everything, stating that she and her husband were going away to his land, to Hiti-au-revareva (Border-of-passing clouds, Pitcairn Island). Tumu-nui replied 61
"I told you, my daughter, not to spurn your husband, that he was a king from the Border and you might thus send him back there. Now your countrymen would be lost in this voyage; many are the foes of the deep. There are, Pu'a-tū-tahi (Coral-rock-standing-alone), Ahifa-tu-moana (the Sea-serpent), 'Are-mata-roroa (Long-wave), Are-mata-popoto (Short-wave), Pahua-nui-api-taa-i-te-ra'i (Great-Tridacna-that-opens-against-the-sky), Anae-moe-oho (Shoal-of-monsters), Tupe-io-ahu (Beast-of-heated-flesh), and 'Otu'u-ha'a-mana-a-Ta'aroa (Stork-exalted-by-Ta'aroa)! And now my daughter, do not go; stay here with us, your parents." The daughter answered 203
"I shall by no means stay." The father said 11
"Will you not weep for me and your mother?" 13
"I shall weep [she said], but I should weep more for my husband." 18
"Go" [said he]. "You have a royal will; you cannot be persauded to stay." So the daughter went to her husband, and the king said [to her] 40
"Have you properly considered the matter, Hau-vana'a, to go with me to my country?" 25
"I will go with you" [she said]. But the husband said 15
"Here is what I would say to you, my wife. Stay here in your country, and behold your parents, your clan, your mountain, and hear your praises [in the chants]." The wife answered 54
"I shall by no means stay." The husband continued 13
"But no, my sister, parents and country would cause regret as soon as they became lost to you and me in the distant haze. No, my sister, your eyes then would not again see this land!" 54
"I will go with you!" [she said]. And so the husband consented, and he said [to her]: 23
"Put together our clothes and our bedding."
Henry: 471 1
Conversation between Tū-i-hiti and spirit of the coral
Rock. A tahi va'a ia e tere mai! 13
Tū-i-hiti. O 'Are-mata-roroa ia. 'Ovai ra ia 'aito e parau mai ra? 31
Rock. "'Ovau, o Pu'a-tū-tahi." 11
Tū-i-hiti. Eaha 'oe e matauruuru ai i to'u va'a? 24
Rock. E te Ari'i Tū-i-hiti, tei hea to vahine, o Hau-vana'a? 25
Tū-i-hiti. Teie i nia i te va'a. 15
Rock. Teie ta'u parau ia 'oe e ta'u ari'i Tū-i-hiti. Tiri ia mai i raro i te tai, ei fa'atoa i to'u manava. Te vai ra te mamae i te 'a'au i te nanoa ra'a ia vahine ia 'oe. 78
Tū-i-hiti. E Pu'a-tū-tahi e, 'e'ita vau e pa! E 'arofa vau i ta'u vahine, i te mea ia i mauru ai te pae o to'u 'upo'o; o teie nei vahine! Fa'aro'o mai na ra. Tiae o te rarao mai te ari'i a'era, o Tumu-nui, i te va'a, o te tapea mai i te tamahine, tae mai i onei ia 'oe nei, a tapea iho. 129
Rock. A haere, e ta'u ari'i.
Rock. There is a canoe approaching! 12
Tū-i-hiti. It is 'Are-mata-roroa. Who is that foe speaking? 22
Rock. It is I, Pu'a-tū-tahi. 10
Tū-i-hiti. Why do you roar at my canoe? 14
Rock. O King Tū-i-hiti, where is your wife, Hau-vana'a? 20
Tū-i-hiti. Here in the canoe. 12
Rock. This is what I have to say to you, my king, Tū-i-hiti. Throw her into the sea, to stimulate my vitals. Pain still remains in your heart from the slights that this wife has shown you. 54
Tū-i-hiti. Pu'a-tū-tahi, I cannot part [with her]! I love my wife, in proof of which she was the cause of my hair partly falling out! it was this woman! But give heed to me. Should yonder king, Tumu-nui, prepare his canoe to come for his daughter, when he arrives here where you are, hold him back. 93
Rock. Go on, my king.
Henry: 473 1
Tumu-nui encountering Ahifa-tu-moana
"E Tumu-nui e, ua pohe tatou!" 13
"E pohe tatou ia vai?" 10
"E pohe i te Ahifa-tu-moana." 12
"Ua puoroa i te fenua tere mai ai au i te moana nei, e 'ore au e mata'u."
"O Tumu-nui, we shall perish!" 9
"By whom shall we perish?" said he. 8
"We shall perish by Ahifa-tu-moana." 11
"I have performed my religious duties at home before I sailed abroad, so that I have no fear."
Henry: 474-475 1
King 'Iore-roa bidding his people farewell
Ei onei ra 'outou e te va'a mataeina'a o Peeai e Papahonu o te Hiti-uta e te Hiti-tai! Teie matou e e tere nei i te moana, 'aore 'itea te tae fa'ahou ra'a mai i te fenua nei. Inaha, to'u tua'ana, ua mate i te toa o te moana! 105
Teie to 'outou ari'i a muri atu, o to matou tamaiti iti, o Rata. O to'na metua vahine, o Maemae-a-rohi, ta'u tuahine, te fa'atere-hau ei mono a'e ia'u; a hi'o 'outou e a ha'apao maite 'outou ia raua. E pee mai mai ta'u na teina ia matou ia pohe a'e. 118
Te haere nei matou e farerei ia Pu'a-tū-tahi, ia 'Are-mata-roroa, ia 'Are-mata-popoto, ia Ahifa-tu-moana, ia Pahu'a-nui-api-taa-i-te-ra'i, ia Anae-moe-oho, ia Tupe-io-ahu, e ia 'Otu'u-ha'amana-ia-Ta'aroa. E riro paha matou i te pohe ma te 'ite 'ore fa-ahou, e 'imi a ra matou i ta'u tua'ana, ia Tumu-nui, e i tei pee 'atoa ia na. Ia ora tatou i te atua! 164
[King accosting Pu'a-tū-tahi, monstrous sea serpent, and breakers] 21
"'O vai ra ia tau toa?" 10
"'O maua ia, 'o te Pu'a-tū-tahi e te Ahifa-tu-moana." 23
"Eaha 'orua e pau mai ai i to'u pahi?" 18
"E pau maua e ha'apou ia 'outou ei ta'ata na maua." 26
"'Eita matou e noaa ia 'orua! Ua au i to'u atua; ua ha'apee ta'u pua'a; ua pee tei ni'a, ua fai tei raro, tere ai matou i te moana."
Abide here, O clans of Peeai (Made-to-fly) and Papahonu (Turtle-Rock), Hiti-uta (Inner-coast) and Hiti-tai (Outer-coast)! Here are we about to launch on the deep, not knowing whether we shall ever return home. Behold, my brother has been slain by an ocean foe! 84
Here is your future king, our little boy, Rata (Tame). His mother, Maemae-a-rohi (Courageous-frown), my sister, will be the regent in my place; look to them and give them heed. My younger brothers will follow. 63
We are going to approach Pu'a-tū-tahi, 'Are-mata-roroa, Are-mata-popoto, Ahifa-tu-moana, Pahu'a-nui-api-taa-i-te-ra'i, Anae-moe-oho, Tupe-io-ahu, and 'Otu'u-ha'amana-ia-Ta'aroa. We shall perhaps perish without seeing you again; yet we must search for my brother, Tumu-nui, and those who accompanied him. May you and we live in the gods! 125
[King accosting Pu'a-tū-tahi, monstrous sea serpent, and breakers] 21
"Who are those foes?" 7
"It is we, Pu'a-tū-tahi and Ahifa-tu-moana." 17
"Why do you send out sprays to my ship?" 9
"We splash you to make you come down and be men for us." 17
"You cannot overcome us! I prayed to my god; I offered a pig as a sacrifice; propitiation was established above, and curses were banished below ere we launched into the deep."
Henry: 477-478 1
Conferring of regal power to Rata
E na va'a mataeina'a nei, e Pe'eai e Papahonu, Hiti-uta, Hiti-tai, e parau iti ta'u ia 'outou! Te hi'o atu nei au ia 'outou, inaha ua hefahefa te mata i te hi'o ra'a tu i te rahi o te ta'ata. Ua fa'aro'o 'outou i ta'u parau 'imutaa a'enei e 112
"A ta'ahi i te fenua, e fa'a'apu i te ma'a, e ha'apori i te ta'ata e rave maitai i te hua'ai," ia noa'a te monoi te feia i moe atu i te ara o te moana, a haere fa'ahou atu ai i te matataua ia noa'a mai te pera, o Tumu-nui e tei pee atu ia 'na. 112
I teienei, te opua nei au i te fa'atupu i te tere, maua e te Ari'i Matamata-taua te haere e 'imi i tei pohe ra, e haere roa 'tu ai e hi'o i to maua tamahine ia Hauvana'a i Hiti-au-rereva. E rave rahi te 'aito i te moana; 'oia hoi o Pu'a-tū-tahi, o Ahifa-tu-moana, o 'Are-mata-roroa, o 'Are-mata-popoto, o Pahua-nui-api-taa-i-te-ra'i, o Anae-moeoho, o Tupe-io-ahu, e o 'Otu'u-ha'amana ia Ta'aroa. E noa'a te pohe i teie nei pue aito. 200
Teie ra taua parau na'u nei: no te mea ua ta'ata hia 'tura to tatou fenua, e fa'atupu na tatou i te ho'e harura'a pua'a, e vae i te va'a-mataeina'a, o Hiti-uta e o Hiti-tai o tahi pae; o Pe'eai e o Papa-honu tahi pae. A haru ai 'outou i te pua'a, ei fa'a'ite'itera'a e tei hea te mataeina'a ta'ata itoito maitai ia maiti no te tere na tera mau fenua, na te Pu'a-tū-tahi, na Hiti-tautau-mai, na Hiti-poto, na Hiti-tautau-atu, na Hiti-au-rereva mara'a i ra'i. E noa'a roa ia i tereira feia te toa o te moana e tae noa 'tu i na taehae o te fenua ra o Hiti-marama. 'A'ita e puai o te ta'ata ra, e noho ia ii te fenua, eiaha e haere. 287
Eaha to 'outou manao, e na va'a mataeina'a nei, i teie parau? 30
Ua ti'a ia ia matou. Parau maitai roa tena, e te Ari'i vahine Fa'aterehau. E fa'a'ite na te ui api, ia 'itea maitai hia te huru. Ua ta'ahi matou i te fenua, ua fa'a'apu i te ma'a, e ua rahi mai te hua'ai; e rohi ra ia tupu te itoito e ia manuia manuia tena tere.
O clans here present, Peeai, Papahonu, Hiti-uta, and Hiti-ta'i, I have something to say to you. I am surveying you, and behold my eyes canot include you all in one glance, because you are so numerous. You have heeded what I once said [to you] 88
"Tread the earth, cultivate food, let the people grow fat, and take care of the offspring, that they may replace those who are lost on the trackless ocean, and resume our efforts to recover the remains of Tumu-nui and his followers." 72
Now I purpose carrying out my plans to go, accompanied by Queen Matamata-taua (Endless-strife) and seek our lost ones and go on to see our daughter [and niece] Hau-vana'a at Hiti-au-rereva. There are many foes upon the deep; they are Pu'a-tū-tahi. Ahifa-tu-moana. 'Are-mata-roroa, 'Are-mata-popoto, Pahua-nui, Api-taa-i-te-ra'i, Anae-moeoho, Tupe-io-ahu, and 'Otu'u-haamana-ia-Ta'aroa. We may meet death by any of these foes. 161
Now this is what I have to say: because our land is replenished with people, let us have a boar chase, dividing the clans, having Hiti-uta and Hiti-tai on one side and Pe'eai and Papa-honu on the other. Then you will chase the boars, and we shall thus test the courage of the men of the different clans, so as to choose those who will be capable of action in going to the islands of Pu'a-tū-tahi, Hiti-tautau-mai, Hiti-poto, Hiti-tautau-atu, and Hiti-au-revareva that rises to the sky. Such men can lay hold of the foes in the ocean, and even on the demons of the island of Hiti-marama. But if there be no capable men, we shall remain in this land and abandon the project of going. 222
What do you think, O clans here present, of my proposal? 15
We agree to it. What you say is very good, O Princess Regent. Let the new generation show what they are capable of doing [said the people]. We have trodden the earth, we have cultivated food, and much offspring has been given us; now let us take courage and be strong so as to succeed in this enterprise.
Henry: 479-480 1
Reproach over Rata's killing players of boar seizing game
[People of Pe'eai and Papahonu to Queen Maemae-a-rohi] 24
E te Ari'i Maemae-a-rohi vahine e, tera iho te ta'ata o Peeai e o Papahonu, i ha'apori hia ei ta'ata no te tere, ei fa'a'ite ra'a ui i te tere o te Ari-i-vahine o Maemae-a-rohi! 81
[Queen Maemae-a-rohi to Rata] 13
Eaha 'oe i taparahi ai i te ta'ata? Ta 'oe ia i na o mai e, 'e'ita 'oe e rave noa a'e i ta vera harura'a pua'a? E ari'i maitai 'oe? Inaha, to pue metua o tei pohe i te toa o te moana, te mau ari'i ia i ha'apao hia ei ari'i no te fenua, 'a'ita i taparahi i te ta'ata; e tae mai nei ia 'oe, o'oe atura te taparahi i te ta'ata i fa'aea noa i ni'a i te fenua nei! Eaha 'oe i rave nunui ai i te ta'ata? E ho'ona ho'i te taua ia 'oe, e tena ta'ata ino? Ahiri ho'i 'oe e ta'ata maitai, e 'ai 'oe i te pua'a o to 'oe na'u metua, ta'ata ino pai 'oe. Haere pai 'oe e'ai i te huehue ia pohe vave atu i tena na mahana. 'Aore 'oe a pohe i reira, a haere a amu i te tutae. Eiaha 'oe e amu i te ma'a maumau, te ma'a o te fenua nei a pau i te manumanu ia 'oe, tena na ta'ata 'ino! 352
[Rata to Queen Maemae-a-rohi] 13
E ta'u metua vahine, e te Ari'i Maemae-a-rohi vahine e, mea ra te toetoe o to'u 'a'au ē! Ahiri 'oe i tu mai e taparahi ia'u, mahana-hana ai to'u 'a'au. Eiaha e atu ia, ahiri 'oe i fa'aue i te ta'ata o te va'amataeina'a e tu mai e tata ia'u i te ra'au, 'e'ita roa vau e mamae i tereira! 'A'ita 'tu e ra'au mamae rahi, maori ra o te reo i avau mai nei, e te amuamu; toetoe maite atura to'u 'a'au! Na vai teie, mai te po'ipo'i mai a e a pō maite, e ao a'era e a pō ho'i teie ra, te avau noa mai nei a 'oe! Ta 'oe e parau mai nei e ta'u metua vahine, e Maemae-a-rohi, taria-pu tena parau no'u. 276
Teie ra ta'u parau, e ta'u metua vahine, E hoe atu taua i to 'oe tere. E roa'a ia'u te mata taua; pohe ana'e ia mau toa ia'u. Ahiri e mai te fenua tuati ra e tae noa ia haere, teienei ia mahana e pau ai ia mau toa ia'u. Napehea rа, inaha e tai tua. E'ita atura e noa'a i teienei! 135
A rave ra vau e tarai i ta'u pahi, e ia oti, taua 'toa te haere i to tere taua. Fa'aho'i ra i to va'a a'era i roto i te farau, e hoe a'e o taua tere, 'e'ita ia 'oe e pohe.
[People of Pe'eai and Papahonu to Queen Maemae-a-rohi] 24
O Princess Maemae-a-rohi, these are the people of Pe'eai and Papahonu, fattened for their journey, as an illustration to generations of the travels of the Princess Maemae-a-rohi! 65
[Queen Maemae-a-rohi to Rata] 13
Why did you murder the people? Was that keeping your promise not to interfere with their boar seizing? Are you a good king? Behold, your father and uncles, who were slain by their foes of the ocean, were worthy princes of the land; they did not slay men; and now you have arisen, you have killed inoffensive people of the land! Why did you lay a heavy hand upon them? Can you recover friendship, O man of evil? Were you a worthy person, you might eat pork as did your fathers, but you are unworthy. Go then and eat globe-fish, that you may die today. And if you do not die of that, go and eat dung. Eat not the food of the brave, lest the aliments of the land become blighted by you, unworthy man! 214
[Rata to Queen Maemae-a-rohi] 13
O my mother, Princess Maemae-a-rohi, how chilled now is my heart! Oh, that you would come and beat me so as to warm my heart. And if not this, were you to order the people of the clans to come and smite me with rods, I should not feel pain from them! There is no rod that hurts so badly as the voice of reproach and derision that reaches me; it has chilled my heart! What manner of doing is this, from morning till night from day until now it is night again, you are still upbraiding me! What you say to me, O my mother, Maemae-a-rohi, your words my ears retain. 166
And now here is what I wish to say, O my mother. Let me go with you on your voyage. I am capable of waging war; all those foes I can slay. Were it land joining this, upon which I could go, this day would I consume all those foes. But what can be done when there is the open sea! They cannot now be reached! 93
Then let me make my ship, and when it is finished allow me to accompany you on your long journey. Have your canoe now replaced in its shed, and let us both go together, so that you may not die.
Henry: 483 1
Greeting to aha-tea tree
Manava no te raau i te hi'ora'a! 14
Manava no te tupura'a ra'au i te fenua! 17
Manava no te tutonu ra'a o te ra'au! 15
Manava no te hi'ara'a o te ra'au! 14
Manava no te tapura'a o te ra'au! 14
Manava no te tutai ra'a o te ra'au!
Welcome to the tree we behold! 10
Welcome to the tree growing in the ground! 13
Welcome to the tree overlooking us! 13
Welcome to the tree to fall! 9
Welcome to the tree to be chopped! 11
Welcome to the tree to be drawn away!
Henry: 484 1
Tuoi-papa-papa's call to Ihu-ata and other artisan elves
E Ihu-ata e, e te mano o te atua! 15
Te atua i te aivi e, a pou! 13
Te atua i te fa'a e, a pou! 12
Te atua tapotu e, a pou! 11
A pou, e fa'ati'a tatou i te ra'au mo'i nei, na pohe, ua tua hia e Rata!
O Ihu-ata, O, thousands of gods! 11
Gods of the cliffs, come down! 7
Gods of the valleys, come down! 8
Gods flying over each other [of the air], come down! 15
Come down, and let us raise this king tree, which is stricken, chopped down by Rata!
Henry: 485 1
Rata hearing disturbance while in hiding place
Mai te tai tua ra te hotu ra'a! Ua pohe paha vau auanei. E au tuputupua anei, e au ta'ata anei? E 'ore au e pohe i te tupapa'u, e e ta'ata ra, hoe a ia huru mai ia'u 'atoa nei E au e teie; e au atua, fa'aoromai noa na! It sounds like the roaring ocean! Perhaps I shall soon be slain. Is this the working of spirits or of men? I shall not die by ghosts, and if they be men they will be like myself. This is extraordinary working; it is of the gods, just wait!
Henry: 486 1
Conversation between two artisan elves and Rata
Tuoi. E hoa, to taua ho'i te pohera'a 'ino e! I pāhi 'ho nei taua i te rima ta'ata! Ahiri ho'i e rima atua ra, e pohe ra'a maitai ia; e atua e e atua ta raua tama'i, e ta'ata e e ta'ata ta raua tama'i e au ai. 97
Fefere. E! mea faufau teie pohe i te rima ta'ata! 'A'ita roa taua i pohe i te atua i te po ra. 42
Rata. Tuoi-papa-papa ma, eaha ta 'orua e mihi na? 21
Tuoi. I mihi noa na maua i to maua pohe! 19
Rata. Eaha te mea 'orua e oto ai i tereira? 21
Tuoi. E atua maua no te po, 'e'ita e noa'a i te rima, e tae mai nei ia 'oe nei inaha, ua pohe iho nei maua! Ua mau to maua 'upo'o i te rima ta'ata, e mea faufau atura. 79
Rata. 'E'ita 'orua e ora ia'u, e 'au'au roa vau ia 'orua e tae roa 'tu i te po ia taiva. 42
Tuoi. E tupura'a ta'ata 'oe no te fenua nei; e atua ta 'oe e ra'a, e 'ore roa e au ia rave 'oe i te atua. 49
Rata. Ua riri au ia 'orua i te mea 'orua i fa'ati'a maro i ta'u ra'au i tapu maite hia e au, e i tarai hia e au no ta'u pahi. 59
Tuoi. Ia tapea hia maua ra, 'e'ita ia e noa'a te taua ia te Tumu-nui ra; ia ora maua, e haona ia te matataua, e oti 'atoa ai ta 'oe pāhi. E ra'au mo'a tena ta 'oe i tapu na te atua, na Ihu-ata; teie a 'itea teie nei vao te ta'ahi ra'a hia e te avae ta'ata, e ua riri ana'e te nu'u a te atua ia 'oe i tereira mea. 149
Rata. Ia ora maoti 'orua, eiaha ra 'orua e rave e fa'ati'a fa'ahou i ta'u ra'au; e vai iho mai ra no ta'u pāhi, ia tae au i te pahua nui e i te fenua o te tuputupua ra, i Hiti-marama. 85
Tuoi. A, ua ti'a. E vai ho mai ra 'oe i ta 'oe pāhi na matou e hamani e hamani e maitai ai. 43
Rata. Afea e oti ai ta'u pāhi?
Tuoi. Friend, how ignominiously are we overcome! We have been held by the hand of man! Had it been by the hand of a god, our capture would have been well; it becomes a god to fight with a god, but man should fight with man. 68
Fefera. Yes! This subjugation is disgraceful, being by the hand of man! We have never before been that humbled by the gods in darkness. 39
Rata. Tuoi-papa-papa and company, what are you lamenting? 20
Tuoi. We have just been lamenting our defeat! 17
Rata. Why do you weep on account of that? 13
Tuoi. We are gods from darkness and have been unapproachable to man until now, and behold we have fallen into your hands! Our heads have been grasped by man's hands and thus desecrated. 57
Rata. You cannot escape me. I shall follow you to Hades if you estrange yourselves. 29
Tuoi. You have sprung from man in this world; the gods are what you hold sacred, and it is not lawful that you should lay your hands upon them. 41
Rata. I am vexed with you, because you obstinately persist in restoring to its place my tree, which I chopped down and which I cut into shape for my ship. 46
Tuoi. If you keep us, you cannot obtain from Tumu-nui the power to wage war; if you liberate us, you will become intrepid and also obtain your ship. This is a sacred tree that you have felled, it belongs to the god, Ihu-ata; this is the first time that this recess has been trodden by the foot of man, for which reason the gods are displeased with you. 114
Rata. Then you may both go, but do not take my tree and stand it up again; leave it for my ship, so that I may be enabled to go to the great Tridacna and to the land of the goblins, to Hiti-marama. 59
Tuoi. Ah, we are willing. Now leave your ship with us to make, in order that you may succeed. 31
Rata. When will my ship be finished?
Henry: 489 1
Artisan elves shouting through the forest to gods
Te atua i te aivi e, e te atua i te fa'a, te atua i te tapotu, e te tini atua, e te mano atua, a pou mai i te ao nei, a tufa i ta tatou tao'a ea ai i ta tatou ma'a! O gods of the cliffs, gods of the valleys, gods of the lowering clouds, O tens of gods, O thousands of gods, descend down to this earth, to distribute our goods and to eat our food.
Henry: 490 1
Rata and elves Tuoi and Feufeu at presentation of ship
O vai 'oe e parau mai ra? Answer. O maua, o Tuoi-papa-papa ma Feufeu. 31
Rata. Manava 'orua! Ia ora na 'orua i te tae ra'a mai i to'u nei hau. Na vai teie pahi? 39
Tuoi. Te pahi pa'i ta 'oe i hara i uta ra, i te peho 'o te nu'u atua. 29
Rata. E 'o ta'u pahi teie? 11
Tuoi. E, 'o taua pahi ra tena. 13
Rata. I na hea ra hia te oti vave! E 'oa'oa iti rahi roa to'u; e tae ra ia vau i to'u tere. 40
Tuoi. Ei onei ra, e te Ari'i Rata, e haere matou i uta. Ua topa hia to pahi, o Va'a-i-ama.
Who are you there speaking? Answer. We two, Tuoi-papa-papa and Feufeu. [They then appeared before him.] 36
Rata. Welcome to you both! May you live in coming to my kingdom. Whose is this ship? 25
Tuoi. It is, of course, the ship that you trespassed for inland, in the recess of the gods. 27
Rata. And this is my ship? 6
Tuoi. Yes, that is the ship. 8
Rata. How was it so quickly finished! I am greatly rejoiced; now I shall be able to go on my errand. 30
Tuoi. Adieu, King Rata, we are going inland. You ship is named Va'a-i-ama.
Henry: 496 1
Fishing party's song 4
Ru'uru'u rá i ta'u rama e! 10
Te roroa, e roa tei pō. 11
E ramarama io na, 8
E ramarama tuitui. 9
Tuitui i ta'u rama, 9
Te tarotaro te tui i te rama; 12
I tarotaro o Pi-'a-rire atua.
Now let my torches be tied! 7
Their length is for the long night. 8
Torches are there, 6
Torches to light. 4
Light my torch, 2
With a short invocation light the torch; 11
Invoked briefly is the god Pi-'a-rire (Splash-and-applaud).
Henry: 499 1
Elf song to raise fallen tree
Rere mai, rere mai, 8
Te 'ama'a ta'u ra'au! 9
Homai heti, homai heta, 10
Rere mai, rere mai! 8
Te vai toto o ta'u ra'au 11
Piripiri tapau, tū-- 9
Tū te ra'au tū e!
Fly hither, fly hither, 4
Branches of my tree! 5
Come gently, come enraged, 8
Fly hither, fly hither! 4
Watery sap of my tree, 6
Adhesive gum, stand-- 6
Stand the tree erect!
Henry: 500 1
Rata's chant while dreaming
Piri ihora ta'u mata e! 10
Ta'u moe tū, ta'u moe e oho; 13
Ta'u moe pи hia, 6
Pи hia te fatu 'ura, Tane, 9
E ahiahi Tane. 7
Ta'u moe 'a ū 'iri, a u 'a ra, taitai hia 19
E te oma'oma'ō i te ru'i, 12
Ta i te ao, ta i te mata'ota'o, 13
Periri e rаrа; 4
E a hi na vai, e moemoea po; 13
Te atua, te atua ia e, 11
Ahu ra moe!
Oh, mine eyes did close! 8
My dream is to stand, to be a champion; 11
My dream is to demolish, 7
Demolish by the master in 'ura feathers, Tane, 14
This is Tane's evening. 7
My sleep is amid boards, amid awakening by the song 15
Of the nightly thrush, 4
That records in the day, records at night, 10
Chirps, and spreads out [its wings]; 8
And the fountains flow in the dreams of night. 13
It is the gods, O it is the gods. 9
That excite one in sleep!
Henry: 501 1
Ship dedication to To'a-hiti
Ha, ha ū! Ha ha mau 8
E To'a-hiti mata 'oa, 9
E a ti'a i nia! 7
E a i ni'a te 'ofao 9
O Tua-a-Rata!
Go, go and enconter! Go, go upheld 10
By To'a-hiti of jovial face, 10
And rise! 3
And rise up bows 5
Of Tua-a-Rata (Company-of-Rata)!
Henry: 502a 2
Rata's chant while launching canoe
I Motu-tapu! 5
E rotu, rotu, rotu au, 9
E rotu 'aito, na te manava!
To Motu-tapu (Tabued-island)! 10
I shall smite, smite, smite, 8
With warrior's blows, from depth of feeling!
Henry: 502b 1
Rata's taking leave of land
Ta'u fenua e tū nei e! 11
A huna to mata, 6
Ia 'aro, 'aro i te tere. 10
Ia 'aro, 'aro au i to hia ma te fenua, 17
Ma te marae; 5
Ia 'aro ta'u fenua e tū nei e! 15
A huna to mata io'u e poro'i atu; 15
E poro'i mai e huna, 9
E huna te manava e 'aroha, 11
E 'aroha te 'uru o ta'u fenua 13
E araua'e ho'i.
Oh my land standing forth! 5
Hide thy face, 4
Be lost, lost [to view] in the voyage. 11
Let me be lost in launching away from land, 12
With the marae; 5
Let my land standing out be lost! 8
Hide thy face as I bid farewell; 10
And bid me conceal, 6
Hide my feelings as I say adieu, 12
Say adieu to the woods of my land 11
Till by and by.
Henry: 504a 2
Rata readying to fight Matutu-ta'ota'o
Te pou no mua, te pou no mua, 12
Te pou no muri, te pou no muri, 12
Te pou no roto, te pou no roto, 12
Ahani e huri e! 7
A huri mai i te pō ra 10
Ia tū iho ai o Rata 11
I muri i tena hoe, i tena hoe. 13
E ū ra tei ia 'na, 9
E ū ra tei ia 'na, 9
E manu rere hau, e itoito, 12
Itoito, manu rere hau, rere hau e, 15
A oeoe, oeoe pō, 11
E manu rere hau e!
The front pillar, the front pillar, 8
The inner pillar, the innar pillar, 10
The back pillar, the back pillar, 8
Would that they were overturned! 10
Let darkness descend, 5
Whilst Rata stands 4
Behind, upon that helm, upon that helm, 10
But he will come in contact, 8
But he will come in contact, 8
Far-soaring bird, with energy, energy, 10
Bird far-soaring, far-soaring, 9
Of musical, musical darkness, 9
A bird, far-soaring!
Henry: 504b 1
Rata receiving head of father
Ta'a mai e, ta'a mai e, 10
Teie te aruru rohi e, 10
Teie te aruru rohi e!
Fall away, fall away, oh! 7
Here is the safe receiver, oh! 11
Here is the safe receiver, oh!
Henry: 511 1
Rata's chant to his mother on unburying her
'Aroha 'ore ō mau а! 9
Nu'u nu'u mai, ne'e ne'e mai, 12
Ia piri a tаtа, 5
E Tahiti-to'erau e! 9
E 'aroha 'ore ō mau а; 10
Nu'u nu'u mai, 6
Teie 'au to tamaiti nei!
There was no pity shown indeed! 9
Moving, moving hither, creeping, creeping hither, 14
[As I] Came in contact [I] struck, 9
O, Tahiti-to'erau! 8
There was no pity shown indeed; 9
Moving, moving hither, 6
I thy son have come!
Henry: 521 1
Source: Taroi-nui, a Tuamotuan scholar
Date of recitation: 1896 36
Hono'ura's greeting to family members
"Manava 'outou i te taera'a mai i ta'u mou'a, i Tahuareva nei. Ia ora e au nau teina i tu mai ta'ata maitai i te aro o Ari'i Aua-toa-i-Tahiti. E ia ora 'toa 'orua, na vea o te Ari'i Ta'ihia i Tautira." 96
[The brothers cordially answered him:] 10
"Ae, ia ora 'oe, e Hono'ura, mani o Tahuareva nei! Ia ora 'oe i te atua o te vao nei i to 'oe taae ra'a ia matou, to teina ri'i mai tai mai. Teie te ma'a na 'oe, e teie to maro, o Puhiri-nu'u, na to tatou metua i hapono mai, e poroi mai nei ia 'oe e haere ana'e tatou i te fare." 128
[The two guides said:] 7
"Ia ora 'oe i te atua, e Hono'ura nui ia Aua-toa i Tahiti! E 'aroha iti teie na to tupuna, na te Ari'i Ta'ihia i Tautira."
"Welcome to you all in coming hither to my mountain, Tahuareva. May you live, my brothers, who stand forth handsome men in the presence of King Aua-toa-i-Tahiti. And may you live also, messengers from King Ta'ihia of Tautira." 74
[The brothers cordially answered him:] 10
"Aye, may you live, Hono'ura, back-woodsman of Tahuareva! May you live in the gods of this recess, in your isolation from us, your humble younger brothers of the outer borders. Here is food for you, here is your loin-girdle, Puhiri-nu'u, which our parents have sent you, and they wish you to accompany us home." 103
[The two guides said:] 7
"May you live in the gods, great Hono'ura of Aua-toa of Tahiti! Here are greetings [for you] from your ancestors, from King Ta'ihia of Tautira."
Henry: 522-523 1
Source: Taroi-nui, a Tuamotuan scholar 24
Date of recitation: 1896
0
Hono'ura addressing old women in Punaauia
"E na ruahine moe 'u'uru i te vai a Punaru'u e, tai tahi a'e ti'ara'a o to 'orua fare i ni'a i te tuaivi! E vaiiho i tena ei haerea no te pape rahi i Punaru'u." 72
[The old woman answered:] 7
"I onei ho'i te 'aito ra o Manu-te-a'a, i onei ho'i Manu-te-tape-ari'i, i onei ho'i o Hiti-mai-te-ra'i, parau huahua mai nei; e 'a'ita ho'i maua i fa'aro'o, 'a'ita ho'i to maua fare i iriti hia i ni'a i te tuaivi nei. Ta ratou ho'i tena parau, o vai ho'i to 'oe 'ioa? 120
[Hono'ura replied:] 7
"O vau, 'o Hono'ura." 8
[They scornfully reiterated:] 8
"Hiae! Hono'ura i to Hono'ura ra'a, 'e'ita to maua fare e iriti ia 'oe!"
"Old women, snorers in the river Punaru'u, your house is on a level with the river bank! Leave that [site] for the great waters of Punaru'u to flow over." 49
[The old woman answered:] 7
"We have had here the champion Manu-te-a'a (Bird-of-roots), we have had Manu-te-tape-ari'i (Bird-of-the-royal-measure), we have had Hiti-mai-te-ra'i (Exit-from-the-sky), who threatened destruction to us; and we did not heed them, and our home has not been removed from this slope. They spoke as you do, and what is your name? 103
[Hono'ura replied:] 7
"It is I, Hono'ura." 7
[They scornfully reiterated:] 8
"Blast you! Hono'ura though you be, we will not remove our house for you."
Henry: 523-524 1
Source: Taroi-nui, a Tuamotuan scholar
Date of recitation: 1896 56
Hono'ura addressing audience at great feast of Vai-te-piha-rahi and Vai-piha-iti
E pau ai Vai-te-piha-iti, 12
E to'na 'atoa ra 'uru 'ofa'i, 12
E pau ho'i Vai-te-piha-rahi, 12
E pau hiva! 5
Tau e taua i te tini o Hiva, 13
I te mano o Hiva, 7
Te taooraa o ta'u Mou'a, o Tahuareva.
As Vai-te-piha-iti (Water-of-small-room) is gone 17
With all its heaps of stone, 8
And Vai-te-piha-rahi (Water-of-great-room) is gone, 18
So Hiva will be beaten! 8
There will be war with the tens of Hiva, 11
With the thousands of Hiva, 8
From the chasm of my mountain Tahuareva.
Henry: 525 1
Source: Taroi-nui, a Tuamotuan scholar
Date of recitation: 1896 44
Hoto'ura's chant after renaming his spear Rua-i-havahava
E 'ite ra Aua-toa-Tahiti 12
E iti to'na to'oto'o, o Rua-i-paoa; 16
E nui Hono'ura, e nui to'na to'oto'o, 16
'O Rua-i-havahava!
Now will Aua-toa-Tahiti see 12
His staff, Rua-i-paoa, is smaller; 11
Hono'ura is greater, his staff is greater, 14
It is Rua-i-havahava!
Henry: 529a 2
Source: Taroi-nui, a Tuamotuan scholar
Date of recitation: 1896 42
Conversation between Hono'ura and Te-a'u-roa
Te-a'u-roa. Eaha to 'oe tere? 13
Hono'ura. Tii mai nei au ia 'oe. 16
Te-a'u-roa. Tera mai au! 11
Hono'ura. Ahiri!
Fish. What is your errand? 7
Hono'ura. I have come for you. 12
Fish. Thither I come! 6
Hono'ura. Let us see!
Henry: 529b 1
Source: Taroi-nui, a Tuamotuan scholar
Date of recitation: 1896 33
Hono'ura's chant after dream
Te moe o te toa! 7
Tua te honia e te potipoti. 12
E moe, e hiti, e panoo. 10
A tahi ahiahi 'ino, e a'u teina!
The sleep of the warrior! 8
Bitten is his back by the beetles. 9
He sleeps, he starts, he is anxious. 11
This is a troubled eveining, my brothers!
Henry: 530 1
Source: Taroi-nui, a Tuamotuan scholar
Date of recitation: 1896 39
Hono'ura's chant to his brothers after restless sleep
Piri iho nei ra to'u mata, 11
E pahi ra e! 5
Te ma'o roa 'ai ata. 9
E ama ra e! 5
E oira'a motumotu. 9
E tahi umi i te tata 9
'O to faia mai ai i teie tau ta'ata. 18
'O Toa-rere, 'o Toa-umaa, 11
'O Mu-nee-'uta, 'o Mu-nee-i-tai, 13
Pa'aihere nui i te fa'atoatoa, 15
Te-uhu-nui i tere i te tai o paora, 16
Onoono te hina po; 8
O Ta'aroa maro i te purepure hiti; 15
E tena ia Te-a'u-roa 10
E reia, reia ai i Vavau (Porapora). 17
Ei 'ofa'i te manava, e a'u tau taeae 18
Ia ta hia mai tatou.
My eyes have been closed, 8
Oh, the ships! 3
They are [as] long sharks that eat the clouds, 12
Oh, the outriggers! 6
Cutting [the waves] in their sweeping course. 14
An array of ten fathoms will wreak vengeance 14
Against each man of us. 8
There are Toa-rere (Flying-rock), Toa-umaa (Dividing-rock), 19
Mu-nee-'uta (Snapper-creeping-shorewards), Mu-nee-i-tai (Snapper-creeping-seawards), 27
Pa'aihere-nui (Great-cavalla-fish) of the rocky beds, 17
11 Te-uhu-nui (Great-parrot-fish) that goes in the sea of the meteor, 22
Eager in the grayness of night; 9
Persistent Ta'aroa of the speckled edge, 13
And there is Te-a'u-roa (Long-billfish) 12
Who seized, seized Vavau. 10
Our hearts must be of stone, my brothers, 11
When we are struck.
Henry: 531 1
Source: :Taroi-nui, a Tuamotuan scholar
Date of recitation:: 1896 39
Hono'ura speaking to Tuamotuan fleet
[Hono'ura:] 4
'O vai teie toa i tai nei? 13
[Answer from the head of each Tuamotuan clan:] 15
'O vau, 'o Toa-rere! 8
'O vau, 'o Toa-umaa! 9
'O vau, 'o Mu-nee-iuta! 10
'O vau, 'o Mu-nee-i-tai! 10
'O vau, 'o Pa'aihere-nui i te fa'atoatoa! 19
'O vau, 'o Te-uhu-nui i tere i te tai o paora! 20
'O vau, 'o Ta'aroa maro i te purepure hiti! 18
'O vau, 'o A'u-roa i reia, i reia, 16
I pau ai Vavau! 8
E reia, e reia, e ia pau! 13
[Hono'ura:] 4
E hiva e! A tau mai i uta nei e inu i te 'ava ra, e vinivini, e a hi'o i te vahine paro'o ra, ia Te-'ura-tau-ia-po.
[Hono'ura:] 4
Who are these warriors out here? 12
[Answer from the head of each Tuamotuan clan:] 15
It is I, Toa-rere! 7
It is I, Toa-umaa! 8
It is I, Mu-nee-iuta! 9
It is I, Mu-nee-i-tai! 9
It is I, Pa'aihere-nui of the rock chasms! 14
It is I, Te-uhu-nui that goes in the sea of the meteor! 20
It is I, persistent Ta'aroa [fish] of the speckled edge! 17
It is I, A'u-roa who beat, beat, 12
Who vanquished Vavau! 8
We shall beat, beat, until we conquer! 12
[Hono'ura:] 4
Oh clans! Come on shore and drink 'ava that will make the lips smack and see the renowned woman, Te-'ura-tau-ia-po (Redness-of-twilight).
Henry: 540-541 1
Tane's song of compassion for his bird Tane-manu
Mаnava te pō tua tini tini, 11
Mаnava te pō tua mano, mano, 11
Mаnava 'oe! 4
Tuhia e vai i te pō? 10
Tuhia e vai i nua i te ao? 13
A motu te pō, 6
A motu te ao, 6
Taura'a mua, taura'a i muri, 13
Manu tu'utu'u. 6
A tu'u i te ra'i e hau, 10
A rere mai ra 'oe, 8
Te apiapi, 5
Te fa iti, te ra Tane, 8
Te manu tu'u, tu'u, tu'u. 9
A tu'u i te manu, 7
Hirere a Tane. 6
Te ū a 4
O ta'u manu pi'o i raro, 10
Te ū a 4
O ta'u manu e tū i ni'a, 11
Te ū a o ta'u manu e! 10
Te naia ra 'oe i hea, 10
E ta'u manu e? 6
Te naia ra 'oe i hea, 10
E ta'u manu? 5
Te naia ra 'oe 7
I nua, hiu, i Mu. 7
Na 'ite 'oe ra, mea hiu 10
Mua ia 'na e ta'u manu, 10
E rere a'ena ho'i 'oe i reira, 14
E apa na ho'i 'oe i reira; 12
Ta'ata'ahi tapa tai, 9
A'ena ho'i 'oe i reira.
Welcome to the many, many, nights, 8
Welcome to the thousands of nights, 10
Welcome to you! 6
Cursed by whom in darkness? 6
Cursed by whom in light above? 8
Severed the night, 5
Severed the day, 5
Alighting before, alighting behind, 11
Was my bird, set free. 5
Set free from the peaceful sky, 9
Thou didst fly down 4
To close places 5
Appearing small, in the day of Tane, 11
A bird set free, set free, set free. 11
Set free was the bird, 6
That flew down from Tane. 6
The collision 5
Of my drooping bird, 5
The collision 5
Of my bird standing erect, 6
Oh, the collision of my bird! 8
Whither art thou flitting, 7
O my bird? 2
Whither art thou flitting, 7
My bird? 1
Thou art flitting 5
Above, tired, to the Mu (Murmuring). 11
When thou knowest, fatigued 9
Before him, O my bird, 6
Fly thou thither, 4
Ward thou it off there; 7
Tread fearlessly the sea, 8
When thou art there.
Henry: 550 1
Te Pehe o Hiro
Eaha ta'u, e Tane e, 9
Tane, atua no te purotu e? 11
E 'aha! 3
E 'aha o te hui o te ra'i, 11
E 'aha na'u, e Tane e! 9
E tui i roto, e puputa i vaho, 13
E tui i vaho, e puputa i roto. 13
Nati hua, nati mau. 8
Te mata teie o ta'u 'aha, 11
E Tane e, 4
Ei ha'amau i tau va'a, 11
Ia na ni'a i te mata-'are roroa, 14
E i te mata-'are popoto; 10
I hiti tautau mai, 9
E tae roa i hiti tautau atu. 14
Tau 'aha nei, e Tane e, 10
Ia mau, ia mau!
What have I, O Tane, 7
O Tane, god of beauty? 8
'Tis sennit! 3
'Tis sennit of the host of heaven, 10
'Tis sennit for thee, O Tane! 9
Thread it from inside, it comes outside, 14
Thread it from outside, it goes inside. 14
Tie it fully, tie it fast. 8
This is the fashion of thy sennit, 9
O Tane, 3
To hold thy canoe, 5
That she may go over long waves, 9
And over short waves; 6
To the near horizon, 7
Even to the far-off horizon. 9
This sennit of thine, O Tane, 9
Let it hold, let it hold!
Henry: 550-551 1
Song of the outrigger
Te 'aha fero 'iato teie, 11
Te 'aha mo'a a Tane e; 9
A fero rа, a nati mau roa. 10
A fero, a taviriviri 9
I te 'aha na ni'a iho. 9
Eaha e paruparu ai, 10
Eaha e ta'ata'a ai, 10
Tei mau i te 'aha mo'a, 10
I tau aha mo'a e Tane e?
This is sennit for lacing on the 'iato, 12
The sacred sennit of Tane; 8
Now lace it on, tighten it to hold. 10
Lace it and wind 5
The sennit around it. 7
What will weaken it, 6
What will sever it, 5
When it holds with the sacred sennit, 9
With thy sacred sennit, O Tane?
Henry: 553 1
Source: Tamera, a priest, and added to with the aid of Mrs. Walker by Pe'ue of Fautau'a and by Te'iva Vahine of Ti'arei
Date of recitation: Tamera: 1855; Pe'ue and Te'iva: 1890 76
Exchange of passwords between Hina and Mono'i-here
Hina. Mono'i-here te tane, Hina te vahine! 16
Mono'i-here. Teihea to metua vahine niho roroa, o No-na? 24
Hina. Tei te a'au roroa, tei te a'au potopoto, te ravaa'i ra i te i'a na taua, ta'u hoa tane. Te tumu o te papa e vahia!
Hina. Mono'i-here is the man, Hina is the woman! 16
Mono'i-here. Where is thy mother, No-na, with long teeth? 16
Hina. She is on the long reef, on the short reef, catching fish for us, my lover. Oh foundation of rock, break open!
Henry: 591-592 1
Source: Tu-ma-tahi of Papeari, Tahiti 36
Te-pua-iti-i-te-rau-'onini's lament for Ma'irūrū
Tuputupu te maire fai nuanua. 14
Fai tū tui rа, na roto i te hau 13
Ra'a muri na ta'u hoa iti e! 12
Te 'ie'ie e toro i vae rota, 13
I tapu hia tura e, are! 10
'O vau ho'i e piri noa 10
Mai te maire iti, 8
Taua e a au ra e, e fenua! 13
Harua! E iti te taiha'a 11
I te 'aroha iti i te tane e! 12
Tei ni'a nui tei mitimiti aru ra, 15
Tei au au a rupe, 9
Te te nina hara motu. 8
E ta'ata iti tere roa Ma'irūrū, 16
E tatari au e, e roa a e, 12
A roa i te hi'a na, a roa. 11
Te tui ra i ta'u manu iti e ta'i nei, 16
Tuitui ra e! Fa'a fati onoi hau 15
Te tere hiti momoere, 9
Momoere tera mai aea e! 12
Na te ū riri, i manua ai noa. 14
Tei tahatai ta'u tane hoa, 12
Ti'a maira; i ti'a na e, 10
Te aha poipoi e! 8
I ti'a maira i te huru 10
O toa nui, toa nui ra'a 11
Tere nui no te tapu, 8
I te fenua i tini rau e hoa e a! 15
No te mauri, te mauri, 9
Tau hoa vahine e tai nei, 12
Te tui a manu manu. 8
A ari ra i ta'na heiva, 10
Te tu'ia i raro a roa, 10
A motu, tei hau a i te niho; 12
A tahi a mau manu ri'i ri'ari'a! 14
Area toa maua nei, 10
O ta'u tane hoa tera roa 11
Tei te tui poto i o a ra'i reva. 14
Te tua pure no rirerie ra, 11
I tua te heva; a ta'i, a ta'i au, 14
Heva, heva, a ta'i au i te hoa e, 14
Mo'emo'e i te rau faena! 11
Piri noa mai te maire iti 12
Taua e, a au ra, e fenua.
The maire grew for the hard curse, 10
But a curse with requiem in peace, 13
Sacredness following thee, O my dear friend! 13
The 'ie'ie that stretched forth is divided, 13
Is cut away, alas. 6
I indeed am clinging [to it] 9
Like the maire fern. 7
Oh, our attachment was [firm] as the earth! 12
Snatched away! Mourning is inadequate 14
To the sorrow for a lover! 8
Overwhelmed amid the surf, 8
Am I struggling unconsoled, 8
For him leveled, cut off by crime. 9
A man of long errand was Ma'irūrū, 13
I awaited him and he still delayed, 12
Delayed by falling delayed. 8
But the requiem by my little bird singing, 11
Oh, the requiems! To break the evil spell 13
Of the errand to sacred border, 9
Gloomy sacredness is that indeed! 10
From anger kindled, in haste consumed. 11
On the seaside was my lover, 9
Standing; Oh, he was standing 7
For the morning prayer! 6
He stood in the midst 6
Of great rage, of great rage brooding [for the] 15
Great errand of sacrifice, 9
In the land of many friends! 7
For the departed spirit, the departed spirit, 13
Is thy woman friend now weeping, 9
With requiem of birds. 7
But frightful was his deed, 7
To strike [thee] down full length, 8
To cut, still worse to cause to bite; 12
These are horrifying little birds (deeds)! 12
As for the great rage towards us, 10
My lover has gone away 7
With short requiem to sky space. 9
Many prayers are for the outraged, 11
Loudly did I bewail; I weep, weep, 12
Mourn, mourn, O I weep for the friend, 12
Lonely, from many deceptions! 8
Cling together as the maire fern 10
Shall we two, as [firm as] land.
Henry: 610 1
Huri-i-te-mono'i song of pursuit on surf board
[Before launching into the sea] 11
Hini riaria te tai o te atua, 14
E hoho mai i ni'a. 8
Tei po ta'u vana'a tue rire, 12
Hine, hine e! 5
[After launching into the sea] 10
Tau 'aura'a tei tua; tei Hiti-roa e 17
To ro'i ai'a e ri e, 9
To ro'i ai'a e taa au ra 12
Tei tua tei Hiti-roa e!
[Before launching into the sea] 11
Terrific are the waves of the ocean of the gods, 16
Roaring as they rise. 7
Benighted is my oration, 8
Impelled by the applauding terrific, terrific waves. 16
[After launching into the sea] 10
Thy swimming extends out to sea; to Hiti-roa far off 16
Will thy bed of refuge lodge, 8
Thy bed of refuge upon which I depart 11
Away to sea, to Hiti-roa!
Henry: 611-612 1
Huri-i-te-mono'i's invocation to ancestral fish gods to receive her
Maoa'e maoa'e hia e, 11
Maoa'e ri'i mata ioio ra. 13
Te maoa'e hia e! 8
Ia riro atu vau i ta'u tupuna, 14
O Tonu ma vaha, te maoa'e 11
Ia Tonu-ma-vaha, nui ra. 10
Te maoa'e, maoa'e, maoa'e hia e! 16
Ia riro atu vau i ta'u tupuna, 14
Ia Roi, ia Roi matao matao ra; 15
Ia riro vau i ta'u tupuna ma'o, 14
Ia Tama-'opu-rua, te maoa'e e!
The trade wind has come 7
Trade wind with brilliant sea caps. 10
The trade wind has come! 7
Let me go to my ancestor, 7
To Tonu-ma-vaha, O trade wind, 10
To Tonu-ma-vaha with great mouth. 11
The trade wind, trade wind, trade wind has come! 13
Let me go to my ancestor, 7
To Roi (Black-fish), Roi so dark; 9
Let me go to my shark ancestor 8
To Tama-'opu-rua (Child-of-two-stomachs), O trade wind!
Henry: 612 1
Foreboding by Tahitian princesses at arrival of Hina-te-pipiro
Tau tapaau ua hara; 10
E ta'ata paha tei tai i hiti e. 14
A ti'a mai, a haere mai i uta nei e!
Thy banners are deviating; 8
Perhaps some person is at sea in the horizon. 15
Arise and come to this land!
Henry: 613 1
Pua's assurance to her brother, Tui-hani-potii, at confluent current
E utue, e parare ia. 10
Te ora iti a'e a te ora 11
Tereira ia. 6
'Aore paha ia'u nei, tei ia'na ra paha, 18
Mai to'na ui, mai to'na ua, 12
Mai to'na patu tere i te moana, 13
E tere au i te moana.
The pledge of peace will disperse it. 12
A narrow escape of life 9
Will it be. 3
Not perhaps with me, it is perhaps with her, 11
In her season, in her rain. 9
As she propelled her course in the ocean, 14
So shall I move on in the ocean.
Henry: 615a 2
Song of sisters restoring Tui-hani-potii to life
Tuia e, tuia hani potii nei! 14
E